Avaya BCM 2.0 Programming null

Avaya BCM 2.0 Programming null
Enterprise Edge 2.0
Programming Operations
Guide
1-800-4 NORTEL
www.nortelnetworks.com
© 2000 Nortel Networks
P0911588 Issue 01
Contents 3
Contents
Chapter 1
About this document 13
What’s new in this document 13
How this guide is organized 13
Related documents 14
Regulations 15
Safety information for North American customers 15
Enhanced 911 Configuration 16
Radio-frequency interference 16
Telecommunication registration 17
Hearing-aid compatibility 17
Electromagnetic compatibility 17
Telephone company registration 18
Use of a music source 18
Rights of the telecommunications company 18
Repairs 18
Safety information for European customers 19
Radio-frequency interference 20
Software licensing 21
Chapter 2
Enterprise Edge Overview 23
Enterprise Edge telephony hardware components 24
Enterprise Edge data networking hardware components 24
Enterprise Edge software components 25
Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution 25
Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging 26
Enterprise Edge Call Center 27
Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting 27
Enterprise Edge Voice over IP gateway 27
Enterprise Edge TSP 27
Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager 27
Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording 28
Enterprise Edge Attendant Consol 28
Enterprise Edge Integrated QoS Routing 28
Tivoli 28
Optivity 28
Unified Manager 28
Browser requirements 29
Understanding Unified Manager 30
Menu descriptions 32
Enterprise Edge system access 32
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
4 Contents
Chapter 3
Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 35
Enterprise Edge required parameters 35
Setting up an Enterprise Edge IP Address 36
Setting up web-based administration 37
Browser settings 37
Logging on to Enterprise Edge 37
Preloading Java class files on your workstation 39
Accessing Unified Manager through the Preinstalled Client Home Page
39
Logging off Enterprise Edge 40
Rebooting the Enterprise Edge server 40
Shutting down Enterprise Edge System 40
Licensing 41
Entering the software keycodes 41
Configuring system settings 41
System registration 42
Basic registration using Internet Access 43
Basic Registration using v.90 modem (North America only) 43
Chapter 4
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 45
Viewing Enterprise Edge resources 45
LAN 46
Viewing LAN resources and configuring global LAN attributes 46
Configuring LAN resources 46
WAN 49
WAN Overview 49
Permanent WAN Connection 50
Viewing WAN Resources 51
Setting global WAN parameters 51
Configuring WAN Summary Parameters 52
Setting WAN Line Parameters 53
PVC Congestion Control 56
WAN PPP Parameters 57
WAN performance 58
Dial Up 58
Configuring RAS Server TCP/IP 58
ISDN Dial Up 59
V.90 modem (North America) Dial Up 63
Media Services Card 66
Rules for configuring DSP resource allocation 67
DSP Current Configuration 68
DSP Manager 68
DSP Settings 69
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Contents 5
Media Bay Modules 69
Bus 71
Module 72
T1 Parameters (North America only) 77
E1 Parameters (Europe) 79
Configuring a data module 79
Provision lines 81
Chapter 5
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 83
Programming order 83
Programming Services 84
Viewing Enterprise Edge Services 85
Viewing all Services 85
To Enable or Disable a Service 85
Statuses 86
Telephony Services 87
Enhanced 911 (E911) Configuration 89
Terminals & sets 90
Copying settings from one telephone set to another 91
General 91
Line access 93
Capabilities 98
User preferences 102
Restrictions 103
Telco features 106
Lines 108
Copying settings from one line to another 108
General 109
Trunk/line data 111
Setting Received number 117
Restrictions 118
Telco features 120
Loops 121
Restriction filters 124
Time & date 127
Call Routing 128
Routes and destination codes 129
Programming the PRI routing table 130
Destination codes 131
Setting up a route for local calling 133
Setting up a route for long distance calling 134
Adding a long distance carrier access code 135
Programming for least cost routing 136
Using dialing restrictions with routing 137
Using a dialing plan to route outgoing PRI calls 137
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
6 Contents
Scheduled Services 138
Ringing service 139
Restriction service 141
Routing Service 142
Common Settings 143
System speed dial 145
Adding or changing a system speed dial 145
General Settings 147
Business name 147
Feature settings 148
Call log space 151
Timers 152
Direct dial 153
CAP assignment 154
Dialing plan 154
Access codes 156
Remote access packages 160
COS Passwords 160
DN lengths 162
Network Name Display 163
Programming Network Name Display 165
Call by Call service selection for PRI 166
Programming Call by Call service selection 168
CbC limits 168
Release reasons 169
Network Services 169
Hunt groups 170
Adding or removing members from a group 171
Moving members of a group 172
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 173
Setting the Distribution mode 174
Setting the hunt delay 174
Companion 177
Registration 177
Changing the Registration password 178
Radio data 179
Register individual portables 181
Portable telephone programming 182
Hospitality 183
Alarm time (AL) feature 184
Set/room settings 185
Call permissions 185
Alarm data 186
Telco features 187
Voice message center numbers 187
Outgoing name and number blocking (ONN) 188
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Contents 7
Voice Mail 188
Call Detail Recording 188
TAPI 188
Console Service 189
VoIP Gateway 189
VoIP local and remote gateways 189
DHCP 192
Configuring a DHCPRelayAgent 194
LAN settings for DHCPServer 194
LAN settings for DHCPRelayAgent 198
DNS 199
IP Routing 200
Configuring IP Routing 201
IP Routing global settings 201
Configuring IP routing on an interface 202
IPX Routing 208
Configuring IPX Routing 208
Configuring an interface for IPX routing 209
Adding RIP filters for IPX routing 213
Adding SAP filters for IPX routing 214
Adding Static Routes for IPX Routing 214
Adding Static Service for IPX 215
SNMP 216
SNMP Community List, Manager List, and Trap Community List 217
QoS 220
Relationship between the QoS Module and theVoIP QoS Monitor 220
QoS Restrictions and Defaults 221
Filters 223
QoS performance graphs and tables 225
Port Range Setting for Legacy Networks 225
QoS monitor 227
QoS Monitor Mean Opinion Score 227
Web cache 228
Net Link Manager 229
Selecting the permanent WAN link as the primary WAN connection
230
Selecting a dial-up link as the primary WAN connection 231
Alarm Service 232
NAT (Network Address Translation) 232
Example of a common NAT configuration 235
IP Firewall Filters 235
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
8 Contents
Chapter 6
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1
DPNSS 1 services 241
DPNSS 1 capabilities 242
DPNSS 1 features 242
Three Party Service 243
Making a conference call 243
Diversion 243
Restrictions by set type 244
Setting Diversion 245
Redirection 245
Restrictions by set type 245
Setting Redirection 245
Executive Intrusion 245
Restrictions by set type 246
Intrusion levels 246
Call Offer 247
Displays 247
Restrictions by set type 247
User Actions 248
Route Optimization 248
Setting Route Optimization 248
Message Waiting Indication 249
Restrictions by set type 249
Setting Message Waiting Indication 249
Loop avoidance 252
Programming Loop avoidance 252
Chapter 7
Configuring Management Settings 253
User Manager 253
Adding a user profile 254
Modifying a user profile 254
Deleting a user profile 255
Alarm Manager 256
Configuring the Alarm Manager 256
Chapter 8
Maintenance 259
Enterprise Edge general maintenance 259
System startup 259
Warm reset 260
Backup and restore 260
Backup, restore, upgrade utility (BRU) for Enterprise Edge system 261
Backup and restore telephony programming using Unified Manager’s
Tools menu 265
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
241
P0911588 Issue 01
Contents 9
Enterprise Edge system diagnostics and utilities 269
Performance Statistics 269
Error Messages 270
MIB II Information 274
Maintenance programming for telephony resources 278
System version 278
Media Bay Module status 279
System test log 282
System administration log 283
Network event log 284
Alarm codes 285
Event messages 285
Tests 294
CSU statistics 297
Link Status 301
Metrics 301
Moving telephones 302
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 305
General troubleshooting information 305
Getting ready 306
Types of problems 306
Basic troubleshooting procedure 306
Viewing system performance and fault alarms 307
System performance graphs and tables 308
Fault Alarm Banner 308
Problems with telephones 309
Telephone has faulty buttons, display, handset or other hardware
problems 309
Digital telephone display is unreadable 309
Telephone has no dial tone 310
Problems with lines 310
Calls can be received but cannot be made 310
Dial tone is absent on external lines 311
Lines at a telephone are busy after call is over 311
Auto-answer line rings at a telephone 313
Prime telephone gets misdialed calls 314
Selected lines reads “Not in service” or “Not available” 314
Selected line pool shows “No free lines” 315
Problems with optional equipment 315
Problems with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 316
Problems with the auxiliary ringer 316
Problems with external paging 317
Problems with Music on Hold and Background Music 317
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
10 Contents
Problems with module service 318
Digital Trunk Computer Module trouble 318
Monitoring the T1 or PRI signal 320
Problems with Trunk or Station Modules 320
Problems for network or remote users 321
Remote feature code gets no response 321
Dialed number gets ringback and the wrong person 322
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of ringback 322
Dialed number gets busy tone 322
Dialed number does not get through 322
Dialed feature code gets overflow tone 323
Dialed feature code gets busy tone 324
Line pool access code gets overflow tone 324
Line pool access code gets ringback 325
Line pool access code gets busy tone 325
Dialed number gets no response 325
Problems with Companion sets (North American systems only) 326
Appendix A: Network Examples 327
Access using Enterprise Edge 328
Lines used for networking 328
PRI lines 329
T1 lines (Loop, E&M, DID, Ground start) 329
BRI lines 330
DPNSS lines (International systems only) 330
Remote system access to Enterprise Edge 330
Remote access on loop start trunks 331
Remote access on a private network 331
Remote access on T1 Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks 332
Remote access on PRI trunks 332
Remote access on DPNSS lines 332
Enterprise Edge security 333
Class of Service 333
Restriction filters 333
Direct inward system access (DISA) 335
Coordinated dialing plans 335
Dialing plan using public lines 335
Dialing plan using T1 E&M lines 337
Dialing plans with shared line pools 340
Networking examples 341
PRI Networking with Meridian 1 341
PRI networking using Call-by-Call Services 346
Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway and M1 networking 348
Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway 351
Networking with QSIG (International systems only) 356
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Contents 11
Private networking with DPNSS (International systems only) 359
Public networking scenarios 362
Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones 363
Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to a private network 363
Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network 364
Private networking scenarios 365
Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones 366
Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to other nodes in the private
network 366
Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network 367
Select T1 E&M trunks to the private network 368
Using Enterprise Edge Line Redirection 368
PRI dialing plan example for 2-way DID 370
PRI DID and 2-way DID 370
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 371
Welcome to ISDN 371
Analog versus ISDN 371
Types of ISDN service 372
ISDN layers 372
ISDN Bearer capability 373
Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI 373
PRI services and features 373
BRI services and features 373
ISDN hardware 377
PRI hardware 377
BRI hardware 378
Clock Source for ISDN 379
Other ISDN BRI equipment 380
ISDN standards compatibility 380
Planning your ISDN network 380
Ordering ISDN PRI 381
Ordering ISDN BRI 381
Supported ISDN protocols 382
ISDN programming 383
Program ISDN equipment 386
Appendix C: Setting Up Remote Routers 389
Creating an Outbound Traffic Filter 389
Sample Criteria, Ranges, and Actions for UDP Filtering 390
Appendix D: Market profile attributes 391
Languages available to customer 391
System defaults 392
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
12 Contents
Glossary 395
Index 437
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
About this document
1
This guide explains how to program your Enterprise Edge system. For more
information about the Enterprise Edge document suite, refer to Related documents
on page 14.
Note: The section Regulations on page 15 summarizes the Enterprise Edge system
regulatory information.
The section Software licensing on page 21 contains software licensing
information.
What’s new in this document
This release includes additional information regarding:
•
market profile attributes for United Kingdom markets
•
updated backup and restore procedures for the BRU utility
•
automatic registration of Enterprise Edge with the Tivoli Management Server
•
Optivity interworking in the areas of network discovery, SNMP alarms
integration, and launching of the Unified Manager
•
DSP allocation through the DSP Manager
•
IPX routing configuration for networking
•
primary and backup dialup WAN connections using ISDN or V.90 modem (The
V.90 modem is available in North America only.)
•
OSPF routing protocol
•
firewall filters
•
network address translation (NAT)
How this guide is organized
This document contains the following sections:
•
Enterprise Edge Overview on page 23 provides an overview of the hardware
and software components of the Enterprise Edge system and a description of
Unified Manager.
•
Setting up your Enterprise Edge system on page 35 includes information on
how to set up your IP address and Web-based administration, how to configure
your system settings and other basic procedures such as logging on and off your
Enterprise Edge system.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
14 About this document
•
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1 on page 241 describes
the procedures used to program the Digital Private Network Signalling System
(DPNSS 1) for International systems only.
•
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources on page 45 describes the procedures
used to program the networking resources for your Enterprise Edge system.
•
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services on page 83 describes the procedures used
to program all the Enterprise Edge services.
•
Configuring Management Settings on page 253 includes procedures used to
program user and alarm settings.
•
Maintenance on page 259 includes all the maintenance procedures required to
keep your system in operation. This chapter ncludes descriptions of how to
perform both a system and telephony programming backup and restore.
•
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system on page 305 allows you to solve
problems in the Enterprise Edge system that require changes to system
programming.
•
Appendix A: Network Examples on page 327 includes some networking
examples using the Enterprise Edge system.
•
Appendix B: ISDN Overview on page 371 includes some background
information about ISDN.
•
Appendix C: Setting Up Remote Routers on page 389 explains how to set up a
Nortel Networks (BayRS) router.
•
Appendix D: Market profile attributes on page 391 describes the functionality
associated with each of the Enterprise Edge market profiles.
•
Glossary on page 395 contains a list of Enterprise Edge terms and definitions.
Related documents
In addition to the Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide, the Enterprise
Edge documentation suite contains the following documents:
•
Enterprise Edge Feature Programming Telephone Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
•
Enterprise Edge IP Telephony Configuration Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Reference Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Quick Reference Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Programming Record
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging AMIS Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging AMIS User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Unified Messaging Client Installation Guide
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
About this document 15
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Unified Messaging Quick Reference Guide
•
Enterprise Edge Software Keycode Installation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Call Center Agent Cards
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 TSP Server Configuration Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Personal Call Manager User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Attendant Console Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Attendant Console User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Call Detail Recording System Administrator Manual
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 ATA 2 Installation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 ATA 2 User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Message Networking Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Message Networking User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Fax Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Fax User Guide
You can also access a number of telephone and accessory quick reference cards.
Regulations
Safety information for North American customers
Enterprise Edge equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA
C22.2 No. 950-95 and UL-1950 Edition 3.
Risk of shock.
Do not plug in the computer or any telephone or network cables before
opening the computer.
Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
16 About this document
Only qualified persons can service the system.
The installation and service of this hardware is hazardous and can cause severe
harm to the person performing the tasks or to other persons. Only qualified
service personnel must perform the installation and service tasks.
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains
are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to themselves and users, the
service personnel must connect the Enterprise Edge system to an outlet
equipped with a third-wire ground.
Service personnel must be alert to the risk of high leakage currents spreading
onto metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines.
These leakage currents flow to Protective Earth ground through the power
cord. Because of the protective function of earth ground, when cabling the unit,
the first task the service personnel must perform is the connection to an earthed
outlet.. Subsequently, the last task to perform is the removal of the the
connection. It is important that operations requiring the unit to be powered
down must have the network connections (central office lines) removed first.
Enhanced 911 Configuration
Warning
Local, state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer
Premises Equipment vary. Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding
compliance with applicable laws and regulations.
Note: For information about 911 configuration, refer to Enhanced 911 (E911)
Configuration on page 89.
Radio-frequency interference
Equipment generates RF energy.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If not
installed and used in accordance with the installation manual, it may cause
interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with ICES.003, CLASS A Canadian EMI Requirements. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which
case the user, at his or her own expense, will be required to take whatever
measures may be required to correct the interference.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
About this document 17
Telecommunication registration
Enterprise Edge equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry
Canada CS-03 and US Federal Commission FCC Par t68 and has been registered
under files Industry Canada 332-5980 A and
FCC AB6CAN-20705-KF-E (key system), AB6CAN-20706-MF-E (hybrid
system), and AB6CAN-23740-PF-E (PBX system). Connection of the Enterprise
Edge telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made
through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local
telecommunications company. This type of customer-provided equipment cannot
be used on party lines or coin lines.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The
customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not
prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized maintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to
this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure
for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected
together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Only qualified persons can service the system.
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician.
Hearing-aid compatibility
Enterprise Edge telephones are hearing-aid compatible, as defined in Section
68.316 of Part 68 FCC Rules.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Enterprise Edge equipment meets all FCC Part 15, Class A radiated and conducted
emissions requirements.
Enterprise Edge does not exceed the Class A limits for radiated and conducted
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of
Industry Canada.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
18 About this document
Telephone company registration
It is usually not necessary to call the telecommunications company with
information on the equipment before connecting the Enterprise Edge system to the
telephone network. If the telecommunications company requires this information,
provide the following:
•
telephone number(s) to which the system will be connected
•
FCC registration number (on label affixed to Enterprise Edge)
•
universal service order code (USOC)
•
service order code (SOC)
•
facility interface code (FIC)
Use of a music source
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the
American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or similar organization if
Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background
Music features of this telecommunication system.
Nortel Networks hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain
such a license.
Rights of the telecommunications company
If the Enterprise Edge system is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telecommunications company may discontinue service temporarily. If possible, the
telecommunications company will notify you in advance. If advance notice is not
practical, the user will be notified as soon as possible. The user will be given the
opportunity to correct the situation and informed of the right to file a complaint to
the FCC.
The telecommunications company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of the system. If
this happens, the telecommunications company will give you advance notice in
order for you to make any necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted
service.
Repairs
In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs to certified equipment will be
performed by an authorized supplier.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
About this document 19
Safety information for European customers
WARNING
The instructions in this manual are intended to be
performed by Qualified Service Personnel.
The CE mark indicates that the Enterprise Edge equipment meets the requirements
of the following EU Directives:
•
Low Voltage Directive (73/23IIC)
•
Electromagnetic Directive (89/336/EEC)
Risk of shock.
Ensure the computer is unplugged from the power
socket and that any telephone or network cables are
unplugged before opening the computer.
Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Only qualified persons should service the system.
The installation and service of this hardware is to be
performed only by service personnel having
appropriate training and experience necessary to be
aware of hazards to which they are exposed in
performing a task and of measures to minimize the
danger to themselves or other persons.
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication
network and AC mains are possible with this
equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel
and users, the Enterprise Edge system must be
connected to an outlet with a third-wire Earth.
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of
high leakage currents becoming available on metal
system surfaces during power line fault events near
network lines. These leakage currents normally
safely flow to Protective Earth via the power cord.
Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to an
earthed outlet is performed first and removed last
when cabling to the unit. Specifically, operations
requiring the unit to be powered down must have the
network connections (exchange lines) removed first.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
20 About this document
Radio-frequency interference
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment
this product may cause interference. The user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Read and follow installation instructions carefully
This product uses Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV) circuits which
include the following ports: analogue lines (including PFT), modems, ATA, BRI,
AC15A, and TCM Isolator.
This product uses Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits which include the
following ports: TCM extensions, external music source (MSCX), auxiliary ringer
(AUX), paging system relay (PAGE), LAN interface, WAN interface, and the serial
port.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
About this document 21
Software licensing
Copyright (c) 1995-1999 The Apache Group. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the
Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/)."
4. The names “Apache Server” and “Apache Group” must not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact [email protected]
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “Apache” nor may
“Apache” appear in their names without prior written permission of the Apache
Group.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the
Apache HTTP server project (http://www.apache.org/).”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on
behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based on public domain software
written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications, University of
Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. For more information on the Apache Group and the
Apache HTTP server project, please see http://www.apache.org/.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
22 About this document
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Overview
2
The Enterprise Edge system includes software and hardware components that
provide telephony technology, basic voice messaging, data networking and IP
telephony.
The Web-based navigation tool Unified Manager provides easy access to all
Operations and Maintenance programming on the Enterprise Edge system at a
single site. For more information about Unified Manager, see page 28.
Tivoli provides multi-site and multi-network system management. For more
information, refer to Tivoli on page 28. Optivity provides multi-site network
management. For more information, refer to Optivity on page 28.
Note: Some of the components described in this section are not available in all
areas. Ask your Nortel Networks Enterprise Edge supplier for information
about the availability of components.
The main component of the Enterprise Edge system is the Enterprise Edge server.
The Enterprise Edge server controls all tasks such as call processing, voice
messaging, and data routing. The Enterprise Edge server also contains the
telephony and data networking components.
PCI cards
Media Bay Modules
The system components are summarized in:
•
Enterprise Edge telephony hardware components on page 24
•
Enterprise Edge data networking hardware components on page 24
•
Enterprise Edge software components on page 25
For a detailed description of each hardware components, refer to the Enterprise
Edge Installation and Maintenance Manual.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
24 Enterprise Edge Overview
Enterprise Edge telephony hardware components
The telephony components perform call processing. These components also
connect the Enterprise Edge server to the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) lines and the Enterprise Edge telephones. The telephony hardware
components of the Enterprise Edge system include:
•
Media Services Card (MSC), which is a PCI standard card that perform call
processing and media processing of the voice channels.
•
Station set Media Bay Modules, which provide access to telephone lines. The
Enterprise Edge system includes the following station set media bay modules:
- 16-port Digital Station Media Bay Module (EE-DSM 16), which allows the
connection of 16 digital telephone sets to the system
- 32-port Digital Station Media Bay Module (EE-DSM 32), which allows the
connection of 32 digital telephone sets to the system
- Analog Station Media Bay Module (EE-ASM 8), which allows the connection
of analog station sets to the system (North American systems only)
•
Trunk Media Bay Modules, which provide access to telecommunications
trunks. The Enterprise Edge system includes the following trunk media bay
modules:
- Digital Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-DTM), which provides the connection
between a standard digital PSTN T1 or PRI line and the Enterprise Edge system.
- Caller ID Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-CTM), which provides the ability to
access four analog Caller ID PSTN lines. (North American systems only)
- Basic Rate Interface Media Bay Module (EE-BRIM S/T), which provides the
ability to access up to four BRI S/T ISDN lines.
- Fibre Expansion Media Bay Module (EE-FEM), which provides the ability to
access up to six Norstar expansion modules. These expansion modules add
PSTN lines and telephones to the Enterprise Edge system.
•
Station sets and adapters
Enterprise Edge data networking hardware components
The data networking components connect the Enterprise Edge server to the local
area network (LAN) and the wide area network (WAN). The data networking
hardware components of the Enterprise Edge system include:
•
V.90 modem card used to send and receive data using the public telephone
system. (North American systems only)
•
LAN interface card to connect the Enterprise Edge system to the local area
network. This card is a 10/100 Base T Ethernet network interface card.
•
WAN interface card to connect the Enterprise Edge system to the wide area
network. North American systems have a T1 interface port and a synchronous
port. European systems have two serial synchronous ports.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Overview 25
Enterprise Edge software components
The Enterprise Edge system provides a number of software applications. Some of
these applications work immediately after you install the Enterprise Edge system.
To use other applications, you must enable the application using software keycodes.
A software keycode is a password number provided to the installer. The Enterprise
Edge applications available are:
•
Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution on page 25
•
Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging on page 26
•
Enterprise Edge Call Center on page 27
•
Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting on page 27
•
Enterprise Edge Voice over IP gateway on page 27
•
Enterprise Edge TSP on page 27
•
Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager on page 27
•
Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording on page 28
•
Enterprise Edge Attendant Consol on page 28
•
Enterprise Edge Integrated QoS Routing on page 28
For information on enabling software applications, refer to the Enterprise Edge
Software Keycode Installation Guide.
Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution
Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution software supplies standard telephony operating
features plus the following additional features:
•
Enterprise Edge Companion (North American systems only) on page 25
•
Programming, administration and maintenance on page 25
Enterprise Edge Companion (North American systems only)
The Enterprise Edge Companion Wireless software provides wireless functionality
without losing the advantages of the wired system.The system can be programmed
so that users can publish one telephone number and receive all calls on both their
desk set and their portable, allowing them to answer the one who is most
convenient.
Programming, administration and maintenance
The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager software provides programming,
administration and maintenance. Enterprise Edge Unified Manager provides a
series of windows and menus which allow you to navigate through the different
areas of the application and program the system. For more information on Unified
Manager, refer to Unified Manager on page 28.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
26 Enterprise Edge Overview
Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging
Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging is a WindowsTM based application that allows
the user to set up and administer the following Voice Messaging features:
•
Voice messaging on page 26
•
Enterprise Edge Auto attendant on page 26
•
Custom Call Routing (CCR) on page 26
•
Enterprise Edge Networking on page 26
•
Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging on page 26
Voice messaging
Voice messaging records caller’s messages and stores them in a mailbox for easy
retrieval. Each Enterprise Edge telephone in your system can have its mailbox and
personal greeting.
Enterprise Edge Auto attendant
Auto attendant answers business calls with a Company Greeting. A voice prompt
then offers callers a menu of options to direct their call by selecting a digit on the
dial pad.
Custom Call Routing (CCR)
CCR replaces the Automated Attendant menu with a customized CCR Home Menu
to offer callers a wider range of call routing options and access to submenus and
information messages. CCR allows you to determine the menu options and record
the voice prompts that guide callers along call paths.
Enterprise Edge Networking
Enterprise Edge Networking includes General Networking parameters, Voice
Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM) parameters, Audio Messaging Interchange
Specification (AMIS) specific parameters and AMIS Site Administration. For more
information about Enterprise Edge Networking, refer to the Enterprise Edge
Networking Set Up and Operation Guide.
Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging
Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging includes three features:
•
Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging allows you to create and receive
messages on your personal computer.
•
Enterprise Edge Personal Mailbox Manager allows you to change mailbox
features and functions such as mailbox initialization and target attendant, record
greetings, and set up and maintain off-premise message notification.
•
Enterprise Edge Operator Manager allows you to change the Operator
password, change business status, enable or disable the system attendant and
enable or disable the Call Answer feature.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Overview 27
For more information, refer to the Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging Client
Installation Guide.
Enterprise Edge Call Center
The Enterprise Edge Call Center is an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) system
designed to handle incoming calls. Incoming calls are distributed to available
agents or to Enterprise Edge greetings in your call center. To ensure that each call
is handled correctly, the Enterprise Edge Call Center system answers, plays
greetings and routes each incoming call to the first available agent in the order of
the call's arrival. For more information, refer to the Enterprise Edge Call Center Set
Up and Operation Guide.
Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting
Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting is a Windows software application that
provides Real Time statistics and complete management information on the daily
performance of your Enterprise Edge system. Enterprise Edge Call Center
Reporting helps you manage call traffic and provides a full range of management
reports that provides critical information for accurate business planning. It also has
the ability to support multiple Wallboards which can be configured separately to
display the information that the agents require. For more information, refer to the
Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide.
Enterprise Edge Voice over IP gateway
Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway allows you to use IP telephony. VoIP Gateway
converts the voice in a call into a packet format that can be sent over an intranet.
With Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway, you can make telephone calls over any
intranet connected to the Enterprise Edge system. For more information, refer to the
Enterprise Edge IP Telephony Configuration Guide.
Enterprise Edge TSP
Enterprise Edge TSP is the interface between the Enterprise Edge system and
Microsoft®1 TAPI. This interface allows you to use TAPI applications on the
Enterprise Edge system. For more information, refer to the Enterprise Edge TSP
Server Configuration Guide.
Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager
Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager is a TAPI application that allows you to
control your Enterprise Edge telephone from your personal computer. For more
information, refer to the Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager User Guide.
1.Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
28 Enterprise Edge Overview
Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording
The Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording software records call activity. When a
telephone call is made to or from your company, the information about the call is
recorded. When the call is completed, information about the call is printed out in
Call Records. For more information, refer to the Enterprise Edge Call Detail
Recording System Administrator Guide.
Enterprise Edge Attendant Consol
Enterprise Edge Attendant Console uses a graphical user interface to provide
centralized call management. For more information, refer to the Enterprise Edge
Attendant Console Set Up and Operation Guide and the Enterprise Edge Attendant
Console User Guide.
Enterprise Edge Integrated QoS Routing
Enterprise Edge Integrated QoS Routing controls the interface between the
Enterprise Edge system and the local area network, wide area network, and Internet.
Tivoli
Tivoli provides inventory management, multi-site software distribution and
service level and status monitoring. All Enterprise Edge systems are sold with an
imbedded Tivoli Management Agent (TMA) that allows Enterprise Edge to
connect to a central server where the software resides. When installed, all
Enterprise Edge systems automatically register with the central TMR server. For
more information, refer to System registration on page 42.
Optivity
Optivity allows the customer to view the topology of the network including the
Enterprise Edge, other routers, hubs, switches and servers and see how the
different devices are connected and performing. The Optivity management station
can be used to capture SNMP alarms sent from Enterprise Edge. Unified Manager
can be launched from within the Optivity Management Tool suite. For more
information, refer to the Optivity documentation
Unified Manager
The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager provides a web-based navigation tool that
lets you view and change configuration for:
•
system settings
•
IP Services
•
VoIP Service
•
Telephony Services
•
Management Server Module
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Overview 29
•
QoS Module
•
Diagnostics
Most changes made with Unified Manager become part of current Enterprise Edge
programming when you select an item from the menu options. However, some
changes take effect a minute after the user stops programming. If a programming
error occurs, you must reenter the original programming.
For more information on Unified Manager, refer to
•
Browser requirements on page 29
•
Understanding Unified Manager on page 30
•
Enterprise Edge system access on page 32
Browser requirements
Your computer must meet the following requirements to configure Enterprise Edge
through the Unified Manager.
•
WinNT or Windows workstation running on P133 or higher CPU (or
compatible)
•
64 MB RAM, 10 MB disk space
•
Minimum screen definition of 1024 X 768
•
Minimum monitor size of 17 inches
To use Enterprise Edge Unified Manager, you must have:
•
Java Virtual Machine (JVM) 5.0 (build 5.0.0.3188 or greater)
•
One of the following web browsers:
Netscape Communicator 4.5 or greater
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or greater
If you are using Netscape Communicator, you must set the following parameters:
•
Enable Java: On
•
Cached document comparison: Every time
If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer, you must set the following parameters:
•
Check for newer versions: Every visit to the page
•
Java JIT compiler enabled: On
For information about setting these parameters, refer to the user documentation that
came with your web browser.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
30 Enterprise Edge Overview
Understanding Unified Manager
Unified Manager consists of:
•
a menu bar where users access configuration commands
•
a navigation frame where is located the navigation tree that allows you to
navigate through Enterprise Edge programming headings
•
an information frame that displays the windows that relates to the headings you
select in the navigation frame
menu bar
navigation
tree
navigation
keys
buttons
heading
navigation
n
frame
window
information
frame
The menu bar contains configuration management options. These options are
enabled when you select the different headings in the navigation tree to enter
specific areas of the Enterprise Edge system. If an option is dimmed, it is not
available for the heading you have selected.
The navigation tree contains headings that allow you to access specific areas of the
Enterprise Edge system. The key symbol ( ) beside each heading indicates that the
heading can be expanded to show sub-headings. To make sub-headings appear,
double-click the item or just click on the key itself. As you select various headings
in the navigation tree, the heading changes color and Unified Manager displays the
appropriate information frame.
The information frame can contain configuration windows or dialog boxes
indicating the appropriate action and system messages or warnings.
For more detailed information on Unified Manager, refer to:
•
Using the configuration windows on page 31
•
Changing data views in Unified Manager on page 31
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Overview 31
Using the configuration windows
The configuration windows are used to configure Enterprise Edge settings. The
configuration windows always contain a window identifier. Some fields use editin-place formats to allow you to configure settings in the box opposite each box
name. When you tab to the next box, the previous box values are saved. Some box
use drop-down list to provide you with valid entries.
If a value is invalid, an error message appears to alert you of the error. The dialog
box format allows you to enter text in boxes and save the settings by clicking the
Save button where available or by simply moving to another heading in the
navigation tree.
window identifier
field names
text fields
Changing data views in Unified Manager
You can change the order and size of data views in the Unified Manager.
Use the following procedure to change the column order.
1. Point to the column that you want to move and click on it.
2. Holding the mouse down, drag and drop the column to the appropriate
location.
The other column in this location, automatically changes places with the
column you are moving.
Use the following procedure to change the column width of any column in the
display.
1. Keeping the pointer in the heading row, move it over any column edge until it
changes to a double-headed arrow.
2. Drag the column edge to the appropriate location.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
32 Enterprise Edge Overview
Menu descriptions
You access Enterprise Edge functions using the menu. The menu is dynamic which
means that the menu commands change depending on the heading you select from
the navigation tree.
Menu descriptions
Use
To
Group
View the system, resources, services, and management.
Edit
Edit parameters.
Configuration
Access configuration dialog boxes and screens.
Performance
Access performance graphs and tables.
Fault
Access fault management settings.
Report
Generate a report.
Tools
Use Enterprise Edge tools.
Logoff
Log off, reboot or shutdown the Enterprise Edge server.
View
Refresh the information window to reflect configuration changes.
Help
Access online help.
Enterprise Edge system access
Note: System access must be controlled by providing one userid, the
administrator, with read-write privileges. All other users must be given
read-only privileges. This prevents concurrent configuration of the
Enterprise Edge system. For information on defining user profile and
password, see User Manager on page 253
The Unified Manager’s navigation tree contains five main headings that allow you
to access specific areas of the Enterprise Edge system. The main headings are:
•
System on page 32
•
Resources on page 33
•
Services on page 33
•
Management on page 33
•
Diagnostics on page 33
System
When you select the System heading, you can view system information such as
your system name and description and which resources and services are available.
When you select the System heading, the following menu options are enabled:
Configuration, Performance, Fault, Logoff, View and Help. These menu options
provide access to statistical information, allow you to enable or disable services and
perform system reboot or shutdown. For more information on configuring your
system settings, refer to the Configuring system settings on page 41. For
information on Performance and Fault monitoring, refer to Viewing system
performance and fault alarms on page 307 and Enterprise Edge system diagnostics
and utilities on page 269.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Overview 33
You can expand the navigation tree under the System heading to find the Licensing
and the Identification subheadings.
Resources
The subheadings under the Resources heading, allow you to configure the
following resources:
•
LAN
•
WAN
•
Media Services Card
•
Media Bay Modules
•
Dial Up
For more information on resource programming, refer to Configuring Enterprise
Edge Resources on page 45.
Services
Use the options under the Services heading to configure services for the Enterprise
Edge system, including telephony services. For more information on configuring
these settings, refer to Configuring Enterprise Edge Services on page 83.
Management
Use the options under the Management heading to configure network management
parameters for User Manager and Alarm Manager. For more information, refer to
Configuring Management Settings on page 253.
Diagnostics
Use the options under the Diagnostics heading to generate and access statistics on
different system components. Enterprise Edge provides various statistics, metrics
and event logs on resources and services to help you carry out system maintenance
activities. For more information on using diagnostics tools, refer to Maintenance on
page 259.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
34 Enterprise Edge Overview
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Setting up your Enterprise Edge system
3
Refer to the following information when setting up your Enterprise Edge system.
•
Enterprise Edge required parameters on page 35
•
Setting up an Enterprise Edge IP Address on page 36
•
Setting up web-based administration on page 37
•
Logging on to Enterprise Edge on page 37
•
Logging off Enterprise Edge on page 40
•
Rebooting the Enterprise Edge server on page 40
•
Shutting down Enterprise Edge System on page 40
•
Licensing on page 41
•
Configuring system settings on page 41
•
System registration on page 42
Enterprise Edge required parameters
The Enterprise Edge quick start module provides quick access to the parameters
necessary for the Enterprise Edge server to become active online. However, you
must enter a minimum set of parameters within the quick start module. For more
information, see the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Obtain the required parameter values from an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or
corporate network administrator.
Note: Configure all the required parameters during the initial configuration
session after you power on the Enterprise Edge server and connect with
either an RS-232 or an Ethernet port. After you configure the parameters,
reboot the Enterprise Edge server from either the console or Unified
Manager.
Enterprise Edge required parameters are:
•
Initial IP address and mask for each network interface
•
Primary (and optional secondary) DNS servers
•
Default next-hop router
•
Fractional T1 channel numbers (if you are using fractional TI)
•
System name
•
WAN link protocol
•
Frame Relay DLCI / CIR (if applicable)
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
36 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system
•
V.90 modem dial-up username and password (North America only)
•
V.90 modem dial-up phone number and optional alternate phone number (North
America only)
The following table describes the Enterprise Edge server connectivity options.
Field
Definition
HTTP
You can connect to Enterprise Edge from your PC using your JAVA-enabled
Internet browser.
TTY
You can connect a dumb terminal to the console of the Enterprise Edge server
through an RS-232 cross-over cable, or you can use Hyperterminal from Win95/
Win NT systems. Refer to the appropriate installation guide for information on
how to use the console menus.
Setting up an Enterprise Edge IP Address
To manage the Enterprise Edge server using a web browser or an RS-232
connection, you must first set up the IP address. The Enterprise Edge server LAN
interface is shipped with default IP address 10.10.10.1 and mask 255.255.255.0.
You can change the Enterprise Edge IP address using
To set up the Enterprise Edge server initial IP address using a RS-232 port:
1. Plug in the Enterprise Edge server.
2. Connect a PC or laptop computer to the Enterprise Edge server RS-232 port
using a null modem cable.
3. Start a HyperTerminal session on the PC or laptop computer.
4. Enter the LAN/WAN IP address and all other required parameters.
To set up the Enterprise Edge server IP address using a LAN:
1. Plug in the Enterprise Edge server.
2. Connect a laptop to the Enterprise Edge server by Ethernet (back-to-back by
using a crossover cable to avoid disturbing the corporate LAN).
3. Set your PC or laptop computer IP address to 10.10.10.2 with a mask
255.255.255.0.
4. Start a web browser on your laptop with a URL of 10.10.10.1.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 37
Setting up web-based administration
You can establish web-based administration to manage the Enterprise Edge system
using Unified Manager. Your PC must be set up as an Enterprise Edge client with
Internet Explorer 4.0 or greater and a JAVA Virtual Machine (JVM) 5.0.0.3188 or
greater installed.
To install JVM on a workstation, search the Microsoft information web page for
instructions.
For information on minimum computer or software requirements refer to the
Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Note: The ideal display setting for a monitor attached to Enterprise Edge is
1280 x 1024.
Browser settings
Set your browser as follows:
Program
Required Settings
Netscape Communicator 4.5
or greater
Enable Java: On
Category: Cache
Cached document comparison: Every Time
Internet Explorer 4.0 or
greater
Check for newer versions of stored pages: Every visit to the page
Advanced Java VM
Java JIT compiler enabled
Unified Manager allows multiple users to log on to the Enterprise Edge system. If
more than one user log on to configure the same or related subsystems, the most
recent modification remains in effect and overwrites changes previously made.
Maintain one user profile with system administrator privileges. If you have more
than one system administrators, you must plan configuration changes carefully. For
information on managing user profile and system access, see User Manager.
Note: When configuring Enterprise Edge using Unified Manager, you must
disable proxies and directly access Enterprise Edge. The procedure to
disable proxies depends on the browser and version.
Logging on to Enterprise Edge
You can access the Enterprise Edge system from another computer through a
WAN/Internet connection or a dialup connection. The dialup connection uses either
the built in V.90 modem (North America only) or an ISDN dialup. Either access
method creates an IP connection that enables all IP-based management tools. For
more information on remote connections, refer to Dial Up on page 58.
Use the following procedure to log on to Enterprise Edge using the web browser:
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
38 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system
1. Launch your web browser.
2. In the URL address field, type the Enterprise Edge IP address and add port
6800.
For example: HTTP://10.10.10.1:6800
The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager initial page is displayed.
3. Click the Configure button.
The Enterprise Edge login screen appears.
4. In the Login box, type your login name.
The default login name is supervisor.
5. In the Password box, type your password.
The default password is visor.
Tips
Make sure to change the password after you first log on to Enterprise Edge.
For information on how to change passwords and to define user profiles, see
User Manager on page 253.
6. Click the Connect button.
The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager software starts. Depending on your
system, Unified Manager software can take up to several minutes to initialize.
Tips
Performance at startup of Unified Manager is enhanced by preloading the Java
class files on all PCs and laptops from which you want to access Enterprise
Edge using Unified Manager. Prelaoding the Java class files on your
workstation saves time because the Enterprise Edge server does not need to
download Java class files to your PC when you launch Unified Manager. See
Preloading Java class files on your workstation.
The login screen includes:
Field
Definition
Login
Allows you to enter the user name. The name can contain up to 50 case-sensitive
alphanumeric characters. The default log in name for a system administrator is
supervisor.
Password
The Enterprise Edge password associated with the login name. The password can
contain up to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters. The default system
administrator password is visor.
Configure
Allows you access Enterprise Edge configuration.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 39
Preloading Java class files on your workstation
To preload Java class files on your workstation:
1. From your PC Start menu, choose Find and then Computer...
2. In the Named: box, enter your Enterprise Edge system name.
Tips
If you do not know your Enterprise Edge system name, log on to Enterprise
Edge the usual way using Unified Manager and from the navigation tree, click
System. The system name is displayed in the System Name box.
3. Click Find Now.
4. Double-click on the computer icon.
The NortelDT folder is displayed.
5. Open the NortelDT folder.
6. Open the Unified Manager IE Client or Unified Manager Netscape Client
folder, depending on which Internet browser you use to access Enterprise
Edge Unified Manager.
7. Double-click on the Setup.ex icon to install the client software on your
computer.
Accessing Unified Manager through the Preinstalled Client Home
Page
Tips
To access Unified Manager through the Preinstalled Client Home Page, you
must first preload the Java class files on your PC. See Preloading Java
class files on your workstation.
1. Lauch you browser and enter your Enterprise Edge IP address followed by
port 5800. For example: http://10.10.10.1:6800
The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager initial page is displayed.
2. From Enterprise Edge home page, click the Preinstalled Client Home Page
hyperlink.
3. Click the Configure button to access Unified Manager.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
40 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system
Logging off Enterprise Edge
To log off Enterprise Edge:
1. Choose Enterprise Edge in the navigation tree.
The Logoff menu is enabled.
2. From the Logoff menu, click Logoff.
A message appears that asks you to confirm your request to log off.
3. Click Yes to log off.
Rebooting the Enterprise Edge server
To reboot the Enterprise Edge server:
1. Choose System in the navigation tree.
The Logoff menu is enabled.
2. On the Logoff menu, click Reboot.
A message appears that asks you to confirm your request to reboot.
3. Click the Yes button to reboot.
Shutting down Enterprise Edge System
To shut down the Enterprise Edge System:
1. From the navigation tree, choose System.
The Logoff menu is enabled.
2. On the Logoff menu, click Shutdown.
A message appears that asks you to confirm your request to shut down the
system.
All Enterprise Edge services stop when performing system shutdown
Performing a system shutdown stops all Enterprise Edge applications and
services, including IP telephony. Active IP telephony calls fall back on the
PSTN if you have programmed your system to do so.
3. Click the Yes button to shut down the system.
A Shutdown process status window is displayed and the Done button is
enabled.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 41
4. Click the Done button.
When the shutdown is completed, your browser loses the connection with
Enterprise Edge.
Tips
The Enterprise Edge system automatically restarts 45 seconds after the Power
LED turns off. Disconnect Enterprise Edge power cord from the AC outlet if
you do not want the system to restart withing this period of time.
Licensing
The Licensing heading in Unified Manager allows you to view Enterprise Edge
unique System Identification Number.
To view the System Identifier:
1. Choose System, Licensing.
The System Identifier is displayed in the System section.
Entering the software keycodes
To enable software packages other than the base package, you need a security
keycode. Each security keycode contains three eight-digit numbers. For
information about how to obtain System Identification numbers, see the Enterprise
Edge Software Keycode Installation Guide.
To enable a software package:
1. Select System, Licensing.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Add a keycode. A dialog box appears.
3. In the Keycode box, type the 24-digit number in the following format:
xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx-xxxxxxxx.
4. Click Save.
Configuring system settings
You configure your system settings using the Group menu selection in the
upper-left corner of your screen.
1. Choose Group and then choose System or Comprehensive.
2. Click the System key to expand the navigation tree.
The Licensing and Identification headings appear.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
42 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system
3. Click Identification.
The Identification window is displayed.
4. Use the following table to configure the System Identification settings:
Setting
Definition
System Name
Allows you to assign a name to the Enterprise Edge system. Each Enterprise
Edge system on a network must have a unique name. The name must not
exceed 15 characters in length and must not contain special characters like
“/;,”.
Description
Shows a description of the Enterprise Edge system.
Date
Allows you to set the current date. Because the value for the date changes,
save the changes by pressing TAB as soon as the new date is entered.
Time
Allows you to set the current time. Because the value for the time keeps
changing, save the changes as soon as the new time is entered. Use the 24hour format to set the time. The seconds field is optional.
Time Zone
Allows you to select the local time zone for your system.
Country
Allows you to select the country you are in.
Current Domain
Name
Allows you to enter the name of the domain on which your Enterprise Edge
system is currently registered. You must add Enterprise Edge to the domain
controller before you add the current domain name.
New Domain
Name
Allows you to enter the new name of the domain on which your Enterprise
Edge system is registered. You must add Enterprise Edge to the domain
controller before you enter the new domain name.
Enter the IP address of the next hop to reach the domain controller for TAPI.
Next Hop to NT
Domain Controller
for TAPI
Note: For information on configuring Enterprise Edge resources and services,
refer to Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources on page 45, and
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services on page 83.
System registration
When your Enterprise Edge system is installed and operational, it registers specific
information with a Tivoli Management Region (TMR) server. The goal of
registration is to build a customer profile containing system inventory information
which can then be used to bring you enhanced support and value-added services.
Note: To allow automatic registration, you must connect the system to the internet.
In North America, you also have the option to connect your system to an
analog line (PSTN) to establish a dial-up connection using the v.90 modem.
The system makes repeated call attempts every 24 hours until it connects to
the Tivoli server. The repeated attempts the system makes to make a
connection are transparent to your use of the system. For information on
how to connect the installed v.90 modem to a telephone line, refer to the
Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 43
Basic registration using Internet Access
For basic system registration using the public Internet, the system needs direct
access to the Internet (without going through a firewall). If access to the Internet is
through a firewall, the following configuration rules must be set on the firewall:
•
For traffic coming from the Enterprise Edge, allow all UDP and TCP traffic to
the Nortel Tivoli Gateway (192.122.98.36) on ports above 1023.
•
From the Nortel Tivoli Gateway (192.122.98.36) allow TCP traffic to
Enterprise Edge on port 9495.
Basic Registration using v.90 modem (North America only)
Refer to the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide for information
on how to setup the Enterprise Edge v.90 modem.
The following information is automatically collected:
•
System ID
•
System Hardware list
•
System Software list
•
Operating system details
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
44 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
4
This chapter provides information on configuring Enterprise Edge resources. The
following shows the programming map for Enterprise Edge telephony and
networking resources:
Resources
LAN
LAN1
WAN
WAN1
WAN2
Media Services Card
DSP Current Configuration
DSP Manager
DSP Settings
Media Bay Modules
Bus 02
Modules on Bus
Module 1
Module 2
Module 3
Module 4
Bus 03
Bus 04
Bus 05
Bus 06
Bus 07
Bus 08
Dial Up
V.90modem
V.90
modem(North
(North
America)
America)
Dial Up
Dial Up ISDN Dial Up
User2
isdnbackup
Note: The resources listed on this table may not correspond exactly at the
resources available on your Enterprise Edge system.
For information on how to view the Enterprise Edge resources available on your
system, refer to Viewing Enterprise Edge resources on page 45.
Viewing Enterprise Edge resources
Unified Manager lets you view and configure Enterprise Edge networking
resources including LAN, WAN, and dial up resources such as ISDN or V.90
modem (North America). To view the networking resources your Enterprise Edge
system supports:
1. On the Group menu, click Resources or Comprehensive.
2. On the navigation tree, click Enterprise Edge, and then click Resources.
The available Enterprise Edge resources appear in a table format.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
46 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
The Resources table contains the following information:
Attribute
Description
Name
Provides a list of available resources.
Status
Shows the operating status of each resource.
Version
Shows the software version of each resource.
Description
Provides a description of the interface card for each resource.
LAN
Enterprise Edge is equipped with an Ethernet/802.3 network interface card which
supports the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frame format. The Ethernet connection uses
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) to manage the
access to the physical media.
The Enterprise Edge Ethernet interface card supports the following features:
•
100 BASE – TX with RJ-45 connector
•
10 / 100 Auto Sense
•
Full Duplex
•
Fast LAN-to-LAN routing (when using more than one LAN cards)
•
LAN traffic smoothing
Viewing LAN resources and configuring global LAN attributes
Enterprise Edge Unified Manager shows all available LAN resources. If your
Enterprise Edge server is equiped with two LAN interface cards, Unified Manager
displays all available LAN resources and numbers each one (LAN1, LAN2).
To view the available LAN resources and configure global LAN attributes:
1. Select LAN from the navigation tree. Unified Manager displays the global
LAN Parameters and the Resources table showing available LAN cards.
Configuring LAN resources
Setting LAN global parameters
1. Click on the Resources heading to expand the navigation tree.
The available resouces appear.
2. Click LAN.
The Lan Parameters and Resources windows appear.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 47
3. Set your global LAN parameters according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Fast Routing
(Between LANs)
Allows you to enable or disable fast routing to improve LAN-to-LAN
routing performance. This feature is for an Enterprise Edge system equipped
with two LAN cards. At the same link speed, a smaller packet size means
more packets to forward. Use a lower traffic threshold. For more
information on Fast Routing, see Guidelines to configure LAN to LAN traffic
smoothing. Permitted values: Enabled or Disabled
Default: Disabled
Decrement TTL
When Fast Routing is enabled, Decrement TTL lets you decrement the timeto-live (TTL) value in the IP header of packets as they travel from LAN to
LAN. Decrement TTL lets you increase processing time for each fast-routed
IP packet, which reduces CPU cycles. This feature is used when other
routers or special applications on the network connect to the LAN interfaces.
Permitted Values: Enabled or Disabled
Default: Disabled
Traffic Smoothing
(In Mbps)
Lets you set the rate, in Mbps, at which the LAN driver receives packets
from the LAN interface. The main purpose of this feature is to limit the
number of host CPU cycles spent on LAN-to-WAN packet forwarding.
Normally, LAN drivers operate at link speed, which implies that the driver
forwards packets as fast as possible until there is no packet in the receiving
buffer.
Permitted values: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, Disabled
Default: 40
Guidelines to configure LAN to LAN traffic smoothing.
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
512 bytes
1024 bytes 1500 bytes
Fast Routing
enabled
40 mbps
50 mbps
50 mbps
50 mbps
Not needed Not needed
Fast Routing
disabled
or
LAN-to-WAN
routing
10 mbps
15 mbps
30 mbps
50 mbps
50 mbps
50 mbps
Note: The settings shown in the table above ensure data routing uses a maximum
of 60 to 70 percent CPU cycles (Celeron 366MHz processor).
Note: If the LAN to WAN link speed is 10 mbps, selecting higher traffic
smoothing parameters has no impact on packet forwarding, which the
system still performs at a link speed of 10 mbps.
Configuring a LAN interface
LAN1
To configure LAN1 or any other LAN interface:
1. Click the LAN navigation key to expand the navigation tree.
The available LAN interfaces appear.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
48 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
2. Click LAN1. Unified Manager displays the LAN Summary screen for LAN1.
3. Configure the LAN1 attributes according to the following table.
Attribute
Description
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the LAN interface in the following format:
255.255.255.255.
If you do not know your LAN interface IP address, contact your system
administrator or your Internet service provider.
SubNet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the LAN interface in the following format:
255.255.255.255. If you don’t know your subnet mask address, contact your
system administrator or your Internet service provider.
Physical Address
Shows the physical address of the LAN interface.
Description
Provides a description of the network interface card supporting the LAN
connection.
Version
Shows the version of the LAN interface card.
Speed
Shows the speed of the connection to the LAN interface.
Connection Type
Lets you select a type of connection to the LAN interface.
The following values are supported and are interpreted as follows:
Auto Sense: The LAN interface uses the auto negotiation protocol to choose
the maximum possible speed of the connection. Depending on the connected
device, the LAN can choose 100 MB or 10MB, full-duplex or half-duplex.
10 MB Half: The speed is set to 10 Mbit/s and mode to half-duplex.
10 MB Full: The speed is set to 10 Mbit/s and mode to full-duplex.
10 MB Auto: The speed is set to 10 Mbit/s and the mode (half-duplex or
full-duplex) is automatically selected by the interface, using the auto
negotiation protocol. The 10MB Auto connection type limits the maximum
traffic coming into Enterprise Edge to 10 Mbit/s, and enables the auto
negotiation feature for easier interconnection. Limit the incoming traffic if
you notice that the bursty traffic from the connected LAN is degrading the
quality of voice calls carried through VoIP over the WAN. Though the LAN
traffic gets lower priority in Enterprise Edge, a high incoming traffic to the
Enterprise Edge server can result in service interruptions in the system,
which degrades the quality of voice calls carried as VoIP.
100 MB Half: The speed is set to 100 Mbit/s and mode to half-duplex.
100 MB Full: The speed is set to 100 Mbit/s and mode to full-duplex.
Default value: Auto Sense
Status
Shows the current status of the LAN connection.
The possible states are:
Up: The resource is operational.
Down: The resource is not operational.
Note: Consult your System Administrator for the appropriate configuration
information before changing the settings.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 49
Note: Because the Enterprise Edge WAN interface has a maximum bandwidth of
1.544 Mbit/s (T1) or 2.048 Mbit/s (E1), setting the LAN connection speed
to 10 Mbit/s does not reduce performance. However, the CPU is more
efficient if you limit your incoming traffic to 10 Mbit/s. To increase your
CPU performance, set the connected external LAN hub or switch to
10 Mbit/s or to Auto Sense.
Note: If you enable LAN Traffic Smoothing, the connection type defaults to
Auto Sense and there is no requirement on the external LAN hub or switch.
To view LAN performance:
1. From the LAN1 summary screen, on the menu, click Performance and then
click LAN Graph.
The LAN Graph: Statistic Chart screen is displayed.
2. On the menu, click Performance and then click LAN Table.
The LAN Table: Statistic Table screen is displayed.
WAN
WAN Overview
A WAN (wide area network) is a geographically dispersed data communication
network. The term WAN distinguishes a broader data communication structure
from a local area network (LAN). A WAN can be privately owned or rented, but
usually connotes the inclusion of public (shared user) networks.
Enterprise Edge is equipped with a SDL WAN Series 500 interface card with two
serial synchronous ports (Europe), or a SDL WAN Series 550 interface card with
one T1 port (with integrated CSU/DSU) and one serial synchronous port (North
America). Each port from the WAN interface provides a primary WAN connection
(WAN1, WAN2). The serial synchronous port supports the following:
•
North America: V.35
•
Europe: V.35 (Upper Sync Port) and X.21 (Lower Sync Port)
•
Maximum line speed: 8 Mbit/sec.
Enterprise Edge provides primary and backup WAN links through dial-up
connections using a V.90 modem (North America) or ISDN BRI/PRI. For
information on V.90 modem or ISDN connections, see Dial Up. Net Link Manager
provides continuous WAN connection status monitoring. For information on Net
Link Manager, see Net Link Manager on page 229.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
50 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
Permanent WAN Connection
The permanent WAN connection is exposed as a dedicated network adapter. The
permanent link supports frame relay or Point-to-Point protocol (PPP) at the link
layer. The link protocol used depends on the existing network or on the service you
buy from your Internet service provider. The two ports provided by the SDL WAN
interface card can be independently configured to run frame relay or PPP.
Frame Relay
Enterprise Edge supports frame relay in group mode. That is, for each physical port
(serial sync or T1 port), there is one IP address for all PVCs (permanent virtual
circuits). The available Data Link Control interface numbers are 0-1023. Of the
1023 PVCs, 16 are reserved. The maximum number of PVC’s allowed is 1008.
For a frame relay network, Enterprise Edge supports the Frame Relay Forum
standard FRF.9 compression protocol with the standard STAC compression
algorithm. Enterprise Edge software performs the compression. For information on
enabling or disabling WAN data compression, see WAN Data Compression on
page 50.
Point-to-Point-Protocol (PPP)
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is a full-duplex transmission protocol for
communication between two computers using a serial interface, typically a personal
computer connected by telephone line to a server. For example, your Internet
service provider (ISP) can provide you with a PPP connection so that the ISP’s
server can respond to your requests, pass them on to the Internet, and return your
requested Internet responses to you. PPP uses the Internet protocol (IP).
Enterprise Edge supports PPP Compression Control Protocol (CCP) (RFC 1962)
with STAC compression algorithm. This compression is done by Enterprise Edge
software and can be enabled or disabled using a parameter in PPP configurations.
For information on WAN data compression, see WAN Data Compression on page
50.
WAN Data Compression
Enterprise Edge provides a WAN Data Compression feature. You can use data
compression on permanent WAN connection and on backup WAN connection. By
default, WAN Data Compression is enabled on Enterprise Edge. WAN Data
Compression can be enabled or disabled from the Setting WAN Frame Relay
Parameters screen or from the WAN PPP Parameters screen, depending on your
system configuration.
On a permanent WAN connection, Enterprise Edge supports the following data
compression protocol:
•
Frame Relay Forum standard FRF.9 data compression protocol with de facto
standard STAC compression algorithm
•
PPP Compression Control Protocol (RFC 1962) with STAC compression
algorithm
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 51
On dial-up WAN connections, Enterprise Edge supports the following data
compression protocol:
•
Microsoft Point-to-Point Compression (MPPC), RFC 2118
Viewing WAN Resources
Enterprise Edge lets you view available WAN resources.
To view available WAN resources:
1. From Unified Manager, under Resources, click WAN. The Resources section
displays the WAN interfaces (WAN1, WAN2) in a table format.
Setting global WAN parameters
If PPP is the link protocol for a WAN interface (WAN1 or WAN2), you can use an
authentication process to identify the user requesting a network connection. The
authentication process involves creating a list of user names and assigning
passwords using the PPP Password List. Enterprise Edge uses the information on
the list to verify and confirm the identity of the user. Only those users whose names
appear on the PPP Password List can access the network. The PPP Password List
configuration lets you add, modify or delete an item on the list.
To create a PPP Password List:
1. From the WAN Resources section, scroll down to the PPP Password List.
2. From the menu click Configuration and select Add PPP User&Password.
The PPP Password List dialog box appears.
3. In the P# box, type the number of the list item. For example, if you are adding
the first item on the list, the P# is P1.
Note: If you type an item number which already exists in the list, the
following message appears "You tried to add a row with existing key".
Assign a new number to the item to want to add to the list.
4. In the PPP User Name box, type the user name associated with the computer
you want Enterprise Edge to identify as a valid network user.
Note: You must overwrite the default user name User with the user name
you want to add to the list.
5. In the PPP Password box, type the password you want to assign to the user
defined in the PPP User Name box. The password can contain a combination
of lowercase and uppercase letters and numbers.
6. Click Save to save your settings.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
52 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
To modify an existing item on the PPP Password List:
1. From the list, click the item you want to modify. The selected item is
highlighted.
2. From the menu, click Configuration and select
Modify PPP User&Password. The PPP Password List dialog box appears.
3. Make the necessary changes.
4. Click Save to save your changes.
To delete an item from the PPP Password List:
1. From the list, select the item you want to delete. The selected item is
highlighted.
2. From the menu, click Configuration and select
Delete PPP User&Password. A dialog box appears to ask "Are you sure you
want to delete this row?" Click Yes.
Configuring WAN Summary Parameters
1. Click the WAN navigation key to expand the navigation tree.
2. On the navigation tree, click WAN1 or WAN2. Unified Manager displays the
following screens: WAN Line Parameters (if you are configuring a T1 port
[North America only]), WAN Frame Relay or PPP Parameters (depending on
the link protocol selected), and PVC Congestion Control screens.
Note: Clicking the WAN1 or WAN2 navigation key causes the key to
disappear. You must click WAN1 or WAN2 to access the WAN
Summary screen.
3. Use the attributes in the following table to configure Enterprise Edge WAN
Summary settings:
Attribute
Description
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the WAN interface. The WAN IP address must be in
the following format: 255.255.255.255.
You can obtain this information from your system administrator or your
Internet service provider.
SubNet Mask
Enter the subnet mask address of the WAN. The subnet mask IP address must
be in the following format: 255.255.255.255.
You can obtain this information from your system administrator or your
Internet service provider.
Physical Address Shows the physical address of the WAN interface.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 53
Attribute
Description
Description
Provides a description of the network interface card that supports the WAN
connection.
Port
Shows the port type of the WAN interface.
Version
Shows the version of the WAN interface.
Speed
Shows the operational speed of the WAN interface.
Status
Shows the current resource status of the WAN interface.
The possible states are:
Up: The resource is operational.
Down: The resource is not operational.
Link Protocol
Lets you select a WAN link protocol. The options are Frame Relay or PPP
protocol.
The default is Frame Relay.
If you change the link protocol, the configuration screen changes to include
fields corresponding to the link protocol you choose. To ensure proper
operation, always refresh the page by clicking View and then Refresh.
The link protocol to choose depends on the existing network or on the service
you buy from you Internet services provider.
Compression
Lets you enable or disable data compression. The possible values are:
Enabled, Disabled
The default is Disabled.
Frame Size
Lets you specify the maximum frame size for the layer-2 packet carried on
this port. The default is 1600.
4. Press the TAB key to save your settings.
Note: Unified Manager refreshes the link protocol screen according to the
choosen protocol. Your choice of protocol depends on the existing
network or on the service you buy from your Internet service provider.
Frame relay is the default link protocol. If you change the link protocol
the following message appears "Reminder! Previous setting requires
rebooting the system to take effect. Please reboot the system..." Click
OK.
Reboot the system
You must remember to reboot your system for the changes you made to the
link protocol to take effect. You can continue Enterprise Edge Resources
configuration and reboot the system at a convenient time.
Setting WAN Line Parameters
The WAN Line Parameters screen is displayed when configuring a T1 port (North
America only). Enterprise Edge supports T1 and fractional T1. Refer to the Port
box on the WAN Summary Parameters screen to see which type of port your are
configuring.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
54 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
1. Use the information provided in the following table to set the WAN Line
Parameters:
Attribute
Description
Channel Rate
Lets you set the data transmission rate for each of the DS0 channels in the T1
line.
Possible values are 64K or 56K.
The default value is 64K.
Clock Source
Lets you set an internal or external T1 clock source.
Possible values are External or Internal.
The default value is External.
Frame Type
Lets you set the type of framing the T1 line supports.
Possible values are ESF or SF(D4).
The default value is ESF.
Use the setting your T1 service provider recommends.
Line Coding
Lets you set the type of encoding used in the T1 line.
Possible values are B8ZS or AMI.
Use the setting your T1 service provider recommends.
Line Polarity
Lets you set Normal or Inverted line polarity in the T1 line. Select Inverted
only if Line Coding is set to AMI.
Pulse Density
Lets you control whether the DSU/CSU maintains the minimum level of 1s on
the line for AMI encoding.
Possible values are Enabled or Disabled.
Default value is Disabled.
Channel List
Lets you create a list of T1 channels used when using fractional T1. You can list
each channel numbers or provide a range of numbers separated by a comma or
hyphen. The channel list can contain a mix of ranges and individual channel
numbers. For example, a valid channel list format is 3,5,6,10-15,18,20-23. To
use all the available T1 channels, type All. Your T1 service provider can give
you this information.
Default value is All.
Note: Always use the same frame type as your service provider.
Note: Always use the same line coding method as your service provider.
2. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Setting WAN Frame Relay Parameters
If you chose frame relay as your link protocol, set the WAN Frame Relay
Parameters.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 55
1. Use the information in the following table to set the WAN Frame Relay
Parameters:
Attribute
Description
LMI Type
Lets you set the type of local management protocol used on this link.
The link management type must be the same as the one used by the
frame relay service provider. The available options are Original LMI,
ANSI T1.617 Annex D or ITU-T Q.933 Annex A.
The default setting is Original LMI.
Polling Interval
Lets you set an interval, in seconds, between LMI status inquiry
messages. The polling interval must be the same as the one used by the
frame relay service provider’s switch.
Possible values are between 5 and 30 seconds.
The default setting is 10.
Full Enquiry Interval
Lets you set the maximum number of LMI Status Enquiry messages
sent before sending a Full Status Enquiry request. This value must
match the corresponding value set in the frame relay service provider’s
switch.
Possible values are between 1 and 255 (in seconds).
The default setting is 6.
Error Threshold
Lets you set the maximum number of consecutive failures permitted in
LMI Status Enquiry before dropping the link. It is also the number of
successful consecutive LMI Status Enquiry messages that must be
received before marking a link as operational.
Possible values are between 0 and MAXINT.
The default value is 3.
Monitored Events
Lets you set the number of events sampled for making decisions about
the error threshold. This value must be set to a higher number than the
value set in the Error Threshold box.
Possible values are a number between 0 and MAXINT.
The default value is 4.
DS Code
Lets you set the Differentiated Services code (DSCode) recognized by
the frame relay driver for traffic prioritization. This value is a mask
value. When an IP packet is sent, the frame relay driver checks if the
packet's DSCode field (in the IP header) has any of the bits defined in
the DS Code.
Compression Enabled
PVCs
Lets you create a lists of PVCs on which data compression is enabled.
Type the list of PVCs for which data compression is enabled. The value
can be a comma-separated list of DLCI numbers.You can define a
range of DLCIs by inserting a hyphen between the lower and the upper
boundaries. A list can contain individual DLCI numbers and DLCI
ranges. If data compression is enabled, compression and decompression
operations are performed on the data going to and coming from the
PVCs enumerated on this list.
Access Rate
Lets you set, in kbps, the maximum access rate on the interface running
frame relay. The frame relay congestion control engine uses this value
to limit or shape traffic. The Access Rate value is determined using the
T1 channels available for data communication on the port attached to
this interface and their data rates.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
56 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
2. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
PVC Congestion Control
If frame relay is your link protocol, you must configure PVC Congestion Control.
If PPP is your link protocol, there are no PVC Congestion Control settings to
configure.
1. Use the following table to set WAN PVC Congestion Control:
Column
Description
Entry (CC#)
Lets you define each congestion control entry on the interface. A
congestion control entry must use the following format: CC2, where the
prefix 'CC' is followed by a number. Each entry must use a different
number. For example, 'CC2' is a valid congestion control entry.
Enterprise Edge requires that you use consecutive numbers when
entering congestion control entries. If you do not use consecutive
numbers, the system adjusts them to be consecutive. If you add an
existing entry, the existing entry is modified with new values. When
you modify an entry, the name cannot be changed.
DLCI
Lets you enter the data link connection identifier (DLCI) number of the
PVC on which to perform congestion control. A DLCI must be
configured for congestion control to be performed.
Enterprise Edge uses one-second intervals to measure this parameter.
CIR
Lets you set, in kbits, the committed information rate. The CIR is the
carrier guarantees that the router transmits over a predetermined time
interval when congestion is not present.
Contact your service provider for correct setting.
Enterprise Edge uses one-second intervals to measure this parameter.
Committed Burst (bC)
Lets you define the number of bits, in kbits, the router transmits over a
specified time interval if congestion is present. As a rule this value is set
for 1/4 the value of the CIR.
Enterprise Edge uses one-second intervals to measure this parameter.
Excess Burst (Be)
Combined with the committed burst rate, lets you set, in kbits, the
maximum number of bits the router transmits over a predetermined time
interval if there is no congestion. The combined value of committed
burst and excess burst must be less than or equal to the line speed.
To add PVC congestion control:
1. On the menu, click Configuration, and then click Add PVC Congestion
Control.
2. In the Entry (CC#) box, type the entry “CCxx” where “xx” is a unique
integer.
3. In the DLCI box, type the DLCI number.
4. In the CIR (kbps) box, type the CIR in kbps.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 57
5. In the Committed Burst BC (kbits) box, type the committed burst in kbits.
6. In the Excess Burst BE (kbits) box, type the excess burst in kbits.
7. Click the Save button to save the entries.
To modify a PVC congestion control entry:
1. Select the entry you want to modify in the PVC Congestion Control table
2. On the menu, click Configuration, and then click Modify PVC Congestion
Control.
The PVC Congestion Control dialog box appears.
Note: If you have not selected a PVC Congestion Control entry, an error
message appears saying "Please select a row in the Table".
3. Click any box that requires modification and make the changes.
4. Click the Save button to save the modifications.
To delete a PVC congestion control entry:
1. Click the entry you want to delete in the PVC Congestion Control table.
2. On the menu, click Configuration, and then click Delete PVC Congestion
Control.
A message prompts you to confirm the deletion.
Note: If you have not selected a PVC Congestion Control entry, an error
message appears saying "Please select a row in the Table".
3. Click the Yes button to delete the PVC congestion control entry.
WAN PPP Parameters
If you chose PPP as your link protocol, set the WAN PPP Parameters screen.
1. Use the following table to set the WAN PPP parameters:
Attribute
Description
LCP Keep Alive
Interval
Lets you define at which interval, in seconds, to send a keep alive signal
when there is no regular traffic on the PPP link.
The default value is 10.
LQR Interval
Lets you define at which interval, in 1/100 second, to perform link
quality monitoring.
Allowed Authentication Lets you specify if a remote user can use PAP or CHAP or if the remote
user is restricted to use CHAP only.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
58 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
Attribute
Description
Cisco’s Encapsulation
Mode
Lets you enable or disable the Cisco compatibility mode.
2. Press the Tab key to save your settings.
WAN performance
To access the WAN Primary Link performance graphs and tables for a particular
WAN interface:
1. In the navigation tree, select WAN1 or WAN2.
2. On the menu, click Performance, WAN Graph.
The WAN Graph: Statistic Chart appears.
3. On the menu, click Performance, WAN Table.
The WAN Table: Statistic Table appears.
Dial Up
Enterprise Edge lets you create and use dial up connections for Remote Access
Service (RAS) or dial-on-demand network access. RAS lets you access Enterprise
Edge remotely by making an IP connection using an ISDN BRI/PRI line or the
Enterprise Edge V.90 modem (North America). Once connected to the Enterprise
Edge system, you can access all IP-based system management operations.
Enterprise Edge also supports dial-on-demand for primary and backup WAN
connections. Primary and backup WAN connections can use an ISDN BRI/PRI line
or a V.90 modem (North America).
Configuring RAS Server TCP/IP
1. Click the Resources key to expand the navigation tree.
2. Click Dial Up.
The RAS Server TCP/IP Configuration screen appears.
3. Use the following table to configure the RAS Server TCP/IP settings:
Attribute
Description
Allow Network Access
Lets you give dial up access to the entire network (Yes) or to restrict
access to Enterprise Edge only (No).
When using dial up for dial-on-demand WAN connection (as a primary
or back up WAN connection), set Allow Network Access to Yes.
When using dial up for remote system management purposes only, set
to No.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 59
Attribute
Description
Static IP Address Pool
Lets you set the IP address Enterprise Edge assigns when a remote site
dials into the Enterprise Edge system.
The default value is 10.10.10.5
Address Mask
Lets you set the IP address mask corresponding to the IP address range.
The IP addresses from the static address pool then reserved for
assignment to remote sites.
The default value is 255.255.255.240
4. Press the TAB key to save your settings.
ISDN Dial Up
Enterprise Edge supports ISDN Dial Up for dial-on-demand WAN access. You
have the choice to use ISDN BRI/PRI as your primary WAN connection or as a
back up for your permanent WAN connection.
Tips
To use an ISDN dial-up connection, you must first configure your system for
ISDN. For more information, refer to Appendix B: ISDN Overview. If your
system is already configured to support ISDN, make sure you configure a Data
Module for ISDN dial up connection. For more information, see Configuring a
data module.
Tips
After you have created an ISDN dial up interface, you must use Net Link
Manager to select which type of network connection the system must use for
primary and backup connection.
Creating an ISDN dial up interface
1. Click the Resources key, and then click the Dial Up key to expand the
navigation tree.
The existing ISDN interfaces are listed and the Add button at the top of the
navigation tree is enabled.
2. Click the Add button located over the navigation tree.
The Add ISDN dialog box appears.
3. In the (Dial In) Name box, type the name of the interface you are creating.
Add backup to Name
If you are creating an ISDN interface to use as a backup for a permanent WAN
connection, the (Dial In) Name must contain the string "backup". For
example, "ISDNbackup" is a valid name if you want to use an ISDN
connection as a WAN backup connection.
4. In the Password box, type a password.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
60 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
5. In the Confirm Password box, type your password again.
6. In the Channel list, select the channel the connection must use.
7. Click Save to save your settings.
The newly created ISDN interface is displayed under ISDN.
Configuring an ISDN interface
To configure an ISDN interface:
1. Under Resources, Dial Up, ISDN, click on the interface you want to
configure.
The ISDN Summary, ISDN Link Parameters, ISDN Access Parameters and
ISDN Channel Characteristics screens are displayed.
2. Use the following table to configure the ISDN Summary settings:
ISDN Summary:
Attribute
Description
Interface
Shows the name of the ISDN interface selected.
IPAddress
Lets you set the IP address of the ISDN interface when it connects. You can
set a fixed IP address for the dial-up interface. You can select
RemoteAssigned to indicate that Enterprise Edge must obtain an IP address
from the remote end. The address obtained depends on the RAS server to
which Enterprise Edge connects.
The default value is RemoteAssigned.
Description
Shows a description of the interface.
Status
Lets you view and set the ISDN interface resource status. Possible values are:
Up: the ISDN interface is currently connected. Also used to force the interface
to initiate a connection.
Down: the ISDN interface is not currently connected.
Enabled: the ISDN interface is enabled for use.
Disabled: the ISDN interface is currently disabled.
You cannot select an ISDN interface that is set to “RemoteAssigned” as the
Local Gateway IP for the VoIP Gateway.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 61
ISDN Link Parameters
Use the following table to set the ISDN Link Parameters:
Attribute
Description
Dial Retries
Lets you set the number of times the systems attempts to connect before
considering the connection nonoperational.
The default value is 3.
Dial Interval
Lets you set the interval, in seconds, between connection attempts.
The default value is 60.
IP Header
Compression
Lets you enable or disable IP header compression. The feature must be enable
at both ends of the connection.
The default value is Enabled.
Software
Compression
Lets you enable or disable software compression. When enabled, all dial-up
connections use Microsoft Point-to-Point Compression (MPPC).
The default value is Disabled.
PPP LCP
Extensions
Lets you enable or disable the following PPP Link Control extensions: TimeRemaining and Identification.
The default value is Enabled.
Disconnect Time Lets you set, in seconds, the interval during which the ISDN interface
disconnects when there is no traffic.
3. Scroll down to the ISDN Access Parameters screen.
ISDN Access Parameters
1. Use the following table to set the ISDN access parameters:
Attribute
Description
Authentication
Lets you select the authentication type for the link. The options are
AllowClearText or EncryptedOnly.
AllowClearText: when selected the Challenge Handshake Authentication
Protocol (CHAP) is used first and if the receiving end of the link declines,
PAP is used to authenticate the link.
EncryptedOnly: when selected, only encrypted authentication such as CHAP
is used on this interface during PPP authentication process.
Two Way
Authentication
Lets you enable or disable link authentication in both directions.
Dial-Out User ID Lets you define a user name and password that the link must use to
authenticate itself when dialing out to another router.
2. Scroll down to the ISDN Channel Characteristics screen.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
62 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
ISDN Channel Characteristics
The ISDN Channel Characteristics shows the default characteristics for the channel
you selected when you created the ISDN interface. The following ISDN Channel
Characteristics table provides a description of each ISDN channel characteristics:
Attribute
Description
Row(R#)
Identifies the number of the item in the ISDN channel list.
Port
Shows the channel selected for this ISDN interface. The channel shown here
is the channel you selected when you created the ISDN interface.
Phone 1
Lets you enter the phone number to use to make an ISDN connection to the
network or to Enterprise Edge. If needed, include area codes and all necessary
digits to dial an external number. The phone number must contain only
numerical digits only (no alphabetical or other characters are allowed).
Phone 2
Lets you enter an alternate phone number to use to make the ISDN
connection. If needed, include area codes and all necessary digits to dial an
external number. The phone number must contain numerical digits only (no
alphabetical or other characters are allowed).
Line Type
Lets you specify if the line is a 64K or 56K digital line.
Fallback
Lets you specify whether or not to fall back to a slower speed if unable to
connect at the previously set speed.
To add an ISDN channel to the ISDN Channel Characteristics list:
1. From the Configuration menu, choose Add ISDN Channel.
The ISDN Channel Characteristics property sheet appears.
2. Use the table under ISDN Channel Characteristics to configure the channel
characteristics settings.
To modify the characteristics of an existing ISDN channel:
1. From the ISDN Channel Characteristics screen, click on a row.
The row is highlighted.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Modify ISDN Channel.
The ISDN Channel Characteristics property sheet appears.
3. Make the necessary changes. See the table under ISDN Channel
Characteristics for a description of each characteristic.
4. Click the Save button to save your settings.
To delete an ISDN channel from the ISDN Channel Characteristics list:
1. In the ISDN Channel Characteristics screen, click on a row.
The row is highlighted.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 63
2. From the Configuration menu, select Delete ISDN Channel.
The Select an Option screen appears, asking you if you want to delete the
selected row from the list.
3. Click the Yes button.
Deleting an ISDN interface
To delete an ISDN interface:
1. Click the ISDN key under Resources
2. Click the name of the interface you want to delete. The interface name is
highlighted.
3. Click the Delete button located at the top of the navigation tree. A dialog box
asks you "Are you sure you want to delete this node?".
4. Click Yes.
V.90 modem (North America) Dial Up
Enterprise Edge is equipped with an internal V.90 modem which connects to your
phone line with a RJ-11 connector. The V.90 modem has the following features:
•
V.90 56 kbps ITU standard
•
V.34 33.6 kbps ITU standard
•
V.42/MNP 2-4 error control
•
V.42 bis/MNP 5 data compression
•
Compatible with ITU and Bell Standards from 56 kbps down to 1200 bps
Note: The modem is capable of receiving at a maximum speed of 56 kbps and
transmitting at a maximum speed of 31.2 kbps. Because of FCC regulations,
receiving speed is limited to 53 kbps. Current line noise can impact the
speed of the modem.
The V.90 modem WAN connection always uses PPP as the link layer protocol. For
correct operation, the link must be connected to a remote access server (RAS).
Enterprise Edge supports the following authentication features:
•
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP)
•
Challenge Authentication Protocol (CHAP)
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
64 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
Configuring V.90 modem interface for dial up WAN backup connection
Tips
Remember to set Dial Up global parameters before creating modem dial up
interfaces. For information on setting Dial Up global parameters, see
Configuring RAS Server TCP/IP.
The same modem is shared between the remote dial-in for system
administration and the backup WAN link. The WAN backup function is not
available if a break in the WAN permanent connection occurs while a system
administrator is connected to Enterprise Edge.
The V.90 modem is used for WAN backup connection. To configure V.90 modem
interface:
1. Click Resources to expand the navigation tree.
2. Click the Dial Up key to expand navigation tree.
3. On the navigation tree, click the V.90 key to see available modem interfaces.
Enterprise Edge comes with a default modem backup interface called
ModemBackup. The TivDialup interface, which is also listed under V.90, is
reserved for Tivoli system management.
4. On the navigation tree, click ModemBackup. A screen displays the following:
Modem Summary, Modem Link Parameters, Modem Access Characteristics
Modem Summary Parameters
1. Use the following table to set the Modem Summary Parameters:
Attribute
Description
Interface
Shows the name of the modem interface selected.
IP Address
Lets you set the IP address of the modem interface when it connects. Users
can set a fixed IP address for the dial-up interface. If a fixed address is
specified, Enterprise Edge uses the address to the receiving end.
Users can select RemoteAssigned to indicate that Enterprise Edge must
obtain an IP address from the remote end and use it. The address obtained
depends on the RAS server to which Enterprise Edge connects.
The default value is RemoteAssigned.
Description
Shows a description of the interface.
Version
Shows the version of the modem subsystem.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 65
Attribute
Description
Status
Lets you view the modem interface resource status and to enable or disable the
modem interface.
The possible states are:
Up: the auto WAN backup service is enabled and the dial-up link is currently
active.
Down: the auto WAN backup service is enabled and the dial-up link is
currently disconnected.
Enabled: the interface is enabled for use by the auto-backup server.
Disabled: the auto WAN backup service is disabled.
2. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Modem Link Parameters
1. Use the following table to set the Modem Link Parameters:
WAN Link Parameters Dialog Definitions
Attribute
Description
Telephone Number
Lets you type a telephone number to use to connect using the
modem interface. If needed, include area codes and all necessary
digits to dial an external number.
Alternate Telephone
Number
Lets you type an alternate number to use to connect using the
modem interface. Include area codes and all necessary digits to dial
an external number.
Connect Rate
Lets you specify the initial speed (in bits per second) for the modem
to connect. Set to the maximum permissible value for best results.
Permitted values: 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800. Note: This is
the initial rate; the actual rate is always negotiated.
Dial Retries
Lets you set the number of attempts the system must make when
trying to connect before considering the connection nonoperational
The default value is 3.
Dial Interval
Lets you set the interval, in seconds, between successive connection
attempts.
The default value is 60.
Speaker Mode
Lets you enable or disable the speaker during initial link
establishment.
IP Header Compression
Lets you enable or disable IP header compression. To function, the
receiving end must also use this feature.
Software Compression
Lets you enable or disable data compression in the software, instead
of the modem. For dial-up connections, Unified Manager uses
Microsoft Point-to-Point Compression algorithm (MPPC).
Hardware Compression
Lets you enable or disable data compression in the hardware instead
of the software.
PPP LCP Extensions
Lets you enable or disable the following PPP Link Control
extensions: Time-Remaining and Identification.
The default value is Enabled.
2. Press the TAB key to save the settings.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
66 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
V.90 Modem Access Parameters
1. Use the following table to set the V.90 Modem Access Parameters:
Attribute
Description
Authentication
Lets you select the authentication type for the link. The options are
AllowClearText or EncryptedOnly.
AllowClearText: when selected the Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is used first and if the receiving end
of the link declines, PAP is used to authenticate the link.
EncryptedOnly: when selected, only encrypted authentication such
as CHAP is used on this interface during PPP authentication process.
Two Way Authentication Lets you enable or disable link authentication in both directions.
User ID (name password) Lets you define a user name and a password that the link uses to
authenticate itself when dialing out to another router.
2. Press the TAB key to save the settings.
Guidelines for Using Remote Dial-in
Consider the following guidelines when using remote dial-in:
•
The same modem is shared between the remote dial-in for administration and
the backup WAN link. If a remote administration user is connected while the
primary link breaks, the automatic backup function does not occur.
•
While using the back-up interface, Enterprise Edge always calls. Enterprise
Edge does not answer an incoming call from a router.
Media Services Card
Enterprise Edge applications consume Digital Signal Processor (DSP) resources.
DSP resources are controlled by software (the number of ports or services that are
available to any application) and hardware (the number of MSPECs) installed. Each
system is preconfigured with a default DSP resource allocation based on the
number of MSPECs installed. However, you may need to change the DSP resource
allocation using the DSP Manager if you:
•
replace an MSPEC
•
purchase more software
For more information on configuring DSP resource allocation, refer to:
•
Rules for configuring DSP resource allocation on page 67
•
DSP Current Configuration on page 68
•
DSP Manager on page 68
•
DSP Settings on page 69
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 67
Rules for configuring DSP resource allocation
The following rules apply when configuring DSP resource allocations:
•
When no MSPECs are installed, 8 Voice channels can be configured
•
The system can be configured with a maximum of:
—
—
—
—
•
16 Voice channels
2 FAX channels
8 WAN ports
8 VoIP trunks
Each MSPEC can be configured with a maximum of:
—
—
—
—
2 VoIP trunks
12 Voice channels
1 FAX channel
8 WAN ports
•
Eight WAN ports will be configured automatically if there are available
MSPEC resources
•
If both Voice channels and VoIP trunks are configured on the same MSPEC, a
maximum of 2 Voice channels can be configured
•
If both Voice channels and WAN ports are configured on the same MSPEC, a
maximum of 4 Voice channels can be configured
•
The following ports and channels cannot be configured together on the same
MSPEC:
— WAN and VoIP
— WAN and FAX
The following table lists some allowable combinations of channel types and
identifies the default configuration for some types of feature codes on a 4 MSPEC
system.
Voice
VoIP
FAX
WAN
Default configuration when feature code is
1
8
8
0
0
8 VoIP trunks or 8 VoIP trunks and FAX
2
16
6
1
0
6 VoIP trunks and FAX
3
10
6
0
8
6 VoIP trunks
4
16
4
2
0
4 VoIP trunks and FAX
5
16
4
1
8
6
16
4
0
8
4 VoIP trunks
7
16
2
2
8
2 VoIP trunks and FAX
8
16
2
0
8
2 VoIP trunks
9
16
0
2
8
10
16
0
0
8
P0911588 Issue 01
no feature codes entered
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
68 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
DSP Current Configuration
To view the current DSP resource allocation:
1. Choose Resources, Media Services Card, DSP Current Configuration .
The DSP Current Configuration window displays the number of channel types
running on each MSPEC. For example, the default configuration might
include 4 Voice channels and 8 WAN ports running on MSPEC number 4
(DSP-4 on the table). For more information on allowable MSPEC
configurations, refer to the table above.
DSP Manager
The DSP Manager is used to change the DSP resource allocation currently running
on the system. To change the DSP resource allocation, use the following procedure:
1.
Choose Resources, Media Services Card, DSP Manager.
The DSP Manager window is displayed, showing the configuration that you
can edit. In addition, the DSP Configurations window displays a table
showing the Current, Default and Custom configurations.
Current configuration is the configuration that is currently running on your
system. Default configuration contains the default values preprogrammed for
the number of MSPECs showing. Custom configuration is the configuration
that you are programming into your system. You must reboot the system for
the Custom configuration to become to Current configuration.
2. Select Custom from the Edit menu.
3. Enter the appropriate values in the boxes according to the Rules for
configuring DSP resource allocation on page 67.
Note: At any time during this step, you can revert back to the default or
current configuration by selecting Default or Current from the Edit
menu.
4. Select Validate from the Configuration menu.
The system will notify you if your configuration is valid by displaying a
message in the Last Status box.
5. Select Submit from the Configuration menu.
The Last Status box displays a message indicating that the custom
configuration has been submitted and that a system restart is required. The
next time you restart your system, the custom configuration will be loaded.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 69
DSP Settings
The system DTMF length may need to be adjusted because of certain detection
errors. For example, some cellular phone tones are closer to the short DTMF
millisecond range. If a company is having trouble with the cellular phone
connections, it may be necessary to change the DTMF length to 30 milliseconds.
To change the DTMF length:
1. Choose Resources, Media Services Card, DSP Settings.
The DSP Settings window displays the DTMF length.
2. Click in the box and change the DTMF length to a value between 30 and 60.
3. Press the Tab key to save your settings.
Media Bay Modules
The Media Bay Modules heading lets you view and change settings for trunk
modules installed in Enterprise Edge. The following illustration shows a detailed
view of the Media Bay Modules programming map and the attributes that appear
for each different module type.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
70 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
Note: Depending on which Media Bay Module your system is equipped with, the
settings and parameters available may vary.
Media Bay Modules
Bus 02 - 07
Modules on Bus
Module 1
Module type PRI
Low line/loop
High line/loop
Protocol
Protocol type
NSF extension
B channel selection sequence
Clock source
Overlap receiving
Call-by-call service selection
Foreign Exchange
Inwats (800)
Switched Digital (SDS)
Inter...
Nine Hundred (900)
T1 Parameters (North America only)
CO fail
Interface levels
Framing
Internal CSU
CSU line build
Line coding
Provision lines
Line xxx
Status
Media Bay Modules (cont’d)
Bus 02 - 07
Modules on Bus
Ports on Bus
Module 1
Module type Loop
Low line/loop
High line/loop
Disconnect timer
Module 1
Module type T1
Low line/loop
High line/loop
Disconnect timer
Answer timer
Clock source
T1 Parameters (North America only)
CO fail
Interface levels
Framing
Internal CSU
CSU line build
Line coding
Module 1
Module type BRI-ST
Low line/loop
High line/loop
Protocol
Clock Source
Overlap receiving
Module 1
Module type DPNSS
Low line/loop
High line/loop
Clock source
Local num len
Maximum transits
Module 1
Module type DASS2
Low line/loop
High line/loop
Clock source
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 71
To enable or disable any of the buses on the Enterprise Edge system:
1. Under the Resources heading, click the Media Bay Modules key.
Buses 02 to 08 are displayed.
2. Select the bus you wish to disable.
Information about the bus is displayed and the Configuration menu option is
enabled.
3. On the Configuration menu, select Disable.
The system prompts you to confirm your request.
4. Click the OK button to disable the bus.
Bus
Bus 01 is reserved for the MSC card. Because there is no hardware programming
required for the MSC card, bus 01 is not displayed. You can view and perform
maintenance operations on Bus 01. For more information, see Maintenance on page
259.
For a detailed description of the various Media Bay Modules and proper hardware
configurations, see the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Note: Because the voice over IP (VoIP) functionality resides on the MSC card, it
is not necessary to program any hardware settings for it. The Trunk mode
is automatically set to VoIP for lines 001 to 014. For more information, refer
to Lines on page 108.
To configure a bus type:
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules.
2. Click a Bus (Bus 02 to 07).
Note: Bus 08 is reserved for configuring a data module, which provides a
soft router connection to a remote router. The functionality for this
feature is on the Media Services Card, not in a discrete media bay
module. For information about programming a data module, see
Configuring a data module on page 79.
3. From the Programmed Bus Type list, choose a bus type.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
72 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
4. Press Enter.
The choice of Programmed Bus Type available depends on the hardware unit
that is installed. The following table shows the type of bus available for each
hardware unit.
Bus Type
Hardware unit
Station module
Digital Station Media Bay Module (EE-DSM 16 or
EE-DSM32)
Analog station module
Analog Station Media Bay Module (EE-ASM 8)
Trunk module
Digital Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-DTM)
CLID Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-CTM)
BRI S/T Media Bay Module (EE-BRIM S/T)
Fiber Expansion Module
Set module, Analog Station Module, UK analog LEC,
BRI-U2, BRI-U4, BRI-ST
Module
The Module heading lets you configure settings for the module. Options displayed
depend on the type of Media Bay Module installed in your system and the Module
type you select.
To program a module:
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules, Bus 02-07, Ports on Bus and
Module 1 to access the module configuration settings.
2. Click a Module type: Loop, PRI, BRI-ST, DASS2, DPNSS or T1, and press
Enter.
Note: To provision PRI lines, see Provision lines on page 81.
3. Configure the card settings according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Low/line loop
Automatically assigned based on the card type and the module number.
For more information, see page 73.
Values: View only
High line loop
Automatically assigned based on the card type and the module number.
For more information, see page 73.
Values: View only
Disconnect timer1 Lets you specify the duration of an Open Switch Interval (OSI). For
more information, see page 74.
Values: 60, 100, 260, 460, or 600 milliseconds (Default: 460)
Answer timer2
Lets you set the minimum duration of an answer signal before a call is
considered to be answered.
Values: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds (Default: 2)
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 73
Attribute
Description
Protocol3
Lets you define a trunk protocol. For more information, see page 74.
Values: NI-2, DMS100, DMS250, AT&T4ESS, SL-1, Euro, Q-Sig
Protocol type3
Lets you define a protocol type. This settings applies to the SL-1 private
networking protocol only. For more information, see page 74.
Values: User (Slave), Network (Master)
Default: User (Slave)
NSF Extension3
Lets you define the Network Specific Facilities (NSF) information
element. If the prompt Clear Routes is displayed, click Yes to confirm
your selection. For more information, see page 74.
Values: None, WATS, ALL
B-channel
selection
sequence3
Lets you define how B-channels are selected. For more information, see
page 75.
Values: Ascending Sequential, Descending Sequential
Clock Source4
Lets you designate which EE-DTM acts as a primary or secondary
timing slave or a Timing Master. The Clock Source may also be
programmed on BRI T-loops or NT loops. For more information, see
page 75.
Values: Primary, Secondary, Timing Master
Notes:
1 Applies to Loop and T1 card types only.
2 Applies to T1 card types only.
3 Applies to PRI card types only, NI2 protocol only.
4 Applies to PRI and T1 card types only.
Note: There must be an EE-DTM installed if you want to program PRI or T1 trunk
lines. The EE-DTM is automatically disabled and re-enabled when you
change the card type. There is no need to manually enable and disable it.
Low line/loop High line/loop
Low line/loop and High line/loop settings are automatically assigned according to
the settings in the following table. Note that Buses 6 and 7 are reserved for the
Companion mobility option if Companion is included in the system.
Card Type
Bus 02
Bus 03
Bus 04
Bus 05
Bus 06
Bus 07
T1 (Card 1)
211-234
181-204
151-174
121-144
91-114
61-84
PRI (Card 1)
211-233
181-203
151-173
121-143
91-113
61-83
Loop (Card 1)
211-214
181-184
151-154
121-124
91-94
61-64
Loop (Card 2)
219-222
189-192
159-162
129-132
99-102
69-72
Loop (Card 3)
227-230
197-200
167-170
137-140
107-110
77-80
Loop (Card 4)
235-238
205-208
175-178
145-148
115-118
85-88
Note: PRI on a T1 carrier has 23 lines (for example, Bus 2 has L211-233). PRI on
an E1 carrier has 30 lines (for example, Bus 2 has L211-l240).
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
74 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
Disconnect timer
Disconnect timer (North America only) lets you specify the duration of an Open
Switch Interval (OSI) before a call on a supervised external line is considered
disconnected. This setting must match the setting for the line at the central office
(CO).
You must enable disconnect supervision by changing the Trunk mode attribute.
Under the Telephony Services sub-heading, choose Lines and Line/trunk Data. See
Trunk/line data on page 111 for more information.
Protocol
Enterprise Edge supports a number of different trunk protocols used by different
service providers and markets. Supported protocols are listed in the table below.
ISDN Service
Protocol
PRI-T1
NI-2, DMS100, DMS250, AT&T4ESS, SL-1
PRI-E1
QSIG, Euro, Sl-1
BRI (North America)
NI
BRI (Europe)
Euro, QSIG
Protocol type
When you select SL-1 protocol, an additional setting, Protocol type, appears.
Because SL-1 protocol is a private networking protocol, you have the option of
designating an Enterprise Edge node as a Network (Master). The default setting is
User (Slave). In public network configurations, the CO is generally considered the
Network side or Master.
Protocol
Type
NI-2, DMS100, DMS250, AT&T4ESS
Public protocols
SL-1 (premium feature)
Private protocol
NSF Extension
If you select the NI-2 protocol and you are using Call-by-Call services, you must
specify how Enterprise Edge should handle the NSF (Network Specific Facilities)
The table below summarizes the NSF Extension settings recommended for each
switch type.
Central Office
NSF Extension Setting
DMS100
None
Siemens ESWD, Lucent 5ESS
WATS
GTD5, DMS10
ALL
The Network Specific Facilities (NSF) information element is used to request a
particular service from the network.
When you select NONE, the NSF extension bit is not set for any service.
When you select WATS, the NSF extension bit is set for unbanded OUTWATS calls.
When you select ALL, the NSF extension is always set for all CbC services.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 75
B-channel selection sequence
B-channel selection sequence lets you select either Ascending Sequential or
Descending Sequential depending on your service provider. You should choose
the opposite setting of your service provider.
If all lines for two EE-DTMs (configured as PRI) are in the same PRI pool, then
both cards must be set to use the descending B-channel selection sequence. As a
result, the service provider must use ascending sequential sequence.
The B-channel selection sequence for BRI QSIG is always set to Descending on
Enterprise Edge, so it must set to Ascending on the service provider.
Clock Source
Clock Source lets you designate which of the systems’ Digital Trunk Modules
(EE-DTMs) obtains the timing reference from the network to be used for
synchronization.
Systems with digital interfaces need to synchronize to the network in order to
function. Synchronization is done in a hierarchical way, where each device (switch)
obtains the network clock from the device above it in the synchronization hierarchy
and passes the network clock to the device below it in the synchronization
hierarchy. The synchronization levels are referred to as strata. BRI modules can
also be used for the timing reference.
Enterprise Edge systems are stratum 4E equipment and are usually used as
termination points in a network.
For each EE-DTM, choose one of the following settings: Primary, Secondary, or
Timing Master.
Primary reference
The EE-DTM obtains the timing reference from the network and the system
synchronizes to it. This is the default value for the first EE-DTM in Enterprise Edge.
If the system is configured with an EE-DTM (configured as PRI), the setting should
be set to Primary.
Secondary reference
The EE-DTM acts as a standby reference. If there are excessive errors on the
primary T1 reference link, or the EE-DTM designated as primary reference fails,
the second EE-DTM will obtain the timing reference from the network to be used
for system synchronization. This is the default value for the second EE-DTM in
Enterprise Edge.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
76 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
Timing Master
The EE-DTM does not obtain timing from the network, but transmits the systems
timing to equipment connected to it.
Changing clock source may disconnect calls.
Changing the clock source for your system may cause your system to restart
itself, resulting in dropped calls. Choose a suitable time to change the clock
source and use the Page feature to inform users of possible service disruptions.
Tips
In most T1 network configurations, you need one EE-DTM configured as PRI
to act as a primary reference. The only application where you might not have a
PRI EE-DTM designated as a primary reference is in a network where your
Enterprise Edge system is connected back-to-back with another switch using a
T1 link or PRI link. If the other switch is loop-timed to your Enterprise Edge
system, your EE-DTM configured as PRI can be designated as a timing master.
If your Enterprise Edge system has two EE-DTMs, you cannot assign both
EE-DTMs as primary reference or both EE-DTMs as secondary reference.
You can only have one primary reference and one secondary reference per
system. You can have a T1 or PRI(T1) or PRI(E1) or BRI as clock source.
Call-by-call service selection
By default, incoming calls are routed based on the Called Party Number. The last
‘N’ digits of the called party number are used as Received Digits to find a target line
(where ‘N’ is the Received Number Length).
For example, the incoming calling party number is 800-555-1234. The received
digit number length is 4, and the result is 1234. These last four digits are used to
route the call.
Depending on the protocol and the service, alternate routing maps may be defined.
1. To change the incoming call routing for a service, select a different service
under Protocol:, Call by Call Routing, FX:
The first applicable service for the given protocol is displayed. In this
example, the service is FX.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 77
2. Change the mapping that is applied to incoming calls of this service type to
obtain the received digits. In all cases, the received digits are used to find a
target line or to activate Remote Access.
None: No mapping is applied. The last ‘N’ digits of the Called Party Number
are used as received digits. Note that if there is no called party number (may
occur with some FX calls) the call will ring at the incoming trunk’s Prime set.
All: Lets you define the received digits used for all calls with this service
type, regardless of the called party number or service identifier (SID). For this
option, all calls with this service type on this PRI will ring the same target
line.
Map table: Lets you associate different received digits with different calls of
this service type depending on the call party number and/or the service
identifier. Incoming calls that do not match any entry defined in the map table
will ring at the prime set. Depending on the service type and the protocol, you
may be able to map the called party number (By number) and the service
identifier (SID). The following table shows the different options.
Service
Protocol
FX
800
I-800
SDS
900
NI-2
SID
By number
N/A
N/A
N/A
DMS-100
SID
SID or By number N/A
N/A
N/A
DMS-250
SID
SID or By number N/A
N/A
SID or By number
4ESS
N/A
By number
By number By number By number
Note: This setting is available for T1 trunks configured as T1 E&M. See Trunk/
line data on page 111 for more information about configuring trunk types.
T1 Parameters (North America only)
The T1 Parameters heading appears for card types that have been configured as T1
or PRI. It lets you define a number of settings that are dependent on your T1 service
provider settings.
To program T1 Parameters:
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules, Bus 02-07, Modules on Bus,
Module 1, and T1 Parameters.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
78 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
2. Configure the T1 parameters according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
CO fail
Lets you select the carrier failure standard used by your T1 or PRI
service provider. Consult your T1 or PRI service provider for the proper
setting.
Values: TIA-547A or TR62411 (Default: TIA-547A)
Interface levels
Lets you define a loss plan setting. For more information, see page 78.
Values: ISDN or PSTN (Default: ISDN)
Framing
Lets you select the framing format used by your T1 or PRI service
provider: Extended Superframe (ESF) or Superframe (SF). Contact your
T1 or PRI service provider for the proper setting. (SF or Superframe is
sometimes known as D4.)
Values: ESF or SF (Default: ESF)
Internal CSU
Lets you turn the internal T1 channel service unit on or off. For more
information, see page 79.
Values: On or Off (Default: On)
CSU line build
Lets you set the gain level of the transmitted signal. This setting only
appears when the Internal CSU is set to On.
Values: 0, 7.5, or 15 dB (Default: 0)
DSX1 build
Lets you set the distance between Enterprise Edge and an external
channel service unit. This setting only appears when the Internal CSU is
set to Off. Contact your service provider for the proper settings.
Values: 000-100, 100-200, 200-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600, or
600-700 feet (Default: 000-100)
Line coding
Lets you define the encoding signals on a T1 line. Select the standard
used by your T1 service provider. Contact your T1 service provider for
the proper setting.
Values: B8ZS or AMI (Default: B8ZS)
Interface levels
Interface levels defaults to the ISDN loss plan setting.
Find out if your Enterprise Edge system is connected to a central office (CO) with
digital network loss treatment (ISDN I/F levels) or analog network loss treatment
(PSTN I/F levels) by checking with your telecommunications service provider.
The ISDN setting requires digital access lines (DAL) that have digital network loss
treatment. On a DAL network, it is the PBX, rather than the CO, that administers
the dB loss. DALs may have ISDN signaling or digital (such as T1 and so on)
signaling. The loss plan follows the Draft TIA-464-C loss plan, which uses a send
loudness rating (SLR) of 8 dB. To have DAL network loss treatment on a line with
digital signaling, you must contact your service provider.
The PSTN setting requires analog access lines (AAL) that have analog network loss
treatment and digital signaling. On an AAL(D) network, the CO administers the dB
loss.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 79
The loss plan follows the Draft TIA-464-C loss plan. The ISDN loss plan uses a
send loudness rating (SLR) of 8 dB and a receive loudness rating (RLR) of 2 dB.
The PSTN loss plan uses an SLR of 11 dB and an RLR of -3 dB. Choosing the
wrong setting may affect voice quality, either too loud or too soft.
Internal CSU
Internal CSU lets you turn the internal T1 channel service unit on or off. The
channel service unit gathers performance statistics for your T1 lines or PRI with
public interface. Contact your service provider for the proper settings.
Note: You must disable the EE-DTM before you can change this setting. See
Media Bay Module status on page 279 for details.
You can view the performance statistics for your T1 lines in Maintenance under the
CSU stats heading. If you set the internal CSU off, there must be an external CSU
connected to your T1 lines.
E1 Parameters (Europe)
Enterprise Edge does not provide E1 parameters. If your Enterprise Edge is
connecting to a network using E1 trunks, make sure CRC4 checking is enabled at
the other end.
Configuring a data module
Module 08 is reserved for a data module. The data module provides connectivity for
a soft router through Enterprise Edge from facilities such as T1 and BRI. The
remote soft router server only needs to be powered up and running for the feature
to be available. Enterprise Edge automatically configures the Module type as a Data
Module, sets the Data module type to Baystack, and sets the IP address. Baystack
is currently the only soft router supported on Enterprise Edge.
Viewing the data module settings
Use the following procedure to view the current settings for the data module.
1. Under Resources, Media Bay Modules, choose Bus 08.
Note: Before you can configure the data module for fixed access, you must first
configure an EE-DTM module as T1(see Module on page 72) and you must
set the trunk type to Fixed data channel (see Trunk/line data on page 111).
Programming the BayStack settings
When you select the BayStack data module, the following configuration settings
appear:
•
IP address
•
Switched access
•
Line assignment
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
80 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
•
Line pool access
•
Fixed access
IP address
This is the IP Address of the BayStack data module.
Switched access (PRI & BRI)
You can assign ISDN lines to the BayStack data module to provide:
•
normal data network access for the data module
•
dial-up backup and overflow bandwidth (additional channels or trunks) as
needed
The line assignment and line pool access settings are displayed in Switched access.
Line assignment
Use the following procedure to assign one or more lines to the BayStack data
module for incoming data transmission:
1. In Line Assignment, enter the number of the trunk or a target line you need to
assign to the BayStack data module.
The status of the line appears as assigned to the current data module,
unassigned, or assigned to another data module. You can assign a trunk
directly to the BayStack data module.
2. Select Unassigned or Assigned.
If the line is assigned to another data module, you can reassign it to the current
data module.
3. Enter the Dial-In Number for the line (up to 24 digits). The number must
match the Dial-In Number entered for the line and channel in BayStack data
module programming.
4. Assign additional lines to the BayStack data module as required.
Line pool access
Use the following procedure to give the BayStack data module access to a line pool
for outgoing data transmission:
1. The settings for access to the line pools are displayed in Line pool access.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources 81
2. Select the line pools in the list to provide access to the BayStack data module.
You must program line pool access when you select the switched access
settings for the BayStack data module. To use PRI line pools, program the
BayStack data module to use a destination code.
For more information about programming switched access, see the data module
Installer Guide.
Provision lines
The Provision lines heading lets you provision and deprovision ISDN lines. It also
lets you disable PRI channels.
Provision a T1 line
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules.
The window displays Buses 02 through 08.
2. Choose the bus (Bus 02 to 07) associated with the module you want to
provision.
Note: Bus 08 is reserved for a data module and has no lines to provision.
3. Expand the Modules on Bus heading.
The modules on this bus are displayed.
4. Choose the module (for example, Module 1) you want to provision.
5. Expand Provision lines.
All the available lines are displayed.
6. Click the line you want to provision.
7. From the Status box, click Provisioned.
Provision a PRI or BRI line
PRI lines are provisioned by default. BRI loops/lines are provisioned by default
only in the international markets.
Deprovision a line
Deprovisioning all of the lines on an EE-DTM does not disable the module.
Note: BRI loops/lines are deprovisioned by default in the North American market.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
82 Configuring Enterprise Edge Resources
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules.
The window displays Buses 02 through 08.
2. Choose the bus (Bus 02 to 07) associated with the module you want to
provision.
Note: Bus 08 is reserved for a data module and has no lines to provision.
3. Expand the Modules on Bus heading.
The modules on this bus are displayed.
4. Choose the module (for example, Module 1) you want to provision.
5. Expand Provision lines.
All the available lines are displayed.
6. Choose the line you want to deprovision.
7.
From the Status box, click Deprovisioned.
Disable a PRI Channel
PRI channels can be disabled; however, there is no association between a line
number and a B-channel. Disabling of a B-channel can be done when you have
fractional PRI. For more information, refer to Link Status on page 301.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
5
This chapter describes the programming procedures for the many Enterprise Edge
Services, from Telephony to Firewall Filters. Note that a number of other
programming steps are also required to get the system up and running.
Programming order
Program Enterprise Edge system components in the following order to ensure
optimum operation:
1. Media Bay Modules (hardware); see Media Bay Modules on page 69.
2. Lines; see Lines on page 108
3. Terminals & sets; see Terminals & sets on page 90
4. General Settings; see General on page 91
5. Companion (N.A. only), Hunt Groups, Hospitality; see Companion on page
177, Hunt groups on page 170, Hospitality on page 183
6. System Speed Dial and Telco Features; se e System speed dial on page 145,
Telco features on page 187
7. Passwords; see COS Passwords on page 160
Programming affects system operation.
Only a qualified system administrator should perform startup, installation and
maintenance programming. Many of the settings affect correct system operation.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
84 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Programming Services
This is the Services programming map:
Services
Telephony Services
DNS
IP Routing
Terminals & Sets
Lines
Loops
Restriction filters
Time & date
Call Routing
Scheduled Services
System speed dial
General settings
Hunt groups
Companion
Hospitality
Telco features
LAN1
LAN2
V90-1(ModemBackup)
V90-2(TivDialup)
IPX Routing
LAN1
LAN2
V90-1(ModemBackup)
V90-2(TivDialup)
SNMP
QoS
Filters
PortRanges
Voice Mail
Call Detail Recording
Report Params
Report Options
Market Params
Prefix Bins
Access Bin Settings
TAPI
TAPI Service Provider
TAPI Server Configuration
QoS monitor
Mean Opinion Score
Web cache
Net Link Manager
Alarm Service
NAT (Network Address
Translation))
Console Service
Server Configuration
General Information
Diagnostic Logging
VoIP Gateway
H323 Gateway
Remote Gateway
DHCP
LAN1
LAN2
V90-1(ModemBackup)
V90-2(TivDialup)
IP Firewall Filters
LAN1
LAN2
V90-1(ModemBackup)
V90-2(TivDialup)
LAN1
LAN2
You can configure Services attributes under the following headings in the Services
section of Unified Manager:
•
Telephony Services on page 87
•
Voice Mail on page 188
•
Call Detail Recording on page 188
•
TAPI on page 188
•
Console Service on page 189
•
VoIP Gateway on page 189
•
DHCP on page 192
•
DNS on page 199
•
IP Routing on page 200
•
IPX Routing on page 208
•
SNMP on page 216
•
QoS on page 220
•
QoS monitor on page 227
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 85
•
Web cache on page 228
•
Net Link Manager on page 229
•
Alarm Service on page 232
•
NAT (Network Address Translation) on page 232
•
IP Firewall Filters on page 235
Viewing Enterprise Edge Services
To access Services attributes from Unified Manager:
1. On the menu, click Group, then Services (or click Comprehensive to display
all options).
2. To expand the navigation tree, click the Enterprise Edge key ( ) and
Services. The Enterprise Edge Services table appears, with the name, status,
version, and description of the available services. This table also appears
when you select Enterprise Edge, System.
3. Click the Services key to expand the tree. The first listing is Telephony
Services.
Viewing all Services
To view the status, version and description of all Services:
1. Click on the System heading.
The Item, Resources and Services screens appear.
To Enable or Disable a Service
2. On the Configuration menu click Modify Services.
The Services dialog box appears.
3. Click Enabled or Disabled in the Status box.
4. Click Save.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
86 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Statuses
Status
Description
Enabled
Indicates that the resource or service is currently operating. When the
component is enabled, the component can assume any of its operational
statuses.
Disabled
The component is disabled from operation. None of the component’s
operational statuses are valid in this state.
Paused
The component is enabled and is running but is currently not accepting
additional service requests.
Up
This value is read-only. It indicates that the component is enabled and is
operating normally. For a component like a network interface, this means
the interface is enabled and connected to a valid link. For a service like
DHCP, it means that the service is enabled and is currently running
normally
When the current status is Up, setting it to Enabled or Continue (where
available), is a no-operation. Setting it to Disabled disables the service, by
shutting it down and then disabling it. Where available, setting it to Paused
pauses the service
Down
This value is read-only. This value indicates that the user has enabled the
component, and the component is unable to operate in an Up state because
of normal or abnormal, internal or external errors. For example, if a network
interface is in a Down state because of no connection to an actual physical
link, it is a normal, external error. If a service like DHCP service is in a
Down state because of internal errors, it is an abnormal, internal error.
When the current status is Down setting it to Enabled attempts to bring it to
'Up' state again. In an error still exists it may stay at a Down state. Setting it
to Disabled disables the service. Where available, setting it to a Paused or
continued state fail as the service is not yet running.
Enabled
This value is write-only. This value never appears when read. For a service
that is enabled, one of its operational statuses (that is, Up or Down) appears
when its Status field is read.
When this value is set, it indicates that the user wants to enable the
corresponding component and bring it to an Up state. It is probable that the
first happens. The second action depends on the component. For a network
interface, the Up state does not happen unless user connects a link to the
interface. For a service this may not happen only if the system encounters
an error of some kind during the requested action.
Disabled
This value can be either read or set. When read, this indicates that the
component is disabled from operation. When set, it indicates the same, in
addition to taking the component to a Down state before disabling.
Paused
This value can be either read or set. When read, this indicates that the
service is enabled and is given the command to pause. When set, it indicates
the same, pausing the service further.
Continue
This value can only be set. It can be set only when the service in a Paused
state. It resumes paused service.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 87
Telephony Services
This section describes the procedures to configure Enterprise Edge Telephony
Services, found under the Services heading in Unified Manager.
Telephony Services allows you to program and manage all the voice components
associated with Enterprise Edge. You can set up lines and trunks, define settings for
individual telephones, and customize your telephone network to suit your
requirements. From Unified Manager, expand Services and Telephony Services to
view the subheadings.
The table below summarizes the Telephony Services subheadings. Note that
provisioning and diagnostics information is in Maintenance on page 259.
Note: To jump to any section for more information, click the blue, underlined text.
The information is automatically displayed.
Terminals & sets
Allows you to assign settings to each telephone.
Lines
Allows you to assign settings to each trunk and target line.
Loops
Allows you to configure settings for BRI loops.
Restriction filters
Allows you to apply restriction filters for external calls.
Time & date
Allows you to set the display format for both date and time.
Call Routing
Allows you to define how calls are routed on your Enterprise Edge
system.
Scheduled Services
Allows you to create services, such as night ringing, routing and
restrictions, for making external calls.
System speed dial
Allows you to create speed dial codes that can be used by any
telephone in the system.
General Settings
Allows you to change system-wide settings.
Hunt groups
Allows you to create and manage hunt groups.
Companion
Allows you to assign settings for portable telephones.
Hospitality
Allows you to assign Hospitality settings.
Telco features
Allows you to assign settings for external voice message services.
When you select Telephony Services, the Tools menu becomes active. The Tools
menu allows you access to the Backup and Restore tool. For more information on
using the Backup and Restore tool, refer to Backup and restore on page 260.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
88 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
The following illustration shows an overview of the Telephony Services
programming that is accessible through Unified Manager.
Telephony Services
Terminals & sets
DN 221-528
General
Line access
Capabilities
User preferences
Restrictions
Telco features
Lines
Line 001-364
General
Trunk/line data
Restrictions
Line restrictions
Remote restrictions
Module 1
Loops
Loop nnn
SPIDs
Restriction filters
Filter 00-99
Restrictions
Overrides
System speed dial
Speed dial # 01-70
General Settings
Feature settings
Call log space
Timers
Direct dial
Set 1-5
CAP assignment
CAP 1-5
Dialing plan
Private network
Public network
Access codes
Line pool codes
Carrier codes
Remote access packages
Package 00-15
COS Passwords
COS 00-99
DN lengths
CbC limits
Pool
Release reasons
Network Services
ETSI
Hunt groups
Time & date
Call Routing
Routes
Route 000-xxx
Destination codes
Scheduled Services
Ringing service
Ring groups
Schedules
Restriction service
Routing Service
Common Settings
Schedule names
Schedule times
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
Hunt group 01-30
Members
Line assignment
Companion
Registration
Radio data
Hospitality
Set/room settings
Call permissions
Alarm data
Telco features
Voice message center numbers
Outgoing name and number
blocking (ONN)
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 89
Enhanced 911 (E911) Configuration
Government rules vary for support of Enhanced 911 (E911) dialing service by
Customer Premises Equipment. Legislation may require that the Customer
Premises Equipment give a more precise location of the source of a 911 call than
the billing address of the central office line. Consult your service provider about the
laws and regulations.
Use the following configuration rules when installing the Enterprise Edge system,
to assure compliance with local regulations:
•
When equipped with PRI trunks, Enterprise Edge can deliver the Calling Line
ID of a telephone dialing 911 through the Public Switched Telephone Network,
if the proper programming has been implemented and PRI trunk service has
been installed by the service provider. If you are using ISDN PRI, implement
OLI programming and Business Name programming to add the Set ID to the
CLASS information.
•
By default, Restriction Filter 02 is assigned to all sets on startup. There are no
restrictions applied in Restriction Filters 02-99. Restriction Filter 01 has
restrictions, but 911 is an Exception for this filter. For information on how to
change the Restrictions, refer to Restrictions on page 103.
•
When using other trunk interfaces, you can assign separate line pools to groups
of telephones in different areas (for example, in different buildings, floors or
sections).
•
Be careful when using the Set Relocation feature. You may have to reprogram
the line pool access to send the right location on 911 calls.
•
Configure the 911 destination code to dial out over a Normal Schedule in all
applicable Service Modes, as this is the default route should any other
programmed routing attempts fail. When using PRI interfaces, make sure all
sets can use the PRI line pool that the Normal Schedule route uses.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
90 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Terminals & sets
The Terminals & sets heading allows you to assign settings to each telephone. The
following shows a detailed view of the Terminals & sets navigation tree.
Terminals & sets
DN 221-528
General
Name
DN type
Control set
Call log passwords
Line access
Prime line
Intercom keys
OLI number
Line assignment
(Line 001)
Appearance type
Call log set
Vmsg set
Line pool access
Pool A
Answer DNs
Terminals & sets (cont’d)
User preferences
Model
Call log options
Dialing options
Language
Contrast
Ring type
Button programming
User speed dial
Restrictions
Set restrictions
Set lock
Allow last number
Allow saved number
Allow link
Schedules
Line/set restrictions
Capabilities
DND on busy
Handsfree
HF answerback
Pickup group
Page zone
Paging
Direct dial
Priority call
Aux ringer
Allow redirect
Redirect ring
Call forward
Fwd no answer to
Fwd no answer delay
Fwd on busy to
Hotline
Type
ATA settings
ATA answer timer
ATA use
Msg indicate
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
Telco features
First display
Auto called ID
Set log space
Available log space
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 91
Copying settings from one telephone set to another
The Copy command allows you to duplicate programming for a telephone and
apply it to another telephone, a range of telephones or all the telephones on the
system.
To copy telephone settings:
1.
Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528) with the settings you want to copy.
If necessary, choose a subheading to refine your selection.
3. On the Edit menu, click Copy.
4. Choose the data type you want to copy, System data or System+user data.
5. Click Single, Range or All from the Copy type list.
6. Type the DN number of the set or the range of sets (nnn-nnn) where you want
to copy the settings. You do not have to fill in this box if you chose All in the
Copy type list.
7. Click the OK button.
General
The General attributes allows you to assign the name, the DN type, a control set,
and the Call log password for a set.
Name
The default name for a telephone is its DN. You can change it to a more descriptive
name.
To assign a name to a telephone:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Click General.
4. In the Name box, type a name up to seven characters, and then press Enter.
Note: The name can be a combination of letters and numbers.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
92 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
DN type
The DN type attribute allows you to choose the set type: ISDN set or portable set.
For Enterprise Edge desk sets, you can view but you cannot change the DN type.
To change the DN type:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Click the General heading.
4. Click a DN type: ISDN or Portable.
Note: In North America, DNs 469 to 500 are Portable sets and DNs 501 to
528 are ISDN sets by default.
Control set
The Control set attribute allows you to define a DN that will act as a control set. By
default, DN 221 is the control set for all telephone sets (DNs). A control set can turn
Scheduled Services, such as Restriction Service on and off for the telephones
assigned to it. For more information about services, see Scheduled Services on page
138.
You can assign several control sets for your system but you can only assign one
control set per DN.
Tips
You must program external lines and telephones with a control set to use the
three kinds of Scheduled Services: Ringing, Restriction, and Routing Services.
The recommendation is to have one control set for all lines and a different
control set for all telephones (DNs).
You can turn on a service manually or automatically for all telephones
controlled by a given control set, but you cannot combine schedules. In other
words, a service can only be active as normal service or one of the six
schedules at any one time. You can have several schedules active, as long as
they are using different services.
To assign a control set to a DN:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Click General.
4. In the Control set box, type the DN number and press Enter, or click None.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 93
Call log passwords
Call log passwords setting allows you to clear an individual’s Call log password.
This is useful if someone forgets the password and you need to reset it. Select the
set DN and leave the box blank or enter a new password. The user can then enter a
new password from that DN.
To create or reset a call log password:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Click on the General heading.
4. Type a 4-digit password in the Call log passwords box, or leave it blank, and
press Enter.
Line access
Line access allows you to assign lines to individual telephones. To save time, you
can copy the Line access settings to other telephones once you have finished
programming the settings for one telephone.
Note: PRI lines must be set to Auto Answer; they cannot be Manual Answer.
Tips
When you assign line access for BRI loops make sure that the programming
for the two lines on a BRI loop is identical. For example, if line 001 on BRI
loop 201 appears at a DN, line 002 on the same loop should appear at the DN
as well.
In general, you do not assign, auto-answer loop start trunks and auto-answer
BRI trunks to telephones. If assigned, they are for monitoring incoming call
usage, or for making outgoing calls.
To assign a line to a telephone:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets, DN. Click on the
Line access heading.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
94 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
2. Configure line access according to the table:
Attribute
Description
Prime line
You can define the first line that a telephone selects when you make a call
from an Enterprise Edge telephone. PRI pools are not valid selections for a
Prime line.
Note: An assigned prime line is not associated with the assignment of a
prime telephone.
Values: None, Pool (A to O), I/C (intercom), or Line: (Default: None)
Intercom keys
You can assign the number of intercom buttons to a telephone. Intercom
buttons provide a telephone with access to internal and external lines, and
line pools. Refer to Intercom keys on page 94.
Values: 0 to 8 (Default: 2)
OLI number
You can define the digits used for originating line identification number
(OLI). Refer to OLI number on page 95.
Values: up to 24 digits (Default: blank)
You must assign an external line to the telephone in Line assignment (see Line
assignment on page 95) before you can assign the line as the prime line to the
telephone. You must assign a line pool to the telephone in Line pool access (see
Line pool access on page 97) before you can assign a line pool as the prime line to
the telephone. A target line cannot be a prime line for a telephone because it is
incoming-only.
Note: Do not assign a T1 DID line as the prime line for a telephone. If assigned,
the system treats it as if there is no prime line. The set displays the message
Select a line when you lift the receiver.
When you assign a line pool as a prime line, the system searches automatically for
an idle line in the pool. For more information, see Line type on page 116.
3. Choose the Prime line for this DN (Line 001, Pool A, None, I/C). The default
is I/C.
Intercom keys
The Intercom keys attribute assigns the number of intercom keys. Intercom keys
provide a telephone with access to internal and external lines, and line pools.
When you assign each Intercom key during programming, it automatically appears
on the telephone. The intercom keys appear on the lower-right button, or one key
above if the Handsfree/Mute feature appears on the telephone.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 95
When you assign the number of Intercom keys:
•
A telephone requires two intercom buttons to be able to establish a conference
call with two other Enterprise Edge telephones.
•
You require only one intercom button if the button is used to make and receive
internal calls, and to access line pools. You require two intercom keys for a
telephone with several lines assigned to Ring only.
•
The M7100 telephone can have up to eight intercom buttons although the
telephone has one programmable button.
4. Choose the number of Intercom keys you want to assign to this DN (0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8). The default is 2.
OLI number
The originating line identification number (OLI) setting allows you to specify the
number that displays on the telephone you are calling.
Enter the digits used for the originating line identification number (OLI).When you
make an outgoing call on a BRI line, the Call Display information that appears on
the telephone you are calling is usually based on the first Network DN associated
with the line.
If the line has more than one Network DN, you can program a DN to use a Network
DN other than the first one for the outgoing Call Display information. When you
program the alternate Network DN as the ten-digit outgoing line identification
(OLI) number, and you make a call using the line associated with the Network DN,
the OLI number appears on the telephone you are calling.
If an outgoing call is made using a line that is not associated with the Network DN
number used as the OLI number, the network ignores the number; the default Call
Display information (the first or only Network DN associated with the line)
appears.
5. Enter the OLI number in the box. The default is blank. OLI numbers for
North America are ten digits.
Line assignment
The Line assignment setting allows you to assign physical trunks and target lines to
each telephone. You can assign and remove target lines the same as other lines. You
can also assign multiple target lines across a group of sets in a Broadcast ring group.
To assign a trunk or target line to a telephone:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528) that you want to assign to a trunk or
line.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
96 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
3. Choose Line access. Click on the Line assignment heading.
4. Click the Add button above the navigation tree.
5. Type a line number in the Line box.
6. Click the Save button.
7. Click on the Line nnn you just created.
Appearance type
Select how a call on this line shows at the set.
8. In the DN nnn-Line nnn window, choose the line Appearance type. Ring
only, Appear&Ring, or Appear only. The default is Unassigned.
Note: Enterprise Edge will not support a mixture of Appear only and Ring only
appearances for the same line. If you choose Appear&Ring or Appear
only, you can have as many simultaneous DID calls as there are target line
key appearances. If you choose Ring only, you can have as many
simultaneous DID calls as you have intercom keys.
Call log set
The Call log set attribute allows you to specify if the telephone automatically logs
Call Display information for calls on an external line. The line must appear on that
telephone, but it does not have to be a ringing line.
9. Click Y or N to enable call logging. The default is N.
Vmsg (Voice Message) set
If you subscribe to an external voice message service, you can access that service
through your Enterprise Edge system. The voice message setting controls if the
indicator shows on a telephone for voice message waiting on a particular line. The
line must appear on that telephone.
10. Click Y or N to enable voice message waiting indicator. The default is N.
To find out if your voice message service works with Enterprise Edge, or if you
have any problems with your service, contact your voice message service provider.
PRI Lines
Users cannot access PRI lines directly through line appearances or line pools.
To dial outgoing PRI calls use the intercom button and enter a routing code.
When an EE-DTM changes to PRI, the system automatically removes all existing
line appearances for that module.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 97
The Enterprise Edge Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA 2), BRI S-terminals, or a
portable cannot process more than 2 simultaneous calls.
There is a suggested limit of 4 keys per set. You can program more than 4 keys on
a set by programming less than 4 on other sets. For instance, you might program 20
keys on a receptionist set equipped with a CAP.
Tips
In general, you do not assign auto-answer loop start trunks, auto-answer T1
E&M trunks and T1 DID trunks to telephones. If assigned, they are used for
monitoring incoming call usage, or for making outgoing calls (auto-answer
loop start and T1 E&M trunks).
You cannot assign a line that is private to another telephone.
Each line assigned to appear at a telephone must appear at a button with an
indicator on that telephone. The maximum number of line buttons is 8 for the
M7208 telephone, 10 for the M7310 telephone, and 24 for the M7324
telephone.
If you set a line to Ring only, incoming calls appear on an intercom button.
A central answering position (CAP), with one or two CAP modules, can
provide extra line buttons if more than 24 lines are assigned to the CAP. The
remaining lines appear at buttons on the CAP module.
The M7100 telephone is an exception; it has no line buttons and can be
assigned any number of lines. Make sure that lines assigned to an M7100
telephone are assigned to ring; otherwise, you cannot detect incoming calls on
the lines.
Line pool access
The Line pool access setting allows a telephone to access one or more of the fifteen
line pools available (A to O). Six exclusive line pools (PRI-A to PRI-F) are
available for PRI lines. Only three are currently supported.
Only PRI or BRI-QSIG lines can belong to a PRI pool. PRI lines cannot belong to
Line Pools A through O, and all lines on a single EE-DTM (PRI) belong to the same
pool. Lines from multiple EE-DTM (PRI) can belong to the same pool if they are
configured with the same protocol. You can assign PRI lines to pools with the Line
type setting.
To assign a line pool to a telephone:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Line access, Line pool access.
4. Click the Add button above the navigation tree.
5. Enter a letter from A to O.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
98 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
6. Click the Save button.
The set can now access any line in that line pool.
Answer DNs
You can program a telephone to provide call alerting and call answering for other
telephones. The DNs of the other telephones are referred to as Answer DNs.
Every Answer DN you assign to the telephone automatically designates an Answer
button with an indicator to the telephone. Label the buttons to identify the telephone
with its name or DN. More than one telephone can have an Answer button for the
same DN.
You can assign a maximum number of eight Answer DNs to a set.
To create an answer DN on a telephone:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Line access. Click on the Answer DNs heading.
4. Click the Add button above the navigation tree.
5. Type the Answer DN.
6. Click the Save button.
Answer type
1. Select the newly created Answer DN.
2. Choose the Answer type: Appr&Ring, or Appr only. The default is
Appr&Ring.
Capabilities
The Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual
telephones and how they receive calls.
To define telephone capabilities:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Click on the Capabilities heading.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 99
4. Configure Capabilities settings according to the table:
Attribute
Description
DND on busy
Defines whether an incoming call rings if you are already on another call.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Handsfree
Defines whether Handsfree is available to a telephone.
Values: Auto, Standard, None (Default: None)
HF answerback
Defines whether you can automatically answer a voice call without lifting
the receiver or pressing the Handsfree/Mute button.
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
Pickup group
Assigns this telephone to a pickup group.
Values: None, 1 to 9 (Default: None)
Page zone
Assign this telephone to page zone.
Values: None, 1 to 6 (Default: 1)
Paging
Defines whether you can make paging announcements from this
telephone.
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
Direct dial
Defines whether you can call the Direct-dial telephone from this telephone
using the Direct-dial digit.
Values: Set 1 to Set 5, None (Default: Set 1)
Priority call
Defines whether this telephone can interrupt calls or override Do Not
Disturb at another telephone.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Aux ringer
Defines whether an auxiliary ringer (if installed) rings for incoming calls
at this telephone.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Allow redirect
Defines whether this telephone can redirect its lines.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Redirect ring
Defines whether the telephone rings briefly when a call on one of its lines
is redirected by the Line Redirection feature (ƒ°›).
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
Call forward
The Call forward setting allows you to define how unanswered calls are handled or
when the line is busy.
To program call forward:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Capabilities, click on the Call forward heading.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
100 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
4. Configure Call Forward according to the table:
Attribute
Description
Fwd no answer to You can redirect all incoming calls when this telephone does not answer.
Values: up to 24 digits (Default: blank)
Fwd no answer
delay1
You can define the number of rings before the system forwards an
unanswered call.
Values: 2, 3, 4, 6, 10 (Default: 4)
Fwd on busy to
You can redirect all incoming calls when this telephone is busy with
another call.
Values: up to 24 digits (Default: blank)
Notes:
1 Appears after you have entered a call forward no answer number and pressed
Enter.
Hotline
The Hotline setting allows you to define a telephone number that automatically
dials when you lift the receiver or press the Handsfree/Mute button on a set. You
can define an internal or external number.
To define an internal Hotline telephone number:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Capabilities. Click on the Hotline heading.
4. Click Internal, and then press Enter.
5. In the Internal # box, choose Direct dial set or DN:, and then type the DN
number (up to 3 digits).
To define an external number as a hotline:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Capabilities. Click on the Hotline heading.
4. Click External.
5. In the External # box, type the telephone number (up to 24 digits).
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 101
6. Click a Facility value: Use line nnn, Use prime line, Pool code, Use routing
table.
Note: For Pool, type a letter from A to O and then press Enter. For Use line,
type a number from 001 to 238, and then press Enter. You cannot use
Target lines as the facility.
ATA settings
The ATA settings allow you to define general settings for analog terminal adapters.
To configure ATA settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Capabilities. Click on the ATA settings heading.
4. Configure ATA settings according to the table:
Attribute
Description
ATA answer
timer
Select the length of delay between the last digit you dial and when the
Enterprise Edge ATA 2 device is ready to receive DTMF tone.
Values: 3, 5, 7, 10 (Default: 7)
ATA use
Select the location of the Enterprise Edge ATA 2.
Values: On site, Off site (Default: Off site)
Msg Indicate
Select the type of message indicator. Tone sends a Message Tone through
the set’s receiver and Lamp turns on the set’s Message Lamp when you
receive a message.
Values: None, Tone, Lamp (Default: None)
Tips
If you have a modem or fax machine keep the ATA answer timer delay short.
If a call to a fax machine or modem cannot connect, try shortening the delay. If
an individual is dialing the number for a fax machine or modem, you may want
to make the delay a little longer.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
102 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
User preferences
The User preferences settings allow you to do the same programming that users can
do at their telephones. If the attached set is not an Enterprise Edge set, these options
are not available.
To configure User preferences settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Click on the User preferences heading.
4. Configure User preferences settings according to the table:
Setting
Description
Model
Pre-program the model of Enterprise Edge set that will use this DN
(M7310). You cannot change the model if the set is already attached.
Call log options
Select whether the set will:
Log all calls, No autologging, No one answered or Unanswered by
me.
Dialing options
Select Standard dial, Pre-dial or Automatic dial.
Language
Choose the display language: English, French or Spanish.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the display 1, 2, 3,4, 5.....9
Ring type
Select a ring type 1, 2, 3, 4
Button programming
The Button programming heading allows you to program the telephone buttons
with internal and external autodialers and programmed feature keys.
1. Click on the key to expand the User preferences heading.
2. Click on the Button programming heading.
The list of available buttons expands.
3. Click on the button you want to program.
4. In the Type box, choose External autodial, Feature, Blank, or Internal
autodial.
5. Press Enter to refresh the screen.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 103
External autodial
The Value and External # boxes appear.
6. In the Value box, choose the line for the external autodial.
7. In the External # box, type the telephone number.
Feature
The Value box appears.
8. In the Value box, choose the Feature code you want to program on this
button.
Internal autodial
The Value and Internal # boxes appear.
9. In the Value box, choose the line for the internal autodial.
10. In the Internal # box, type the DN.
User speed dials
1. Click on the key to expand the User preferences heading.
2. Click on the User speed dials heading.
3. Click the Add button above the navigation tree.
The Add User speed dials screen appears.
4. In the Speed dial # box, type in the internal or external telephone number.
Restrictions
The Restrictions settings prevent you from making certain kinds of calls from a
telephone or from lines that are available at the telephone. You can also restrict
some features.
When you finish programming restriction settings for one telephone, you can copy
those settings to other telephones.
To configure Restrictions settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Restrictions. Click on the Set restrictions heading.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
104 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Set restrictions
The Set restrictions window Allows you to assign a restriction filter to a telephone
to prevent certain numbers from being dialed from that telephone, and prevent the
use of certain features.
Set lock
You can adjust the amount of personal programming and customizing that can be
done at a telephone.
4. Select the setting: None, Partial, or Full.
None allows you access to all features on your telephone.
Partial prevents:
•
•
•
•
•
programming autodial buttons
programming user speed dial numbers
programming feature buttons
moving line buttons
changing the display language
• changing dialing modes (Automatic Dial,
Pre-Dial, and Standard Dial)
• using Voice Call Deny
• saving a number with Saved Number
Redial
Full, in addition to the restrictions outlined for Partial lock, prevents:
•
•
•
•
changing Background Music
changing Privacy
changing Do Not Disturb
using Ring Again
•
•
•
•
using Call Forward all calls
using Send Message
using Trunk Answer
activating Services
Allow last number
5. Click Y or N to allow a set to use the Last Number Redial feature.
Allow saved number
6. Click Y or N to allow a set to use the Saved Number Redial feature.
Allow link
7. Click Y or N to allow a set to use the Link feature (a host signaling option).
Schedules
You can assign a different restriction filter for normal service and for each of six
schedules. See Scheduled Services on page 138 for more information about the
schedules.
To configure Restrictions Schedules settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 105
3. Choose Restrictions, Set restrictions, Schedules.
4. Click on the schedule you want to program. For example, Evening.
5. In the Use filter box, type in the number of the restriction filter you want to
assign to the set.
Schedule
Restriction filter
Normal
02
Schedule 1 (Night)
11
Schedule 2 (Evening)
12
Schedule 3 (Lunch)
13
Schedule 4
00
Schedule 5
00
Schedule 6
00
For example, if you enter a set of restrictions for filter 11, the restrictions will
automatically apply for the Night schedule.
Line/set restrictions
The Line/set restrictions attributes allows you to assign a restriction filter to a
specific line for outgoing calls at a specific telephone. This type of filter replaces
any line or set restriction filters that might otherwise apply. The Line/set restrictions
restricts the numbers you can dial on a line, but only from that telephone. The same
line on another telephone can have different restrictions.
As with set restrictions, you can apply a different line restriction for normal service
and for each of six schedules.
To configure Line/set restrictions settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Restrictions, Line/set restrictions.
4. Click on the Line number you want to configure.
The list of schedules expands on the navigation tree.
5. Click on the schedule name that you want to configure. For example, Night.
The Night schedule window appears.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
106 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
6. In the Use filter box, choose None or Filter:. Type the number you want to
assign as the line/set restriction for this schedule and press the Enter
key.There are no default line/set restrictions.
Tips
A maximum of 255 line/set restrictions may be applied to lines at telephones.
If you assign a line/set restriction to a line at a particular telephone, it overrides
any line restrictions or set restrictions that might otherwise apply.
If no line/set restrictions are defined, the numbers are checked against the set
restrictions and the line restrictions, if either of these have been defined. The
numbers may be rejected by either restriction.
Telco features
The Telco features settings program the way Enterprise Edge works with public
network or other outside features and services. Enterprise Edge works with two of
these services: Call Display and an external voice message service.
When you finished programming Telco features settings for one telephone, you can
copy those settings to other telephones.
To configure Telco features settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets.
2. Click the telephone set (DN 221-528).
3. Choose Telco features.
Feature assignment
If you subscribe to Call Display services (often called Caller ID), external calls are
identified on the display. You may also have a message indicator from an external
voice mail service show on the set’s display. Analog Call Display services are
available with an EE-CTM. You can customize how this information is used.
PRI also provides the Caller ID.
4. Select the number of the line you want to program with Feature settings.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 107
First display
Depending on the services you subscribe to, Call Display information may contain
the number of the caller, the name of the line in your Enterprise Edge system that
the call is on, or both. For each telephone, you can determine what information
displays first.
5. Select the setting: Name, Number or Line.
Tips
The Call Information feature displays and toggles between the name and line
number for Call Display information.
You may see Unknown number on the display if the information is not
available from your telephone company. You may see Private number on the
display if the caller blocks that information.
Auto called ID
The Auto called ID setting allows you to see the extension number and name on
your display, of the set you call. The Auto called ID set for target lines is the same
set that has appearance on that target line.
6. Click Y or N to enable Auto called ID.
Set log space
The Log space settings determines the number of items that can be stored in the Call
log for each telephone. There is no log space assigned by default.
7. Enter an amount. Available log space indicates the amount of space
remaining.
Tips
There must be space available in the log pool in order for you to add space to a
Call log. The maximum number of spaces available is 600.
You can allocate system-wide log space in Call log space under General
settings. If you want to allocate the same log space to all telephones, use the
Call log space setting instead.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
108 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Lines
The Lines heading allows you to assign attributes for each line. The following
illustration shows a detailed view of the Lines programming map.
Note: Lines 001 to 014 are for VoIP trunks. Lines 241 to 364 for target lines.
Lines
Line 001-364
General
Name
Control set
Use remote package
Trunk/line data
Trunk type
Line type
Dial mode
Received number
If busy
Prime set
CLID set
Auto privacy
Trunk mode
Answer mode
Answer with DISA
Link at CO
Use auxiliary ringer
Full autohold
Loss package
Signalling
ANI number
DNIS number
Restrictions
Line restrictions
Remote Restrictions
Telco features
Voice message center numbers
Center 1 - 5
To program settings for a line, click the line number (Line 001-364) of the line and
click the key beside the selected line number to display the programming sublevels.
Copying settings from one line to another
The Copy commands allows you to duplicate programming for a line and apply it
to another line or a range of lines.
When you copy data from a physical trunk to a target line (or the other way around),
only the data in common is copied. For example, copying a target line to a T1 E&M
trunk copies only the Line data settings because there are no Trunk data settings for
a target line.
Note: You cannot copy programming between lines on different types of modules.
The Received number of a target line is a unique number and cannot be
copied.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 109
To copy line settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines.
2. Click the line (Line 001-364) from which you want to copy settings. If
necessary, choose a subheading to refine your selection.
3. On the Edit menu, click Copy.
4. Click Single or Range from the Copy type list.
5. In the Copy to box, type the line number or the start and end line numbers of
the range of lines where you want to copy the settings.
6. Click the OK button.
General
The General heading allows you to assign the name, a control set, and a remote
package for a line.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines.
2. Choose the line number (Line 001- Line 364).
3. Click General.
Name
The default name for a line is “Line” and its three-digit number (for example, Line
001), but you can change it to any combination of letters and numbers to a
maximum length of seven characters.
To change the name of a line:
4. In the Name box, type a name (up to seven characters) and then press Enter.
Control set
The Control set attribute allows you to define a DN that acts as a control set for a
line. By default, DN 221 is the control set for all lines. A control set turns Scheduled
Services on and off for the lines assigned to it. For more information about services,
see Scheduled Services on page 138.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
110 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
You can assign several control sets for your system but you can only assign one
control set per line.
Tips
External lines and telephones must be programmed with a control set to use the
three kinds of Scheduled Services: Ringing, Restriction, and Routing Services.
One recommendation is to have one control set for all lines and a different
control set for all telephones.
You can turn on a service manually or automatically for all external lines
controlled by a given control set, but you cannot combine schedules. In other
words, a service can only be active as normal service or one of the six
schedules at any one time. You can have several schedules active, as long as
they are using different services.
5. In the Control set box, type the DN number and press Enter, or click None.
Use remote package
The Use remote package attribute allows you to define whether remote users can
access line pools or not. The table below shows the remote package settings.
Remote package 00 is the default setting for the Use remote package setting. It
permits no access to line pools. Unlike packages 01 to 15, you cannot change
package 00. You can define up to 15 remote access packages (01 to 15). You can
also copy settings from one remote package to another.
Parameter
PBX
Package 00
Prohibits remote access to line pools, Page, remote monitoring and
administration. Cannot be changed.
Package 01
Line pool access
Packages 02 - 15
Line pool access
DID
Y for Pool A
N for Pools B to O and PRI-A to PRI-F
N for Pools A to O and PRI-A to PRI-F
To assign a remote package:
6. In the Use remote package box, type the two-digit remote package number,
and then press Enter.
Tips
The line pool access display shows an alphabetic line pool identifier, followed
by a numeric line pool access code in brackets, for example, Pool A (9):N. If
no access code has been identified, there is nothing between the brackets, for
example Pool A ( ):N. The line pool access code can be programmed under
Terminals & sets.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 111
Trunk/line data
The Trunk/line data attributes allow you to program settings for lines that affect
how Enterprise Edge communicates with other switches, and allows you to
determine how lines (including target lines) are used in Enterprise Edge.
To configure a trunk or line:
1.
Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines, Line nnn.
2. Click on the Trunk/line data heading.
3. If you have a T1 module, select a trunk type: Loop, E&M, DID, Ground,
or Fixed data channel.
Any other module shows the trunk type but you cannot change this setting.
For more information about trunk types, see Trunk type on page 115.
Note: You can only change the trunk type setting for lines connected to an
T1 module. All other lines are automatically configured based on the
type of hardware module present. VoIP is automatically assigned as
the trunk type to Lines 001 to 014 and cannot be changed.
Trunk/line data settings vary depending on the type of trunk that has been
programmed and the hardware to which the trunk is connected. The following
table lists the options that are available for each trunk type. A checkmark
indicates that the option is present.
Trunk type
Loop
Loop
Ground DID
start
start
start
Digital
Analog Digital Digital
E&M
BRI-ST
Digital
PRI
lines
Target VoIP
lines
DASS2
DPNSS
√
√
√
√
√
√
Line type
√
√
√
√
Dial mode
√
√
√
√
√
—
—
—
—
—
—
Received # —
—
—
—
—
—
—
√
—
√
—
If busy
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
√
—
√
—
Prime set
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
CLID set
√
√
—
—
√
√
—
√
—
√
√
Auto
privacy
√
√
√
√
√
√
—
—
√
—
√
Trunk
mode
√
√
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Answer
mode
√
√
√
—
√
√
—
—
—
—
√
Answer
with DISA
√
√
√
—
√
√
—
—
—
—
—
Link at CO √
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
112 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Trunk type
Loop
Loop
Ground DID
start
start
start
Digital
Analog Digital Digital
E&M
BRI-ST
Digital
PRI
lines
Target VoIP
lines
DASS2
DPNSS
Use
auxiliary
ringer
√
√
√
√
√
√
—
√
√
√
√
Full
autohold
√
√
—
—
—
√
—
—
√
—
√
Loss
package
√
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Signal
—
—
—
√
√
—
—
—
—
—
—
ANI
Number
—
—
—
√
√
—
—
—
—
—
—
DNIS
Number
—
—
—
—
√
—
—
—
—
—
—
4. Configure the line settings according to the following table (again, available
option fields will depend on the line type selected):
Attribute
Description
Line type
Define how the line is used in relation to other lines in the system.
• A Public line can be accessed by more than one telephone.
•
A Private line can be assigned only to one telephone and
the prime telephone for that line. Enter the internal number
of the telephone.
•
Pool assigns the line to one of the 15 line pools. If a line is
assigned to a line pool, but is not assigned to any
telephone, that line is available only for outgoing calls.
Values: Public, Private to:, Pool A to O, PRI-A to PRI-F
(Default): Public
For more information and Tips, refer to Line type on page 116.
Dial mode
Specify whether the system uses dual tone multifrequency
(DTMF) or pulse signalling on the trunk.
Tone does not appear if Signalling is set to Immediate (T1 DID
&T1 E&M trunk types only).
Values: Pulse, Tone (Default: Tone)
If busy
Define whether a caller gets a busy tone or the call forwards to the
prime set when the target line is busy. Busy tone only works for
PRI trunks.
Values: To Prime, Busy Tone
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 113
Attribute
Description
Prime set
Assign a telephone to provide backup answering for calls on the
line. For an Auto Answer line, calls will be redirected if the
received number is invalid or the target line is busy, and if the ‘If
busy’ parameter is set ‘To prime’.
Each line can be assigned only one prime set.
Values: DN:, None (Default: DN 221)
CLID set
Specify what sets are capable of using the Call Line Identifier
(CLID) feature.
Values: DN:, None (Default: None)
Auto privacy
Define whether one Enterprise Edge user can select a line in use at
another telephone to join an existing call.
Tips
Users can change a line’s privacy setting for an individual call
using the Privacy feature (ƒ°‹).
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
Trunk mode
Define whether disconnect supervision, also referred to as loop
supervision, releases an external line when an open switch
interval (OSI) is detected during a call on that line. You must set
this to Supervised if a loop trunk has its Answer mode set to Auto
or if you enable Answer with DISA. Disconnect supervision is
also required to conference two external callers. The line must be
equipped with disconnect supervision from the central office for
the Supervised option to work.
Tips
The duration of an open switch interval (OSI) before Enterprise
Edge disconnects a call is programmed by the Disconnect
timer setting. See Hardware on page 84 for more information.
Values: Unspr, Supervised (Default: Unspr)
Answer mode
Define whether a trunk is manual or automatic answer. The
Answer mode setting appears for T1 ground start lines, T1 E&M
lines, and T1 loop start lines and BRI lines whose Trunk mode
setting is set to Super. Select the setting: Manual or Auto.
Note: You require Disconnect supervision if loop start trunks
are to operate in auto-answer mode.
Values: Manual, Auto (Default: Manual)
Answer with DISA
P0911588 Issue 01
Define whether the system prompts a caller for a six digit class of
service (COS) password. This setting appears for T1 loop start
and T1 E&M lines that have auto-answer mode. Set this option to
No for T1 E&M lines on a private network that have auto-answer
mode.
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
To program DISA on a PRI trunk, see Direct inward system
access (DISA) on page 331.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
114 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
Link at CO
Some exchanges respond to a Link signal (ƒ‡⁄) by
providing an alternative line for making outgoing calls. When you
enable Link at CO, the system applies the restrictions on outgoing
calls to the digits dialed after the Link signal, and the call on the
alternative line is subject to all restrictions. Disabling Link at CO
prevents a Link signal from resetting the Enterprise Edge
restrictions in cases where the host exchange does not provide an
alternative line.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Use auxiliary ringer
Allows you to turn the auxiliary ringer on or off. Refer to Use
auxiliary ringer on page 117.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Full autohold
Enables or disables full autohold. When enabled, if a caller selects
an idle line but does not dial any digits, that line is automatically
placed on hold if you then select another line. Applies to loop start
and VoIP trunks. Full autohold is always in place for T1 E&M
trunks; it has no meaning for incoming-only T1 DID trunks.
The default setting should be changed only if Full autohold is
required for a specific application.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Loss package
Allows you to select the appropriate loss/gain and impedance
settings for each line. For more information refer to Loss
package on page 117.
Values: Short CO, Medium CO, Long CO, Short PBX, Long
PBX (Default: Medium CO)
Signalling
Defines the signal type for the line. Applies to T1 E&M or T1
DID trunks. The immediate setting does not appear for T1 E&M
or T1 DID trunks connected to an EE-DTM if the Dial mode is set
to tone.
Make sure that this matches the signal type programmed for the
trunk at the other switch.
Values: WinkStart, Immediate, DelayDial (Default: Winkstart)
ANI Number
Defines whether the telephone number of the caller will be
collected for this line. Applies to T1 E&M and T1 DID trunks.
For T1 E&M and T1 DID trunks connected to an EE-DTM, this
setting only appears if Signalling is set to WinkStart.
The central office must deliver ANI/DNIS in DTMF mode. No
additional equipment is required.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
DNIS Number
Defines whether the digits dialed by an external caller on this line
will be collected. Applies to T1 E&M trunks. For T1 E&M trunks
connected to an EE-DTM, this setting only appears if Signalling is
set to WinkStart and Answer mode is set to Manual.
These digits are required for some third-party software
applications.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 115
Trunk type
Trunk/line data varies with the type of trunk module, the configuration, and what
line you select. For example, you can configure the EE-DTM as PRI or T1.
You can program the following trunk types:
Hardware Unit
Trunk Types
EE-DTM
PRI
T1 Loop, T1 E&M, T1 Ground, T1 DID, T1 Fixed
DASS2
DPNSS
EE-CTM (North America)
Loop
EE-BRIM S/T
BRI-S/T
Note: The Fixed data channel trunk type is required if you want to use the soft
router feature in Enterprise Edge. You must first install an EE-DTM and
configure it as Module type, T1 (see Module on page 72.) You must then
configure the Trunk type as Fixed data channel. You can now configure
Module 08 as a Data module (see Configuring a data module on page 79).
Enable modules
If you disabled any Trunk Modules prior to perform programming, enable
them now, or your system will not function properly. See Media Bay
Module status on page 279.
Voice over IP trunk considerations
For IP functionality with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway, the trunk type is VoIP.
Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway routes voice traffic over private Internet Protocol
(IP) networks to link multiple sites together using an existing corporate data
network. Lines 001 to 014 are reserved for IP functionality. The number of lines
available for use is a function of software key codes and currently eight of the 14
lines are available for IP functionality.
Note: VoIP trunks should not be accessed through Line appearances as the user
will not receive dial tone.
VoIP trunks should be configured to use a discrete line pool (Pool A to O). Do not
mix other trunk types on the same line pool. You can configure your IP trunks to
use the fallback feature.The use of Line pool codes is not recommended as you will
not be able to configure for fallback. The quality of the IP trunk connection is
assessed during initial call setup, and if the quality is outside the configured
threshold, Enterprise Edge will try to find an alternate route to complete the call
(fallback) based on the programming definitions in the routing table. If you do not
configure your network for fallback and the call quality is below threshold, the IP
call will fail. For an example of a network configuration that supports fallback, see
Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway on page 351.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
116 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
When fallback is configured, the IP call will be rerouted to a circuit-switched
connection. This could be either a private network trunk or it could be a public
network trunk. Ideally you would want to configure fallback to use the least cost
route if possible. For more information about configuring VoIP trunks, see the
Enterprise Edge IP Telephony Configuration Guide.
Line type
Tips
Line pools must never contain a mixture of lines. All lines in a given line pool
should go to the same location.
Try to avoid putting unsupervised loopstart lines in a line pool. These lines can
become hung, especially when a remote user uses the line pool to make an
external call.
There are two more programming settings that must be assigned before a line pool
can be used:
•
You must assign line pool access to telephones in Line access programming.
•
You must assign system-wide line pool access codes in General settings (not
applicable to PRI pools).
Tips
A telephone can be administered to search automatically for an idle line from
several lines appearing on the telephone. Assign a line pool as the prime line
(in Line access) and all the lines in the line pool must appear on that
telephone. When the user lifts the receiver or presses Handsfree/Mute, any one
of the lines, if idle, can be selected by Automatic Outgoing Line selection.
Changing the settings for trunk type on a system that is in use may cause calls
to be dropped.
When assigning lines to line pools, consider your network configuration. You
may be able to create a unified dialing plan by assigning lines to the same
location to the same line pool on each of your systems. For example, if system
A and system B each have tie lines to system C, assign the tie lines to pool D
on each of the systems.
You cannot assign target lines to a line pool.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 117
Use auxiliary ringer
This setting allows you to turn the auxiliary ringer on or off. An auxiliary ringer can
be programmed on a line or a set. When programmed on a line, the auxiliary ringer
will ring every time a call is received. When programmed only on a set, the
auxiliary ringer will not ring when a transferred call is received.
Tips
The auxiliary ringer is an optional device that should be connected by the
installer.
If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external
line, and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer, the
auxiliary ringer will ring for the call transfer.
An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed in Services to ring for a line
placed into a scheduled Ringing service.
Loss package
Loss package allows you to select the appropriate loss/gain and impedance settings
for each line. The setting is based on the distance between Enterprise Edge and the
terminating switch, and the terminating switch type. When measuring the distance
from Enterprise Edge to CO and from Enterprise Edge to PBX, use 600 ohms as the
termination resistance setting.
Loss
Package
Receive
Loss
Transmit
Loss
Impedance
Distance to switch/cable
loss/terminating switch
Short CO
0 dB
3 dB
Short
Short/<2 dB/Enterprise
Edge to CO
Medium CO
0 dB
0 dB
TIA/EIA 464
Medium/>2 dB and <6 dB/
Enterprise Edge to CO
Long CO
-3 dB
0 dB
TIA/EIA 464
Long/>6 dB/Enterprise
Edge to CO
Short PBX
0 dB
0 dB
Short
Short/<2 dB/Enterprise
Edge to PBX
Long PBX
-3 dB
0 dB
TIA/EIA 464
Long/>2 dB/Enterprise
Edge to PBX
A loss of 4 dB corresponds to a cable length of approximately 2700 m (9000 ft).
Setting Received number
The Received number attribute allows you to specify the digits to make a specific
target line ring. A received number cannot be the same as, or be the start digits of a
line pool access code, a destination code, the DISA DN or the Auto DN.
If you are configuring auto-answer BRI trunks to map to target lines, the received
number should be the same as the Network DN supplied by your service provider.
The call will be directed to the prime telephone for the incoming line if the Network
DN is not used.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
118 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines, Line nnn, Trunk/line data
and click on the Received number heading.
The Received number screen for the line appears.
2. Type in the Received number in the Public number box (for North America).
or type in the Public number and Private number (for UK). The default is
blank.
Restrictions
Restrictions prevent you from making certain kinds of calls from specific lines on
the telephone. You can also restrict some features. This section describes how to
apply restriction filters to lines; see Restriction filters on page 124 for details on
creating the filters.
Line restrictions
The Line restrictions attribute allows you to specify the filter applied to this line to
restrict the dial out numbers. You can assign a different restriction filter for normal
service and for each of six schedules. See the section on Services for more
information about the schedules. For PRI, line restriction changes apply to all 23
lines.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines, Line nnn, Restrictions, Line
restrictions.
2. Click on the schedule heading that you want to configure. For example,
Night.
The Line restriction window for that schedule appears.
3. In the Use filter box, type in the number of the restriction filter you want to
assign as the line restriction for this schedule. The default restriction filters are
as follows:
Schedule
Restriction filter
Normal
03
Schedule 1 (Night)
21
Schedule 2 (Evening)
22
Schedule 3 (Lunch)
23
Schedule 4
00
Schedule 5
00
Schedule 6
00
Tips
When a remote user places an external call on a line, any filters used with the
line still apply.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 119
Remote Restrictions
Specify the restriction filter for the line that remote callers use to call in to
Enterprise Edge. A restriction filter is a set or group of restrictions and overrides.
As with line restrictions, you can apply a different remote restriction for normal
service and for each of the six schedules.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines, Line nnn, Restrictions,
Remote restrictions.
2. Click on the schedule heading that you want to configure. For example,
Night.
The Remote restriction window for that schedule appears.
3. In the Use filter box, type in the number of the restriction filter you want to
assign as the remote restriction for this schedule.
Select the remote restrictions for each schedule. The default restrictions are as
follows:
Schedule
Restriction filter
Normal
04
Schedule 1 (Night)
31
Schedule 2 (Evening)
32
Schedule 3 (Lunch)
33
Schedule 4
00
Schedule 5
00
Schedule 6
00
Tips
The remote restriction restricts the numbers that can be dialed on an incoming
auto-answer line. If a remote user then selects a line to place an external call,
any filter used with the line still applies.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
120 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Telco features
If you subscribe to a voice message service outside your office, you can access it
through your Enterprise Edge system. You can specify what voice message center
you use for each external line that receives message waiting indication.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines, Line nnn.
2. Click on the Telco features heading.
The Telco features window for the line appears.
3. Select the Voice message center for the line, Center 1 - Center 5 or None.
Note: To program the external numbers for each Center, refer to Voice message
center numbers on page 187.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 121
Loops
The Loops heading allows you to program BRI loop settings.
The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Loops programming map.
Loops
Loop 201-xxx
Type: T
Protocol
Clock source
Overlap receiving
ONN blocking state
SPIDs (North America only)
Loop 201-xxx
Type: S
Sampling
Clock source
Note: Headings will vary according to your market profile.
Configuring the loop type
The Media Bay Modules support two types of BRI loops: S and T.
To configure a T loop:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Loops.
2. Select a loop number (for example, Loop 201).
3. Set the Type to T.
4. Configure the loop settings according to the table:
Attribute
Description
Protocol1
Allows you to select the appropriate ISDN protocol. The values
displayed depend on both the market profile and software keycodes. NI
is National ISDN. Euro is the ETSI ISDN standard. Q-Sig is also an
ETSI standard and appears if the Q-Sig software key is loaded.
Values: Euro, Q-Sig
Clock source
Allows you to designate a clock source for maintaining system
synchronization. Values: Master, Primary, Secondary (Default:
Master)
Overlap receiving Allows for support of target lines in markets which use Overlap
receiving signalling on the BRI trunks. Overlap receiving must be
configured for each BRI loop.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Local number
length
P0911588 Issue 01
Allows you to set the local number length. This parameter appears only
when Overlap receiving is set to Y.
Values: 0-10 (Default: 8)
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
122 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
ONN blocking
state
Allows you to set the ONN block state.
Values: Suppression bit, Service code (Default: Suppression bit)
Notes:
1 The values displayed depend on the market profile that is loaded. Euro and Q-Sig
appear in all the European profiles.
To configure an S loop:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Loops.
2. Select a loop number (for example, Loop 201).
3. Set the Type to S.
4. Configure the loop settings according to the table:
Attribute
Description
Sampling
Allows you to select a sampling rate for the S-loop. Select Fixed if two
or more S-interface devices use the loop and the length of the loop is less
than 200 m (650 ft.). Select Adaptive if two or more S-interface devices
use the loop and the length of the loop is greater than 200 m (650 ft.). If
one S-interface device is using the loop, the length of the loop can be up
to 1000 m (3230 ft) and the Sampling rate should be set to Adaptive.
Values: Adaptive, Fixed (Default:
ONN blocking
state
Allows you to set the ONN block state.
Values: Suppression bit, Service code (Default: Suppression bit)
SPIDs (North America only)
For ISDN BRI service, your service provider supplies service profile identifiers
(SPIDs) and Network DNs.
To assign a SPID to a BRI loop:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Loops.
2. Click the key beside the loop number (for example, Loop 201) where you
want to assign DNs.
3. Click on the SPIDs heading.
4. Choose Add above the navigation tree.
The SPID dialog box appears.
5. Type in the SPID number.
6. Click Save.
SPID 1 appears as a sub-heading.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 123
Assigning the Number of B-channels
To assign the number of B channels to a SPID:
1. From the SPIDs heading, click on the SPID # you want to configure for this
Loop.
2. Select 1 or 2 in the Number of B-channels box.
Assigning DNs
To assign Network DNs to the BRI loop:
1. From the SPID # heading, click on the Network DNs heading.
2. Click the Add button above the navigation tree.
3. Type the DN number in the DN box.
4. Click the Save button.
DN 01 appears as a sub-heading.
Assigning Call type for a Network DN
Configure the call type for the Network DN, Voice, Data or Both:
1. From the Network DNs heading, click on the DN ## that you just assigned.
The Loop# /SPID# /DN # window appears.
2. Select Voice, Data or Both in the Call type box.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
124 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Restriction filters
Restriction filters prevent you from making certain kinds of calls from a telephone
or from lines that are available at the telephone. They also restrict some features.
The following illustration shows the Restriction filters programming map.
Restriction Filters
Filter 00-99
Restrictions
Restriction 01
Digits
Overrides
Override 001
Digits
Filters
A restriction filter is a set or group of restrictions and overrides that specify the
external numbers or feature codes that cannot be dialed from a telephone or on a
line. Rather than define individual restrictions and apply them repeatedly to
telephones and to lines, the restriction filters setting Allows you to assign them in
one step as a single package of dialing sequences that are not permitted.
In addition to restricting telephone numbers, you can prevent people from entering
dialing sequences used by the central office (the public network) to deliver special
services and features. Because some of these features provide the caller with dial
tone after they have entered the special code (which often uses # or *), users may
have an opportunity to bypass restrictions. To prevent this from happening, you can
create filters that block these special codes.
You create a filter by defining the dialing sequences that are denied. There will also
be variations of each sequence that you will want users to be able to dial. Sequences
that can be dialed are called overrides.
Once you create the filters, you can assign the restrictions to a telephone
(Terminals & sets), to a line (Lines), to a particular line on a telephone (Terminals
& sets), and to remote callers (Lines, Remote access).
Note: Filter 00 cannot be changed; filters 02—04 have default settings; see
Default filters (North America) on page 125.
To program a restriction filter:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Restriction filters.
2. Expand the restriction filter you want to program (Filter 00-99). Click on the
Restrictions heading.
3. Click Add above the navigation tree to enter a restriction for each filter.
The Add restrictions dialog box appears.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 125
4. Type the digits that you want to restrict callers from dialing.
5. Click Save.
6. Click Overrides to view, or click Add above the navigation tree to enter
overrides for each restriction filter.
The Add Overrides dialog box appears.
7. Type the digits that are an exception to the restriction.
8. Click Save.
Note: Enter the letter A as a wild card character that represents any digit in a
sequence of numbers when denying numbers or creating overrides.
If you delete a restriction, it also deletes the overrides and the restrictions
renumber to fill the gap.
Default filters (North America)
Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing and cannot be changed.
Filter 01 is pre-programmed with ten restrictions and some associated overrides. In
Filter 01, Restriction 02 and Override 001 allow long distance toll free calls.
The dialing string 911 (the number for emergency assistance in North America) is
included as both a restriction and an override in Filter 01. This arrangement
prevents anyone from blocking calls for emergency assistance on lines or sets using
the default filter.
Filter
Restrictions (denied)
00
Unrestricted dialing
01
01: 0
Overrides
02: 1
001: 1800
002: 1877
003: 1888
03: 911
001: 911
04: 411
05: 976
06: 1976
07: 1AAA976
08: 1900
09: 1AAA900
10: 5551212
02 - 99
No restrictions or exceptions programmed
Note: Default filters are only loaded at a cold start.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
126 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Filters 02, 03, and 04, although not preset with restrictions and overrides, are the
default filters in these programming headings:
Filter
Heading
Sub-heading
02
Terminals & sets
Set restrictions
03
Lines
Line restriction
04
Lines
Remote restriction
Tips
Filter 00 cannot be changed. Enterprise Edge can have up to 100 restriction
filters (00 to 99).
Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions. There is no limit on
the number of overrides that can be allocated to a restriction. There is a
maximum total of 400 restrictions and overrides allocated to the 100
programmable filters.
The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits. The maximum length of an
override is 16 digits.
A single letter (A) in a dialing sequence is a wild card (stands for any digit).
You can use * and # in a sequence of numbers in either a restriction or an
override. These characters are often used as part of feature codes for other
systems or for features provided by the central office (the public network).
When restricting the dialing of a central office feature code, do not forget to
create separate restrictions for the codes used for DTMF and pulse lines.
Examples of dialing strings that may be restricted for this reason are *67 and
1167. Do not string together a central office feature code and a dialing
sequence that you want to restrict. Create a separate restriction for each.
You can copy restrictions and overrides from one filter to another. Any
restriction or override can be used in any number of filters. Each time it is
used, it counts as one entry. For example, if restriction 411 exists in filters 01,
02 and 03, it uses up three entries of the 400 entries available.
Removing a restriction from a filter has no effect on the contents of other
filters even if the restriction was copied to them. You cannot delete a filter.
Removing the restrictions programmed on a filter makes it an unrestricted filter
but the filter itself is not removed.
Exercise caution when removing overrides.
Removing a restriction removes the overrides associated with it. It also
changes the identifying numbers of the subsequent restrictions that you may
have defined. For example, if you remove Restriction 01, Restrictions 02 to 08
are renumbered as 01 to 07.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 127
Time & date
1. Click Time & date. Enter the time and date in the following format:
yyyyMMddHHmmss.
You can configure the system to your local time zone under System,
Identification. The system automatically determines and changes the time for
Daylight Savings Time if you have ISDN lines.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
128 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Call Routing
The Call Routing heading allows you to define how calls are routed by your
Enterprise Edge system. The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Call
Routing programming map.
Call Routing
Routes
Route 000
External #
Use pool
Destination codes
xx
Schedules
Call routing decides what path an outgoing call takes using the digits that are dialed.
It is sometimes called Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
When you select an internal line and dial, the system checks the numbers you enter
against the routing tables. If the number you dial starts with a destination code, the
system uses the line pool and dials out digits specified by the route assigned to that
destination code, and then dials the rest of the number that you dialed.
Routing service replaces a number of manual tasks, including:
•
entering a line pool code
•
dialing an access code for a long distance carrier
•
deciding which line pool to use according to the time and day
You can set up routing to take advantage of any leased or discounted routes using
information supplied by the customer. The system cannot tell what lines are cheaper
to use.
For Call by Call service selection (PRI only), the installer defines destination codes
for various call types over PRI lines (for example; Foreign Exchange, Tie Trunk,
and OUTWATS). The user simply dials a number using the intercom button
without having to enter any special information. For more information see, Call by
Call service selection for PRI on page 166.
Using routing to create a coordinated dialing plan is explained in Coordinated
dialing plans on page 335.
Plan your routing service before doing any programming.
Routing affects every call placed in the system and must be carefully planned
to avoid conflicts and gaps in the programming. Use tables to design routes
and destination codes, then check for potential problems before you start
programming. It will also save you time to have all the settings written out in
front of you.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 129
Routes and destination codes
The settings for a call route include:
•
a 3-digit route number (000-999)
•
external # digits (up to 24)
•
a line pool
•
destination codes (max. of 500 available, up to 7 digits)
•
DN type
•
public DN lengths
•
a schedule (programmed in Services)
Tips
To dial a telephone number that does not match any of the programmed
destination codes, you must choose a line and dial the number. For long
distance dialing, you can program the area codes in the North American
numbering plan as destination codes.
Routes
To program a call route:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Call Routing, Routes.
2. Click Add above the navigation tree. Enter a 3-digit route number (000-999)
and click Save.
3. Click on the Route number in the navigation tree.
The Route window appears.
External #
External number or dial out number is the number you want the route to use.
4. Enter the digits (up to 24). You can press F78 to insert a 1.5 second pause in
the dialing string, or F804 to wait for dial tone, if necessary. Route 000 has no
External # by default and cannot be changed.
Use pool
5. Select a line pool for the route: Pool A, Pool B...Pool O or
PRI-A to PRI-F. The PRI pools only display if you configure an EE-DTM for
PRI.
Note: Route 000 uses Pool A by default and cannot be changed.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
130 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
DN type
The DN type setting shows only for service type Tie.
6. Select Public or Private DN type.
Call by Call Service routing
The following is an example of a Routing Table containing Call by Call
programming (available in the North America market profile).
Route #
(000-999)
Dial Out
(24 digits)
Use Pool
Service Type
Service
Identifier
003
PRI-A
Public
004
PRI-A
FX
xxxxx
005
PRI-A
Tie
xxxxx
006
PRI-B
OUTWATS
xxx
007
PRI-B
Private
008
PRI-B
Switched Digital
Note: The public DN lengths are used for all PRI calls except those whose routes use service type
Private or service type Tie with DN Type specified as Private.
The service identifier (SID) depends on the selected service type (for example, with
NI-2 protocol).
Service Type
Service Identifier description
Public
None
FX
Facility Number 1-5 digits
Tie
Facility Number 1-5 digits
OUTWATS a
Optional Band Number 1-3 digits
Private
None
Switched Digital
None
a. For NI-2, do not program the Carrier Access Code for banded OUTWAT calls. This call may
be rejected.
When you select or change a PRI protocol, the Service Type and Service ID fields
automatically clear for each entry in the routing table for that PRI.
Programming the PRI routing table
The dialing plan must be thoroughly planned out in advance before programming
the information into the Enterprise Edge system.
To program the routing table:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Call Routing, Routes.
1. Under Route001, External #:, type a number (up to 24 digits).
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 131
2. Under Use pool:, select a line pool.
The PRI pool(s) displayed depend on how the PRI lines are put into pools in
the Trunk/Line Data section of programming. It is possible to have only pool
PRI-A, or only pool PRI-B, or only PRI-C, etc., even if there are three
EE-DTMs configured as PRI in the system.
3. Under ServiceType:Public, select a different Service Type if required.
4. Under Service ID:None, type the Service ID number. This is shown only if
the service requires an ID.
5. Under DN type:Public, type Public or Private. This box shows only for
service type Tie.
Destination codes
The numbers used for destination codes must not conflict with:
•
Call Park Prefix
•
External Access Code
•
Direct Dial Numbers
•
Line Pool Code
•
Internal set numbers (intercom)
•
DISA DN
•
Auto DN
For example, the system will confuse an internal number of 221 and a destination
code of 22 because even if the caller dialed the complete internal number, the call
would be routed using the first two digits. But an internal number of 221 and a
destination code of 23 would work.
In order to make digits available for use with destination codes, you can change the
DN length of B1 and B2 DNs depending on your system size. You can change the
DN length either at system startup or in General settings.
Wild card character
When programming destination codes, you can use wild cards in the destination
code string. Wild card characters reduces the number of destination codes
programmed in the system.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Call Routing, Destination codes.
2. Click on the destination code you want to modify or click Add above the
navigation tree to enter a new destination code.
The Destination code dialog box appears.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
132 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
When you enter a destination code, type the letter A as a wild card character in the
destination code.
The wild card character can be used only for the last digit of a destination code and
represents any digit from 0 to 9 except for digits already programmed or used by
other numbering plans. Should there be a conflict with other digits already
programmed or used by other destination codes, an error message appears.
The wild card character can only be used to group destination codes that use the
same Route and Digit Absorbed Length.
Route
External #
Line Pool
555
763-4018
Line Pool C
565
763-3492
Line Pool A
Destination codes
Route
Digit Absorb
Dial Out
555
3
763-4018 -1
9202
565
3
763-3492 -2
9203
555
3
763-4018 -3
9204
555
All
763-4018
9205
565
2
763-3492 -05
9206
555
3
763-4018 -6
9207
555
3
763-4018 -7
9208
555
3
763-4018 -8
9209
555
3
763-4018 -9
9201
a
a. In this example, the default Line Pool A access code 9 is deleted to make it available
for use as a Destination code
Note: The numbers in italics in the Dial Out sequence are not visible to the user.
Destination codes
Route
Digit Absorb
Dial Out
920A
555
3
763-4018 - A
9204
555
All
763-4018
9205
565
2
763-3492 - 05
Note: The numbers in italics in the Dial Out sequence are not visible to the user.
Normal route
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Call Routing, Destination codes.
2. Choose the Route you want to configure, and click Schedules.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 133
Use route
3. In the Use route setting, select what route a call using the destination code takes
during normal service and for each of the schedules. You can program the
automatic schedule times under Scheduled Services. The default Normal route
is 000, it has no External # digits, and uses Pool A.
Absorbed length
4. Select the portion of the destination code that is always absorbed by the
system and not used in the dialing sequence. Select the number of digits to be
deleted: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or All.
Tips
The digit absorption setting (absorbed length) only applies to a maximum of
two schedules. Setting digit absorption to 0 minimizes the effort involved in
preparing destination codes. With a 0 setting, the actual digits dialed by a caller
are preserved in the dial out sequence. Programming a dial out sequence as
part of the route may or may not be necessary depending on the required
dialout.
Setting up a route for local calling
An office can have different suppliers for local and long distance telephone service.
By programming a destination code, any call that begins with 9 (the most common
dial out digit) will automatically use lines dedicated to local service.
The first step is to build a route (underCall Routing in Telephony Services).
•
Type 001 (or any other available route number).
You can view defined routes or erase a defined route.
•
Assuming that the lines for local calling have been placed in Line pool A,
choose it as the line pool.
•
Type the dial out digits (if any) that are needed to direct the call once it is
connected to an external line.
The second step of programming is setting up how the route will work with a
destination code. Because users will dial 9 to make an external call, 9 should be the
destination code.
For local calls only, there are no dial out numbers (compare with Setting up a route
for long distance calling on page 134).
•
Type 9 at Destination Code:.
If entering a code other than 9, a valid destination code must be used. See
Destination codes on page 131.
View existing destination codes before entering a new code.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
134 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
The destination code can use a different route depending on a Schedule (see
Services). In the current example, Route 001 is used when someone dials 9 during
normal mode (the mode used when the other Schedules are turned off).
•
The route for the first schedule appears after Normal:. Type the defined route
number 001.
The following illustrations show sample tables used for planning and recording
routing service. They are filled out to match the examples of routes for local and
long distance calling.
Routing Service (Services: Routing Service)
Route #
(000-999)
Dial out (if required)
(max. 24 digits or characters)
Use Pool
001
none
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
002
none
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
Destination codes (Services; Routing service; Destination codes)
Service Schedule
name
(max. 7 char)
Night Rte
Normal Rte
Evening Rte
Lunch Rte
DestCode
(max. 7 digits)
Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb
(000-999) Length (000-999) Length (000-999) Length (000-999) Length
9
000
1
000002
All
000
000
001
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
0
Setting up a route for long distance calling
An office may have leased lines or T1 E&M trunks which make it cheaper to call
long distance. The routing should take place automatically when the number of the
outgoing call begins with 1.
Again, the first step is to define a route (under Call Routing in Telephony
Services).
•
Type 002 (or any other available route number) at Route:
•
Assuming that the discounted lines for calling long distance have been placed
in Line pool B, choose it as the line pool.
•
Type 1 at Destination Code:
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 135
A valid destination code must be used. See Destination codes on page 131. View
existing destination codes before entering a new code.
The destination code can use a different route depending on the Schedule. In this
example, the system uses Route 002 (which uses Line pool B) to take advantage of
the lower cost when the system is in normal mode.
•
The route for the first schedule appears: Normal:. Type the defined route
number 002.
Tips
The digit absorption setting (Absorbed Length) only applies to a maximum of
two schedules.
Setting Absorbed Length to 0 minimizes the effort involved in preparing
destination codes. With a 0 setting, the actual digits dialed by a caller are
preserved in the dialout sequence. Programming a dial out sequence as part of
the route is not necessary.
If rates change depending on the time of the day or week, a different route can
be used for the same destination code 1 when a particular schedule is in use.
See Programming for least cost routing on page 136.
Adding a long distance carrier access code
In many cases, long distance service uses the same lines as local service but is
switched to a specific carrier using an access number (sometimes called an equal
access code). Programming for routing can include the access number so users do
not have to dial it every time they make a long distance call.
1. Create a route that uses a line pool containing local lines only.
2. Program the route to use a line pool containing the lines used to access the
long distance carriers.
3. Type the dial out digits, which are the same as the access digits. For example,
if the access code is 10222, the dial out digit is 10222.
4. Create a destination code 91: 9 (for outside access) and 1 (for long distance).
A valid destination code must be used. See Destination codes on page 131.
5. Set Absorbed Length to 1. The 9 is only used internally and should be
dropped; the 1 is needed to direct the call to the public carrier network.
Tips
The destination codes 9 and 91 used in the examples cannot be used together.
If the destination code 91 is needed to direct long distance calls, you must
create a separate set of codes that use local calling routes. These codes would
be, for example, 90, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98 and 99. See Wild card
character on page 131 for information on programming destination codes.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
136 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
User dials
9-1-601-555-2222
Call is directed in
the public system
9-1-601-555-2222
1-601-555-2222
91 is a destination
code – system uses
Route 001 and Line
Pool A
External lines recognize
the long distance access
code and switch to the
appropriate carrier
10222-1-601-555-2222
Routing tables
“absorb” 9
1-601-555-2222
Dialout programming
tells the system to add
the access code for
long distance (e.g.
Programming for least cost routing
It may be cheaper to use another long distance carrier at another time of day.
Continuing with the example used in the previous flowchart, the lines that supply
local service in normal mode will also be used for long distance service after 6 p.m.
because that is when rates become competitive. For the system to do this
automatically, another route has to be built.
1. Choose Route 007 (or any other available route) at Route:.
2. Choose No number for the dial out.
3. Choose Line pool A (local service carrier lines).
In this case, the change in route uses the start and stop times for Night Schedule (the
schedule for different modes are set up under Services).
1. Add 91 as a Destination code.
2. The route programmed with the access code as its dial out (Route 001)
remains as the route used by Normal:.
3. Make sure Absorbed length is set at 1.
4. Under Night route: select Route 007.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 137
Calls that begin with the digits 91 will now travel out without using the access code
when the Night schedule comes into use automatically or when you turn it on at a
control set.
Using dialing restrictions with routing
Routing service can be further customized by adding dialing filters to lines in line
pools. Filters restrict the use of the line to specific area codes.
Tips
Host system signaling codes can be part of the dial out.
You can also use routing as an alternate method for a direct-dial number. For
example, create a destination code 0 and program the number of the internal or
external destination as the dial out. Digit absorption should be set to 1.
Because overflow routing directs calls using alternate line pools, a call may be
affected by different line filters when it is handled by overflow routing.
Using a dialing plan to route outgoing PRI calls
The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and private networks. The
dialing plan is a collection of features responsible for processing and routing
outgoing calls. All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan.
The Dialing Plan:
•
Allows Enbloc dialing by buffering user-dialed digits until a complete DN has
been dialed (Enbloc dialing is a requirement for PRI).
•
Provides the ability to map user-dialed digits to a service type on a Call-by-call
basis.
•
Allows long distance carrier selection via user-dialed Carrier Access Codes.
•
Allows incoming calls to be routed according to the service type and the digits
received.
Enbloc dialing
The Private DN Length must be set to the number of digits users dial to reach other
nodes in the private network. PRI trunks use the Private DN Length parameter to
determine when a complete number is dialed. PRI trunks use the PSTN DN Length
Table to determine when a complete PSTN DN is dialed. Entries in the table consist
of two fields, Prefix and DN Length.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
138 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Scheduled Services
The Scheduled Services heading allows you to control three types of service by the
time of day and day of week:
•
Ringing service for alternate call ringing at certain times and days.
•
Restriction service for alternate dialing restrictions at certain times and days.
•
Routing service for alternate call routing at certain times and days.
You can also specify common names and times for schedules under the Scheduled
Services heading.
The following illustration shows the Services programming map:
Scheduled Services
Ringing service
Ring Groups
Ring Group 001-100
Sets
DN xxx
Schedules
Night
Service setting
Trunk answer
Extra dial set
Line Settings
Line xxx
Ring group
Aux ringer
Evening
Services (cont’d)
Routing Service
Schedules
Night
Service setting
Overflow
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
Common Settings
Schedule names
Schedule 0-6
Name
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
Restriction service
Night
Service setting
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
Schedule times
Monday-Sunday
Schedules
Night
Start time
Stop time
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 139
Each of the three services has six schedules that you can customize. For example,
you may want to combine alternate call ringing with alternate dialing restrictions
for lunchtime, evenings, and weekends (Schedules 1, 2, and 3). Then you may want
to run alternate call routing using three separate schedules.
Tips
Once you have programmed the different services and schedules, you can turn
each of the services on separately. For example, the Night schedule might
control both Ringing service and Restriction service. But you can turn on just
the Ringing service part of the Night schedule if you wish.
You can activate the services from the designated control telephone for each
Enterprise Edge telephone and line in your system. You can have one control
telephone for the whole system, or different control telephones for different
Enterprise Edge telephones and lines.
If you want to have several services active at the same time, simply program
them on for the same schedule.
Ringing service
At certain times or in certain situations, you may want additional telephones to ring
for incoming lines. The most common use of this feature is when a security desk
telephone rings for incoming lines after 5:00 p.m., a practice often called “night
service”.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Scheduled Services, Ringing service.
Ring groups
Ring groups allows you to define groups of extended ringing sets. A group can be
assigned to any line for any of the schedules. You can define up to 100 ring groups
with up to 30 sets for each ring group.
To define a ring group:
2. Choose Ring groups.
3. Choose the ring group you want to program (Ring group 001-100). The
subheading Sets appears in the navigation tree.
4. Click on Sets and click on Add above the navigation tree.
5.
In the Add Sets window, type the DN of the set you want to assign to this
ring group.
Tips
You can assign any set on the Enterprise Edge system to a ring group. The
assigned control set for each schedule is added to each ring group.
A set can belong to more than one ring group.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
140 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Schedules
Indicate how Ringing service should be activated for each of the schedules:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Scheduled Services, Ringing service.
2. Choose Schedules. The navigation tree expands to show all the schedule
names.
3. Click on a schedule name (for example, Night). The schedule window
appears.
Service setting
4. Select whether the Service schedule is Off, Manual, or Auto.
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control set
using the Ringing service feature code.
Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service. You are still able to
start and stop the service by entering the appropriate Services feature code at a
control set. If you select this setting, you will have to set start and stop times. See
the section on schedule times for information on programming times.
Off prevents the service from being activated.
Trunk answer
Trunk answer allows you to answer, from any telephone, an external call that is
ringing at another telephone in your office. This is useful if the other telephones are
not assigned the same lines as the telephone you are using to answer the call.
5. Click Y or N to enable Trunk answer.
Tip
You can change the Trunk Answer setting only if Ringing service is set to
Manual or Automatic.
Extra dial set
The Extra dial set attribute allows you to assign an additional direct-dial set for each
schedule.
6. Enter the DN of the extra-dial set or choose None.
Tip
The extra dial set is activated during a schedule by entering the Ringing service
feature code from a direct-dial set. This does not activate the Ringing service
unless the direct-dial set is also a control set.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 141
Line settings
For Ringing service, Ring group and Auxiliary ringer use are programmed for
each line individually.
Ring group
You can assign a predefined ring group to a line for each schedule. See Ring group
on page 141 to create groups of extra ringing telephones.
7. Choose Schedules, Line settings.
8. Click on the line number (for example, Line 061).
The schedule/line number window appears.
9. Type in a ring group number (001-100) to choose a different ring group
assignment.
Tip
Only one ring group can be assigned to a line for each schedule. To combine
groups of ringing sets, you must create a new ring group which contains all the
sets you want to ring and assign it to the line.
Aux ringer
Indicate whether the auxiliary ringer (if installed) also rings when Ringing service
is on.
10. Click Y or N to enable Auxiliary ringer.
Tips
The default ringing telephone is 221. This means that all lines ring at telephone
221 when Ringing service is on.
You can copy Ringing set and Auxiliary ringer programming from one line to
another.
If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external
line, and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer, the
auxiliary ringer will ring for the call transfer.
Restriction service
Indicate how the alternate dialing restrictions are activated for each of the
schedules:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Scheduled Services, Restriction
service.
2. Select the schedule you want to program, (for example, Night).
The schedule window appears.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
142 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Service setting
3. Select the service setting for the schedule: Off, Automatic, or Manual.
See Service setting on page 140 for descriptions of the three settings.
Routing Service
Indicate how call routing activates for each of the schedules:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Scheduled Services, Routing
service.
2. Select the schedule you want to program, for example, Night. The schedule
window appears.
Service setting
3. Select the service setting for each schedule Off, Automatic, or Manual.
See Service setting on page 140 for descriptions of the three settings.
Overflow routing
If all the lines used by a route are busy when a call is made, you can program
Routing service to overflow to the route used for normal mode. If this happens, the
set sounds a warning tone and displays the message Expensive route. The caller
can then release the call to avoid using the normal route, or continue with the call.
4. Choose Y or N to enable or disable Overflow routing. The default is N.
Tips
A schedule must be active for overflow routing to be in effect. Overflow
routing is not available in normal mode.
You must create an overflow route to be used with each destination code. In
this way, every route used with a scheduled mode that has overflow service
must have an alternate route in normal service.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 143
Common Settings
Services share the settings for schedule names and schedule times.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Scheduled Services, Common
settings.
Schedule names
The schedule name shows on the display of the control set when the schedule is
turned on. It identifies the active schedule.
2. Click on Schedule names. The Schedule name window appears.
3. Type a name of one to seven characters in the Name box.
Tips
The default names of the six possible schedules are only suggestions and may
be changed to any other name. A schedule name can be one to seven characters
long. It is recommended that you reserve certain schedules (4, 5, and 6)
exclusively for alternate call routing (Routing service).
Schedule times
Schedule start and stop times are set at times you are most likely to want each
service to be active.
4. Click on Schedule times.
5. Click on the day you want to program (for example, Monday).
6. Click on Schedules. The programming menu expands to display all the
schedules.
7. Click on the schedule you want program. The Day-Schedule window appears.
8. Type the start and stop times for each schedule, on each day.
Schedule
Start time
Stop time
Schedule 1: Night
23:00
07:00
Schedule 2: Evening
17:00
23:00
Schedule 3: Lunch
12:00
13:00
Schedule 4: Schedule 4
00:00
00:00
Schedule 5: Schedule 5
00:00
00:00
Schedule 6: Schedule 6
00:00
00:00
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
144 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Tips
It is only necessary to program start and stop times for schedules that are
activated automatically. See the instructions with Ringing service for
information on activating schedules.
The time may be entered in either 12 or 24-hour format. If the display is in
English, and the hour entered is less than thirteen, the display prompts you to
specify AM or PM.
If you assign identical start and stop times for a schedule, for example, 04:00
start and 04:00 stop, the schedule is in effect all day. The only exception to this
is a start and stop time of 00:00; in this case the schedule is off for the day.
You may assign overlapping times. For example, if schedule 1 is assigned
from 9:00 am to 4:00 pm and schedule 2 is assigned from 1:00 pm to 5:00 pm,
then the start time of the second schedule is treated as a stop time for the first
schedule.
This is also true if two schedules have the same start time but different stop
times; the stop time of the shorter schedule is treated as the start time of the
longer schedule.
If one schedule starts and stops within the times of another schedule, the first
service temporarily ends when the second service starts. The first service then
resumes when the second service has ended.
Some schedules start and stop at the same times each day: use COPY to copy
the start and stop times from one day to the next.
Start and stop times do not span days.
When you program a schedule to start in the evening and stop in the morning,
it does not carry over into the next day. For example, if you program Night
service for Friday (22:00 to 6:00), the system turns on Night service from
midnight to 6 am on Friday, and then again from 10 pm to midnight on Friday.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 145
System speed dial
The System speed dial heading allows you to specify speed dial codes (01 - 70) and
external numbers that any telephone set on the system can use. The following
illustration shows the System speed dial programming map.
System speed dial
Speed dial # 01-70
External #
Facility
Display digits
Bypass restrictions
Adding or changing a system speed dial
You can program a speed dial on your Enterprise Edge system so that anyone in
your office can dial a frequently-used number using a two-digit code. Examples of
system speed dials might include telephone numbers of regional sales offices within
your organization or key customers that you call frequently.
To change a speed dial that already exists, follow the same steps as if you are
creating a new system speed dial. The new programming overwrites the previous
number and settings.
If you are creating a system speed dial for the first time you will need to choose the
type of facility for the system speed dial. For more information about programming
line facilities, see Line type on page 116.
The system has a standard name to display, so it is not necessary for you to program
one; however, if you choose not to display the telephone number, you may want to
create a more descriptive name.
To create a system speed dial:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, System speed dial.
2. Click a speed dial (Speed dial # 01 to 70).
3. In the External # box, type the telephone number (up to 24 digits), and then
press Enter.
If this is a new speed dial, more fields appear after you press Enter.
4. Click a Facility value: Use prime line, Use line:nnn, Pool code:x, or Use
routing table.
Note: If you assign a specific line to a system speed dial number, only
telephones with an appearance of that line can use the speed dial
number.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
146 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
5. Click a Display digits value: Y (Yes) or N (No).
Note: If you choose not to display the digits, the name of the Speed Dial
code is displayed instead of the phone number. The default is Y.
6. Click a Bypass restrictions value: Y (Yes) or N (No). The default is N, the
Speed dial number will not bypass the line and set restrictions already
programmed.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 147
General Settings
The General Settings heading allows you to define system-wide settings. The
following shows the General Settings programming map.
General settings
General settings (cont’d)
Business name
Change DNs
Feature settings
Background music
On hold
Receiver volume
Park mode
Delayed Ring Transfer
Held Line Reminder
Directed pickup
Page tone
Alarm set
Set relocation
Message reply enhancement
AnsKey
Call log space
Timers
Camp timeout
Park timeout
Page timeout
Transfer callback timeout
Host delay
Link time
Direct dial
Set 1-5
Type
None
Internal #
External #
Facility
CAP assignment
CAP 1-5
CAP set
Access codes
Park prefix
External code
Direct dial digit
Auto DN
DISA DN
Private access code
Line pool codes
Pool A-O
Access code
Carrier codes
Prefix xxx
Code prefix
ID length
Remote access packages
Package 00
Line Pool Access
Pool A
Remote page
COS Passwords
COS 00-99
Password
User filter
Line filter
Remote package
DN lengths
Received # length
DN length
CbC limits
Pool PRI-A
Public
Tie
Foreign Exchange (FX)
Outwats
Inwats (800)
Release reasons
Network Services
ETSI
Business name
The Business name setting allows you to type in a name that will show on the
display of the person you are calling.
To change the Business name:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, and then click on the General settings
heading.
The General settings screen appears.
2. Type a name up to 7 characters and then press Enter.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
148 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Change DNs
Change DNs allows you to change the directory number (DN) or internal number
of a telephone in the Change DNs dialog box.
Changing DN locks programming session.
Changing an individual DN locks the programming session into the Change
DNs programming mode. To unlock the programming session, exit and restart
Unified Manager.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, and then click on the General settings
heading.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Change DNs.
The Change DNs dialog box appears.
3. In the Old DN box type the DN you want to change.
4. In the New DN box type the new DN.
5. Click OK.
Note: To change the start DN for your system see System startup on page 259 of
the Maintenance chapter.
Feature settings
The Feature settings attribute allows you to program a number of features that apply
to all telephones connected to Enterprise Edge.
To configure Feature settings:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General settings, Feature settings.
2. Configure Feature settings according to the table:
Attribute
Description
Background music Allows you to listen to music through your telephone speaker. A music
source must be connected to Enterprise Edge.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
On hold
Allows you to choose what a caller hears on an external line when the
line is put on hold. Tones provides a periodic tone. Music provides any
signal from a source such as a radio connected to Enterprise Edge.
Silence provides no audio feedback.
Values: Tones, Music, Silence (Default: Tones)
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 149
Attribute
Description
Receiver volume
Allows you to specify if the volume level of a receiver or headset returns
to the system default level when a call ends or is put on hold, or if it
remains at the volume level set at the individual telephone.
Values: Use sys volume, Use set volume (Default: Use sys volume)
Park mode
Allows you to define how retrieval codes are assigned to parked calls.
For more information, see Park mode on page 150.
Values: Lowest or Cycle (Default: Lowest)
Delayed Ring
Transfer
Defines whether unanswered external calls are automatically forwarded
to a prime telephone after a certain period of time. You can estimate the
delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings by six.
Note: You must assign a prime telephone for this feature to operate.
Assign a prime telephone to one or more external lines in Line
Data programming.
Values: 1,2,3,4,6 or 10 (Default: 4)
Held line reminder Reminds you that a call at your telephone is still on hold. You
periodically hear two tones from your telephone until you return to the
call on hold.
Choose the number of seconds before the Held line reminder feature
begins at a telephone that has an external call on hold.
Values: Off, After 30, 60, 90, 120, 150 or 180 Seconds (Default: After
60 Seconds)
Directed pickup
Allows you to answer any calls by specifying the ringing telephone's
internal number.
Directed pickup is useful when not all the telephones have the same
lines, but you want to allow co-workers to answer a call on any external
line from their telephones.
Note: Do not confuse Directed pickup with the Group pickup feature.
Group pickup, allows you to answer a call at any telephone
within a specific group without specifying the internal number
of the ringing telephone.
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
Page tone
Defines whether a tone sounds before a page begins.
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
Alarm set
Allows you to assign a telephone on which alarm messages appear when
a problem has been detected in the system. Alarms are recorded in the
Windows NT event log.
Values: None, DN: (Default: 221)
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
150 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
Set relocation
Allows you to move any telephone to a ne wlocation without losing the
directory number, autodial settings, personal speed dial codes, and any
programming for that telephone.
Note: Activate Set relocation after you do the set installation and
programming, for more flexibility in testing equipment.
If you deactivate Set relocation while moving a set, the internal
number and programming data remain with the physical port
on Enterprise Edge. When you connect the set somewhere else,
it does not receive the original programming.
Values: Y or N (Default: N)
Message reply
enhancement
Activates the Message Reply Enhancement feature. For more
information, see Message reply enhancement on page 150.
Values: Y or N (Default: Y)
Answer key
Allows you to determine what types of calls will alert at the telephone.
For more information, see Answer key on page 151.
Values: Basic, Enhanced, or Extended (Default: Basic)
Park mode
The Call park feature allows you to suspend a call and lets someone retrieve the call
by entering a retrieval code at any Enterprise Edge set in the system. Park mode is
the setting that determines how the system assigns a retrieval code to parked calls.
Select the way that the system will choose a Call park code: Lowest or Cycle.
When set to Lowest, the system chooses the lowest code that is available when the
call is parked. When set to Cycle, the system will choose the codes in a sequence,
from lowest to highest, until all the codes have been used.
Message reply enhancement
The Message reply enhancement feature allows you to automatically deactivate the
message waiting indicator on analog telephones connected to an Enterprise Edge
Analog Station Media Bay Module (EE-ASM), if the reply call from the analog
telephone to the direct-dial telephone is answered, no matter where the call is
answered from by the user.
This feature also functions if the user invokes the Call pickup feature to answer the
reply call from the analog set. It does not however, work with the Retrieve parked
call feature.
Tips
Direct dial sets are the only sets that can send messages (using Feature 1) to
analog telephones connected to an Enterprise Edge Analog Station Media Bay
Module (EE-ASM). The direct dial set must be the designated direct-dial set
for the analog telephone receiving a message.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 151
Answer key
There are up to eight answer keys that you can assign to a set. The Answer key
setting in Feature settings programming Allows you to determine what types of
calls alert at the telephone. Answer key changes do not apply to portables.
Your choices are: Basic, Enhanced and Extended.
With the default Basic setting, answer keys do not ring for:
•
Prime set call capture
•
Call forwarded calls
•
Other answer key calls
•
Priority calls
•
Voice calls
•
Ringing service
•
Callbacks
The Enhanced setting is the same as the Basic setting except that answer keys will
ring for overflow call routed calls (special case of Prime set call capture). Answer
keys will not ring for line transferred calls (although Basic will ring).
Extended will ring for all call types except priority calls and voice calls.
Select the setting: Basic, Enhanced, and Extended.
A Phantom DN is a line that can be programmed to appear and ring on a set that
does not physically exist. It allows you to create an Answer key for the set that does
not exist.
Call log space
The Call log space setting allows you to reallocate the Call log space equally to all
telephones in your system.
To Reset log space:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General settings, Feature settings,
Call log space.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Reset logs. The Property sheet window
appears.
3. Type the space allocation for the Call log at each telephone. In the Space per
log box of the Property sheet window, type a three-digit number (for example,
020, to give each set 20 spaces).
4. In the # of sets with logs box in the Property sheet window, type the number
of sets with logs.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
152 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
5.
Click OK. The system automatically reallocates log space.
Tips
Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space to
all the telephones in your system.
Reallocating Call log space may destroy Call log data at telephones that lose
space.
There are 600 Call log spaces available in the system. There are no spaces
allocated by default. Changing the space allocation using Log defaults defines
the log space available to all telephones in the system.
Timers
The Timers setting allows you to define a number of timer settings for your
Enterprise Edge system. These settings apply to all telephones connected to the
Enterprise Edge system.
To configure Timers:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General Settings, Timers.
2. Configure settings according to the table:
Attribute
Description
Camp timeout
Allows you to assign the number of seconds before an unanswered
camped call returns to the telephone that camped the call.
Values: 30, 45, 60, 90,120, 150 or 180 seconds (Default: 45)
Park timeout
Allows you to assign the number of seconds before a parked call on an
external line returns to the originating telephone.
Values: 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 300 or 600 seconds (Default: 60)
Page timeout
Defines the period of time after which the paging feature automatically
disconnects.
Values: 15, 30, 60, 120, 180, 300, 600 2700 seconds (Default: 2700)
Transfer callback
timeout
Allows you to specify the number of rings before a callback occurs on a
transferred call. You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply
the number of rings by six.
Values: 3, 4, 5, 6 or 12 (Default: 3)
Host delay
Assigns the delay between the moment an outgoing line is selected to
make an external call (for example, by lifting the receiver off the
telephone) and the moment that Enterprise Edge sends dialed digits or
codes on the line.This ensures that a dial tone is present before the
dialing sequence is sent. Minimizing this delay provides faster access to
the requested features.
Values: 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800 or 2000
milliseconds (Default: 1000)
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 153
Link time
Allows you to specify the duration of a signal required to access a feature
through a remote system. The Link time depends on the requirements of
the host switching system. For example, to program external dialing
through a Centrex system requires a Link time of 400 ms.
Link is another name for recall or flash.
Values: 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000
milliseconds (Default: 600)
Direct dial
The Direct dial setting allows you to dial a single system-wide digit to call a specific
telephone, called a direct dial telephone. The most common example of a direct dial
set is a telephone for an operator, a receptionist or an attendant. A total of five direct
dial sets can be programmed on the system.
To configure Direct dial sets:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General Settings, Direct dial.
2. Click on the Direct dial set you want to program (Set 1-Set 5). The Set #
window appears.
Type
3. Choose if the Direct dial set has an Internal or External number or None.
Internal/External#
4. Type the internal or external number that the system automatically dials when
someone enters the direct dial digit. The default number for the Direct dial set
is DN 221.
Facility
If you assign an external number as a direct dial set, you must indicate what line to
use for the call.
5. Select the facility (line) for the external number: Use line:, Pool A to O, Use
prime line, Use routing table.
Tip
There is just one direct dial digit for the entire system. Enterprise Edge cannot
verify that the number you assign as an external direct dial set is valid. Check
the number before assigning it as a direct dial set, and call the direct dial set
after you’ve assigned it in order to test it.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
154 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
CAP assignment
The CAP assignment setting designates a telephone as a central answering position
(CAP). The CAP must be an M7324 telephone, and may have one or two CAP
modules attached. You can install a maximum of five CAPs on Enterprise Edge.
The CAP can:
•
Monitor the busy/not busy and Do not disturb status of Enterprise Edge
telephones.
•
Answer external calls on up to 120 lines, and extend calls to other Enterprise
Edge telephones.
•
Send up to 30 messages to other Enterprise Edge telephones.
•
Provide up to 96 extra memory buttons for the M7324 telephone.
To configure a CAP assignment:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General Settings, CAP assignment.
2. Click on the CAP you want to program (CAP 1-CAP 5). The CAP # window
appears.
3. Type the set number of the M7324 telephone you want to designate as a CAP.
Tips
If CAP modules are attached to an M7324 telephone that has not been
programmed as a CAP, then no CAP settings are assigned. If a CAP module
(or modules) is relocated with the M7324 telephone, the settings are retained.
Dialing plan
Dialing timeout
Dialing timeout specifies how long Enterprise Edge will wait between user-dialed
digits. This value allows Enterprise Edge to determine when the user has stopped
dialing.
The user can also use the ‘#’ key to tell Enterprise Edge that they are finished
dialing however, this is not usually required except for international calls where the
number of digits dialed varies.
1. Click on Dialing plan. The Dialing plan window appears.
2. In the Dialing timeout box select a timeout value. You can select the
following values (in seconds): 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 15.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 155
Note: A timeout value that is too small forces you to enter the digits very quickly
one after the other. A value that is too large causes the system to wait for a
long time after the last digit is entered before the call is actually made.
For more information on non-PRI routing tables and destination codes, see Routing
Service on page 142.
Private network
The Private network settings allows you to configure the type of network (CDP,
UDP), the location code and private network DN length.
Type
You can specify if your Private network uses a coordinated dialing plan (CDP) or a
universal dialing plan (UDP).
1. From Dialing plan, click on the Private network heading.
2. Choose the type of private network, CDP or UDP. The default is None.
Private DN lengths
The Private DN lengths parameter specifies the length of DNs in the private dialing
plan. This is used by all PRI calls where the route uses DN Type: Private.
1. From Dialing plan, click on the Private network heading.
2. Select a Private DN length (3-14).
Public network
Public DN lengths
• In most cases it is not necessary to change the default values. The public DN
lengths table is used for all PRI calls except those whose routes use service type
Private or service type Tie with DN Type specified as Private. The public DN
lengths table allows Enterprise Edge to determine the length of a DN based on
the initial digits dialed by the user. In the public DN lengths table:
•
You can define at most 30 entries.
•
Each entry consists of a DN prefix string (1 to 10 digits) and a length value (two
digits, 1 to 25).
•
Several entries will be predefined in North America (can be removed or
modified). These defaults will handle most regions in North America without
the need for additional programming.
•
The table always contains one ‘default’ entry; this cannot be removed. You can
only modify the length parameter associated with this entry. The default entry
specifies the length of any dialing string that does not match one of the other
table entries.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
156 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
1. Under Dialing plan, Public network, Public DN lengths, click on a prefix
number (0, 00, 01, 011, 1, 411, 911).
2. Under DN prefix:, type the DN prefix number (2 digits, 1 to25).
3. Under DN length:, type a DN length number (2 digits, 1 to 25).
Access codes
The system uses Access codes to direct calls to the correct lines and destinations. If
the codes conflict, some of the features on the system will not work.
The table of default settings can help you plan your access codes so there are no
conflicts.
Digit
Use
Heading
0
Direct dial digit
Access codes
1
Park prefix
Access codes
2
The first digit of B1 DNs
Startup
9
Line pool A access code
(Takes precedence over the External line
access code if there is a conflict.)
Access codes
——
External line access code
Access codes
——
Destination code
Services
To program Access codes:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General Settings, Access codes.
2. Double click on Access codes. The Access codes window appears.
Park prefix
The Park prefix is the first digit of the call park retrieval code that you enter to
retrieve a parked call. If the Park prefix is set to None, calls cannot be parked.
3. Select the setting: None, or 1, 6, 7, 8.
Tips
The Park prefix cannot be the same as: the Direct dial digit, the External line
access code, the first digit of a DN, the first digit of a line pool access code, or
the first digit of a destination code.
Other programmable settings may affect what numbers appear in the window
during programming. Although the numbers 0 to 9 are valid Park prefix
settings, some may already be assigned elsewhere by default or by
programming changes. (To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default
settings in the description of External code.)
If DN length changes, and the changed DNs conflict with the Park prefix, the
setting changes to None.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 157
External code
The External code setting allows you to assign the external line access code for
M7100 telephones and Enterprise Edge ATA 2s to access external lines.
4. Select the setting: None, or 6, 7, 8.
Tips
The external line access code cannot conflict with: the Park prefix, the direct
dial digit, the first digit of a line pool access code, the first digit of a DN, or the
first digit of a destination code.
If DN range, and the changed DNs conflict with the external line access code,
the setting changes to None.
Direct dial digit
The Direct dial digit setting allows you to specify a single system-wide digit to call
a direct dial telephone.
5. Select the setting: None, or 0, 6, 7, 8.
Tips
Another direct dial telephone, an extra dial telephone, can be assigned for each
schedule in Services programming.
The Direct dial digit cannot be the same as the first digit of a DN, of a line pool
access code, the external line access code or the Call park prefix. It cannot be
the first digit of a destination code.
If DN length is changed, and the changed DNs conflict with the Direct dial
digit, the setting changes to None.
Auto DN
Calls answered without DISA require no password to access Enterprise Edge. The
Class of Service (COS) that applies to the call depends on the COS for the trunk.
6. Type in the Auto DN digits to be received from the auto-answer trunk.
Tips
The length of the Auto DN is the same as the Received Number Length
specified in General Settings.The Auto DN is cleared if the Received Number
Length is changed.
The Auto DN cannot be the same as a line pool access code or a destination
code.
DISA DN
For calls answered with DISA, the system presents a stuttered dial tone to prompt a
caller to enter a valid password. The Class of Service (COS) that applies to the call
is determined by this COS password.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
158 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Once a remote user accesses Enterprise Edge, they can change the existing COS
using the DISA DN. This gives you greater flexibility when you create access
privileges. For example, you may want to have a shared DN for remote access and
separate COS passwords with different dialing out privileges for individuals.
7. Type the DISA DN digits to be received from the auto-answer trunk.
Tips
The length of the DISA DN is the same as the Received number length
specified in General Settings. The DISA DN is cleared if the Received
number length is changed.
The DISA DN cannot be the same as a line pool access code or a destination
code.
Private access code
The Private access code is the first digit the user dials to access private facilities. It
provides access to tandem and toll bypass functionality. For example, a PSTN user
in Toronto could call a PSTN user in Ottawa and have the call routed over the
private network connection from the Toronto office to the Ottawa office and then
out to the PSTN from the Ottawa office. This bypasses any long distance toll
charges. To add this functionality, the destination code has to include the private
access number. For an example of a toll bypass network configuration and its
associated programming, see Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway on
page 351.
8. Type the Private access code (up to two digits).
Line pool codes
The Line pool codes setting allows you to assign a line pool access code for each of
the fifteen line pools (A to O). These codes specify the line pool for making an
outgoing external call.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General Settings, Access codes.
2. Click on Line pool codes. The navigation tree appears Pool A-Pool O.
3. Click on the Pool you want to program. The Pool window appears.
4. Type the Access code. The default Access code is 9 for Line Pool A, for Line
Pool B to O. No default is specified for Line Pools B to O.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 159
For PRI, see Line Pools on page 169.
Tips
The code can be one to four digits.
A line pool access code can be the same as an external line access code. In this
case, the line pool access code takes priority over the external line access code,
and a line from the line pool is selected.
A line pool access code cannot conflict with the Park prefix, the Direct dial
digit, the first digit of any Received number, the first digit of any DN
(including the Auto DN or the DISA DN).
To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default settings in the description of
External code.
Carrier codes
A multi-digit Carrier access code contains an Equal Access Identifier Code
followed by a Carrier Identification Code. The CIC identifies the carrier that
handles the call. The Carrier Access Code table stores the CAC digit pattern that
you define for your region. In most cases it is not necessary to change the default
values. The capability is there to modify overall patterns if required.
•
You can define at most five entries.
•
Two entries will be pre-defined in North America, but you are free to remove
these defaults.
•
Each entry consists of an equal access identifier code prefix (one to six digits)
and a carrier identification code length (one digit, 1 - 9).
•
Each entry is identified by the prefix digits themselves.
1. Select General settings, Access codes, Carrier codes.
2. Click on a Prefix number or choose Add above the navigation tree to add a
new Prefix.
3. In the Code prefix box, type in 1 to 6 digits.
4. In the ID length box, type a carrier ID length value (one digit, 1 to 9).
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
160 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Remote access packages
The Remote access packages setting allows you to control the remote use of
Enterprise Edge line pools. Create a remote access package by defining the system
line pools remote users can access. You then assign the package to individual lines
(see Use remote package on page 110), and to a particular Class of Service
password (see COS Passwords on page 160).
To program Remote access packages:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, General settings, Remote access
packages.
2. Click on a Remote access package number (00 to 15).
The Package window appears.
Remote page
The Remote page setting allows you to determine if the Remote access package
allows Remote paging.
3. Type in Y or N to enable remote paging for each pool in the Remote access
package.
Line pool access
4. Click on Line pool access, and then click Add above the navigation tree.
5. Enter a line pool access code, and then click Save.
COS Passwords
Class of Service (COS) passwords permits controlled access to a system's resources
by both internal and remote users. When you enter a Class of Service password at
a telephone, the restriction filters associated with your Class of Service password
apply instead of the normal restriction filters. Similarly, when a remote user enters
a Class of Service password on an incoming auto-answer line, the restriction filters
and remote package associated with their Class of Service password apply instead
of the normal restriction filters and remote package.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 161
COS Passwords allows you to define individual passwords and determine the
restriction filters and remote package associated with each.
Tips
The Class of Service passwords for a system should be determined randomly
and should be changed on a regular basis.
Users should memorize their COS passwords instead of writing them down.
Employees' COS passwords should be deleted when they leave the company.
Typically, each user has a separate password. Alternately, several users can
share a password or one user can have several passwords.
A system can have a maximum of 100 six-digit COS passwords (00 to 99).
You can copy the restriction filters and remote package from one COS
password to another. COS passwords must be unique.
To assign a COS password:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, COS Passwords.
2. Click a COS group (COS 00-99).
The COS nn window appears.
Password
3. Type a 6-digit password in the Password box and press Enter.
User filter
User filter allows you to assign a restriction filter to a Class of Service password.
The user filter associated with the Class of Service password replaces any normally
applicable set restriction, line/set restriction, and remote restriction. The default
setting (None), means that any normally applicable filters (set restriction, line/set
restriction, or remote restriction) still apply.
4. Select a User filter value: None or Filter:. If you select Filter:, type the
2-digit user filter and press Enter.
Line filter
The Line filter box allows you to assign a specific line restriction to a Class of
Service password. The line filter associated with the Class of Service password
replaces any normally applicable line restriction. The default setting (None), means
that any normally applicable line filter still applies.
5. Select a Line filter value: None or Filter:. If Filter: is selected, type the
2-digit line filter and press Enter.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
162 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Remote package
6. Click a Remote package value: None or Package:. If you select Package:,
type the 2-digit remote package and press Enter. See Remote access packages
on page 160 for more information.
DN lengths
The DN lengths setting allows you to change the number of digits for the Received
number length and the DN length.
To assign DN lengths:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, General settings, DN lengths.
The DN lengths window appears.
Received # length
The Received number length setting allows you to change the number of digits
received on auto-answer trunks. These digits identify target lines, Auto DNs, and
DISA DNs.
2. In the Received # length box, select the setting: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
Tips
The target line number (for example, line 241) and the Received number for
the target line (for example, Received number: 123 for line 241) are two
different numbers.
The Received number length may be the same as the system DN length, or
may, because of network or central office constraints, be set to some other
value.
Changing the Received number length causes all programmed received digits
to be cleared.
DN length
The DN length setting allows you to change the number of digits for all DNs. The
maximum length is seven. The default and minimum length is 3.
3. In the DN length box, select the setting: 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
4. Press the Tab key to save the new DN length.
The prompt appears, “If Nortel Networks Voice Message is installed all
messages and mailboxes will be deleted.”.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 163
5. Click OK to save the new DN length. Click Cancel to restore the original
value.
Do not change DN length immediately after a system startup.
You must wait for at least two minutes after a system startup before you
change the DN length.
Data devices drop calls when you change the DN length. (These data devices
use the B2 channel. The M7100, M7310, and M7324 telephones use the B1
channel. Calls are not dropped for these telephones.)
The DN length change takes two minutes, depending on the size of the
Enterprise Edge system. System response may briefly slow down during this
time.
Tips
On a newly installed Enterprise Edge system, change the DN length first
before continuing with other programming.
Each increase in length places the digit 2 in front of any existing DN. For
example, if DN 234 was increased to a length of 4, the new DN would be
2234.
If the DN length change so creates a conflict with the Park prefix, external line
access code, direct-dial digit, or any line pool access code, the setting for the
prefix or code changes to None, and the corresponding feature is disabled.
Network Name Display
Enterprise Edge displays the name of the calling party, when available, on both
Private or Public ISDN PRI interfaces. The displayed name may include the
Receiving Calling Name, Receiving Redirected Name, and/or Receiving
Connected Name. The outgoing name is the Business name concatenated with the
Set name. The outgoing name is not supported on BRI (North America). For
information on programming your CLASS assignment, see Feature assignment on
page 106.
Note: Network Name Display is an optional feature that is available based on the
interface you subscribe to.
Interface
Feature
NI PRI
DMS
Custom PRI
SL-1
NI-BRI
Receiving Calling
Name
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Receiving Redirected
Name
Supported
Receiving Connected
Name
Sending Calling Party Name
Sending Connected Name
P0911588 Issue 01
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
164 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Receiving and Sending Calling Party Name
Network Name Display allows the name of an incoming PRI/BRI call to be
displayed on the Enterprise Edge set receiving the call.
Calling Party Name with status of ‘PRIVATE’ may be displayed on the Called
Party set as ‘Private name’. If the incoming Calling Name is defined by the CO as
a private name, then ‘Private name’ appears on the answering set. If the Calling
Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed on the Called Party set as ‘Unknown
name’.
The system supports sending the calling party name (Business name and Set name
concatenated together) on calls originated by the Enterprise Edge system.
For information on programming your CLASS assignment, see Feature assignment
on page 106. The Set Name will only be sent if the OLI for the Set is configured.
See OLI number on page 95.
Receiving Redirected Name
Network Name Display allows the receiving of the Originally Called Name
(Redirecting Name) on incoming calls. The Originally Called Name will be stored,
but not displayed.
Receiving and Sending Connected Name
Network Name Display supports the reception of Connected Name on outgoing
calls. The Connected Name is stored and displayed on the Enterprise Edge set.
In order for this to work you need to set the Called ID to yes. See Auto called ID on
page 107.
The system also supports sending the Connected Name (Business and Set Name
concatenated together) on incoming calls.
If the call is answered by a hunt group, the hunt group name is used instead of the
set name in forming the connected name.
The Connected Name is a transient display that appears for about 3 seconds.
Note: The Connected Name will only be sent if the OLI has been programmed.
See OLI number on page 95.
Network Name Display interactions
Calling and Connected Name information (if available) is passed between trunks
with Selective Line Redirection (SLR). Only Calling Name information is passed
between trunks in cases where Direct System Inward Access (DISA) has resulted
in tandeming of trunks.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 165
Programming Network Name Display
The Business name and the Set name make up the information that is used for the
outgoing Calling name or connected name.
Calling/connected name is only sent once the Business name is programmed. To
program the Business name, see General Settings on page 147. It is recommended
that you use a blank space for the last character of the Business name to act as a
separator between the Business name and Set name.
To program the Set Name:
1. Under Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & sets, General settings
select the set number of the telephone
2. In the Business name box, type the Business name (7 characters).
3. Other areas that must also be programmed include:
• The OLI number, see OLI number on page 95.
• Under Telco Features, the Call ID must be set to Yes, see Auto called ID on
page 107
• Under Lines, type the set number where you want the CLID to appear, see
CLID set on page 113.
Outgoing name and number blocking (ONN)
When you activate, ƒ°⁄· blocks the outgoing name and number
(ONN) on a per call basis. When you use this feature, the system flags the call to
the CO so that the name and number does not present to the person you call.
Enterprise Edge alerts the CO by two methods and each depends on the type of
trunk involved in placing the outgoing call. Analog trunks use a dialing digit
sequence called a Vertical Service Code (VSC). The VSC differs from region to
region and must be programmed. Analog trunks with both tone and pulse dialing
trunks can have separate VSCs. PRI trunks have only one VSC.
To configure ONN:
1. Under Services, Telephony Services, Telco features, two options are
available.
2. For analog trunks under Voice message center numbers, ONN blocking,
Analog VCS, Tone:None. You can choose F78, (0-9), *, #.
3. Type a new tone dialing Name and Number blocking digit sequence.
4. For non-analog trunks under Voice message center numbers, ONN
blocking, Pulse:None. You can choose F78, (0-9), *, #.
5. Type a new pulse dialing Name and Number blocking digit sequence.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
166 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Call by Call service selection for PRI
Call by Call service selection allows you to access services or private facilities over
a PRI line without the need for dedicated facilities. The different services represent
different types of access to the network. Various services (see list below) are
available depending on the chosen protocol.
Call by Call service selection is supported for the following protocols:
•
National ISDN 2 (NI-2)
•
DMS-100 custom
•
DMS-250 (MCI, Sprint, Generic)
•
AT&T 4ESS custom
The following Call by Call Services are supported:
•
Public
Public calls connect Enterprise Edge and a Central Office (CO). Both incoming
(DID) and outgoing (DOD) calls are supported. Dialed digits conform to the
standard North American dialing plan (E.164 standard).
•
Foreign Exchange (FX)
Foreign exchange service connects an Enterprise Edge site to a remote central
office (CO). This provides the equivalent of local service at the remote location.
•
Tie
Tie lines are private incoming and outgoing lines that connect Private Branch
Exchanges (PBXs) such as Enterprise Edge.
•
Outward Wide Area Telecommunications (OUTWATS)
This outgoing call service allows an Enterprise Edge user to call telephones in
a specific geographical area referred to as a zone or band. Typically a flat
monthly fee is charged for this service.
•
Inward Wide Area Telecommunications (INWATS)
This long distance service allows an Enterprise Edge user to receive calls originating from specified areas without charge to the caller. A toll-free number is
assigned to permit reverse billing.
•
International INWATS
An international long distance service that allows an Enterprise Edge user to
receive international calls originating from specified areas without charge to the
caller. A toll-free number is assigned to permit reverse billing.
•
Switched Digital
This service provides premises to premises voice and data transport with call
management and monitoring features.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 167
•
•
Nine Hundred
This service is commonly referred to as fixed charge dialing.
Private
Private incoming and outgoing calls connect Enterprise Edge to a virtual private
network. Dialed digits may conform to the standard North American dialing
plan (E.164 standard) or the dialed digits may use a private dialing plan.
Enterprise Edge
Service types1
NI-26
DMS-100
(custom)
DMS-250
(MCI, Sprint,
Generic)
AT&T 4ESS
FX
FX
FX2
Tie3
Tie
Tie
Tie
SDN
(software defined
network)
INWATS
INWATS
INWATS
Eight Hundred
Toll Free
MEGACOM
International
INWATS
Same as
INWATS
Same as
INWATS
Same as
INWATS
International
Toll Free
Service
OUTWATS
IntraLATA
OUTWATS
OUTWATS with
bands
InterLATA
OUTWATS
OUTWATS
PRISM
MEGACOM
DMS Private5 VNET
Private
(virtual network)
ACCUNET4
Switched Digital
Nine Hundred
Public
Nine Hundred
Public
Public
MultiQuest
Public
1. A shaded box indicates that the protocol does not support the service.
2. DMS-250 Sprint and UCS support incoming FX only (i.e. Network-to-Enterprise
Edge). DMS-250 MCI does not support FX.
3. NI-2 allows two Tie operating modes: senderized and cut-through. Enterprise Edge
will only support senderized mode.
4. Rates greater than 64 kbps will not be supported.
5. Bell Canada VNET.
6. Not all service types may be supported by a switch type. For information,
contact your service provider.
Programming Call by Call on PRI requires you to program various areas of the
Enterprise Edge system such as:
• Under Line Access, assign the line pool.
•
Under Services, in routing services section, assign which pool to use for routing
and which service type, and service id if required.
•
Under General settings, specify the minimum and maximum values for the
pools.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
168 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
•
Under Hardware, choose DTI (PRI) and select the protocol
Programming Call by Call service selection
Programming the Enterprise Edge system for Call by Call Service Selection with a
PRI interface requires:
•
Provisioning a DTI as PRI if a DTI configured as PRI is not already a part of the
system, see the Maintenance section.
•
Selecting a protocol, on page 99.
•
Programming incoming call routing, on page 152.
•
Programming routes that use the PRI pools, seeCall Routing on page 128.
CbC limits
PRI pool limits for Call by Call services allows you to configure limits for service
types without interacting with the CO. This feature sets the minimum and maximum
number of incoming and outgoing calls per service type for the PRI pool.
The number of active calls will be tracked and whenever a call is being setup, a
check will be made to determine if it will be allowed. Calls will not be allowed if
they exceed the maximum value for that service type or if they will use lines needed
to maintain the minimum value of other service types.
The summation of the minimum values for incoming or outgoing PRI services
cannot exceed the total number of lines in the PRI pool.
The maximum value for an incoming or outgoing PRI service cannot exceed the
total number of lines in the PRI pool.
Programming CbC limits
1. From General Settings, CbC limits, select a pool (PRI-A to PRI-F) that
supports Call by Call routing.
2. Select a service.
The services that display depend on the protocol.
3. Type a number if required under Min incoming:2.
4. Type a number if required under Max incoming:23.
5. Type a number if required under Min outgoing:4.
6. Type a number if required under Max outgoing:23.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 169
Line Pools
All lines in a PRI interface are in the same PRI line pool. This pool cannot contain
any non-PRI lines. There is one PRI pool available for each PRI interface.
Depending on the order that the modules are configured as PRI, Pool PRI-A
represents lines 061 to 083, Pool PRI-B represents lines 085 to 107, and Pool PRI-C
represents lines 109 to 131, etc. to Pool PRI-F. If all PRIs are connected to the same
service provider and use the same protocol, lines 061 to 083, 085 to 107, and 109 to
1311 etc. can be put in the same pool, PRI-A, PRI-B, PRI-C up to PRI-F.
Release reasons
This setting is useful for diagnostic purposes. It shows the reason why an ISDN call
is released. The Release reasons can display as Simple or Detailed text. When the
default None is selected, no release reason appears on the set.
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, General settings, Release reasons.
2. Choose a Text setting: Simple, Detailed, or None.
Note: If you select Simple text, you must disable the Cause code. This is for
diagnostics.
Network Services
Network Services allows you to configure access to outside the network.
ETSI
You can allow users to redirect calls on an ETSI ISDN line to outside the network.
To allow Network Diversion:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, General settings, NetworkServices,
and click on the ETSI heading.
2. In the NetwkDiversion box, select Y.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
170 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Hunt groups
The Hunt groups heading allows you to assign a group of Enterprise Edge sets to a
Hunt group. A single directory number ensure that calls route to the appropriate
Hunt group. The following shows a detailed view of the Hunt groups programming
map.
Hunt groups
Hunt group 01-30
DN
Mode
If busy
Queue time-out
Overflow
Name
Members
Member xxx
DN
Appearance type
Line assignment
Line xxx
You can create a Hunt group for a group of persons performing the same task, and
answering a number of related telephone queries. Some typical uses of Hunt groups
are:
•
a sales department answering questions on product prices or availability
•
a support department answering questions concerning the operation of a product
•
an emergency department answering calls for help
You can use Hunt groups to route calls to a support service such as a Help Line for
a software company. Specialists handling Product A can be in one group, and
specialists handling Product B can be in another group. Incoming calls hunt for the
next available set in the group. If no set is available, the system places the call in a
queue or routed to an overflow set.
In the Hunt groups subheading you can program the following:
•
members of a group
•
member position in a group
•
what lines you assign to a group
•
how the system distributes incoming calls
•
how long the system looks for available members
•
where a call goes if all members are busy
Note: Do not program videophones as members of a Hunt group. Hunt groups
allow one B channel connection at a time and videophones use two B
channels.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 171
The operation of some features varies if the Enterprise Edge set is part of a Hunt
group. The table below shows the affected Features.
Feature
Description
Call Forward All Calls
The system ignores Call Forward All Calls feature and the
Hunt group call rings at the set.
Call Forward No Answer
The system ignores Call Forward No Answer and the
Hunt group call continues to ring until the hunt time
expires.
Call Forward on Busy
The system ignores Call Forward on Busy and the Hunt
group call continues to ring until the hunt time expires.
Do not Disturb on Busy
If this feature is active, the set will not receive notification
of incoming Hunt group calls.
Group Pickup
If a set is part of a Hunt group and a call pickup group,
then an incoming Hunt group call can be picked up from
any set that is in the call pickup group.
Transfer via Hold
The system support transfer for Hunt group sets; however,
you cannot Transfer via Hold. Once you answer a call on
a Hunt group set, its appearance disappears from all other
sets in the Hunt group so that other calls can come in on
the same line.
Priority Call
You cannot make Priority calls to Hunt group DNs.
Ring Again
You cannot use Ring Again when calling a Hunt group
DN.
Line Redirection
The Allow redirect attribute should be set to N for lines
assigned to Hunt groups. For more information, see
Capabilities on page 98.
Page Zones
You cannot include Hunt group DNs in a Page zone.
Voice Call
Hunt groups cannot accept voice calls. Answer buttons
have no appearances for voice calls, and the set does not
ring.
Adding or removing members from a group
Any Enterprise Edge set, or portable can be a members of a Hunt group. An
Enterprise Edge set can be in more than one Hunt group but is considered a member
in each Hunt group, increasing the total number of members in the system.
There can be only one appearance of the same Hunt group on a set. Hunt group DNs
cannot be members of other Hunt groups. A DN can be associated with a member
of a Hunt group and is called a member DN.
Consult your customer service representative to determine your Hunt group number
range.
To add a member to a Hunt group:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
172 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
3. Expand the Hunt group heading and click Members.
4. Click the Add button above the navigation tree.
5. Type a number in the DN number box.
6. Click the Save button.
To remove a member from a Hunt group:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Expand the Hunt group heading and click Members.
4. Click the member (for example, Member 001) to be removed.
5. Click the Delete button above the navigation tree.
To remove all members from a Hunt group:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Expand the Hunt group heading and click Members.
4. Click the Delete All button above the navigation tree.
Moving members of a group
Member order within a Hunt group is important. The member order determines how
a call routes through a Hunt group.
To move a member within a Hunt group:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Expand the Hunt group heading and click Members.
4. Click a member from the member list (for example Member 003).
5. On the Configuration menu, click Move.
6. Type the new member number (001, 002, etc.) in the Move to box.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 173
7. Click the OK button.
The system automatically reorders the list.
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group
Configure the prime set for a Hunt group’s line to None to avoid delayed ring
transfer of external Hunt group calls to the prime set before the Hunt group can
receive the call. For more information about programming line settings, see Prime
set on page 113.
You can assign a line to only one Hunt group.
To assign a line to a Hunt group:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Click Line Assignment.
4. Click the Add button above the navigation tree.
5. Type a line number (for example 061) in the Line number box.
6. Click the Save button.
To unassign a line:
1. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
2. Click Line Assignment.
3. Click the line number (for example, Line 061) to be deleted.
4. Click the Delete button above the navigation tree.
To unassign all lines in a Hunt group:
1. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
2. Click Line assignment.
3. Click the Delete All button above the navigation tree.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
174 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Setting the Distribution mode
There are three modes of call distribution:
•
Broadcast—rings each set in the group simultaneously. Hunt group handles
calls one at a time; other calls put in a queue. As soon as you pick up a call, the
call next in the queue presents to the Hunt group without waiting for queue
time-out.
In Broadcast mode, a single incoming call rings simultaneously at all the sets in
a group. This way, all receptionists in the group share the load of answering
large volumes of calls. All sets automatically display the calling line
identification (CLID), if available. A familiar example is a fund-raising
campaign where a group of operators wait to take each call as it comes in.
•
Linear—starts the call at the first set in the Hunt group and distribution is
complete when the first free set is found. All calls present simultaneously.
Distribution is order based.
In Linear mode, you can program your top salesperson to be the first member
of the Hunt group to receive incoming calls.
•
Rotary—the call starts at the set after the one that answers the last call.
Distribution is complete when the next free set is found. Call can present
simultaneously. Distribution is order based.
In Rotary mode, you can ensure that all your helpline people receive calls on an
equal basis, rather than one person receiving the majority of calls. The call rings
at one set at a time in a round-robin fashion.
If a Hunt group has available members but nobody answers the call, the call routes
through the Hunt group list until either someone answers the call or the queue
time-out occurs. In the latter case, the call routes to the overflow position. Once a
call goes to the overflow position, it is no longer a Hunt group call.
To set the call distribution mode:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Click a Mode value Linear, Rotary, Broadcast and press Enter.
Setting the hunt delay
This setting allows you to program the number of rings the system permits at a Hunt
group set before moving on to the next set in the Hunt group. This attribute appears
only if the distribution mode is set to Linear or Rotary. For more information, see
Setting the Distribution mode on page 174.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt Groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Click a Hunt Delay value 1 to 10 and press Enter.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 175
Programming busy line setting
A Hunt group is busy if one of two scenarios exists:
•
An incoming Hunt group call presents to all of its members.
•
All of its members are active on a Hunt group call.
There are three routing options if a Hunt group is busy:
•
Busy tone—the caller gets a busy tone (PRI lines only).
•
Overflow—the call routes to an overflow position. If the overflow DN is the
hunt group DN for that same Hunt group, the overflow option does not appear.
•
Queue—the call stays in the system for a period of time. Within this period of
time, the call presents to a member if one becomes available. When time-out
occurs, the call presents to an overflow position.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Click an If Busy value: Busy tone, Overflow, or Queue, and press Enter.
Queue time-out
This setting allows you to program the number of seconds a call remains in the Hunt
group queue before it routes to the overflow position.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Click a Queue timeout value: 15, 30, 45, 60, 120, or 180 and press Enter.
Overflow set
The Overflow setting allows you to program the overflow set where unanswered
Hunt group calls go. Unless the overflow position is a Hunt group set, the call is no
longer a Hunt group call. If the overflow set is a Hunt group set, Enterprise Edge
considers the call as a new call and it goes to the bottom of the queue.
The overflow set can be a set DN number associated with a voice mailbox:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Type the DN number in the Overflow box, and press Enter.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
176 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Name
The Name setting allows you to program the Hunt group name, such as SERVICE
or SALES. The name can be up to seven characters in length.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hunt groups.
2. Click a Hunt group (Hunt group 1-30).
3. Type a new name and press Enter.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 177
Companion
The Companion heading allows you to assign portable telephones to the system,
check Base Station parameters, and enable and disable registration through
programming. The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Companion
programming map.
Companion
Registration
Registration enabled
Credits available
Registration password
Portable DNs
DN xxx
DN status
Radio data
Credits available
Total credits
System LID
Re-evaluation
Status
Radios
Radio xxxx
Radio
Cell assignment
Antenna type
Cells
Cell 01
Cell Radios
Cell neighbors
Cell radio neighbors
Note: Enterprise Edge Companion Wireless requires a software keycode to
activate.
Registration
Software Keys are required to activate wireless capabilities.
To take advantage of the wireless capabilities available to your Enterprise
Edge system, you must first enable a certain number of portable credits using
Software Keys.
You must enable registration for the entire Enterprise Edge system to allow
registration of individual portables.
To enable user registration:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Registration.
2. Select a Registration enabled option: Y (Yes) or N (No).
3. Press Enter.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
178 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Registration should normally be disabled.
For security reasons, and to prevent unauthorized users from being registered
to your system, disable Registration when you have finished registering the
portables.
Changing the Registration password
To ensure that no one registers unauthorized portables to your system, there is a
separate level of password access. You can, and should, set your own password to
prevent unauthorized handsets from registering on your system.
Change password to avoid incorrect registration.
To ensure accurate registration, change the Registration password before
registering any portables. If there is another wireless system in radio range, and
both systems have the same Registration password and Registration enabled,
you may accidentally register on the other system instead of on your own.
The default Registration password is 72346.
To program a new Registration password:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Registration.
2. Type a new password in the Registration password box.
Tip
You can choose any combination of one to six digits. It is easier to remember
the password if the digits spell a word. Provide this password only to selected
personnel to prevent unauthorized access to programming. The implications of
such access may include the rearrangement of line assignments, which could
affect the operation of Enterprise Edge.
Portable DNs
Once you enable registration for your Enterprise Edge system, a series of extension
numbers (469 to 500) are automatically available for registration. Check that an
extension number is available before registering a portable telephone to it.
If the extension number shows a status of Available, it is ready for registering a
Companion portable telephone.
If the extension number shows a status of Registered, a Companion portable
telephone is already registered to that extension number. In this case, you can either
pick a different extension number, or deregister the current portable telephone. You
must perform deregistration both at the portable and from Unified Manager.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 179
To view registered and available DNs:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Registration, Portable
DNs.
2. Click a portable DN (for example, DN 471).
The DN status box appears.
Deregistering a portable
Deregister an extension number from Unified Manager when:
•
You must replace the portable due to loss or breakage.
•
You want to assign the handset to someone with a different telephone number
than the previous user.
To deregister a portable:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Registration, Portable
DNs.
2. Click a portable DN (for example, DN 471).
The DN status window appears.
3. On the Configuration menu, click Deregister.
Tip
This procedure does not clear the registration data in the portable. You must
also deregister from the portable telephone (“on-the-air” deregistration).
Radio data
The Radio data heading allows you to view the number of credits available, the total
number of credits and the System LID.
1. From Companion, click on the Radio data heading.
The Radio data window appears.
Re-evaluation
Re-evaluation automatically assigns the proper cell configuration to each radio in a
Base Station. When you add or remove Base Stations, you must apply
Re-evaluation to the system.
If the Re-evaluation status reads Required, you can carry out the re-evaluation.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
180 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
To view the Re-evaluation status:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Radio data.
2. Click Re-evaluation.
3. On the Configuration menu click Re-eval now or Schedule.
Radios
The Radios setting allows you to program Base Stations settings.
Cell assignment
A cell is the area covered by one or more radios in close proximity. As you move
around your office while on a call with your portable, the call hands off from one
cell to another. A call on a portable hands off from one cell to another only if
Enterprise Edge assigns those cells as neighbors. Enterprise Edge automatically
assigns cell neighbors and re-evaluates the cell-to-cell configuration when you add
or remove Base Stations.
The cell assignment setting allows you to see if a Base Station radio is assigned to
a cell in the Companion system.
To view the cell assignment:
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Radio data, Radios.
2. Click Radio nnnn. Where nnnn is the four-digit radio number.
The Radio screen appears. The Radio box displays the radio number. The
Cell assignment box appears if the radio is Assigned or Unassigned.
3. In the Antenna type box select if the radio antenna is Internal or External.
Cells
Cell programming allows you to examine the cell radio, cell neighbor, and cell radio
neighbor settings.
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Radio data, Cells.
2. Select a cell number (Cell 01 to Cell 32).
Cell Radios
The Cell radios subheading allows you to view the 5-digit number of any radios
assigned to this cell. For example, if radio 07012 is in the cell, 07012 assigned
appears.
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Radio Data, Cells, Cell
nn, Cell radios.
2. Click on the radio number to view the setting: Assigned or Unassigned.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 181
Cell neighbors
The Cell neighbors subheading allows you to view the 2-digit number of any cells
that border a particular cell in a system.
1. Select Services, Telephony Services, Companion, Radio Data, Cells, Cell
nn, Cell neighbors.
2. Click on the cell number to see the settings: Assigned or Unassigned.
For example, cell 01, Neighbour:03 and Neighbour:04 display. This means
that cells 03 and 04 are assigned as cell neighbors.
Cell radio neighbors
The Cell radio neighbors subheading allows you to view the 2-digit number of any
cells that border a particular cell in a system (the cell neighbors) plus any cells that
border the cell neighbors.
1. Select Services, Telephony services, Companion, Radio Data, Cells, Cell
nn, Cell radio neighbors.
2. Click on the cell number to see the settings: Assigned or Unassigned.
For example, cell 01, Radio neighbour:03, Radio neighbour:04 display, and
Radio neighbour:11. Cell 11 does not appear as a cell neighbor (see the
example under Cell neighbor), therefore it must be a neighbor of cell 03 or 04.
Register individual portables
You must do two things to register each portable with Enterprise Edge:
•
Register the portables by entering the Registration password on each one.
•
Verify that the portable operates properly.
When you distribute the portables, tell the users that the portables are registered and
give them the corresponding extension numbers.
Tip
You can register a portable to more than one system. You cannot register a
portable to more than one extension number per system. You cannot register
more than one portable to one extension number.
If a portable telephone is to be used in more than one Enterprise Edge system,
its owner must know which registration slot number was used to register the
portable telephone with each system. (It is preferable that each user have the
system they use most often registered in slot 1.)
If a portable telephone is lost or broken, deregister it from the system before
replacing it with another portable telephone.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
182 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Portable telephone programming
Once the registration process is complete, portable telephone programming is much
the same as it is for Enterprise Edge desk telephones. Some of the programming
settings do not affect the operation of the portable.
The table below shows the recommended settings for Enterprise Edge.
Programming level Programming
option
Setting
Notes
Terminals & sets/
Capabilities
Forward
no answer
Fwd to: <DN>
Fwd Delay:
<no. of rings>
This stops the Companion portable from
ringing when the call has been forwarded to
its new destination. The portable user can still
answer the call, but it does not ring.
The settings for Forward no answer are found
under Terminals & sets, Capabilities in the
Unified Manager.
Forward on busy
Y
Do not disturb
on busy
N
Handsfree
N
Handsfree
answerback
None
Pickup group
<group
number>
Paging
Y
Page zone
1
Direct dial
Set 1
Hotline
None
Priority call
Y
Requires special configuration of hardware
and programming
Set lock
Y
Does not apply to portables.
Allow last number Y
Does not apply to portables.
Allow saved
number
Y
Does not apply to portables.
Allow link
Y or N
This can be set to N for portables.
Terminals & sets/
Restrictions/Set
Restrictions
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
A portable can be part of a pickup group and
answers calls ringing at telephones in the
same group when the user enters *76.
(See Capabilities on page 98 for more
information about Group pickup.)
A portable cannot be a Direct dial telephone.
It can use the Direct dial digit.
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 183
Hospitality
Hospitality Services (HS) is a group of features that increases the value of the
Enterprise Edge system in small- to medium-sized facilities such as hotels, motels
or hospitals. The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Hospitality
programming map.
Hospitality
Service change time
Desk password
Room condition password
Set/room settings
DN 221-344
Room number
Requires desk password
Call permissions
Vacant filter
Basic filter
Mid filter
Full filter
Alarm data
Attempts
Retry interval
Alarm duration
Time format
Expired alarms
In a hotel setting, guests gain improved services through immediate access to basic
functions like:
•
Wake-up service or reminders
•
Accurate tracking of the room’s service requirements
The system classifies Enterprise Edge telephones as one of three types of sets: a
common set, a room set or a Hospitality Services (HS) admin set.
Common set
A common set can be a telephone found in a lobby, office, or common area. It is not
associated with a room and does not have access to all of the HS features.
Common sets are Enterprise Edge telephones or analog telephones connected to an
analog terminal adapter (ATA), or an analog station module (ASM).
Room set
A Room set is a set you assign to a room. You can assign up to five sets to the same
room (they all share same room number).
Room sets can be any Enterprise Edge telephone or an analog telephone connected
to an ATA or an ASM.
Hospitality Services (HS) admin set
A Hospitality Services (HS) admin set is any two-line display Enterprise Edge
telephone. You can program an HS admin set to require you to enter the Desk admin
password before the system grants access to HS administrative features.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
184 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Alarm time (AL) feature
The Alarm time feature provides an alarm clock capability on Enterprise Edge and
analog telephones that connect to an ATA or an ASM. You can program both room
sets and common sets to sound an audible alert at time you request.
You can program one Alarm time within a 24 hour period on a room or common set
and you must reset the alarm daily. When the alarm sounds, all sets in a given room
alert. When you cancel the alarm on any set cancels the alarm on all the sets in the
room. A new Alarm time entered on a room or common set overwrites any alarm
set previously.
If the Enterprise Edge system experiences a power failure, the failure can result in
lost Alarm times. When the Enterprise Edge system is running and the system’s
time resets, the missed Alarm times alert. At all times, the Enterprise Edge system
allows up to a maximum of 25 sets that can alert at the same time.
For more information about programming this feature, see the Enterprise Edge
Feature Telephone Programming Guide.
Service change time
The Hospitality setting allows you to enter the time when occupied rooms change
state from Service done to Service required. The Service change time is an primary
part of the Room condition (RC) feature.
To change the service time:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, and click on the Hospitality heading.
2. Type the time in the Service change time box according to the following
format and press Enter:
hh is a number from 00 to 23
mm is a number from 00 to 59
Desk password
The Desk password setting controls access to all Hospitality Services
administrative features. The default Desk password is 4677. It is recommended that
you change the password to prevent unauthorized use.
To change the Desk password:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, and click on the Hospitality heading.
2. Type a password (1 to 6 digits) in the Desk password box and press Enter.
Room condition password
The Room condition password setting controls access to the Room condition
feature (ƒ°‡fl). The default Room condition password is None. For
more information about using ƒ°‡fl, see the Enterprise Edge Feature
Telephone Programming Guide.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 185
To create a Room condition password:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, and click on the Hospitality heading.
2. Type a password (1 to 6 digits) in the Room condition password box, and
press Enter.
Set/room settings
The Set/room settings allows you to assign sets to a room and enable access control
to HS administrative features.
To assign a set to a room:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hospitality, Set/room settings.
2. Click a DN number (DN 221-344).
3. Type a room number in the Room number box, and press Enter.
To enable or disable password control:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hospitality, Set/room settings.
2. Click a DN number (DN 221-344).
3. Click a Requires desk password value: Y or N, and press Enter.
The default setting is Y. This means that you cannot access administrative
features from a room set without first entering a valid password. You can
define a Desk password under the Hospitality heading. For more information,
see Desk password on page 184.
Call permissions
The Call permissions heading allows you to assign dialing filters to room sets based
on the room occupancy status. The Vacant state indicates that the room is empty.
The Basic, Mid and Full states indicate that the room is occupied. The default
dialing filter for all Room occupancy states (Vacant, Basic, Mid, and Full) is 00.
The dialing filters are standard Enterprise Edge Restriction filters (Filters 00-99).
For more information, see Restriction filters on page 124.
To assign dialing filters:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hospitality, and click on the Call
permissions heading.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
186 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
2. Type a 2-digit filter number in the Vacant, Basic, Mid or Full filter boxes,
and press Enter.
Alarm data
The Alarm data heading allows you to program the following alarm settings:
•
Attempts - the number of times the Alarm time feature attempts to alert the
occupant before cancelling.
•
Retry interval - the interval period in minutes between each attempt.
•
Alarm duration - the period in seconds that a set alerts for each alarm attempt.
•
Time format - the hour format used, 12-hour or 24-hour.
To define the Alarm Data:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hospitality, and click on the Alarm
data heading.
2. Click an Attempts value: 1 to 5, and press Enter. The default value is 3
attempts.
3. Click a Retry interval value: 2 to 9, and press Enter. The default value is 4
minutes.
4. Click an Alarm duration value: 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 or 50, and press
Enter. The default value is 15 seconds.
5. Click a Time format: 12 hour or 24 hour and press Enter.
Expired alarms
The Expired alarms setting allows you to program the system to notify a set when
a Hospitality alarm expires. You can also program whether a caller hears a tone
when an alarm expires.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Hospitality, Alarm data, and click
on the Expired alarms heading.
2. In the Notify set box select: None or DN:.
3. If you select DN:, type in the DN number that you want to notify when an
alarm expires.
4. In the Use tone box select Y or N.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 187
Telco features
The Telco features heading allows you to define settings for voice message center
numbers and outgoing name and number blocking. The following illustration shows
a detailed view of the Telco Features navigation tree.
Telco features
Voice message center numbers
Center 1 - 5
External #
Message wait indication string
Message wait cancellation string
Outgoing name and number blocking (ONN)
Tone
Pulse
BRI
Voice message center numbers
If you subscribe to a voice message service outside your office, you can access it
through your Enterprise Edge system. You can specify what voice message center
you use for each external line that receives message waiting indication. This setting
specifies the external telephone numbers that the Message feature dials to retrieve
voice messages.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Telco features, and expand Voice
message center numbers in the navigation tree.
2. Click on the Center number you want to program. For example, Center 1.
The Center 1 screen appears.
3. Enter the External # for up to five message centers: Center 1 through
Center 5. The default for each voice message center number is an empty box.
Tips
A telephone does not show that external voice messages are waiting unless you
enable External voice message set. The setting is in under Terminals & sets,
Line access, Line assignment.
You can program up to five voice message center numbers, but many systems
require only one.
DPNSS settings
•
Message wait indication string (AN*1#): indicates that the message center has
a message in the mailbox. This is a default NSI string for message waiting.
•
Message wait cancellation string (AN*0#): indicates that the voice mails have
been retrieved. Again, this is a default NSI string for message waiting.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
188 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Outgoing name and number blocking (ONN)
The Outgoing name and number blocking feature blocks the outgoing name and
number on a per call basis. When you use this feature, the system flags the call to
the CO so that the name and number does not present to the person you call. See
Outgoing name and number blocking (ONN) on page 186 for more information.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Telco features, ONN blocking.
2. Enter the telephone number for ONN blocking in the Tone, Pulse, or BRI
boxes.
Voice Mail
For information on Voice Mail service configuration, refer to the following
documents:
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Reference Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Quick Reference Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Voice Messaging Programming Record
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 AMIS Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 AMIS User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Networking Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Networking User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 FAX Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 FAX User Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Unified Messaging Client Installation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Unified Messaging Quick Reference Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide
•
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Call Center Agent Cards
•
Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide
Call Detail Recording
For information on Call Detail Recording, refer to the Enterprise Edge Call Detail
Recording System Administrator Guide.
TAPI
For information on TAPI Service Provider, refer to the Enterprise Edge 2.0 TSP
Server Configuration Guide.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 189
Console Service
For information on Console Service, refer to the Enterprise Edge 2.0 Attendant
Console Set Up and Operation Guide or the Enterprise Edge 2.0 Attendant Console
User Guide.
VoIP Gateway
The Voice over IP (VoIP) Gateway settings allow you to configure the Local
(H323) and Remote Gateways for Enterprise Edge.
To view and change the status of VoIP gateway settings:
1. Choose Services, and click on the VoIP Gateway heading.
The VoIP Gateway Summary screen appears.
2. View the VoIP Gateway Summary attributes and configure the status
according to the table below:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows the description of the VoIP gateway.
Version
Shows the version of the VoIP gateway.
Status
Allows you to choose Enabled, Disabled, Paused, or Continue for the VoIP
gateway service.
3. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
VoIP local and remote gateways
To configure VoIP local and remote gateways:
1. Choose VoIP Gateway and click on H323 Gateway heading (Local).
The Local Gateway screen appears.
2. Configure the VoIP Local Gateway attributes according to the table below:
Attribute
Description
Preferred Codecs Allows you to specify the local VoIP gateway to convert voice to data packets
1st to 5th
and vice versa. The system negotiates these parameters during call setup with
the other VoIP gateway involved in the call. Enterprise Edge negotiates
Codecs in the order of preference you specify here. Refer to the VoIP Gateway
User Guide for a discussion on these values.
Echo
Cancellation
Allows you to enable or disable the Echo Cancellation feature in the VoIP
calls.
Non-linear
Processing
Allows you to enable or disable non-linear processing.
Silence
Compression
Allows you to enable or disable silence compression.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
190 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
Fallback to
Circuit Switched
Allows you to enable or disable fallback to the circuit switched network
(PSTN).
Voice Jitter
Buffer
Allows you to specify the voice jitter buffer size in the range of 20-200. The
default setting is 50. Press the Tab key.
Fax Jitter Buffer
Allows you to specify the FAX jitter buffer size in the range of 20-200. The
default setting is 50. Press the Tab key.
Local Gateway
IP
Allows you to specify the local VoIP gateway IP Address when Enterprise
Edge interacts with other VoIP gateways. Since the Enterprise Edge server
typically has more than one IP interfaces and more than one IP Address, you
must choose one that the VoIP gateway uses. This address must match the
entry for this gateway in the remote gateway table of those VoIP gateways.
Ensure other gateways can reach this address via IP. For example, IP-LAN1.
Press the Tab key.
Gatekeeper
Allows you to specify the IP address for an external gatekeeper. Set this to
None if the gatekeeper functions locally.
The default is None.
Call Signaling
Allows you to specify how directory numbers convert into the destination IP
address.
Direct: gateway resolves addresses locally using the remote gateway table.
GatekeeperRouted: gateway sends call signaling messages to the gatekeeper.
You must set Gatekeeper parameters to support this.
GatekeeperResolved: gateway uses endpoint location services of the external
gatekeeper to resolve addresses before sending call signaling directly to
destination. This is not supported in release 2.0.
The default is N/A.
Alias Names
Allows you to enter the text name that Enterprise Edge uses to register with
the Gatekeeper. This identifies the H323 (Local) gateway.
The default is N/A.
3. Press the Tab key save the settings.
Remote Gateway
To add remote gateways:
1. Choose VoIP Gateway, and click on the Remote Gateway heading.
The Remote Gateway list appears.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Add Entry.
The Remote Gateway screen appears.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 191
3. Configure the VoIP Remote Gateway attributes according to the table below:
Setting
Definition
Name
Allows you to specify a logical name for the remote VoIP gateway. You can
edit this setting only when you add a new gateway entry. While you modify an
existing entry, this name cannot be changed.
Destination IP
Allows you to specify IP Address for the remote VoIP gateway. You can enter a
fully qualified DNS Name or just host name (where applicable) or IP address in
dotted format. Press the Tab key.
QoS Monitor
Allows you to enable or disable QoS Monitor for this VoIP gateway.
Transmit
Threshold
Allows you to specify the transmit threshold while interacting with this VoIP
gateway. Press the Tab key.
Receive
Threshold
Allows you to specify the receive threshold while interacting with this VoIP
gateway.
Gateway Type
Allows you to specify the VoIP gateway type. VoiceNet is the only permitted
value in Release 2.0.
Destination
Digits
Allows you to specify the destination digits for this gateway. When the local
gateway sees this prefix, it forwards the call to the VoIP gateway at the
specified destination IP Address. Press the Tab key.
4. Click the Save button.
To modify remote gateways:
1. In the Remote Gateway table, click the remote gateway you want to modify.
2. On the Configuration menu click Modify Entry.
The Remote Gateway screen appears.
3. Modify the Remote Gateway attributes.
4. Click the Save button.
To delete remote gateways:
1. In the Remote Gateway table, click the remote gateway you want to delete.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Delete Entry.
A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
192 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
DHCP
Enterprise Edge provides DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) service to
branch office clients. This service dynamically assigns IP addresses to branch office
PCs, so you do not need to manually assign an IP address to each PC.
To configure Enterprise Edge as your DHCP server, you must create a scope of IP
addresses for each LAN interface and then allocate a block of IP addresses to that
scope. If you already have a DHCP server then you need to set up Enterprise Edge
as a relay agent to that server.
Tips
Because Enterprise Edge retrieves default DHCP parameters from the LAN
interface parameters, you must configure a LAN interface before you configure
the DHCP server for that interface. For information on configuring a LAN
interface, see LAN1 on page 47.
You must define one DHCP scope for each LAN interface. For DHCP service, there
are global attributes that affect all scopes, and there are attributes that are specific
for each scope.r
Tip
Use Enterprise Edge DHCP default configuration unless your network does not
allow it.
If you must modify the DHCP default configuration on Enterprise Edge, make sure
configuration settings are consistent throughout the network and take the following
into consideration:
•
If a change in the DHCP configuration resulted in a change in the ‘Router’ and
‘Subnet mask’ fields for a given scope of IP addresses, perform one of the
following actions to ensure good system operation:
- Execute ipconfig/release and ipconfig/renew on each of the workstations. For
Windows 95 and Windows 98, use the winipcfg.
- For clients that do not support ipconfig and winipcfg, a reboot is necessary to
renew their IP addresses.
•
If you made a change in the DNS server configuration or DNS name field,
repeat the actions stated in step 1 above to ensure proper connectivity with the
network.
•
Always schedule a down time when making changes to the Enterprise Edge
DHCP server configuration to minimize impact on your network users.
•
Reboot the Enterprise Edge system for the changes to take effect.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 193
To configure global attributes for DHCP:
1. On the navigation tree, choose Services and click on the DHCP heading to
view the Mode, Global Options and Summary screens for DHCP.
2. Select the DHCP mode, DHCPRelayAgent or DHCPserver.
Configuring a DHCPServer
3. Configure the settings in the DHCPServer Global Options and DHCP
Summary screen:
Setting
Definition
IP Domain Name This setting defaults to the value entered in the Domain box of the DNS
Summary page (see DNS) because all the DHCP clients of an Enterprise
Edge server are in the same DNS domain as the Enterprise Edge server.
Enterprise Edge runs only a DNS cache and does not introduce another DNS
zone.
The domain name is passed to the client when Enterprise Edge responds to a
client’s DHCP requests.
Use caution if you change this.
WINS Node
Type
Allows you to specify a clients WINS node type.
Enterprise Edge automatically sets this value to 8 (indicating H-Node) on all
DHCP clients of Enterprise Edge. This setting configures the DHCP client
PCs to use p-node name resolution before resorting to b-node name resolution,
which is efficient when a WINS server is configured for the network.
Enterprise Edge also includes a WINS server.
Other options available are:
1: indicates a b-node that uses broadcast mechanism for NetBIOS name
resolution.
2: indicates a p-node that uses point-to-point mechanism involving a WINS
Server for NetBIOS name resolution.
4: indicates a m-node that first uses broadcast and then point-to-point
mechanism for NetBIOS name resolution.
Use caution if you change this.
Description
Provides a description of the Enterprise Edge server.
Version
Shows the version number of the Enterprise Edge server.
Status
Allows you to enable or disable the DHCP server. When you disable the
server, you need to assign static IP addresses to clients.
4. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
194 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Configuring a DHCPRelayAgent
If you choose DHCPRelayAgent as the mode, the Global Options screen and Server
List appear and the Configuration menu is enabled.
1. Choose what the log displays, Errors Only, Warnings Also, Maximum or
Disabled. The default is Errors Only.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Add server.
The Server list dialog box appears.
3. Type in the IP Address of the server.
Note: You can specify a number of servers. The routing component searches
the list for the server on the same subnet as the interface and forwards
the packet.
4. Click Save.
LAN settings for DHCPServer
If you configured the DHCP mode for DHCPServer in the previous procedure then
configure LAN1 scope attributes as follows. If the mode is DHCPRelayAgent refer
to LAN settings for DHCPRelayAgent on page 198.
1. Choose Services. Click the DHCP navigation key to expand the navigation
tree.
2. Click on the LAN1 heading.
Note: If your Enterprise Edge system has multiple LAN interfaces, you can
see multiple DHCP scopes under DHCP. They are named LAN1,
LAN2, etc. This section describes configuring the DHCP scope for
LAN1. Follow the same instructions to configure any of the
parameters under the scope for LAN2.
The frame displays the LAN Scope Specific Options, Address Range, and
Excluded Address Range screens.
3. Scroll down to view all settings.
4. Configure the scope-specific settings. Refer to the DHCP LAN attribute table
below.
5. Configure the LAN address range and the LAN excluded address services
screens through the menu. Refer to the DHCP LAN attribute table below.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 195
Note: If the IP Address or subnet mask for a LAN interface changes, the
system creates or modifies the corresponding DHCP scope for the
interface. This operation also involves setting default values for some
parameters. By default, Enterprise Edge sets the IP Address of
corresponding LAN interface to DNS Server, WINS Server, Default
Gateway options of the scope. It also sets the lease time to 3 days and
creates a range of addresses for the scope. If the IP Address of the
LAN interface is in the lower half of the subnet, the address range set
for the scope includes all the address above the LAN interface address.
If the IP Address of the LAN interface is in the upper half of the
subnet, the address range set for the scope includes all the address
below the LAN interface address. By default, the scope is enabled.
The DHCP LAN1 Scope Specific Options, Address Range and Excluded Address
Range attributes are:
Attribute
Description
DNS Server
Allows you to specify the DNS server.
Enterprise Edge automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP
Address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this
value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
WINS Server
Allows you to specify the WINS server.
Enterprise Edge automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP
Address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this
value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
Default Gateway
Allows you to specify the default next-hop router.
Enterprise Edge automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP
Address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this
value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
Lease Time
Allows you to specify the time, in seconds, for an address assignment until
the client’s lease expires.
Scope Status
Allows you to enable or disable the scope.
Address Range
Allows you to specify the valid IP addresses for DHCP clients.
Excluded Address
Allows you to specify IP addresses that are not available to DHCP clients.
Tips
When DNS is disabled in Enterprise Edge, this box must be set to a remote
DNS server.
6. Press the TAB key to save the settings.
To modify, add, or delete a DHCP address range or excluded address range, assign
only one IP Address range for a DHCP Scope and exclude ranges of addresses in it
from being assigned to clients.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
196 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
To modify address ranges:
1. Click an address in the address range table.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Modify Address Ranges.
The Address Range dialog box appears.
3. Type the necessary changes in the fields.
4. Click the Save button to save the modifications.
To add an address range:
1. On the Configuration menu, click Add Address Range.
The Address Range dialog box appears.
2. In the Range box, type the range identifier.
The range box uniquely identifies a range value in the scope. The value for
this setting must follow certain conventions. It must always start with the
prefix 'R' followed by a unique number identifying the range in the table. For
example, 'R2' is a valid name. Specify nonrecurring values for the unique
number. If you specify an existing range name, it modifies the existing range.
If you use nonsequential numbers the system automatically reassigns
sequential numbers. When you modify a range, you cannot change the range
name. The range name does not have any significance other than identifying
an entry.
3. In the Start Address box, type the start address.
4. In the End Address box, type the end address.
Scroll down to see all setting fields.
Make sure the start address and end address are in the same subnet.
5. Click the Save button to save the address range.
To delete an address range:
1. Click an address in the Address Range table.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Delete Address Ranges.
A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
Note: When you delete or modify an IP Address range it removes any
excluded addresses that are in the original address range value.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 197
To modify excluded address ranges:
1. Click an excluded address in the Excluded Address Range table.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Modify Excluded Address Ranges.
The Excluded Address Range dialog box appears.
3. Type the necessary changes.
4. Click the Save button to save the modifications.
To add excluded address ranges:
1. On the Configuration menu, click Add Excluded Address Range.
The Excluded Address Range dialog box appears.
2. In the Range box, type the range identifier.
Note: The range setting uniquely identifies an excluded range value in the
scope. The value for this setting must follow certain conventions. You
must type the prefix 'E' followed by a unique number identifying the
range in the table. For example, 'E2' is a valid name. Specify
nonrecurring values for the unique number. If you specify an existing
excluded range name, the system modifies the existing range. If you
use non-sequential numbers the system automatically reassigns
sequential numbers. When you modify an excluded range, you cannot
change the range name. The excluded range name does not have any
significance, other than uniquely identifying an entry.
3. In the Start Address box, type the start address.
4. In the End Address box, type the end address.
Scroll down to see all setting fields.
Note: Make sure the start address and end address are in the same subnet,
and an excluded address range is completely contained in an IP
address range specified for the subnet.
5. Click the Save button to save the excluded address range.
To delete an excluded address range:
1. Click an excluded address in the Excluded Address Range table.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Delete Excluded Address Ranges.
A message prompts you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
198 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
LAN settings for DHCPRelayAgent
If you configured the DHCP mode as DHCPRelayAgent (refer to Configuring a
DHCPRelayAgent on page 194), then configure LAN1 scope attributes as follows.
If the mode is DHCPServer refer to LAN settings for DHCPServer on page 194.
1. Choose Services. Click the DHCP navigation key to expand the navigation
tree.
2. Click on the LAN1 heading.
Note: If your Enterprise Edge system has multiple LAN interfaces, you can
see multiple DHCP scopes under DHCP. They are named LAN1,
LAN2, etc. This section describes configuring the DHCP scope for
LAN1. Follow the same instructions to configure any of the
parameters under the scope for LAN2.
The window displays the Relay DHCP packets, Hop-count threshold, and
Seconds-since-boot threshold parameters.
Configure the scope-specific settings. Refer to the DHCP LAN Relay Agent
Interface Parameters table below:
Attribute
Description
Relay DHCP
packets
Allows you to enable or disable the relay of DHCP packets on this
interface.
Enterprise Edge automatically disables this function for each interface.
Hop-count
threshold.
Allows you to specify the maximum number of hops. After this number of
hops, DHCP requests are discarded.
The values are 0 to 16. The default value is 4.
Seconds-since-boot
threshold
Allows you to specify the minimum number of seconds since the last boot,
before Enterprise Edge forwards DHCP requests.
The values are 1to 3600. The default value is 4.
3. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 199
DNS
Enterprise Edge functions as both a gateway to the Internet and as a DNS proxy.
Note: If your PC is a DHCP client under Enterprise Edge, you do not have to let
your workstations know that Enterprise Edge is your Internet gateway.
When Enterprise Edge receives DNS requests from clients, it first checks its local
cache for name entries and records. If found locally, Enterprise Edge immediately
responds to clients. Otherwise, Enterprise Edge creates a new DNS request to the
remote Primary or Secondary DNS servers on behalf of the client. If the remote
DNS server responds with the requested records, they are forwarded to clients and
cached in Enterprise Edge.
Guidelines for Using Enterprise Edge DNS service
Consider the following guidelines when using DNS:
•
If you enable the Enterprise Edge DNS service, make sure that you configure
each workstation on the network to use Enterprise Edge as DNS server.
•
When you disable Enterprise Edge DNS service, set the DNS Server field in
DHCP configuration to the remote DNS server IP address. If DHCP service is
also disabled in Enterprise Edge, you must configure each workstation on your
network to use the remote DNS server
1. To configure DNS services settings, select Services, and click on the DNS
heading in the navigation tree.
The DNS Summary screen appears.
2. Configure the DNS Summary attributes as per the table below:
Attribute
Description
Description
Allows you to view the description of the server in cache mode.
Version
Allows you to view the version of the software interface.
Status
Allows you to enable or disable the DNS cache proxy in Enterprise Edge.
Domain
Allows you to specify the domain name that Enterprise Edge and its DHCP
clients uses. When you modify the Domain, the setting automatically copies to
Domain Name global options under DHCP service.
Primary (and
Secondary)
Server
Allows you to specify the primary server IP address in a valid dot format. You
can specify more than one address if you separate them by a space. DNS cache
uses them in the order you specify, to resolve names.
Forward Timeout Allows you to specify the time-out, in seconds, to resolve queries using the
DNS servers that you specify in DNS server.
3. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Note: The DNS proxy carries security features because it keeps all of the internal
IP addresses from external web servers. For information on other security
features, see NAT (Network Address Translation) on page 232 and IP
Firewall Filters on page 235.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
200 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
IP Routing
The IP Routing service setting allows you to select, add or delete routing protocol
on specific interfaces, choose routing protocol options, and add or delete static
routes.
Enterprise Edge supports the following IP routing protocols:
•
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
•
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Enterprise Edge supports RIP, a widely-used protocol for managing routing
information in a self-contained network, such as a corporate intranet. RIP measures
the shortest path between two points on a network in terms of the number of hops
between those points.
Enterprise Edge router sends RIP routing information updates that list all the other
hosts it knows about, to its nearest neighbor host every 30 seconds. The neighbor
host sends the information to its next neighbor, until all the hosts in the network
know the routing paths, a state known as network convergence. RIP uses a hop
count to determine network distance. Each router in the network uses the routing
table information to determine the next host for the packet, until it reaches the
destination.
Enterprise Edge supports on demand routing table update and periodic routing table
update. On demand routing table update is available only on demand-dial
interfaces. Periodic update operates efficiently on persistent links
For information on how to select RIP as your routing protocol, see Configuring IP
Routing on page 201.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
Open Shortest Path First protocol bases its path descriptions on “link states” that
take into account additional network information. OSPF also lets the user assign
cost metrics to a given host router so that some paths are given preference. OSPF
supports a variable network subnet mask so that a network can be subdivided into
areas. For information on how to select OSPF as your routing protocol, see
Configuring IP Routing on page 201.
WARNING
Because OSPF is a “link-state” based routing protocol, you must not use OSPF on
demand dial interfaces. Frequent link status (between “up” and “down”) may cause
the protocol to become unstable.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 201
Configuring IP Routing
The followings table shows the Enterprise Edge IP routing protocols and the
precedence order when conflicting or redundant routes occur.
Precedence
IP Routing Protocols
1.
Static Routing
2.
OSPF
3.
RIP v1 and v2
IP Routing global settings
To configure global settings for IP Routing:
1. Choose Services and click the IP Routing heading.
The IP routing Summary, RIP Global Settings and OSPF Global Settings
configuration screens appear.
2. Configure the Routing Summary attributes according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows a description of the router.
Version
Shows the version of the router.
Status
Allows you to enable or disable the router. The possible values are:
Up: the IP router is currently functioning.
Enabled: allows you to enable the router.
Disabled: allows you to disable the router.
3. If your network uses RIP, configure the RIP Global Settings according to the
table below. If your network uses OSPF, go to step 6.
The RIP Global Settings are:
RIP Log Level
Allows you to enable the recording of events in the Event Viewer. The
following options are available:
Maximum, logs all information in the Event Viewer.
Warnings Also, logs errors and warnings in the Event Viewer.
Errors Only, logs errors in the Event Viewer.
Disabled, disables event logs.
The default value is Errors Only.
Triggered Update Allows you to specify the minimum interval, in seconds, at which a router
Interval
must send a routing table update if the metric for a given route changes. If the
router detects a change in the routing information, the router sends an update
message at the specified interval.
Possible values are 1 to 50000.
The default value is 5.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
202 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
4. Press the TAB key to save your settings.
Note: After you configured global settings, you must configure each
interface to use the IP routing protocol of your choice. For more
information, see Configuring IP routing on an interface on page 202.
5. If OSPF is the routing protocol of your choice, configure the OSPF Global
Settings according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
OSPF Log Level
Allows you to enable the recording of events in the Event Viewer. The
following options are available:
Maximum, logs all information in the Event Viewer.
Warnings Also, logs errors and warnings in the Event Viewer.
Errors Only, logs errors in the Event Viewer.
Disabled, disables event logs.
The default value is Errors Only.
Router ID
Allows you to specify the IP address that uniquely identifies the Enterprise
Edge router on your network.
Router Area ID
Allows you to specify the area where your Enterprise Edge router is located
on your network.
The default value is 0.0.0.0.
Authentication
Type
Allows you to enable or disable password authentication.
Values are None, Password.
The default value is None.
Note: For information on how to set the authentication password, see
Configuring OSPF Parameters on a network interface on page 205.
Configuring IP routing on an interface
After you configured the IP Routing global settings, you must configure each
available network interface to use the routing protocol of your choice or static
routes..
Tips
You must use the same routing protocol on all interfaces. For example, you can
not configure your LAN1 interface to use RIP, and your WAN1 interface to
use OSPF.
This section provides instructions on how to configure interfaces for IP routing and
how to create static routes. The available interfaces appear under the IP Routing
heading. Follow the same instructions to configure all interfaces. For information
on how to create static routes, see Static routes on page 207.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 203
Configuring RIP parameters on a network interface
1. Under the Services heading, click the IP Routing key to expand the
navigation tree.
The available interfaces for IP routing are listed under the IP Routing
heading.
2. Click the interface you want to configure.
The Summary window appears. The Routing Protocol box shows the current
routing protocol.
Tips
If you are changing the routing protocol from OSPF to RIP, you must first set
the Routing Protocol under each available interface to None before you can
select RIP.
Note: The RIP Parameters window does not appear unless you choose RIP as
your routing protocol.
3. In the Routing Protocol list, choose RIP.
4.
Press the Tab key.
The RIP Parameters window appears.
Configure RIP Parameters screen according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Metric
Allows you to assign a cumulative value (in terms of hop count or associated
cost [if applicable]) to routes passing through this interface. The routing
manager adds the metric value of all routes learned through this interface to
the metric value of this interface to make routing decisions. The possible
values are 1 to 16. Because RIP protocol can handle up to 15 hop counts
before reaching destination, a value of 16 corresponds to “counting to
infinity”
The default value is 1.
Routing Table
Update Mode
Allows you to specify the routing table update mode. The possible values are:
On Demand: the router sends its table when another established router
requests it.
Periodic: the router sends its table to other established router at regular
intervals.
The default value is Periodic.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
204 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
Route
Announcement
Type
Allows you to set the type of routing table update announcements the
Enterprise Edge router sends to other routers.
The possible values are:
Disabled: disables sending RIP routing update. If you choose Disabled, you
must configure the other routers in the subnet to use static routes to access the
Enterprise Edge server.
RIP 1: sends only announcements of RIP v1 type in broadcast mode.
RIP 1 Compatible: sends RIP v1 and RIP v2 packets in broadcast mode. Use
this for a network environment which uses RIP v1 and RIP v2.
RIP 2: sends RIP v2 packets in multicast mode only. Use this type of
announcement only if all other routers connected to the Enterprise Edge server
support RIP v2.
The default value is RIP 1.
Route Accept
Type
Allows you to set the type of routing table update announcements the
Enterprise Edge router accepts from other routers.
The possible values are:
Disabled: disables sending RIP routing table update announcements. If you
choose Disabled, you must create static routes in the Enterprise Edge server
to access other networks connected to this interface. This method is preferable
if you want to keep the routing table small in the Enterprise Edge server.
RIP 1: accepts only announcements of RIP 1 type.
RIP 1 Compatible: accepts announcements of RIP 1 and RIP 2 types.
RIP 2: accepts announcements of RIP 2 type only.
Route Expiration Allows you to define the period of time within which a route in the routing
Interval
table must be updated to remain a valid route. The possible values are 15 to
259200 seconds.
The default value is 180 seconds.
Route Removal
Interval
Allows you to define the period of time (in seconds) an invalid route remains
in the routing table before the routing manager removes it from the routing
table. The possible values are 15 to 29200 seconds.
The default value is 180 seconds
Route
Announcement
Interval
Allows you to set the time interval (in seconds) between each routing table
updates when the Routing Table Update Mode is set to Periodic. The
possible values are 5 to 84200.
The default value is 30 seconds.
Route Tag
Allows you to create a special tag which identifies routes announced over the
interface. The route tag helps identify route packets when debugging routing
problems using a network sniffer.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 205
Attribute
Description
Poisoned Reverse Allows you to enable or disable options designed to avoid routing problems
such as loops or metric values exceeding the maximum of 15 hop counts the
RIP protocol allows.
The following options are available:
Actual: routing table update process where a routing table update going out
repeats the information sent by the originator. The system tries to solve this
state known as a loop involving two routers by sending more routing updates.
Split (split horizon): routing table update process designed to avoid sending
the same routing information back to the originator.
Poison Reverse: routing table update process designed to advertise
unreachable routes as having metric value of 16 regardless of incoming
routing update information.
The default value is Split.
Triggered
Updates
Allows you enable immediate route update announcements whenever a metric
or other information changes in the route table entries.
When Triggered Updates is set to Enabled, the system gathers new routing
information for the period of time defined in the Triggered Update Interval
from the RIP Summary window (see IP Routing global settings on page
201). Triggered updates results in more frequent, smaller RIP routing table
updates.
The possible values are Enabled and Disabled.
The default value is Disabled.
Announce
Default Route
Allows you to enable or disable the announcement of default routes in
incoming route announcements. Use caution when you enable this feature
because improper configuration causes a loss of network connectivity. The
possible values are Enabled and Disabled.
The default value is Disabled.
Accept Default
Route
Allows you to enable or disable the acceptance of incoming default routes
announcement.
Set default routes as static routes. If you run Net Link Manager to
automatically backup primary WAN link using a dial-up link, Net Link
Manager manages the default routes and the default routes that you add are
non-operational as soon as a primary link breaks or comes up again.
The possible values are Enabled and Disabled.
The default value is Enabled.
5. Press Tab to save your settings.
Configuring OSPF Parameters on a network interface
1. Under the Services heading, click the IP Routing key to expand the
navigation tree.
The available interfaces for IP routing are listed under the IP Routing
heading.
2. Click the interface you want to configure.
The Summary window appears. The Routing Protocol box shows the current
routing protocol.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
206 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Tips
If you are changing the routing protocol from RIP to OSPF, you must first set
the Routing Protocol under each available interface to None before you can
select OSPF.
Note: The OSPF Parameters window does not appear unless you choose
OSPF as your routing protocol.
3. In the Routing Protocol list, choose OSPF.
WARNING
Because OSPF is a “link-state” based routing protocol, you must not use OSPF on
demand dial interfaces. Frequent link status changes (between “up” and “down”)
may cause the OSPF protocol to become unstable.
4. Configure the OSPF parameters according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Metric
Allows you to assign a cumulative value (in terms of hop count or associated
cost [if applicable]) to routes passing through this interface. The routing
manager adds the metric value of all routes learned through this interface to
the metric value of this interface to make routing decisions. The possible
values are 1 to 16. Because RIP protocol can handle up to 15 hop counts
before reaching destination, a value of 16 is equal to “counting to infinity”
The default value is 2.
Interface Type
Allows you to select the type of interface that describes your network
configuration. The possible values are:
Broadcast a broadcast network supports multiple routers and addresses a
single physical message to all routers.
P2P a point-to-point network joins a single pair of OSPF routers.
NBMA a Non-Broadcast-Multi-Access (NBMA) network supports multiple
routers and cannot address a single physical message to all routers.
The default value is Broadcast
Router Priority
Allows to assign a priority to the Enterprise Edge router. The possible values
are 0 to 255. A value of 0 indicates that the Enterprise Edge system cannot
become the designed router.
The default value is 1.
Transit Delay
Allows you to set (in seconds) the estimated round-trip transit delay in the
network connected to the interface. The values are 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default value is 1.
Retransmit Delay Allows you to set the number of seconds the router waits before retransmitting
after a time-out occurs. The values are 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default value is 1.
Hello Interval
Allows you to define how frequently the router must send “hello packets” on
an interface. The values are 1 to 32767 seconds.
The default value is 10.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 207
Attribute
Description
Dead Interval
Allows you to set the maximum number of seconds the router waits to receive
the next hello before considering the adjacent router as non operational. The
values are 1 to 32767 seconds.
The default value is 40.
Poll Interval
Allows you to define the period of time the router must keep sending hello
packets to an adjacent routing which is considered non operational. The
values are 1 to 32767 seconds.
The default value is 120
MTU
Allows you to specify the Maximum Transmission Unit for this interface. The
values are 1 to 10000.
The default value is 1500
Password
Allows you to define an authentication password (if you selected Password as
the authentication type in the Authentication Type box on the OSPF Global
Parameters window.
There is no default value provided because the Authentication Type is set to
None by default.
5. Press the Tab key to save your settings.
Static routes
You can add static routes to the Enterprise Edge routing table. Static routes on
added to the routing table take precedence over dynamic routes. To add a static
route to the routing table:
1. Under the IP Routing heading, click on the interface for which you want to
create a static route.
The Configuration menu is enabled.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Add Static Route.
The Static Route dialog box appears.
3. Configure the static route attributes according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Static Route
(SR#)
Allows you to assign a number to the static route. For example, the valid static
route number for the first static route is SR1. If you add more than one static
route, use sequential numbers. If you use the number of an existing static
route, the system modifies the existing static route. If you use non-sequential
numbers the system automatically reassigns sequential numbers. When you
modify a static route, you cannot change the number. The only function of the
static route number is to uniquely identify an route.
Destination
address
Allows you to define the IP address of the destination network or host.
Destination mask Allows you to add the IP address of the mask corresponding to the destination
address.
Next Hop Router Allows you to define the IP address of next hop router.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
208 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
Metric Value
Lets you specify the metric value associated with the interface. The system
adds the metric to the hop count of the routes received through the interface.
4. Click save.
The static route is added to the list in the Static Route window.
To modify the configuration of a static route:
1. Click a static route you want to modify in the Static Route table.
The Static Route row is highlighted.
2. On the menu, click Configuration and then click Modify Static Route.
The Static Route dialog box appears.
3. Modify the static route attributes.
4. Click the Save button.
To delete a static route:
1. Click the static route you want to delete in the Static Route table.
2. On the menu, click Configuration and then click Delete Static Route.
3. A message ask you to confirm your request
4. Click the Yes button.
IPX Routing
Enterprise Edge supports RIP and SAP (Service Advertising Protocol) for IPX
routing in a NetWare environment. Static routes and static services are also
supported.
Enterprise Edge supports IPX basic packet filtering feature.
Configuring IPX Routing
1. Choose Services, and click on the IPX Routing heading.
The Global Parameters for IPX Router appears.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 209
2. Use the following table to configure the IPX global settings.
The Summary, IPX Global Summary, RIP Global Settings and SAP Global
settings are:
Attribute
Description
Description
Displays the name of the router.
Version
Displays the version number of the router.
Status
Displays the current status of the service. Possible values are Disabled, Up,
Down. Users can change the status of the service by selecting Disabled or
Enabled. By default, IPX service is Disabled.
Internal Network Allows you to specify the internal network number. The internal network
Number
number uniquely identifies the computer on the intranet.
IPX Log level
Allows you to enable the recording of events in the Event Viewer. The
following options are available:
Maximum, logs all information in the Event Viewer.
Warnings Also, logs errors and warnings in the Event Viewer.
Errors Only, logs errors in the Event Viewer.
Disabled, disables event logs.
The default value is Errors Only.
RIP Log level
Allows you to enable the recording of events in the Event Viewer. The
following options are available:
Maximum, logs all information in the Event Viewer.
Warnings Also, logs errors and warnings in the Event Viewer.
Errors Only, logs errors in the Event Viewer.
Disabled, disables event logs.
The default value is Errors Only.
SAP Log Level
Allows you to enable the recording of events in the Event Viewer. The
following options are available:
Maximum, logs all information in the Event Viewer.
Warnings Also, logs errors and warnings in the Event Viewer.
Errors Only, logs errors in the Event Viewer.
Disabled, disables event logs.
The default value is Errors Only.
3. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Configuring an interface for IPX routing
This section provides instructions on how to configure IPX routing for specific
interfaces. All available interfaces (i.e.: LAN2, WAN1, V90-1) appear under the
IPX Routing heading. The same configuration procedures apply to all interfaces.
1. Choose Services, and click on the LAN1 heading (if configuring IPX routing
for traffic on LAN1).
The IPX routing parameters for LAN1 appear.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
210 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
2. Configure LAN1 for IPX routing using the following tables.
The Interface Summary settings are:
Attribute
Description
Interface Name
Displays the name of the interface you are currently configuring for IPX
routing.
Input Filter
Actions
Allows you to specify the action the filter must perform on inbound traffic.
The values possible values are:
Deny all inbound traffic matching the criterion defined for filters.
Permit all inbound traffic matching the criterion defined for filters.
The default value is Deny.
Note: You must create a filter before you can assign an action. To create a
filter, see Adding RIP filters for IPX routing on page 213.
Output Filter
Actions
Allows you to specify the action the filter must perform on outbound traffic.
The values possible values are:
Deny all outbound traffic matching the criterion defined for filters.
Permit all outbound traffic matching the criterion defined for filters.
The default value is Deny.
Note: You must create a filter before you can assign an action. To create a
filter, see Adding RIP filters for IPX routing on page 213.
Network Number Allows you to specify the network number (also called external network
number) for routing purposes.
Frame Type
Allows you to specify the frame type. For example, an Ethernet 802.2 frame
type value is 2ff.
Ethernet II: 0, Ethernet 803.2: 1, Ethernet 802.2: 2, SNAP: 3 Arcnet: 4.
System default shows only the suffix ff.
The RIP Parameters settings are:
Attribute
Description
RIP State
Allows you to enable or disable RIP for this interface.
The values are Enabled or Disabled.
Advertise Routes Allows you enable or disable the advertisement of routes on the interface your
configuring. The default value is Disabled.
Accept Route
Advertisements
Allows you to enable or disable the acceptance of route advertisement from
remote routers on this interface.
The default value is Enabled.
Update Mode
Allows you to select an update mode for the routing table. The routing table
update modes available are:
Standard update mode sends out a router’s routing table at regular intervals
(which you specify in the Update Interval box). New routes are added to the
routing table as dynamic routes and are deleted from the routing tables when
the router restarts.
Autostatic update mode sends a routing table on the current interface when
other routers connected to this interface request it. New routes to this
interface, using RIP, are stored as static routes in the routing table for this
interface and remain until you delete them.
No Update mode never updates the routing tables on the current interface.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 211
Attribute
Description
Update Interval
Allows you to set at what interval (in seconds) the routing manager updates
the route tables. For example, when you set the Update Mode to Standard,
the routing manager periodically updates the route tables at the interval you
specify in the Update Interval box.
The possible values are 5 to 86400 seconds (24 hours)
Default value is 60 seconds.
Aging Interval
Multiplier
A multiplier used to determine when a route expires and is removed for the
route table. For example, if the update interval is set to 60 seconds and you
enter a value of 3 in the Aging Interval Multiplier, a route remains in the route
table for a maximum of 180 seconds (3 X 60) from the last update.
The default value is 3.
The RIP Input/Output Filters settings display the filter number, Network
number and Network Mask. To add an input or output RIP filter refer to
Adding RIP filters for IPX routing on page 213.
The SAP Summary settings are:
Attribute
Description
Input Filter
Actions
Allows you to specify the action the filter must perform on inbound traffic.
The values possible values are:
Deny all inbound traffic matching the criterion defined for SAP filters.
Permit all inbound traffic matching the criterion defined for SAP filters.
The default value is Deny.
Note: You must create a filter before you can assign an action. To create a
filter,see AddingSAPfiltersforIPXrouting onpage214.
Output Filter
Actions
Allows you to specify the action the filter must perform on outbound traffic.
The possible values are:
Deny all outbound traffic matching the criterion defined for SAP filters.
Permit all outbound traffic matching the criterion defined for SAP filters.
The default value is Deny.
Note: You must create a filter before you can assign an action. To create a
filter, see Adding SAP filters for IPX routing on page 214.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
212 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
The SAP Parameters settings are:
Attribute
Description
SAP State
Allows you to enable or disable SAP for this interface.
The values are Enabled or Disabled.
Advertise
Services
Allows you to enable or disable the advertisement or SAP services on the
interface to remote routers.
Possible values are Enabled or Disabled. The default value is Enabled.
Accept Service
Advertisements
Allows you to enable or disable the acceptance of advertisement of SAP
services from remote routers.
Possible values are Enabled or Disabled. The default value is Enabled.
Update Mode
Allows you to select an update mode for SAP on the interface. The available
options are:
Standard update mode sends periodic updates at interval you define in the
Update Interval box.
Autostatic update mode sends a routing table update when other routers
connected to this interface request it. New routes to this interface, using SAP,
are stored as static routes in the routing table for this interface and remain
until you delete them.
No Update mode never updates the routing tables on the current interface.
If you are configuring IPX routing on a LAN interface, the default value is
Standard. If you are configuring IPX routing for a WAN interface, the
default value is No Update.
Update Interval
Allows you to set the interval (in seconds) at which SAP announcements are
updated. For example, if you set the Update Mode to Standard, the SAP
announcements are updated at the interval you specify in the Update Interval
box. The possible values 5 to 86400 seconds. The default value is 60 seconds.
Aging Interval
Multiplier
A multiplier used to determine when a SAP announcements coming to this
interface expire. For example, if the update interval is set to 60 seconds and
you enter a value of 3 in the Aging Interval Multiplier, a SAP announcement
remains valid for a maximum of 180 seconds (3 X 60) from the last
announcement. The possible values are 3 to 100.
The default value is 3.
The SAP Input/Output Filters settings display the Service Type, Service Name
and Network Mask. To add an input or output SAP Filter refer to Adding SAP
filters for IPX routing on page 214.
The Static Routes settings display the Static Route number, Net Number, Next
Hop Mac Address, Ticks and Hops. To add a Static Routes refer to Adding
Static Routes for IPX Routing on page 214.
The Static Service settings display the Static Service number, Type, Name,
Network, Node, Socket and Hops. To add a Static Service refer to Adding
Static Service for IPX on page 215.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 213
Adding RIP filters for IPX routing
RIP is the routing protocol that routes IPX data packets in an internetwork
environment. IPX Router Manager (Windows NT 4.0 routing management entity)
is responsible for IPX routing operation. You can configure IPX packet filters for
inbound or outbound traffic on interface handling IPX packets. You must configure
the IPX RIP parameters from the IPX heading of the navigation tree (Configuring
IPX Routing on page 208).
Note: The IPX router manager in your Enterprise Edge system operates separately
from the IP routing manager. As a result, RIP configuration under the IP
Routing heading has no effect on IPX routing. You must configure IPX RIP
parameters under the IPX Routing heading.
Tips
After you create and add a filter for IPX routing on an interface, you must
select The Input Filter Action and Output filter Action from the RIP Summary
parameters.
Warning
The filter action which indicates either to deny or allow packets that match
filter definition applies to all filters. You cannot set a filter action for a specific
filter. When you have decided which action the routing manager must perform
on packets matching a filter definition, the routing manager performs this
action every time it finds a match between packets and filters.
To add a RIP filter for IPX routing:
1. Choose Services, IPX Routing and click on the interface you want to
configure.
2. On the Configuration menu click Add RIP Input Filter or Add RIP Output
Filter.
3. Use the table below to set your RIP Input or Output filter parameters for IPX
routing:
Attribute
Description
Input Filter (IF#)
Allows you to give a number to the input filter you are creating.
Output Filter
(OF#)
Allows you to give a number to the output filter you are creating.
Network Number Allows you to enter the network number that identifies the IPX network. A
valid entry is any 4-byte hexadecimal number.
Network Mask
Allows you to enter the network mask to be applied to the source address.
This parameter defines the range of network numbers that you want to filter.
4. Click Save.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
214 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Adding SAP filters for IPX routing
On a Novell network, the Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) provides network
control information about available services on a Novell network. You can define
and add SAP filters for IPX routing.
1. Choose Services, IPX Routing and click on the interface that you want to
configure.
2. On the Configuration menu click Add SAP Input Filter or Add SAP
Output Filter.
3. Use the table below to set your SAP Input or Output filter parameters for IPX
routing:
Attribute
Description
Input Filter
(SapIF#)
Allows you to give a number to the input filter you are creating.
Output Filter
(SapOF#)
Allows you to give a number to the output filter you are creating.
Service Type
Allows you to specify the SAP service type. Use a 2 byte hexadecimal
number. You can use the value 0xFFFF to match services of any type.
Service Name
Allows you to enter the service name. You can use a wildcard service name
such as "*" to indicate all service names.
4. Click Save.
Adding Static Routes for IPX Routing
You can add static routes to the IPX routing table. The IPX static routes take
precedence over the routes added by routing protocol such as RIP.
1. Click on the IPX Routing key to expand the heading.
2. Click on the LAN or WAN interface that you want to configure. For example,
LAN1.
3. Under the Configure menu choose Add Static Route.
The Static Routes dialog box appears.
4. Configure the LAN1 (and WAN1, WAN2, etc.) static routing table attributes
according to the table below.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 215
The following table shows parameters required for IPX static routes:
Attribute
Description
Static Route
(SR#)
Enter a Static Route number.
Net Number
IPX Network Number identifies the destination network for the routing table
entry. The permitted value is 4-byte in hexadecimal format. The default value
is None
Next Hop MAC
Address
Shows the MAC address of the next hop router to reach the network defined
in the NetNumber box. The permitted value is 6-byte in hexadecimal format.
The default value is None.
Ticks
Time required (in 1/60 seconds) to reach the destination network. The values
are 1 to 32,767. The default value is None.
Hops
Shows the number of hops that must be crossed in order to reach the
destination network. The permitted values are 1 to 15. The default value is
None.
Adding Static Service for IPX
1. Click on the IPX Routing key to expand the heading.
2. Click on the interface that you want to configure. For example, LAN1.
3. Under the Configure menu choose Add Static Service.
The Static Routes dialog box appears.
4. Configure the LAN1 (and WAN1, WAN2, etc.) static service table attributes
according to the table below:
The attributes for adding Static services in the IPX network are:
Attribute
Description
Static Service
Show the service type (SS Number). The permitted value is in 2-byte
hexadecimal format. The default value is None.
Type
Allows you to specify the SAP service type. Use a 2 byte hexadecimal
number. You can use the value 0xFFFF to match services of any type.
Name
Shows the static service name. The permitted values can use up to 48 bytes. A
wildcard character (*) can also be selected to indicate all service names.
Network
Shows the network part of the service address. The permitted value uses 4
bytes in hexadecimal format. The default value is None.
Node
Shows the node part of the service address. The permitted value uses 6 bytes
in hexadecimal format. The default value is None.
Socket
Shows the socket part of the service address. The permitted value uses 2 bytes
in hexadecimal format. The default value is None.
Hops
Shows the number of hops to reach the destination network. The permitted
values are 1 to 15. The default is None.
5. Click the Save button to save your settings.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
216 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
SNMP
Enterprise Edge generates SNMP traps corresponding to events and reports those
events to requesting management stations.
Guidelines for using SNMP
Consider the following guidelines when using SNMP:
•
You can set read-only and read-write community names.
•
You can set a list of permitted managers. When set, the agent responds to SNMP
managers requests from those IP hosts only.
•
An empty list of permitted managers implies that agent responds to requests
from anyone.
•
You can set trap communities. Each trap entry identifies the community name
that must be used and the manager addresses.
•
You can enable or disable sending authentication traps.
•
You can enable or disable the SNMP agent.
•
At present, SNMP supports only MIB-II (RFC 1213) MIBs.
1. Choose Services, and click on the SNMP heading.
The screen displays the SNMP Summary, Community List, Manager List, and
Trap Community List screens.
2. Configure SNMP summary screen from Unified Manager.
Configure the SNMP Community List, Manager List, and Trap Community List
from the menu.
The SNMP Summary attributes are:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows the description of the SNMP agent.
Version
Shows the version of the SNMP agent
Status
Allows you to enable or disable the SNMP agent.
Authentication
Failure Traps
Allows you to disable authentication failure traps.
When enabled, the SNMP agent sends authentication failure traps if there is
an authentication failure. Authentication failure happens if an SNMP manager
application provides a wrong community string or performs an operation that
is not permitted for a community.
To modify the SNMP Summary attributes:
1. From the Status list, select Enabled, Disabled or Up.
2. From the Authentication Failure Traps list, select Enabled or Disabled.
3. Press the Tab key to save the changes.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 217
SNMP Community List, Manager List, and Trap Community List
The SNMP community list, manager list, and trap community list attributes are:
Attribute
Description
Community List
Allows you to specify the entry name used as a key to uniquely identify an
individual community entry on the SNMP agent. Its value must follow certain
conventions. It must have the prefix C followed by a unique number that
identifies the community name entry on the agent. For example, C2 is a valid
value. While adding, specify non-recurring values for the unique number.
While adding, if you specify an existing community entry name, it modifies
the existing community entry. Using non-sequential numbers results in
automatic reassignment of sequential numbers. While modifying a
community entry, you can't change the name. The community entry name
does not have any significance other than to identify an entry.
Community
Name
Allows you to specify the name of the community that the individual
managers use to interact with this agent.
When creating community entries, various access permissions are associated
with these names. Manager stations that use different community names get
different permissions on the SNMP agent.
While creating trap communities, various manager IP addresses are associated
with these values. All the manager stations in a trap community get traps with
the community name specified in the entry.
Manager List
Allows you to specify the entry name used to identify an individual manager
entry on the SNMP agent. Its value must follow certain conventions. It must
have the prefix M followed by a unique number that identifies the manager
entry on the agent. For example, M2 is a valid value. While adding, specify
non-recurring values for the unique number.
While adding, if you specify an existing manager entry name, it modifies the
existing manager entry. Using non-sequential numbers results in automatic
reassignment of sequential numbers. While modifying a manager entry, you
can't change the name. The manager entry name does not have any
significance, other than to uniquely identify an entry.
Manager IP
address
Allows you to specify the IP Address of the SNMP Manager station
corresponding to this entry. If no manager entries are created, the Enterprise
Edge device accepts SNMP requests from all stations. If there is a list of
manager entries, Enterprise Edge server accepts SNMP requests from the IP
Addresses specified in the list.
Trap List
Allows you to specify the entry name used to identify an individual trap
community entry on the SNMP agent. Its value must follow certain
conventions. It must have the prefix T followed by a unique number that
identifies the trap community entry on the agent. For example, T2 is a valid
value. While adding, specify non-recurring values for the unique number.
While adding, if you specify an existing trap community entry name, it
modifies the existing trap community entry. Using non-sequential numbers
results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers. While modifying a
trap community entry, you can't change the name. The trap community entry
name does not have any significance, other than to uniquely identify an entry.
To modify the Community List, Manager List, and Trap Community List, use the
following procedures.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
218 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
To add to the community list:
1. On the Configuration menu, click Add Community.
The Community List dialog box appears.
2. Click the Community List box and type the community list number.
3. Click the Community Name box and type the community name.
4. From the Access Permission list, select the Access Permission.
5. Click the Save button.
To modify a community:
1. Click a community in the Community table.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Modify Community. The Community
List dialog box appears.
3. Click any box that requires modification and type the necessary changes.
4. Click the Save button.
To delete a community:
1. Click on a community in the Community table.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Delete Community.
A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
To add a manager to the Manager List:
1. On the Configuration menu, click Add Manager.
The Manager List dialog box appears.
2. In the Manager List box, type the manager list number.
3. In the Manager IP Address box, type the manager IP address.
4. Click the Save button.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 219
To modify the manager list:
1. In the Manager List table, click a manager.
2. On the menu, click Configuration and then click Modify Manager.
The Manager List dialog screen appears.
3. Click any box that requires modification and type the necessary changes.
4. Click the Save button.
To delete a manager:
1. In the Manager table, click the manager you want to delete.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Delete Manager.
A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
To add a trap community to the Trap Community List:
1. On the Configuration menu, click Add Trap Community.
The Trap Community List screen appears.
2. In the Trap List box, type the trap list number.
3. In the Community Name box, type the community name.
4. In the Manager IP Address box, type an IP Address for a manager station that
is a member of this trap community.
5. Click the Save button.
To modify a trap community:
1. In the Trap Community table, click the trap community you want to modify.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Modify Trap Community.
The Trap Community List dialog box appears.
3. Click any box that requires modification and type the necessary changes.
4. Click the Save button.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
220 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
To delete a trap community:
1. In the Trap Community table, click the trap community you want to delete.
2. On Configuration menu, click Delete Trap Community.
A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
QoS
The purpose of the Enterprise Edge QoS module is to set priorities for IP traffic and
to assign quality of service levels to critical applications and IP telephony.
The Enterprise Edge QoS module serves two primary purposes:
•
In a DiffServ network, QoS acts as an edge device and performs the packet
classification, marking, and prioritizing.
•
In a non-DiffServ or legacy network, QoS manages the WAN link bandwidth to
make sure critical voice (and optional video) packets get high priority when
crossing the slow WAN link in both directions.
Relationship between the QoS Module and the VoIP QoS Monitor
The VoIP gateway in Enterprise Edge includes a VoIP Quality-of-Service (QoS)
Monitor that periodically monitors the delay and jitter of IP networks between two
peer gateways by using a proprietary protocol. These monitoring packets are
delivered at UDP port 5000.
The main objective of the VoIP QoS Monitor is to allow new VoIP calls to fall back
to the PSTN if the IP network is detected as “bad”.
The QoS module discussed here complements the VoIP QoS Monitor. While the
VoIP QoS Monitor passively monitors the IP network, the QoS module actively
improves the IP network by giving VoIP packets higher priority to travel so that the
chance for the VoIP QoS Monitor to detect the connection as “bad” is reduced.
Note: For a VoIP call, if a packet passes the VoIP QoS Monitor but fails the QoS
admission control, it is delivered over IP but only as a best-effort flow.
There is no fallback to PSTN if a packet has passed the VoIP QoS Monitor
checking.
VoIP QoS Monitor packets travel at the same priority as VoIP packets, which is at
higher priority than normal IP packets. If VoIP packets travel at a premium level
but VoIP QoS Monitor packets travel at normal best-effort level, it is possible for
the VoIP QoS Monitor to report the IP network as “bad” and start fallback to the
PSTN, but the actual delay and jitter for VoIP packets are still “good” since VoIP
packets have a higher priority. To avoid this, add UDP port 5000 to the high priority
queue in all routers.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 221
QoS Restrictions and Defaults
Enterprise Edge QoS includes the following restrictions and defaults:
•
By default, the general bulk of traffic (not defined by priority filters) is routed
to best-effort Queue 5 (with Queue 1 the highest priority and Queue 8 the
lowest). An administrator can define four classes of traffic above the generic
traffic and three classes below it.
•
A maximum of 31 priority filters for best-effort traffic can be created.
•
The QoS module can be Enabled or Disabled. The default setting is Enabled.
•
The predetermined WAN bandwidth is always available to VoIP gateway
channels. That is, VoIP gateway calls are always admitted. The remaining
WAN premium bandwidth can be used by other H.323 streams, such as
Microsoft NetMeeting. If there is no VoIP gateway traffic, the VoIP WAN
bandwidth can be used only by best-effort traffic, not other premium traffic (for
example, NetMeeting). Enterprise Edge does not support preemption of
admitted premium streams.
•
Currently, packet prioritizing and priority filters apply only to outbound traffic
for specified interfaces. Inbound traffic is treated on a first in/first out (FIFO)
priority.
•
The maximum port numbers you can reserve for premium traffic is 256.
To configure QoS services settings:
1. Choose Services and click on the QoS heading.
The QoS Summary screen appears.
2. Configure the QoS Services Summary attributes according to the following
table:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows the description of the QoS provider.
Version
Shows the driver version of the QoS provider.
Status
Allows you to enable or disable the QoS module.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
222 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
Premium
Bandwidth
Allows you to specify, in percentages, the WAN bandwidth reserved for
premium traffic.
Choose a value for this box based on the link speed, the codecs used by VoIP
gateway, the sample rate and the number of concurrent phone calls (from
internal VoIP gateway) and other H.323 sessions (like Microsoft NetMeeting
traffic) you intend to carry over the WAN link. Refer to WAN Overview
on page 49 for more information on this topic.
Make sure you allocate at least the bandwidth necessary to carry as many
phone calls as specified in 'Number of Phone Ports' box below. Otherwise, the
QoS provider sees the inconsistent configuration and disables itself when
system boots next time, resulting in broken connectivity.
Any additional bandwidth that is more than what is required to carry the
phone calls is available for other H.323 sessions, like NetMeeting sessions
from PCs connected to Enterprise Edge box or other data traffic classified as
premium, through QoS Filters. This additional bandwidth reserved for
premium traffic is always available for other data traffic if there is no
additional H.323 traffic or other premium traffic.
A network administrator can reserve more WAN bandwidth than that required
to carry phone calls and then prevent PC users from using it for NetMeeting
sessions by setting filters that drop H.323 traffic at LAN interfaces.
Video Class
Allows you to specify the type of priority treatment for video traffic in H.323
sessions.
The following choices are available:
Premium: Video traffic is treated as premium traffic that consumes portions
of bandwidth reserved for premium traffic (Premium Bandwidth box).
Best Effort: Video traffic is treated as best effort IP traffic that are prioritized
among other best-effort traffic passing through the WAN link.
Premium DS
Code
Allows you to specify the TOS setting in the IP header for premium packets.
This value is used in conjunction with the frame relay driver in Enterprise
Edge's WAN link, if one is being used, as well as rest of the network.
If the frame relay is used on WAN link, this code should match the DS Code
setting in frame relay settings so that frame relay network treats this traffic as
high-priority.
If rest of the network is diffserv capable, all routers that carry VoIP traffic
from theEnterprise Edge server must be configured to treat the traffic with this
DS code as high-priority or premium traffic.
Number of Phone Allows you to specify the number of phone ports.
Ports
This value specifies the number of concurrent phone calls user intends to carry
over the WAN interface. QoS Provider layer uses this value to determine how
much of the bandwidth reserved for premium traffic is consumed by internal
VoIP gateway and how much is left over for other H.323 or other classified
premium traffic.
3. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 223
Filters
The Filters heading allows you to configure different Filters for QoS and specify the
order that these filters are evaluated. Configure the filters before you specify the
filter order. If a filter name is listed in filter order, but the actual filter is missing,
the system ignores it. If a filter is omitted from the filter order list, the filter is not
effective.
To set QoS filters:
1. Choose Services, QoS and click on the Filters heading.
The Filter Configuration and Filters screen appears.
Adding a QoS filter
2. On the Configuration menu click Add Filters.
The Filters property sheet appears.
3. Set the QoS Filters parameters according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Filter
Allows you to specify the entry name that is used as a key to uniquely identify
an individual filter entry in QoS layer. Its value must follow certain
conventions. It must have the prefix F followed by a unique number that
identifies this filter. For example, F2 is a valid value. While adding, specify
non-recurring values for the unique number.
If you specify an existing filter entry name, the system modifies the existing
filter entry. Using non-sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment
of sequential numbers. While modifying a filter entry, you can't change the
name.
Source Address
Allows you to specify the source IP address in a valid dot format.
If you want to ignore the source address setting in filter, leave this box blank.
If you specify an address in this box, you should also specify a subnet mask in
the Source Mask box.
Source Mask
Allows you to specify the source mask of the IP address in a valid dot format.
If you specify a source address, you must specify a source mask and vice
versa. Make sure that the mask and address match with each other, for
example bitwise and of mask and address is equal to the address.
If you want to specify a range of addresses, use a subnet mask other than
255.255.255.255. For example, address/mask combination 10.10.10.32/
255.255.255.252 represents addresses 10.10.10.32-10.10.10.35.
Destination
Address
Allows you to specify a destination IP address in a valid dot format. See the
instructions for Source Address.
Destination Mask Allows you to specify a mask for the destination IP address in a valid dot
format. See the instructions for Source Mask.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
224 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Attribute
Description
Source Port
Allows you to specify a source port to match the filter.
Specify a source port only if you choose a TCP or a UDP protocol. If you do
not want to include the source port in your filter, select IGNORE for it.
Otherwise, select the port for one of the well-known services from the list or
type it in the list. If you type the port, specify the service's numeric port
number. You can specify a range of ports by specifying the two limits of the
range by a hyphen character, for example, 156-159. You can also specify 0 for
the lower limit and 65536 for upper limit.
Destination Port
Allows you to specify a destination port to match the filter. It is interpreted the
same way as source port.
Protocol
Allows you to specify a protocol to match the filter.
If you do not want to include a protocol in your filter, select IGNORE for the
protocol. Otherwise, select the protocol from the list or type the numeric value
of sub-protocol under IP in the box.
DSCode (TOS)
Criteria
Allows you to specify the DS Code (TOS) value for the filter to match. Use
this setting only if your network or application behind Enterprise Edge is
diffserv capable or diffserv aware. Specify here the DS Code or TOS value
that the application or the other edge device puts in the IP packets it sends.
Otherwise, ignore this setting.
Priority
Allows you to specify the priority given to packets that match the criteria
specified in the filter. The priority value has significance only within the IP
interface the packet is related, and is relative to other packets that go out
through the interface. 0 is the highest priority and 8, the lowest priority.
Use caution when you assign priority. If you assign priority 0 for regular data
traffic, it is possible that the quality of voice calls that go through this
interface are degraded. Use priority 0 only if your WAN does not carry any
voice calls. As a guideline, always start assigning priorities from the lowest
level up.
Outbound DS
Code
Allows you to specify the new DS Code added to the packets that match this
filter. If you do not want to change the DS Code in the packets going out
through the interface, don't specify any value for this setting.
If a value is specified, this setting lets Enterprise Edge change the DS code on
outgoing packets. This lets Enterprise Edge be used as a 'marker' device on the
edge of a diffserv capable network.
4. Click Save.
5. In the Filter Configuration screen specify the order of the Filters from the
most important to the least important.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 225
QoS performance graphs and tables
To access QoS performance graphs and tables:
1. Choose QoS, click Performance on the menu bar and then click QoS Session
Graph.
The QoS Performance Graph appears.
2. On the menu, click Performance and then click QoS Session Table.
The QoS Performance Table appears.
3. Access the remaining QoS graphs and QoS tables by following the steps for
QoS Session Graphs and Tables.
Port Range Setting for Legacy Networks
Enterprise Edge uses UDP port ranges to provide high priority to VoIP packets in
existing legacy IP networks. You must reserve these same port ranges and set them
to high priority on all routers that an administrator expects to have QoS support.
You do not need to reserve port ranges on DiffServ networks.
You can select any port ranges that are not used by well-known protocols or
applications.
Each H.323 or VoIP RTP flow uses two ports. The total number of UDP port
numbers to be reserved depends on how many concurrent RTP flows are expected
to cross a router interface. In general:
•
Backbone routers reserve more ports than edge routers.
•
The port ranges on edge routers are a subset of the backbone router port ranges.
•
Include port number UDP 5000 in the reserved port ranges.
•
The port ranges reserved in an Enterprise Edge system are also reserved by the
remote router.
•
You must reserve two ports for each voice call you expect to carry over the
WAN link. The system requires two additional ports for each video session if
the video traffic is treated as premium traffic.
•
You can reserve multiple discontinuous ranges. Enterprise Edge requires that
each range meet the following conditions:
- Each range must start with an even number.
-There must be an even number of ports in a range.
See Appendix C: Setting Up Remote Routers on page 389 for additional
information on setting UDP port ranges on remote routers.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
226 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
To set the QoS port ranges:
1. Choose QoS and click on the PortRanges heading.
The QoS PortRanges screen appears.
To modify port ranges:
1. In the Port Ranges table, click the port ranges you want to modify.
2. On Configuration menu, click Modify Port Ranges.
The Port Ranges screen appears.
3. In the Begin box, type the beginning value for the range.
This must be an even value.
4. In the End box, type the appropriate end value for the range.
5. Click the Save button.
To add port ranges:
1. On the Configuration menu, click Add Port Ranges.
The Port Ranges dialog box appears.
2. In the PortRange (R#) box, type the port range number.
Type an entry that looks like “Rxx” where “xx” is a unique number.
3. In the Begin box, type the beginning value for the range.
This must be an even value.
4. In the End box, type the ending value for the range.
5. Click the Save button.
Note: If the rest of your network is not diffserv capable, you can set filters in
other routers to give higher priority to VoIP traffic. In all the routers
that carry VoIP traffic from the Enterprise Edge server, you must set
filters that classify the traffic to and from these port ranges as high
priority.
To delete port ranges:
1. In the PortRanges table, click the port range you want to delete.
2. On the Configuration menu, click Delete PortRanges.
A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 227
QoS monitor
To set the QoS monitor:
1. Choose Services and click on the QoS Monitor heading.
The QoS Monitor Summary screen appears.
2. Configure the QoS Monitor Summary attributes according to the following
table:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows the description of the service monitor.
Status
Allows you to enable or disable the service monitor.
Version
Shows the version of the service monitor.
3. From the Status list, select Enabled or Disabled.
4. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
QoS Monitor Mean Opinion Score
To view the QoS Monitor Mean Opinion Score:
1. Choose Qos Monitor and click on the Mean Opinion Score heading.
If you configure or create remote gateways by clicking the VoIP Gateway,
Remote Gateway navigation key, the mean opinion scores of the connections to
these remote gateways, which are a measure of quality of the voice link, while
using IP trunk, for each codec type are displayed in the screen. Each configured
gateway appears on a separate row.
Each row consists of the fields for the name of the remote gateway, its IP
address, the status of the QoS monitoring for the connection, and the mean
opinion scores for each allowed voice codec types and for each direction.
If the QoS Monitor setting for the remote gateway entry is Disabled the MOS
value for the remote gateway is N/A. Also, if the QoS Monitor service is
disabled or down for any reason, all MOS values are N/A.
While MOS values are being shown, they are updated approximately every
50 seconds. To refresh the data, on the menu click View and then click Refresh.
2. Click the QoS Monitor navigation key to close the navigation tree.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
228 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Web cache
When you use Enterprise Edge as a web proxy, Enterprise Edge can store, or cache,
information downloaded from the Internet. A proxy is a server that acts on behalf
of another. Web caching allows LAN workstations to share common information
downloaded from the Internet.
With Enterprise Edge configured as a web proxy with web caching:
•
LAN workstations have shorter download times.
•
The system stores previously downloaded information for future use by all
workstations on the LAN.
•
Enterprise Edge retrieves information from the Internet only if it is not already
cached or if the cached file is out of date compared to the information on the
Internet.
You can configure the web caching settings through your web browser.
The web proxy also provides security features similarly to the DNS proxy because
it hides all of the internal browsers’ IP addresses from external web servers.
External web servers see only Enterprise Edge’s IP address.
Guidelines for Using Web Caching/Proxy
The Enterprise Edge web proxy uses a web server for running in HTTP-Proxy
mode.
Consider the following guidelines when using web caching/proxy:
•
You cannot use a web server installed in Enterprise Edge as a general-purpose
HTTP server. It is only used by the Enterprise Edge web-based management
client and web-cache services.
•
If users must run their web sites, they must run a separate HTTP server on a
system different from Enterprise Edge and make its IP address known to the
users of that site.
To configure the web cache settings:
1. On the navigation tree, choose Services and click on the Web Cache heading.
The Web Cache Summary screen appears.
2. Configure the Web Cache attributes according to the table below:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows the description of the Web Cache server.
Version
Shows the version of the Web Cache server.
Status
Shows the status of the Web Cache server.
This setting is read-only. The server always runs to provide support for
web-based UIs for Enterprise Edge.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 229
Attribute
Description
Server Address
Allows you to tell the web server what IP address to use for interacting with
HTTP clients. Since Enterprise Edge server typically has more than one IP
interface and associated IP Address, users can choose this value. This value
is automatically set to the IP Address of the first LAN interface and changes
when the latter changes. Exercise caution if modifying this value.
Cache Mode
Allows you to enable or disable the cache-mode of operation.
Cache Size
Allows you to specify the maximum size (1 -1 100,000), in KB, of the cache.
Garbage Collection Allows you to specify the interval, in hours, between garbage collection
Interval
operations on the cache.
The values are 1 to 24.
Cache Maximum
Life
Allows you to specify the maximum life, in hours, on the proxy server for
the HTTP pages cached in it.
Values are 1 to 24.
Maximum Server
Threads
Allows you to specify the number of threads ready to serve HTTP requests
in the proxy server.
Values are 1 to 255.
3. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Net Link Manager
Net Link Manager is an Enterprise Edge service that provides constant WAN link
status monitoring. Net Link Manager is also where you select your WAN primary
and backup interfaces.
When Net Link Manager detects a primary WAN link failure, Net Link Manager
automatically establishes a backup WAN connection. Net Link Manager monitors
the WAN primary link by performing multiple tests. When a predetermined number
of tests fails, Net Link Manager establishes the backup connection.
The backup connection uses a V.90 modem (North America) or an ISDN line.
When the backup WAN connection is active, Net Link Manager continues to
monitor the status of the primary WAN link connection. When the primary WAN
link connection becomes available again, Net Link Manager disconnects the backup
connection and re-establishes the primary WAN link.
Warning
If an ISDN dial-up connection is used as the primary WAN connection (that is,
no permanent WAN connection is configured), no backup link is available.
Note: Net Link Manager can provide backup for one link only, even though there
are two primary links (one provided from each WAN interface). Net Link
Manager backs up the link who is responsible for the next hop address.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
230 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Note: Net Link Manager manages the default route in Enterprise Edge. If a link
breaks, Net Link Manager removes all the default routes on the broken link
and adds them to the backup link. This happens during switch over from
primary to secondary link. The default routes return to the primary link after
the connection to the primary WAN link is reestablished.
To enable or disable Net Link Manager:
1. On the navigation tree, click Services then click Net Link Manager.
The Net Link Manager Summary screen appears.
The Summary screen attributes are:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows a description of Net Link Manager.
Version
Shows the version number of the subsystem.
Status
Shows the status of Net Link Manager. This box also provides commands to
enable or disable Net Link Manager.
Possible values: Up, Disabled, Enabled
The default value is: Up
2. In the Status list, select enable or disable.
Selecting the permanent WAN link as the primary WAN connection
1. From the Primary WAN Connection screen, click Mode and from the list click
Permanent.
2. Press the Tab key to validate your choice.
3. The Permanent WAN Connection Setting attributes are:
Next Hop on
Primary Link
Allows users to enter the IP address (in dot format) of the next hop router
which usually is the remote router of the primary WAN link. For more
information on setting up remote router, see Appendix C: Setting Up
Remote Routers on page 389.
Up Poll Interval Allows you to set the polling interval, in seconds, when the primary WAN link
is operational WAN.
Down Poll
Interval
Allows you to set the polling interval, in seconds, when the primary WAN link
is down, and the backup (dial-up) WAN link is operational.
Switch Over
Delay
Allows you to define the interval, in seconds, that Net Link Manager waits
before switching back to the primary WAN link when it becomes available.
This delay is to let the router at the other end of the primary link recognize that
the primary link has come up and allows for necessary routing table updates.
The default value is 30 seconds.
Backup Dial Up Allows you to select which dial up interface to use.
Interface
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 231
4. In the Next Hop on Primary Link box, type the IP address of the next hop.
This address is used by Net Link Manager to add a default route in the
Enterprise Edge server. If this address is unreachable, Net Link Manager dials
the backup link and changes the default route.
5. In the Up Poll Interval box, type the interval value in seconds.
The up poll interval is the interval between successive pings when the next
hop on the primary link is available.
6. In the Down Poll Interval box, type the down poll interval in seconds.
A short interval provides faster recovery.
7. In the Switch Over Delay box, type the switch over delay in seconds.
8. From the Backup Dial Up Interface list, select the dial up interface to use for
WAN backup.
9. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
Selecting a dial-up link as the primary WAN connection
The dial-up WAN connection is always configured as dial-on-demand. The dial-up
WAN connection supports PPP only. Enterprise Edge supports ISDN dial-up WAN
connection
Note: When you configure your primary WAN connection to use a dial-up WAN
connection, no backup WAN connection is available.
1. From the Primary WAN Connection screen, click Mode and from the list click
Dialup.
2. Press the Tab key to validate your choice
3. In the Primary WAN Connection Setting section, select a dial-up interface from
the Primary Dial-up Interface list.
Tips
Before you can select a dial-up interface to connect to the network, you must
first create a dial-up interface under Resources, Dial up. For information on
creating a dial-up interface, see Dial Up on page 58.
4. From the menu click View then click Refresh to save your settings.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
232 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Alarm Service
Enterprise Edge Alarm Service performs the following functions:
•
Monitors WinNT event logs for incoming event.
•
Synchronizes WinNT logs with Enterprise Edge alarm database.
•
Receives events (alarms) from other Enterprise Edge applications through its
API and logs the events in the Enterprise Edge database.
•
Archives alarm history based on the criteria defined in Alarm Manager.
•
Monitors the alarm configuration changes and updates SNMP trap agent and
Alarm Service.
To configure Alarm Service settings:
1. Choose Services and click on the Alarm Service heading.
The Alarm Service Summary screen appears.
2. Configure the Alarm Service Summary screen attributes according to the
following table:
Attribute
Description
Descriptions
Shows a description of the alarm service.
Version
Shows the version of the alarm service.
Status
Allows you to enable or disable the alarm service.
3. Press the Tab key to save the settings.
NAT (Network Address Translation)
Enterprise Edge provides security and firewall features to protect your private data
resources from outsiders. The Network Address Translation feature a network
security feature. NAT is the translation of Internet Protocol addresses used within
your private network to different IP addresses known to Internet users outside your
private network. NAT helps ensure network security because each outgoing or
incoming request must go through a translation process that also provides the
opportunity to qualify or authenticate the request or match it to a previous request.
NAT also translates port numbers.
Enterprise Edge supports both static and dynamic NAT for a number of packet
types and protocols:
NAT Support for:
Type
Packets (static and TCP, UDP, IP
dynamic)
Protocols
H.323, FTP, HTTP, POP3, Telnet, SMTP, DNS, TFTP, GOPHER,
FINGER, NNTP, RPC, SUNNFS and SNMP
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 233
Static NAT
Static NAT is the one-to-one mapping of an IP address on your private network to
an IP address from outside your network. Inbound rules must have external IP
addresses mapped to specific internal IP addresses.
Dynamic NAT
Dynamic NAT is the mapping, between a private network and the outside network,
of one address to a pool of addresses, a pool of addresses to one address or a pool
of addresses to another. The mappings are made in a translation table and remain
there until the table is cleared or until an entry times out.
To view Summary NAT screen:
1. On the navigation tree click Services, then click on the NAT heading.
The NAT Summary screen appears. The Summary screen attributes are:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows a description of NAT.
Version
Shows the version number of the subsystem.
Status
Allows you to enable or disable NAT.
Possible values: Disabled, Enabled
The default value is: Disabled
2. Select the status of NAT, Disabled or Enabled.
3. Press Tab to save the setting.
Configuring an Interface with NAT
1. Choose NAT to expand the navigation tree and click on the interface you
want to configure. For example, LAN1.
The Rule Configuration and Rule Setting screens appear.
Note: Rules can be configured in one of two ways, using default rules or
setting up individual rules.
Adding Default rules
2. Select the status of Default Rules: Enabled or Disabled. The default is
Disabled. Two default rules are set. One is for TCP/UDP and the other for IP.
Both are outbound. The IP address for the Public address is the IP address of
the interface you configure. The system automatically fills in the rule order. If
you choose to add additional rules, the default rules still remain, unless you
disable Default Rules.
Note: Before you can specify the Rule Order you must first add the Rules.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
234 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Add a Rule to an Interface
3. Under Configuration, click Add Rule.
The Rule Setting dialog box appears.
4. Configure the Rule settings according to the following table:
Attribute
Description
Rule Name (R#)
Allows you to assign a number to the Rule.
Direction
Allows you to choose if the direction of the rule is In, Out or Both. Both only
applies to IP protocols.
Protocol
Allows you to choose the protocol for this interface; IP, TCP, UDP, or TCP/
UDP.
Private IP Type
Allows you to specify if the IP type is Fixed or Dynamic.
The default is Fixed.
Private IP
Allows you to specify the Private IP address. The Rule is invalid without this
IP address.
Private Mask
Allows you to specify the mask to use with the Private IP.
Private Port
Range (#-#)
Allows you to specify a single or range of entries (1-65535) or the following;
ALL, FTP, Telnet, SMTP, DNS, Finger, HTTP, H.323, POP3, NNTP,
RPC, SUNNFS, SNMP, SNMP-TRAP, TFTP and Gopher.
Public IP Type
Allows you to specify if the IP type is Fixed or Dynamic.
The default is Fixed.
Public IP
Allows you to specify the Public IP address. This address should be on the
outside network.
Public Mask
Allows you to specify the mask to use with the Public IP.
If you enter 255.255.255.255 then the Public IP is a single address.
If you enter 0.0.0.0 then the Public IP is all possible addresses.
Public Port
Range (#-#)
Allows you to specify a single or range of entries (1-65535) or the following;
ALL, FTP, Telnet, SMTP, DNS, Finger, HTTP, H.323, POP3, NNTP,
RPC, SUNNFS, SNMP, SNMP-TRAP, TFTP and Gopher.
Note: If you do not configure the public and private masks correctly the
system will be affected. You must specify addresses that exist. For
example, if you configure an outbound rule, the Public IP address and
Public Mask are the translated addresses. These addresses must be
assigned or packets will be sent to a non-existent destination. For
inbound rules, the translated address is the Private Address and Mask.
5. Click Save.
6. When you finish adding rules, configure the Rule Order box in the Rule
Configuration screen for the interface.
Note: Configure the rule order from most specific to most general. For
example, a TCP rule for one port should come before a general rule for
all TCP traffic. IP rules should come last.
7. Press Tab to update the screen.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 235
Example of a common NAT configuration
An Enterprise Edge has two LANs and a WAN. The WAN connects to the outside
and has one public IP address. The LANs are part of a private network. The system
allows outgoing traffic but only HTTP traffic is allowed in. LAN1 subnet is
10.10.10.0, LAN2 is 10.10.11.0. The WAN address is 48.123.35.41. The web
server address is 10.10.10.4.
The rules would be as follows:
Rule1
Rule 2
Direction: Out
Direction: In
Protocol: TCP/UDP
Protocol: TCP
Private IP Address: 10.10.0.0
Private IP Address: 10.10.10.4
Private IP Type: Fixed
Private IP Type: Fixed
Private IP Mask: 255.255.0.0
Private IP Mask: 255.255.255.255
Private Port Range: All
Private Port Range: HTTP
Public IP Address: 48.123.35.41
Public IP Address: 48.123.35.41
Public IP type: Fixed
Public IP type: Fixed
Public IP mask: 255.255.255.255
Public IP mask: 255.255.255.255
Public Port Range: ALL
Public Port Range: 8080a
a. Mapping 8080 to the HTTP port on 10.10.10.4.
IP Firewall Filters
The Enterprise Edge IP Firewall Filters feature is one of the security features
Enterprise Edge offers to protect your network against intruders. The security and
firewall features are also used for controlling what outside resources your users will
be able to access. The following features are part of the Enterprise Edge firewall:
•
Basic (stateless) Packet Filter
•
Stateful Packet Filters
The DNS proxy also carries security features because it keeps all of the internal IP
addresses from external web servers. For information on DNS proxy, see DNS on
page 199.
Note: For information on using filters for IPX routing, see IPX Routing on page
208.
Packet filtering
A packet filter is a firewall facility that can monitor the state of active connections
and use this information to determine which network packets to allow through the
firewall.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
236 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Basic (stateless) Packet Filter
Enterprise Edge supports basic (or stateless) packet filtering for IPX protocols.
With basic packet filters, you can configure your system to:
•
Pass packets only from the routes listed in the filter definition.
•
Pass everything except the packets from the routes listed in the filter definition.
To view and change the status of Firewall Filters:
1. Choose Services, then click on the IP Firewall Filters heading.
The Firewall Filters Summary screen appears. The Summary screen attributes
are:
Attribute
Description
Description
Shows a description of Firewall Filters.
Version
Shows the version number of the subsystem.
Status
Shows the status of Firewall Filters. This box also provides commands to
enable or disable Firewall Filters.
Possible values: Disabled, Enabled
The default value is: Disabled
2. Choose the status of the Firewall Filters, Enabled or Disabled.
Configuring Firewall Filters for an Interface
3. Choose Firewall Filters and click on the heading you want to configure. For
example, LAN1.
The Logging Settings, Log Viewing Options, Input Filters’ Rule
Configuration, Input Filters’ Rule Setting, Output Filters’ Rule Configuration,
Output Filters’ Rule Setting screens appear.
4. In the Logging Settings screen, choose if Logging is Disabled or Enabled.
5. In the Logging Settings screen, choose the Logging Level:
- Level 1 logs errors only
- Level 2 logs warnings
- Level 3 logs everything
6. In the Log Viewing Options screen, type the Start Date and End Date (mm/
dd/yyyy).This is only necessary if you wish to view existing logging data.
Note: You can configure rules two ways; using default rules, or, setting up
individual rules.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 237
Adding Default Rules
7. Select the status of Firewall Status: Enabled or Disabled. The default is
Disabled. When you enable Firewall Status, the system allows all outgoing
packets and blocks all incoming packets. If this is how you want the system to
work, then no other rules need to be set.
Adding an Input Filter for a Firewall Filter Interface
8. Before you can specify a Rule Order you must add Filters.
On the Configuration menu click Add Input Filter or Add Output Filter.
9. Configure the Input/Output Filter according to the following table:
Packet Filter Feature
Comments
Name(IR#)
Allows you to assign a number to the Rule.
Stateful
Allows you to specify if this rule will have its states monitored.
This permits the creation of one-way rules. For example, you
can permit inside traffic to return but block outside traffic.
For more information refer to Stateful Packet Filters on
page 238.
The values are Yes and No. The default is Yes.
Disposition
Allows you to specify if a packet that matches this rule passes
through or is blocked.
The values are Block or Pass. The default is Block.
Protocol
Allows you to specify the protocol type of the packet to be
filtered.
The values are; IP, TCP, UDP, TCP/UDP and ICMP. The
default is IP.
Source IP Type
Allows you to specify if the Source IP is Fixed or Dynamic.
The default is Fixed.
Source IP
The source address box of the packet to be filtered.
Source Range Mask
Allows you to specify the source address mask of the packet to
be filtered.
If you enter 255.255.255.255 then the Public IP is a single
address.
If you enter 0.0.0.0 then the Public IP is all possible addresses.
Source Port Range (#-#)
Allows you to specify a single or range of entries (1-65535) or
the following; ALL, FTP, Telnet, SMTP, SNMP, DNS,
DHCP, TFTP, Gopher, Finger, HTTP, H.323, POP, NNTP,
NetBios, RPC, and SUNNFS.
Destination IP Type
Allows you to specify if the Destination IP Type is Fixed or
Dynamic.
The default is Fixed.
Destination IP
Allows you to specify the Destination IP address.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
238 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Packet Filter Feature
Comments
Destination Range Mask
Allows you to specify the source destination mask of the packet
to be filtered.
If you enter 255.255.255.255 then the Public IP is a single
address.
If you enter 0.0.0.0 then the Public IP is all possible addresses.
Destination Port Range (#-#)
Allows you to specify a single or range of entries (1-65535) or
the following; ALL, FTP, Telnet, SMTP, SNMP, DNS,
DHCP, TFTP, Gopher, Finger, HTTP, POP, NNTP,
NetBios, RPC, and SUNNFS.
Source Routing
Allows you to specify how Source Routing is checked.
Ignore: source routing is not checked.
Allow: packets with source routing are matched.
Deny: packets without source routing are matched.
The default is Ignore.
IP Options
Allows you to specify how Source Routing is checked.
Ignore: IP options are not checked.
Allow: packets with IP options are matched.
Deny: packets without IP options are matched.
The default is Ignore.
Quick
Allows you to specify the order of rule match. Yes means that
the first rule match is used. No means the last rule match is
used.
Note: By default, there are no packet filters.
10. Click Save.
After you enter all the Input and Output Filters for an interface:
11. Type in the Input Filters’ Rule Order for the interface you are configuring.
12. Type in the Output Filters’ Rule Order for the interface you are configuring.
Stateful Packet Filters
Enterprise Edge supports stateful and basic packet filtering for IP protocols.
Stateful packet filters monitor active sessions and records session information such
as IP addresses and port numbers. They maintain state information for each flow
(TCP, UDP or ICMP). Stateful filters use the state information to determine if a
packet is responding to an earlier request from an internal node. If the packet is in
response to a request previously made from within the network, the packet is
forwarded to its destination. If a packet originates from an external node, it is
dropped unless a filter rule specifically allows it to be routed to an internal node.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 239
Stateful packet filters protect your network against Internet attacks such as source
spoofing, where an attacker pretends to be a trusted user by using an IP address that
is within the accepted range of IP addresses of your internal network. Enterprise
Edge stateful packet filtering validates that addresses coming from outside the
network are valid outside addresses. Stateful packet filter also protect your network
from a denial-of-service attack, where an attacker tries to block valid users from
accessing a resource or a server.
Stateful filtering supports TCP, UDP, IP, and ICMP. Stateful filtering supports the
following applications: H.323, FTP, HTTP, POP3, Telnet, SMTP, DNS, DHCP,
TFTP, GOPHER, FINGER, NNTP, NetBios, POP2, RPC, SNMP and SUNNFS.
Stateful and basic filtering is configured based on the following criteria
Packet Filter Feature
Comments
Source Address
The source address box of the packet to be filtered.
Source Mask
The source address mask of the address to be filtered.
Destination Address
The destination address box of the packet to be filtered.
Destination Mask
The destination address mask of the address to be filtered.
Protocol
The protocol type of the packet to be filtered. Possible values
are TCP, UDP, ICMP or IP.
Source Port Range
The source port or range of ports of the packet to be filtered.
This box applies only if protocol value is TCP or UDP.
Destination Port Range
The destination port or range of ports of the packet to be
filtered. This box applies only if protocol value is TCP or UDP.
Rule Order
In a comma separated list format, gives the order in which the
filter must apply the rules listed in the Rule Names box.
Rule Name
Define rule name.
Stateful
Select Yes if stateful filtering is required, or No if stateful
filtering is not required. Default: Yes.
Disposition
Specifies the action to take for the packets matching a filter’s
criteria. This parameter must be set for each filter. Action to
take may be different from one filter to the next.
Values are: Block or Pass. Default: Block.
Source Routing
Specifies whether or not to allow any source routing bits in the
IP options box in the IP header.
Values are: Ignore, Allow or Deny. Default: Ignore.
Status
Specifies if the system enforces default filter policy of block all
incoming and pass all outgoing packets. If you disable status,
the system allows packets through.
Values are: Enabled or Disabled. Default: Disabled.
IP options
Specifies whether of not to check any IP options are in the
packet.
Values are: Ignore, Allow or Deny. Default: Ignore.
Source IP Type
For static source IP addresses, this box is set to Fixed.
Otherwise, it is set to Dynamic for source IP addresses.
Values are: Fixed, Dynamic. Default: Fixed.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
240 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services
Packet Filter Feature
Comments
Destination IP Type
For static destination IP addresses, this box is set to Fixed.
Otherwise, it is set to Dynamic for dynamic destination IP
addresses.
Quick
If this box is set to Yes, the filter stops matching operation when
it locates the first match. If set to No, the filter will check the
entire list of rules to find all matches and apply the last match.
Default: Yes.
Note: When you set filters, make sure to allow the flow of packets going to the
RPC port (port 135 TCP or UDP) for correct Unified Manager operation.
For IP Firewall Filter configuration information, see IP Firewall Filters on page
235.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1 241
Configuring Digital Private Network
Signalling System1
6
Note: Throughout this chapter, M7100, M7208, M7310, and M7324 are used to
refer to both the M7xxx and M7xxxN telephone sets. For example, M7100
refers to both the M7100 and M7100N set.
DPNSS 1 services
The Digital Private Network Signalling System (DPNSS 1) is a networking
protocol enhancement that extends the private networking capabilities of existing
Enterprise Edge systems. It is designed to offer greater centralised functionality for
operators, giving them access to Enterprise Edge features over multiple combined
networks.
Note: The DPNSS feature is dependent on the market profile loaded on your
system and whether on not you have a software keycode to enable the
feature.
DPNSS 1 allows an Enterprise Edge local node, acting as a terminating node, to
communicate with other PBXs over the network. For example, corporate offices
separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS 1 to other Enterprise Edge
nodes, bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected.
This allows connected Enterprise Edge nodes to function like a private network,
with all features of Enterprise Edge accessible.
Tips
Enterprise Edge DPNSS 1 works as a terminating node only.
Enterprise Edge to Enterprise Edge DPNSS is not supported.
DPNSS 1 features can be used on any Enterprise Edge telephone set. On most
Enterprise Edge telephone sets, you must use specific keys and/or enter a number
code to access the features. For a description of the types of Enterprise Edge sets,
see the Enterprise Edge Feature Programming Telephone Guide.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
242 Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1
DPNSS 1 capabilities
A single Enterprise Edge node, acting as a terminating node on the network,
supports the following capabilities over DPNSS 1 lines:
•
Direct Dial Inward (DDI) for incoming calls.
•
Originating Line Identification (OLI) for incoming and outgoing calls:
— For incoming calls, the Calling Line Identification (CLI/CLID) information
is displayed to the user on telephone sets with line display (must be configured in programming).
— For outgoing calls, the directory number of the originating party is sent out
as OLI.
•
Terminal Line Identification (TLI) for incoming and outgoing calls. Referred to
as Called Line Identification.
•
Selective Line Redirect (SLR) and External Call Forward (ECF) implemented
on calls between DPNSS 1, and BRI/PRI, DASS2, and Analog lines.
•
These remote access features are supported on DPNSS: DDI, line pool access
code, destination Codes and remote page feature codes.
•
Software Keys; these are required to enable DPNSS 1.
DPNSS 1 features
The following features are available and can be programmed over DPNSS lines:
•
Three Party Service
•
Diversion
•
Redirection
•
Call Offer
•
Executive Intrusion
•
Route optimization
•
Message waiting indication
•
Loop avoidance
The following parameters can be configured for DPNNS 1 lines:
•
Line Type
•
Prime set
•
CLID set
•
Auto Privacy
•
Answer Mode
•
Auxiliary Ringer
•
Full auto Hold
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1 243
Some features are transparent to the user, but must be programmed to be activated.
Others are available for end-user programming at the set. Detailed explanations of
these features follows.
Three Party Service
Three Party Service is a DPNSS 1 feature for Enterprise Edge, similar to the
Enterprise Edge Conference feature. In fact, using the feature at an Enterprise Edge
set is identical in all respects to the Conference feature.
The Three Party Service allows a user, usually an operator, to establish a three-party
conference by calling two other parties from one telephone set. Once the connection
is made, the controlling party can hang up, leaving the other two connected. The
controlling party can even put one party on hold, and talk to the other party.
Note: Enterprise Edge does not support Hold over the DPNSS link itself, which
means that the conferenced party on the distance end of the network cannot
place a Three Party Service call on Hold.
This feature is basically designed to allow operators to assist in the connection of
calls from one main location.
Making a conference call
To initiate or disconnect from a conference call on an Enterprise Edge system over
DPNSS 1, proceed as in “Creating a conference call” in the Enterprise Edge
Feature Programming Telephone Guide.
Note: Three Party Service is supported on M7100 and M7000 telephone sets, but
in a receive-only fashion. These set types cannot initiate Three Party
Service. For more information about these set types, see the Enterprise Edge
M7000 User Card and the Enterprise Edge M7100 User Card.
Diversion
Diversion is a DPNSS 1 feature for Enterprise Edge that lets users forward their
calls to a third party on the DPNSS 1 network. Functionality is similar to Call
Forward on Enterprise Edge, but takes advantage of the broader capabilities of
DPNSS.
There are five variations of Diversion: Call Diversion Immediate, Call Diversion
On Busy, Call Diversion On No Reply, Bypass Call Diversion, and Follow-me
Diversion, described as follows:
•
Diversion Immediate diverts all calls to an alternate set. This function is
programmed by the user at the telephone set.
•
Diversion On Busy diverts all calls to an alternate set when a set is busy. This
feature is programmed in the Unified Manager.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
244 Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1
•
Diversion On No Reply diverts calls that go unanswered after a specified
amount of time. This feature is programmed in the Unified Manager.
•
Bypass Call Diversion overrides all Call Forward features active on a set over a
DPNSS line. An incoming call to the set will not be forwarded; instead, the set
will continue to ring as if Call Forward were not active. This feature could be
used to “insist” that a call should be answered at that location. Bypass Call
Diversion is a receive-only feature on Enterprise Edge, and cannot be invoked
from an Enterprise Edge set.
•
Follow-me Diversion is also a receive-only feature. It allows the Call
Forwarded destination to remotely change the Enterprise Edge Call Forwarding
programming (Call Forward All Calls (CFAC) feature) to a different telephone
set. (Enterprise Edge CFAC must be active and the destination set/PBX must
support the feature.)
For example, user A forwards all calls to set B, a temporary office. Later, user
A moves on to location C. The user does not have to be at set A to forward calls
to location C. Using set B and Follow-me Diversion, the user can forward calls
from A to location C instead.
•
Follow-me diversion can also be cancelled from the forwarded location.
Note: Diversion on Busy and Diversion on No Reply cannot be cancelled from the
nominated (forwarded) telephone sets. These are programmable only by an
installer and not by the user (as in Diversion Immediate).
Note: If multiple sets are programmed to take a call, the first set to respond will
act. All other sets responding are ignored. Therefore, if the first set to
respond has Diversion enabled, this feature will be invoked.
Restrictions by set type
Diversion is indicated differently on different types of sets:
•
All variations of the feature are supported on Enterprise Edge terminals M7000,
M7100, M7208, M7310 and M7324.
•
ATA—All variations of the feature are supported on an ATA.
•
ISDN—All variations of the feature are supported on ISDN sets except
Diversion on Busy and CFWD Busy.
•
Portables—All variations of the feature are supported on portable sets.
•
DNA—Diversion features can be invoked from an Enterprise Edge set
connected on a DNA with boot up. This set can act as a valid destination for
DPNSS Diversion regardless of whether a set is physically connected to the
DNA.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1 245
Setting Diversion
You set Diversion for DPNSS in the same way as Call Forward, see Capabilities on
page 98. You will need to enter the end DN when prompted. You may also need to
include the DPNSS 1 routing number.
Redirection
Redirection is a DPNSS 1 feature similar to Enterprise Edge Transfer Callback.
Redirection lets a call awaiting connection, or re-connection, be redirected by the
originating party to an alternate destination after a time-out period. Failed calls can
also be redirected. Priority calls are not redirected.
Note: The address to redirect depends on the history of the call. Calls that have
been transferred could be redirected to the party that transferred them. In all
other cases, the address to redirect is the one registered at the PBX
originating the redirection.
Note: Enterprise Edge does not support the redirection of Enterprise Edge
originated calls, even over DPNSS 1.
The Diversion on No Reply feature takes precedence over Redirection.
Restrictions by set type
Redirection is indicated differently on different types of telephone sets:
•
For sets without displays the “#” key acts as MORE and the “*” key acts as VIEW.
•
ATA—Is not supported.
•
ISDN—All variations of the feature are supported on ISDN sets.
•
Portables—All variations of the feature are supported on portable sets.
•
DNA—Is not supported.
Setting Redirection
The timer used for the network Callback Feature applies for redirection.
Executive Intrusion
Executive Intrusion (EI) is a DPNSS 1 feature that allows an operator, or other
calling party, to intrude on a line when it is busy. This feature might be required, for
example, in times of emergency or to make an important announcement when the
recipient is on another call.
EI is similar in functionality to Enterprise Edge Priority Call. It is, however, a
receive-only feature on Enterprise Edge sets; that is, EI cannot be initiated from an
Enterprise Edge set. The originating caller would be on another PBX on the DPNSS
1 network.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
246 Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1
When EI is used to intrude on a call in progress, a three-way connection is
established between the originating party and the two parties on the call. The result
is very much like a conference call. When one of the three parties clears the line,
the other two remain connected, and EI is terminated.
Restrictions by set type
Executive Intrusion is indicated differently on different types oftelephone sets:
•
ATA—Is supported.
•
ISDN—Is not supported.
•
Portables—Is not supported.
•
DNA—Is not supported.
The set receiving the intrusion will display Intrusion Call. A warning indication
tone will sound after intrusion has taken place, and the standard conference call tone
will sound every 20 seconds.
Intrusion levels
Whether or not a set will accept or reject an Executive Intrusion request depends on
the level of intrusion protection programmed. Each set (DN) has an Intrusion
Capability Level (ICL) and an Intrusion Protection Level (IPL) of 0 to 3 (Low,
Medium and High).
When the ICL of the intruding set is higher than the IPLs of both sets on the active
call, EI will occur. It is assumed that the intruding set always has a higher ICL, as
it will not be an Enterprise Edge set. For this reason, it is best to set the IPLs of most
telephone sets to the default of None, or Low or Medium.
Intrusion levels are described as follows:
•
ICL: determines the set’s ability to intrude. As long as the ICL is higher than the
wanted party, EI is allowed. Since EI is a receive-only feature, the ICL is not an
issue, and in fact cannot be set on Enterprise Edge.
•
IPL: determines the set’s ability to refuse intrusion. If the IPL is lower than the
originating party, EI is allowed. For general purposes setting the IPL to None,
Low or Medium is recommended, unless intrusion is not wanted.
To program IPL on a set:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & Sets, Capabilities.
2. Choose Intrusion.
3. Click a Protection level: None, Low, Med, or High.
If the level of intrusion protection is set to High no intrusions will be allowed.
The default is None.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1 247
Call Offer
Call Offer over DPNSS 1 allows a calling party to indicate to the wanted party that
there is an incoming call available, even though there is no answer button available
to present the call on the set. The intended recipient can ignore, accept, or decline
the offered call. Call Offer is useful in increasing the call-coverage capability of an
Enterprise Edge system, and helps to lift the network processing load. It is a
receive-only capability on Enterprise Edge: incoming calls would be initiated at
another PBX on the DPNSS 1 network.
An example of Call Offer in use is an operator or attendant who has a number of
calls coming in at once. The operator can extend one call and move to the next
without waiting for the first call to be answered.
Displays
When a Call Offer is made by the originating exchange, the target set displays a
message, and a tone is heard. When an offered call arrives on sets with line display,
the user will see XX...X wtng if the calling party ID is available and CLID is
enabled, otherwise, Line XXX waiting is shown (the line name associated with
the call). If there are more than 11 digits in the incoming number, only the last 10
will display.
If Call Queuing is programmed for the system, the display will show
Release Line XXX.
This is the line name of the highest-priority queued call if it is an offered call.
Restrictions by set type
Call Offer is indicated differently on different types of sets:
•
M7000—The associated LED or LCD will flash, and a tone is heard.
•
ATA—Call Offer is supported as a Camp On feature and a tone is heard.
•
ISDN—Is not supported.
•
Portables—Is not supported.
•
DNA—Is not supported.
Note the following general conditions and restrictions:
•
DND on busy must be programmed as N (see Terminals & Sets, Capabilities)
for a set to accept Call Offer.
•
If CF on busy is programmed for the set, Call Offer will not be accepted.
•
The target line for the set must be set to: If busy: busy tone, which is the default
(see Trunk/line data on page 111).
•
Call Offer will not work if sent over Manual answer lines. Again, it is
recommended that for the majority of purposes, lines be left at the default:
Auto.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
248 Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1
User Actions
The party receiving a Call Offer has three choices, as follows:
•
Ignore it. After a programmed time interval, the Offer request will be removed.
•
Reject it. If the user activates Do Not Disturb on Busy (DND) when the Call
Offer request is made, the request is removed from the set. The calling party is
informed of the rejection.
A call cannot be offered to a set with DND active. The line indicator for external
incoming calls still flashes.
•
Accept it. The Offer is accepted by releasing the active call.
Note: Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy. Call Offer cannot be
accepted by putting an active call on hold.
Route Optimization
Route Optimization is a DPNSS 1 feature for Enterprise Edge that lets calls follow
the optimum route between two end PBXs. This allows efficient use of network
resources.
Route Optimization is initiated by the system and is transparent to the user.
However, in some cases the user may see a call switch from an appearance on the
set to another appearance key or from an intercom key to the appearance key or vice
versa. This occurs when Enterprise Edge receives a Route Optimization request and
initiates a new call to follow the optimal route.
If a set is active on a private line call, the Route Optimization call being established
may go on a public line. This will cause a loss of privacy on that line.
Data calls are rejected by Route Optimization in order to ensure the data
transmission is not affected.
Certain situations result in Route Optimization not taking place. For example, calls
that are using Hold, Parking or Camp features will not undergo Route Optimization,
and if a Route Optimization call undergoes Diversion, the Route Optimization is
dropped.
Setting Route Optimization
There is no system programming required for the feature when Enterprise Edge is
working as a terminating PBX; however, Enterprise Edge must have a private
access code programmed that maps to a valid destination code or line pool code on
DPNSS lines. Further, Allow redirect must be set to Y. For more information, see
Capabilities on page 98.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1 249
Message Waiting Indication
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) is a DPNSS 1 feature for Enterprise Edge Call
Services. Messages are received at a centralised location (a telephone set you predetermine), where they are processed and forwarded to the target set. This
centralisation relieves the network processing load, making the system more
efficient. MWI provides users with the ability to scroll through, erase and reply to
messages.
When there are messages to be retrieved, Message for you is displayed at the set.
Once all the messages are retrieved by the user, a Message Waiting Cancellation
(MWC) is sent from the call centre, and the user set no longer displays MWI.
MWI also allows the user to reply or call back to the message centre. The procedure
for retrieving messages is described in the Enterprise Edge Feature Programming
Telephone Guide.
This feature is only supported on Enterprise Edge target lines.
Restrictions by set type
•
Message Waiting Indication is indicated differently on different types of sets:
•
M7000—Ihe associated LED will flash.
•
ATA—Is not supported.
•
ISDN—Is not supported.
•
Portables—Is not supported.
•
DNA—Is not supported.
Setting Message Waiting Indication
To set Message Waiting Indication, the following conditions must be established:
•
Assign message centre to a line.
•
Select message centre for use.
•
Assign the line to a set to Appear and/or Ring.
Assigning message centres to a line
You need to assign any one of five, or None, of the message centres to the line.
There can be as many as five message centres in a network; that is, five telephone
sets on the Enterprise Edge system can act as mailboxes in the message centres
offered by five different PBXs on the network. These PBXs may also be from
different manufacturers.
Thus, for each message centre there may be different:
•
numbers to be dialled to reach the mailbox from the set
•
MWI strings received, indicating that the centre has a message in the mailbox
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
250 Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1
•
MWC strings received, indicating that the voice mails have been retrieved
When assigning message centres, you can program all three parameters for each.
Remember that the following procedure is not to select a message centre, but to
program any or all of the five available message centres. (This is similar to the
Direct Dial functionality.)
Tips
The MWI and MWC strings used in this procedure are default NSI strings for
Message Waiting.
*58B*AN*1# – Message Waiting Indication
*58B*AN*0# – Message Waiting Cancellation
This provides the information required to program the strings as:
AN*1# for MWI, and
AN*0# for MWC
Private network strings will differ with different message centres. These should
only be changed on the advice of your customer service representative.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines, Telco Features.
2. Click Voice message centre numbers.
3. Choose a Voice message center: 1 to 5.
The existing set (DN) for Message Waiting is displayed, if available, as
Tel#:XXXX.
4. Type the new target number (starting with an access code, if required), or
None. For example: 65142222.
The display shows MWI:AN*1#. This is a string sent by the PBX holding the
message centre.
5. Program the number that the user will dial on the IC key to retrieve a message
from the messaging centre.
6. Program the Non-Specified Information (NSI) string for the MWI that is
expected from the particular message centre.
The display shows MWC:AN*0#. See the next procedure: “Programming
MWI and MWC.”
7. Program the NSI string for the MWC that is expected from the message
centre.
Note: The line must be programmed to Appear and/or Ring at the set.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1 251
Programming MWI and MWC
MWI and MWC information is received from the network in the form of NSI
strings. The NSI strings in DPNSS are dependent on the supplier of the PBX;
therefore, the strings vary depending on the originating PBX.
Each string has the following default structure:
*58XYYYYY..*
The table describes each part of the NSI string:
String Component
*58
Description
Identifies that it is an NSI string.
X
Any letter from A to Z, or nothing.
YYYYY..
Manufacturer specific string, which can contain any sequence of
alphanumeric digits, or *.
#
Marks the end of the identifier.
Only the YYYYY.. # portion of the string must be programmed for MWI and MWC.
The procedure is similar to Set Name/Line Name.
Note: The following criteria must be met when programming NSI strings for
MWI/MWC:
•
No spaces are allowed, including spaces at the end of the string.
•
A # must be present at the end.
•
A # or a * cannot be present in the first character.
Selecting a message centre
With a message centre programmed on a selected line, you must set the message
centre for use:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines.
2. Click a target line number (Line 241 to 364).
3. Click Telco Features, Voice message center numbers.
4. Choose a Voice Message center: 1 to 5.
Setting Message Waiting Indication
1. Ensure that you have programmed a set to access target lines for receiving
messages (see “Assigning message centres to a line, above):
2. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Terminals & Sets.
3. Click a DN (DN 221-528).
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
252 Configuring Digital Private Network Signalling System1
4. Choose Telco Features, Feature assignment.
5. Click Y to enable Call log set.
6. Click Y to enable Vmsg set.
When Vmsg is enabled for a target line on a set, the set logs Message Waiting
Indication/Cancellation received for the corresponding target lines to the user.
Loop avoidance
Errors in the configuration of a network may make it possible for a call to be
misrouted, and arrive at a PBX through which it has already passed. This would
continue, causing a loop which would eventually use up all of the available
channels. The Loop Avoidance service permits counting of DPNSS 1 transit PBXs
and rejecting a call when the count exceeds a predetermined limit.
Programming Loop avoidance
To set Loop avoidance during hardware configuration:
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules, Bus 02 - 07, Modules on Bus,
Module 1.
2. Choose Module type DPNSS.
3. Type a value (0-25) in the Maximum transits box.
The default value is 25.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Management Settings
7
The following shows the programming map for Management:
Management
User Manager
Alarm Manager
In Enterprise Edge Unified Manager, Management allows you to manage user and
alarm settings. Under the Management heading, Unified Manager displays the
following subheadings:
•
User Manager, which displays the User Profile window showing a list of the
current Enterprise Edge user name and associated passwords and access
privileges. The User Profile window allows you to add, modify or delete any
user profile information.
•
Alarm Manager, which displays the Alarm Database, SNMP Trap and the
Alarm Backup Batch Job windows. The Alarm Database window allows you to
modify event information collection parameters. The SNMP Trap window
allows you to enable or disable the sending of different SNMP traps. The Alarm
Backup Batch Job window allows you to enable or disable and to schedule
alarm backup batch job.
User Manager
Enterprise Edge comes with the following default user profiles:
•
Manager Default password: "manager". Access privilege: Read-Write
•
ModemBackup (North America only):
•
supervisor: administrator type user, with "visor" as the default password
•
TivDialup:
•
user: read-only type user, with "user" as the default password
Note: After installation, change the all administrator type passwords.
WARNING
Do not change the default ModemBackup and TivDialup passwords. If you
change the TivDialup password, Enterprise Edge cannot connect with Tivoli. If
you change the ModemBackup password, Enterprise Edge cannot make a
dialup network connection if NetLinkManager detects a break in the
permanent link.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
254 Configuring Management Settings
Adding a user profile
To add a user profile:
1. From Unified Manager, select Management, User Manager.
The User Profile screen appears showing the current user profile information.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Add User.
The User Profile dialog box appears.
3. Use the following table to add the new user profile information:
Attribute
Description
User Name
Allows you to enter the user name. The User Name is case-sensitive and must
not exceed 50 characters in length.
Password
Allows you to assign a password for the user. The password is case-sensitive
and must exceed 15 characters in length.
Confirmed
Password
Allows you to enter the password again to validate the new or modified
password.
Privilege
Allows you to select the level of access associated with the user name. The
following levels of access are available:
READ-ONLY: Allows you to view programming settings, but not to modify
them.
READ-WRITE: Allows you to view and modify programming settings.
READ-WRITE-DIAL: Allows you to view, modify and use a network dial-up
connection.
READ-ONLY-CDR: Allows you to view CDR programming settings.
READ-WRITE-CDR: Allows you to view and modify CDR programming
settings.
4. Click the SAVE button to save your settings.
The new user profile information is added to the list on the User Profile
window.
Modifying a user profile
To modify a user profile:
1. From Unified Manager, select Management, User Manager.
The User Profile window appears showing a list of the current user profiles.
2. From the User Profile window, click on the User Name for which you want to
modify user profile information.
The row containing that user profile information is highlighted.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Management Settings 255
3. From the Configuration menu, select Modify User.
The User Profile dialog box appears.
Note: You cannot modify a user name. You must delete the complete User
Profile row from the User Profile window and add a profile with the
new name.
4. Make the necessary changes in the User Profile dialog box.
5. Click the SAVE button to save your settings.
Unified Manager displays the User Profile window.
Deleting a user profile
To delete a user profile:
1. From Unified Manager, select Management, User Manager.
The User Profile window appears showing a list of the current user profiles.
2. From the User Profile window, click on the User Name you want to delete.
The row containing the user profile information is highlighted.
3. From the Configuration menu, select Delete User.
A Select an Option dialog box asks you if you want to delete this row.
4. Click the YES button to delete the user profile.
The User Profile window is updated.
Note: Maintain only one user profile with administrator privileges and allow
only system administrator to use this user profile. Multiple users
logging on to Enterprise Edge from different client stations using the
administrator account can cause inconsistent or wrong configuration.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
256 Configuring Management Settings
Alarm Manager
The Alarm Manager enables you to manage the collection and storage of alarm
information. The Alarm Manager allows you to set different collection parameters
for the Alarm Database. You can use the Alarm Manager to enable or disable the
sending of all or some types of SNMP traps. The Alarm Manager provides the
Alarm Backup Batch Job, an application which backs up old alarm records to an
archive folder at a scheduled time.
Enterprise Edge provides real-time information about what is occurring within the
Enterprise Edge system through the Alarm Banner and the Alarm Browser.
The Enterprise Edge alarm system includes the following components:
•
Alarm Banner: The Alarm Banner provides a window which allows you to
continually monitor the Enterprise Edge system for alarms. For more
information, see Fault Alarm Banner on page 308.
•
Alarm Browser: The Alarm Browser allows you to browse through a list of
alarms and provides detailed information on each one. For more information,
see Alarm Browser on page 308.
Configuring the Alarm Manager
1. From Unified Manager, click the Management key to expand the navigation
tree and then click Alarm Manager.
Unified Manager displays the Alarm Database, SNMP Trap and Alarm
Backup Batch Job windows.
2. Use the following table to configure the Alarm Database:
Attribute
Description
Maximum
Number Record
Allows you to set the maximum number of records that the alarm database
stores. The default is 0 (no limit). The range is from 0 to 5000.
Kept Timer (days) Allows you to set the number of days that the records remain in the database
before the record is archived.
Resync Timer
(seconds)
Allows you to set, in seconds, the interval (in seconds) at which the alarm
service synchronizes with the Windows NT event logs.
Archive Location
Allows you to enter the path to the directory where the alarm information is
kept. The default path is: “d:datafiles\nortel networks\unified manager\archive\
3. Click TAB to save your settings or continue the configuration.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Configuring Management Settings 257
4. Use the following table to configure the SNMP Trap:
Attribute
Description
TrapsEnabled
Allows you to enable or disable the sending of SNMP traps when a new event
arrives in the alarm database.
EventInfo
Enabled
Allows you to enable or disable sending SNMP traps when an “Information”
event arrives in the alarm database.
EventWarning
Enabled
Allows you to enable or disable sending SNMP traps when a “Warning” event
arrives in the alarm database.
EventError
Enabled
Allows you to enable or disable sending SNMP traps when an “Error” event
arrives in the alarm database.
SrcExclusion
List
Allows you to add, in a comma-separated format, a list of event sources from
which SNMP traps must not be generated. The source exclusion list prevents
you from receiving SNMP traps which have no meaning to you.
5. Use the following table to configure the Alarm Backup Batch Job:
Attribute
Description
Batch Job
Allows you to start or stop a scheduled batch backup to an archive folder. The
Alarm Backup Batch Job uses the Kept Timer value from the Alarm Database
screen to determine when to archive an alarm record.
Schedule Day
Allows you to set the day when the system must perform the backup.
Schedule Time
Allows you to set the time the backup must start.
Tips
Before you change the day or time, or both, you must first stop the batch job.
Make your changes, and then start the batch job again.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
258 Configuring Management Settings
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance
8
This chapter contains the following information:
•
Enterprise Edge general maintenance on page 259
•
Enterprise Edge system diagnostics and utilities on page 269
•
Maintenance programming for telephony resources on page 278
For information on hunt group and call-by-call usage metrics, refer to Metrics on
page 301.
For information on physically moving telephones, refer to Moving telephones on
page 302.
Enterprise Edge general maintenance
•
System startup on page 259
•
Warm reset on page 260
•
Backup and restore on page 260
•
Backup, restore, upgrade utility (BRU) for Enterprise Edge system on page 261
•
Backup and restore telephony programming using Unified Manager’s Tools
menu on page 265
System startup
A system startup replaces any existing telephony programming with the default
programming.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC.
The Configuration menu is enabled.
2. Access the Configuration menu and click System startup.
The system displays a dialog box with three parameters: Region, Template
and Start DN.
3. Select a region from the Region list: Global, UK (United Kingdom), Sweden,
Holland, CALA (Central America Latin America), Carib (Caribbean), NA
(North American) or Denmark.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
260 Maintenance
Each region has a Market Profile associated with it. For more information on
Market Profiles, refer to Appendix D: Market profile attributes on page 391.
Note: When you select a new region, the Template list is read-only. It is only
after the system is restarted that the available templates for this region
are displayed.
4. Type any valid value in the start dn box. The box displays the current value.
5. Click OK to apply these changes.
The system displays a warning that the system will restart and default
programming values will be restored.
Note: After the system’s cold start is completed, you can use a different
template than the default template. From Diagnostics, MSC, System
startup and select a template from the template list. However, if you
select a new template, you must perform another system restart.
Warm reset
A warm reset restores the system but does not affect the current telephony
programming.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC. The Configuration menu option is enabled.
2. Access the Configuration menu and click Warm reset.
The system displays a warning that all active calls will be dropped.
3. Click OK to continue.
Backup and restore
There are two modes of backup and restore on the Enterprise Edge system; the BRU
utility and the Backup and Restore tools which you access through Unified
Manager.
The BRU utility manages local, remote and Web-enabled Enterprise Edge software.
BRU works with .xml script files to perform step-by-step backup, restore or upgrade
of the full Enterprise Edge system or selected components. After you select the
needed components, BRU creates a ready-to-run Windows NT script file which
BRU can execute immediately or at a repeatable scheduled time and date.
Unified Manager’s Backup and Restore tools allow you to back up your telephony
programming or retrieve a complete copy of telephony programming information
to restore on the Enterprise Edge system.
For more information on backing up and restoring your Enterprise Edge system
programming, refer to the following:
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 261
•
Backup, restore, upgrade utility (BRU) for Enterprise Edge system on page 261
•
Backup and restore telephony programming using Unified Manager’s Tools
menu on page 265
Backup, restore, upgrade utility (BRU) for Enterprise Edge system
BRU provides additional functionality that complements the Unified Manager
telephony programming backup and restore features.
You launch the BRU utility after starting a virtual network computing (VNC)
session. The VNC desktop sharing utility supplied with Enterprise Edge allows you
to access the desktop of the Enterprise Edge server from another computer. For
more information on VCN, refer to Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance
Guide.
BRU is used to backup the system registry and customer data stored by default on
the Enterprise Edge hard disk drive. You can store a backup file on any network
accessible drive.
The Enterprise Edge system includes two default script files; Backup and restore
and Upgrade. For more information, refer to:
•
Building Windows NT script files on page 261
•
Starting BRU on page 262
•
Performing a backup or restore using BRU on page 262
Building Windows NT script files
BRU creates a Windows NT.cmd file from the information retrieved from the.xml
file and data from user input. The assembled .cmd file is then executed. In order to
create a backup, restore or upgrade script, BRU must first load the corresponding
.xml file.
Each .xml file contains a top level section that lists the main sections in the .xml file
with for example, tasks such as BACKUP or RESTORE. For each of these tasks
there is a list of available components.
The .cmd file is built from selections from the list of available components. Once
the component is in the Selected Components window, BRU reads the instructions
for this component and writes the .cmd file. BRU can execute the file immediately
or at a specified time and date on a Once, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly schedule.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
262 Maintenance
Starting BRU
Use the following procedure to start a BRU session.
1. From your browser, log into your Enterprise Edge system by entering its IP
address and specify port 5800. For example, if your system’s IP address is
47.20.112.167, enter 47.20.112.167:5800.
The system prompts you for a password.
2. Enter the default password TeirGR8.
Note: The system administrator must change this password after the system
is installed.
3. At this point, you can set the VNC options to the most reliable operation by
selecting the Options menu and setting parameters within the Options
window.
4. On the remote desktop choose Start, Programs, Nortel Networks, BRU.
The EE Backup/Restore/Upgrade window appears.
Performing a backup or restore using BRU
After you have BRU running, use the following procedure to perform a backup or
restore.
WARNING
When you perform a restore, you must always use the same method as the one you
choose to create your latest telephony programming backup file. For example, if
you used BRU to perform your latest telephony programming backup, use the BRU
utility to restore your programming.
1. Click Load to select and load an .xml script file.
A number of backup .xml script files are provided with the Enterprise Edge
system. In addition, there are upgrade script files provided which are used to
upgrade the core software. For more information on .xml script files, refer to
Viewing the created scripts on page 264.
2. Choose the EE BR.xml file from the Open dialog box.
3. Click Open.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 263
4. From the Mode list, select Backup or Restore.
WARNING
When a telephony programming backup is in progress, voice applications stop
working. Enterprise Edge maintains call processing service.
WARNING
When the telephony programming restore is in progress, Enterprise Edge voice
applications and call processing stop working. You must plan telephony
programming restore carefully to minimize impact on Enterprise Edge users.
5. From the Available Components box, select the component(s) you want to
backup or restore. Available components are:
•
Voice Apps Data: includes the contents of all the mail boxes as well as the
Voice Mail setup information.
•
RRAS (Routing and Remote Access Server): contains the configuration of
the routing and remote services.
•
Web Server/TAPI: includes the Apache Web server, the TAPI
configuration files and Unified Manager settings.
•
Registry: this is the Windows NT system registry. It includes system
registry and user setup information.
•
Telephony: includes all telephony programming.
•
Selective: allows user to backup any drive or directory.
Note: It is considered good practice to perform a full backup (select all of the
available components except Selective).
Note: Always backup the Registry component along with any other
component you want to backup up. The Registry component.
6. Click the right arrow button to move the component to the Selected
Components box.
7. Click Execute to run the Backup or Restore file immediately,
or
If you would like to run the Backup tool at another time, select the check box
under Schedule and:
a. Deselect the Current time check box.
b. Use the arrow keys to set the time of execution.
c. From the Date box, select the date.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
264 Maintenance
8.
From the Execute list, select how often you want to execute the backup
operation (Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly).
9. At this point, you can click the Execute button to run the file and the file runs
at the time you have indicated.
After you click Execute, the system displays a Browse for Folder window.
10. Select a folder. If you are doing a backup, indicate where you want to store
your backed up files. If you are doing a restore, indicate the directory from
which you are restoring files.
Note: BRU requires that the destination folder be a mapped or physical drive
and it will prompt you to map the folder to a drive.
11. Click OK.
The status indicators show that the script has been created. The estimated time
to complete the script is displayed. For more information on script schedules,
refer to Viewing the BRU schedule on page 265.
Note: Because the script is stored in the Temp directory, you must exercise
caution when clearing your Temp directory.
Viewing the created scripts
You can view the .cmd file using the following procedure:
1. After you have loaded the .xml file, select the View Script option in the
Backup/Restore/Upgrade window.
2. Use the arrow key to move the component(s) in the Selected Components
box.
3. Click Execute.
The Browse for Folder window is displayed.
4. Choose a source drive and click the OK button.
5. A BRU dialog box asks if you want to view the .cmd file for the selected
component and instructs you to close any sessions of Notepad.
6. Click the YES button to view the .cmd file.
Notepad is launched with the script displayed. You may edit the file at this
point.
7. Close the Notepad window.
A BRU dialog box asks if you are ready to execute the file
8. Click the Yes button if you wish to proceed.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 265
Viewing the BRU schedule
If you would like to verify the BRU schedule use the following procedure:
1. Open the Command Prompt window by choosing Start, Programs,
Command Prompt.
2. Type the WinNT command 'at'.
This command displays the schedule when each script will run and the script
file name.
Backup and restore telephony programming using Unified
Manager’s Tools menu
Unified Manager’s Backup and Restore tool allow you to back up the telephony
component of your Enterprise Edge system programming. The Restore option
allows you to retrieve and apply a complete set of previously backed up telephony
programming information to an Enterprise Edge system.
If a backup file becomes damaged, you cannot retrieve the programming
information. Equip the device where you store your backup files with an application
that protects files from computer viruses and performs file backup and encryption.
The Backup and Restore tool stores two different copies of system programming: a
current backup copy and an archive backup copy.
•
Fnvram.NEW is the current backup copy. This file contains the result of the
latest telephony programming backup. By default, the restore process retrieves
the programming information from that file.
•
Fnvram.OLD is the archive backup copy. This file is the result of the second last
telephony programming backup.
You cannot change the names of the programming backup files. If you need to
create other versions of the backup files, you must create additional folders. Backup
files are treated like an assembly line. When a successful backup is performed, the
information stored in the current backup file is moved to the archive backup file.
Refer to the following procedures for more information:
•
Performing a telephony backup using Unified Manager’s Tools menu on page
266
•
Performing a telephony restore on page 266
•
Stopping a telephony backup on page 268
•
Stopping a telephony restore on page 268
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
266 Maintenance
Note: The Backup, Restore, Upgrade utility (BRU) provides additional
functionality that complements the Unified Manager telephony
programming backup and restore tool. BRU works with .xml files to
perform step-by-step backup, restore or upgrade of the full Enterprise Edge
system or selected components. For more information, refer to Backup,
restore, upgrade utility (BRU) for Enterprise Edge system on page 261.
Performing a telephony backup using Unified Manager’s Tools menu
When you perform a backup, the telephony component of your system slows down.
Plan to perform a backup when you don’t need your system for other tasks.
Use the following procedure to perform a backup.
1. From Unified Manager, click the Services key to expand the navigation tree
and then click Telephony Services.
Unified Manager enables the Tools menu and displays the Backup/Restore
options screen. The Backup/Restore Path box shows the default path where
telephony backup files are stored. The default path is d:\Data Files\Nortel
Networks\Voice Solution\Backups.
2. From the Tools menu, choose the Backup option.
A confirmation dialog is displayed, asking if you wish to start now.
3. Click Yes to start.
When a backup is in progress, the text shows the current action and the file
name. For example, “Backing up System Programming into file
Fnvram.new.” When a backup is in progress, a bar graph shows the rough
percentage of the action that is complete.
Note: When a backup is in progress, you can click Cancel to discontinue the
operation. For more information, refer to Stopping a telephony backup on
page 268.
4. When the backup is complete, click Done.
The Backup and Restore dialog box closes.
Performing a telephony restore
The Restore feature allows you to overwrite existing programming. When you
perform a restore, the telephony component of your system is non-operational and
call processing is suspended. Perform restores during non-business hours, and warn
users that the Enterprise Edge system will be out of service. Schedule restores for a
time when you don’t need your server for other tasks.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 267
When you run a restore, all of the sets are put in maintenance mode. Programming
data from your server’s hard disk or other data storage medium is then loaded into
the system’s memory. After the data is loaded, the Backup and Restore tool takes
the sets out of maintenance mode by initiating a warm start. A warm start restarts
the Enterprise Edge system with all its programming intact, including any changes
you have made.
Use the following procedure to perform a restore..
WARNING
When you perform a restore, you must always use the same method as the one
you chose to create your latest telephony programming backup file. For
example, if you used BRU to perform your latest telephony programming
backup, use the BRU utility to restore your programming.
A restore overwrites existing programming
You cannot recover Enterprise Edge telephony system programming that has
been overwritten.
If a restore fails, the system initiates a cold start
If a restore fails to complete due to an error, the system will initiate a cold
start. This means that all programming will be lost, and all programming
settings will be returned to the factory defaults.
Ensure the restore is completed successfully
A restore replaces all existing programming for the Enterprise Edge system. A
failed restore can shut down the Enterprise Edge system and telephone service
to a site, so it is important to ensure the restore is completed successfully.
1. From Unified Manager, click the Services key to expand the navigation tree
and then click Telephony Services.
Unified Manager enables the Tools menu and displays the Backup/Restore
options screen. The Backup/Restore Path box shows the default path where
telephony backup files are stored. The default path is d:\Data Files\Nortel
Networks\Voice Solution\Backups.
2. From the Tools menu, choose the Restore option.
A confirmation dialog is displayed, asking if you wish to start now.
Note: If you restore any programming which has been enabled by software keys,
you may have to re-enter the keys after the restore.
A confirmation dialog is displayed, asking if you wish to start now.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
268 Maintenance
3. Click Yes to start.
When you initiate a restore, there is a period of a minute or longer while the
restore action is initiated. When a restore is in progress, the text shows the
current action and the file name. For example, “Restoring System
Programming from file Fnvram.new.” The system also displays the
percentage of programming that has been restored.
When the restore is complete, the system automatically restarts.
Note: When a restore is in progress, you can click Cancel to discontinue the
operation. For more information, refer to Stopping a telephony restore on page
268.
4. Verify the system is working properly once the restore is complete.
Stopping a telephony backup
1. When the backup is in progress, click Cancel to discontinue the operation.
The Close Application dialog box appears. The backup continues behind the
dialog box until you respond.
2. Click Yes to stop the backup.
If you click No, the backup will continue.
Stopping a telephony restore
If you stop a restore, you must perform another, successful restore or the system will
initiate a cold start. This means all programming will be lost and all settings will
return to the factory defaults.
1. When the restore is in progress, click Stop to discontinue the operation.
The Stop Restore dialog box appears.
2. Click Yes to stop the restore action.
If you click No, the restore action continues.
3. If you select Yes, the Cold Start Warning dialog box appear saying that the
system will initiate a cold start. You can only click Exit Application.
4. Click Exit Application.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 269
Enterprise Edge system diagnostics and utilities
This section provides information about Enterprise Edge diagnostic programs and
utilities including:
•
Enterprise Edge Performance Statistics
•
Error Messages
•
MIB II Information
•
Alarm Banner
•
Alarm Browser
Performance Statistics
Enterprise Edge provides detailed performance information for the system and the
system resources. The statistics are shown in charts or table format. If a
performance display is active, it is automatically updated with real-time
performance information in time increments that you set.
Note: The statistics generating puts an important workload on the Enterprise Edge
server CPU, connecting network, and web client. Exercise caution when
running statistics.
Generating System Performance Statistics
Enterprise Edge provides statistical information on system throughput and other
performance-related information.
System performance information includes:
•
System CPU Usage (graph or table format)
•
Memory Usage (graph or table format).
To generate system performance statistics,
1. From the navigation tree, click System.
The Performance menu is enabled.
2. From the Performance menu select the statistical information you want the
system to generate, in the format of your choice.
The chart of table appears.
3. From the Counter Type list, select the type of information you want the
system to generate.
4. From the Polling Interval, select at which interval you want the system to
collect the information.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
270 Maintenance
Error Messages
Enterprise Edge displays error messages when system or processing errors occur.
Error message are made of two parts: the error string and the error number.
The error string includes the error description and the context of the error.
The error number is a three-part number that uniquely identifies the error. Be sure
to note the error number when communicating with TSC to resolve the problem.
User Actions
Some Enterprise Edge errors are caused by a wrong parameter value. For these
errors, the recommended action resolves the problem. Other possible errors are
caused by an internal transition of states that puts the system and the user in an error
condition. In this event, assistance from TSC is required to resolve the problem.
Note: Any Enterprise Edge errors that are not listed in this manual are advanced
and require assistance from TSC for resolution.
Errors List
In the following list, in cases where multiple errors can happen in a particular
context, a wild-card representation is used.
Error
Number
Description
Action
2.5.4
This is an invalid data error. There was
an error in setting system date.
Reason: The date, month or year
component contains a zero or negative
value.
Provide the correct date value.
2.xx.4
Make sure system settings are valid.
These are various errors related to an
error in setting system date
Reason: The system rejected the date for
various reasons. The reasons could be
that it is beyond the range of dates
supported. For example, 01/01/0001 is
invalid date
2.5.6
This is an invalid data error. There was
an error in setting system time.
Reason: The hour or minute component
contains a negative value.
Provide the correct date value.
2.xx.6
These are various errors related to an
error in setting system time
Correct the error in the time format.
2.5.8
This is an invalid data error. There was
an error in setting system name.
Reason: The system name does not
follow the standard conventions.
Make sure that your system name does
not contain any special characters
(hyphens are allowed, in addition to
letters and digits), and that it does not
exceed 15 characters in length.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 271
5.4.59
This is an invalid configuration error.
There was an error getting or setting
DHCP parameters.
Reason: You were adding an IP Address
Range and/or Excluded Address Range
and the first field you entered had a
wrong key value. In the dialog boxes that
appear to add the entries, the first field is
a key that should match certain naming
conventions. The conventions are given
the label to those fields.
Follow the conventions given on the
dialog boxes. For IP Address Ranges,
use keys like ’Rxx’ and for Excluded
Address Ranges, use keys like ’Exx’
5.5.39
This is an invalid data value. There are
invalid values for the new excluded
address range.
Reason: The IP Address values specified
for the range are not correct. At present,
each component in IP address specified
in dotted format should be in the range 0255, not including the boundary values.
Fix the value. If your IP Address range
contains more than 255 addresses in it
and you need to exclude a range that
ends with 255 or starts with. 0, use the
next upper or lower value to avoid
specifying this value.
5.5.40
Enter the missing value and click ’Save’
This is an invalid data value. There are
again
missing values in the new excluded
address range.
Reason: Data for each excluded address
entry should include two values - one for
the start and the other for end. This error
happens if one of them is missing.
5.5.41
This is an invalid data value. The new
excluded address range is not completely
within an IP Address range.
Reason: Excluded Address ranges should
be completely contained within a single
IP Address range specified for the scope.
If a DHCP scope contains more than one
IP Address range, then the excluded
address ranges specified, if any, may not
span outside a single IP Address range in
any way. This includes overhanging
outside of a single IP Address Range or
spanning over multiple IP Address
Range.
Fix the over-hanging problem. If
required, specify multiple excluded
address range.
Note: As a guideline, use only one IP
Address range, and specify multiple
excluded ranges to exclude disjoint parts
of it.
5.5.45
This is an invalid data value. The new
range overlaps with an existing range
Reason: This error happens if the
specified excluded range overlaps with
another excluded address range or with
an address that is already assigned to a
DHCP Client computer.
Modify the new excluded address range
so that it does not overlap with another or
does not include assigned IP addresses.
You may also go to the client system that
go the assigned address and release IP
address before setting the excluded
range.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
272 Maintenance
5.16.68
This is an invalid operation. You can’t
delete the last IP Address range in the
scope.
Reason: The scope contains only one IP
Address range and you are attempting to
delete it. You must have at least one IP
Address range in the scope all the time.
You may modify the last entry, however.
Don’t delete the last DHCP range. If you
need to change it, modify it. If you don’t
want the DHCP scope to be operational,
change its status to ’Disabled’. If don’t
want any scope operational, set the status
of the DHCP Service to ’Disabled’.
8.4.2.
This is an invalid configuration
parameter. There was an error in setting
data.
Reason: You tried to add a port range or
filter and the key field didn’t contain the
characteristic prefix.
If you are adding a new port-range, make
sure the ’PortRange (R#)’ field is like
’Rxx’ where ’xx’ is a number. If you are
adding a new filter, make sure that ’Filter
(F#)’ field looks like ’Fxx’ where ’xx’ is
a number.
8.5.3
This is an invalid data value. There was
an error in setting port range
Reason: You are setting a port range
value and the upper and lower limits are
not correct or missing.
Each range should begin with a positive
even number and must end with a
number greater than the beginning
number and must be an odd number.
Further, the range values should be less
than 65535 (64K)
8.8.3
This is an error in data size. There was an
error in setting port range.
Reason: You are setting a port range that
is too big. At present, only 256 ports can
be set in the port-range table.
Consult chapter 3 for a discussion on
port ranges in QoS. You may not need
that big a range. Reduce it to be under
256 ports in the range.
9.4.2
Use appropriate key strings in the dialog
This is an invalid configuration
parameter. There was an error in setting boxes, as suggested in their labels.
data.
Reason: This error can happen when you
are setting a community string entry,
manager entry or a trap community
entry. Each entry uses a characteristic
key string as its field name. Use ’Cxx’
for community strings, ’Mxx’ for
manager entries and ’Txx’ for trap
community entries.
9.6.4
9.6.5
9.6.6
The object was not found. There was an Specify correct number for the key field
name.
error in setting <object Name>
Reason: This error can happen while
setting a community string entry,
manager address or trap community
entry. Each entry takes a characteristic
key field as the first field that should
follow certain conventions, and a unique
number within the class. If that unique
number is 0 or less, this error happens.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 273
10.5.2
This is an invalid data value for
requested data.
Reason: This can happen happens when
user enters values into a dialog box and
clicks ’Save’ on it. If any of the fields
had some strict format specified for it
(say dotted format for an IP address) and
if you entered a wrong value, it would
beep when you tab out of the field. If you
ignored that beep, the GUI would reject
the field and when you clicked ’Save’ it
didn’t send the field to the Enterprise
Edge system, there by causing this
problem.
Follow the rules precisely. If the IP
address has only 1 digit, add zeros in
order to make them 3-digit in each
segments of the dotted notation. For
example 000.000.001.
Make sure to scroll to the bottom of the
screen to add all required values.
11.5.2
This is an invalid data value for
password.
Reason: The user was changing a user
profile and the password entered in
’password’ and ’confirm password’
fields do not match.
Match the passwords.
11.19.9
Add another user with read-write
Failed to Delete. Required at least one
privilege before deleting the concerned
user with read-write privilege.
Reason: You are attempting to delete the user id.
last existing user with READ-WRITE
privilege. This operation is not
permitted, as it would not allow you to
make any other changes to user
configuration or other system
configuration.
11.12.10
Failed to Update. Required at least one
user with read-write privilege.
Reason: You are attempting to modify
the last existing user with READWRITE privilege. At this time, no
modifications are permitted to the last
READ-WRITE user.
14.4.21
Make sure your key names are as per
Invalid Configuration Parameter. Error
convention and provide unique values
in setting interface parameter
for the number component.
Reason: You’re setting a static route,
input filter or output filter under an
interface and you didn’t enter a correct
characteristic key field in the dialog box.
Values for these fields should strictly
follow the convention provided in the
labels for them. It should be something
like ’SRxx’ for static routes, ’IFxx’ for
input filters and ’OFxx’ for output filters.
P0911588 Issue 01
Add another user with READ-WRITE
privilege before modifying the concerned
user id.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
274 Maintenance
14.17.40
14.17.41
Command failed. Error in setting action
for input/output filters
Reason: You were attempting to set the
action for input/output filters on the
interface. The operation failed because,
there were no input or output filters
defined for the interface.
Add an input or output filter before
setting the action
14.17.68
Command failed. Error is setting static
route. This problem is caused by a
mismatch in destination network address
in its subnet mask specified in the route.
Match them. Bitwise ’AND’ of
destination address and subnet mask
should be equal to the destination
address.
The routing protocol is changed and the
screen didn’t update.
Refresh the screen by clicking on ’View
Refresh’ menu item.
Set the routing protocol back to ’NONE’
The routing protocol for the interface
and then set to ’RIP’ again. The RIP
shows up as ’RIP’. But no RIP
configuration parameters show up on the configuration field would show up.
screen
14.5.77
Invalid Data Value. Static default route is None
not permitted in this version. Reason:
You were setting a static route that was a
default route for the system. In this
release of Enterprise Edge, setting
default routes as static routes is not
permitted. The default route is managed
by the ’Net Link Manager’ component
that accepts the address of next hop
router on the primary and then adds or
deletes (manages) the default route in the
system.
MIB II Information
Here is the mapping between Enterprise Edge counters shown in statistics windows
and standard MIB-II variables where applicable.
This section includes:
•
Counters Shown at LAN and WAN Interface Levels
•
Counters Shown at LAN and WAN Interface Levels
•
ICMP Counters
•
UDP Counters
•
TCP Counters
•
QoS Session Counters
•
QoS Best Effort Traffic Counters
•
QoS Dropped Packets Counters
•
QoS Graph Counters
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 275
•
QoS Best Effort Queue Counters
Counters Shown at LAN and WAN Interface Levels
1. Byte Received:
ifInOctets
2. Byte Sent:
ifOutOctets
3. Byte Total:
no equivalent (ifInOctets and ifOutOctets)
4. Current Bandwidth:
ifSpeed
5. Output Queue Length:
ifOutQLen
6. Packets Outbound Discarded:
ifOutDiscards
7. Packets Outbound Errors:
ifOutErrors
8. Packets Received Discarded:
ifInDiscards
9. Packets Received Errors:
ifInErrors
10. Packets Received Non-Unicast: ifInNUcastPkts
11. Packets Received Unicast:
ifInUcastPkts
12. Packets Received Unknown:
ifInUnknownProtos
13. Packets Received:
no equivalent
14. Packets Sent Non-Unicast:
ifOutNUcastPkts
15. Packets Sent Unicast:
ifOutUcastPkts
16. Packets Sent:
no equivalent
17. Packets:
no equivalent
ICMP Counters
Note: Shown on the Performance menu under Resources heading.
1. Messages Outbound Errors:
icmpOutErrors
2. Messages Received Errors:
icmpInErrors
3. Messages Received:
icmpInMsgs
4. Messages Sent:
icmpOutMsgs
5. Messages:
no equivalent (icmpInMsgs + icmpOutMsgs)
6. Received Address Mask:
icmpInAddrMasks
7. Received Address Mask Reply:
icmpInAddrMaskReps
8. Received Destination Unreachable:icmpInDestUnreachs
9. Received Echo Reply:
icmpInEchoReps
10. Received Echo:
icmpInEchos
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
276 Maintenance
11. Received Parameter Problem:
icmpInParmProbs
12. Received Redirect:
icmpInRedirects
13. Received Source Quench:
icmpInSrcQuenchs
14. Received Time Exceeded:
icmpInTimeExcds
15. Received Timestamp Reply:
icmpInTimestampReps
16. Received Timestamp:
icmpInTimestamps
17. Sent Address Mask:
icmpOutAddrMasks
18. Sent Address Mask Reply:
icmpOutAddrMaskReps
19. Sent Destination Unreachable:
icmpOutDestUnreachs
20. Sent Echo Reply:
icmpOutEchoReps
21. Sent Echo:
icmpOutEchos
22. Sent Parameter Problem:
icmpOutParmProbs
23. Sent Redirect:
icmpOutRedirects
24. Sent Source Quench:
icmpOutSrcQuenchs
25. Sent Time Exceeded:
icmpOutTimeExcds
26. Sent Timestamp Reply:
icmpOutTimestampReps
27. Sent Timestamp:
icmpOutTimestamps
UDP Counters
1. Datagrams No Port:
udpNoPorts
2. Datagrams Received Errors:
udpInErrors
3. Datagrams Received:
udpInDatagrams
4. Datagrams Sent:
udpOutDatagrams
5. Datagrams:
no equivalent (udpInDatagrams +
udpOutDataGrams)
TCP Counters
1. Connection Failures:
tcpAttemptFails
2. Connections Active:
tcpActiveOpens
3. Connections Established:
tcpCurrEstab
4. Connections Passive:
tcpPassiveOpens
5. Connections Reset:
tcpEstabResets
6. Segments Received:
tcpInSegs
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 277
7. Segments Retransmitted:
tcpRetransSegs
8. Segments Sent:
tcpOutSegs
9. Segments:
no equivalent (tcpInSegs + tcpOutSegs)
QoS Session Counters
Note: These are proprietary counters implemented by QoS Provider Module.
1. Not Served Priority Sessions: The number of premium priority sessions
declined by the QoS module - probably due to bandwidth restrictions.
2. Requested Priority Sessions: Total number of premium priority sessions
requested
3. Served Priority Sessions: Number of premium priority sessions admitted.
QoS Best Effort Traffic Counters
Note: This is a proprietary counter.
1. Total Best-Effort Octets: Total number octets carried in best-effort level
2. Total Best-Effort Packets: Total number of packets carried in best-effort level.
QoS Dropped Packets Counters
Note: Proprietary counter in QoS.
1. Total Dropped Octets: Total number of octets dropped, probably due to
insufficient buffer.
2. Total Dropped Packets: Total number of dropped packets.
QoS Graph Counters
1. Total Octets: Total number of octets sent by QoS
2. Total Packets: Total number of packets sent by QoS
3. Total Priority Octets: Total number of octets carried in premium priority.
QoS Best Effort Queue Counters
Note: This is a proprietary counter.
1. Total Queue XX Octets: Total number of octets carried at specified queue's
priority.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
278 Maintenance
2. Total Queue XX Packets: Total number of packets carried at specified queue's
priority.
3. Total Queue XX Packets Dropped: Total number of packets dropped at
specified queue - probably due to insufficient buffer space.
Maintenance programming for telephony resources
When you perform maintenance on your Enterprise Edge system, you must know
the system version and the status of each of your Media Bay Modules. For
procedures on how to access this information, refer to the following:
•
System version on page 278
•
Media Bay Module status on page 279
For information on the logs generated by your Enterprise Edge system, refer to:
•
System test log on page 282
•
System administration log on page 283
•
Network event log on page 284
For information on alarm codes and event messages, refer to Alarm codes on page
285 and Event messages on page 285.
If you want to run a line loopback, payload loopback, card loopback or continuity
loopback test, refer to Tests on page 294.
For information on system statistics and metrics, refer to:
•
CSU statistics on page 297
•
Link Status on page 301
•
Metrics on page 301
For information on physically moving an existing telephone, refer to Moving
telephones on page 302.
System version
System version allows you to check the version number of the System Processor
(SP) software, that resides on the Media Services Card (MSC).
1. Choose Resources and click on the Media Services Card heading.
The version number of the software appears in the Version box.
2. Write the version number on the appropriate Maintenance record.
Note: You can use the version number to determine the software release and
it may be required by support staff if a software fault occurs.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 279
Media Bay Module status
Media Bay Modules selection allows you to view the status of all the modules as
well as identify any device or lines connected to the system. This allows you to
isolate any malfunctioning part of the system. In addition, you can use the Media
Bay Module selection to disable and enable modules and devices. For more
information, refer to one of the following procedures.
•
Display the Media Bay Module status on page 279
•
Disable a module on page 279
•
Enable a module on page 280
•
Identify a device connected to the system on page 280
•
Disable a device on page 281
•
Enable a device on page 281
Display the Media Bay Module status
Use this procedure to display module type, the number of sets connected to the
module, the number of busy sets and the module’s state:
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules.
The window displays Bus 02 through to 08.
2. Click on the Bus you want to view. For example, Bus 02.
The Configuration menu is enabled and the status information of the module
associated with that bus appears.
Disable a module
You must disable a module before you replace it. In addition, you may be able to
clear a hung line by disabling and enabling the affected module.
Use Page feature, on your system, prior to disabling.
Use the Page feature to inform users that you are about to disable a module.
Indicate that they may experience delays in the performance of their devices.
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules and click on the Bus ## you want to
disable.
The State box indicates that the module is enabled. The Configuration menu
option is enabled.
2. On the Configuration menu click Disable.
The system displays a warning that this action will disable the entire module
and all of its devices.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
280 Maintenance
3. Click OK. The system disables the module in one minute (or immediately, if
the status is idle). Click Cancel to leave this display without disabling the
module.
Enable a module
Use the following procedure to enable a disabled module.
1. Choose Resources., Media Bay Modules and click on the Bus associated
with the module you wish to enable.
The State box indicates that the module is disabled and the Configuration
menu is enabled.
2. On the Configuration menu click Enable.
The system displays a message indicating that the module is being enabled.
Identify a device connected to the system
You may wish to check a device’s version number for compatibility with the
system. Use the following procedure to display status information for any device
connected to the system.
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules, Bus ##, Port #, Channels.
2. Click on the B1 heading to display the device connected to the B1 channel or
click B2 to display the device connected to the B2 channel.
The window displays the device, its type, the version number of the device
and its state.
3. If there is an add-on device attached to the telephone such as a central
answering position module or a Busy Lamp Field, expand the B1 or B2
heading and click on the Addons heading to display the add-on device.
The following table lists some of the device types that may appear on the Enterprise
Edge device identification display.
Display
Explanation
M7100
M7100 telephone
M7310
M7310 telephone
M7324
M7324 telephone
1: CAP1
First CAP module attached to an M7324 telephone
2: CAP2
Second CAP module attached to an M7324 telephone
Nortel Networks ATA 2
Analog Terminal Adapter
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 281
Disable a device
Give notice that you are disabling equipment.
Inform people that you are going to disable their devices.
Pick a suitable time to disable devices. Disabling a port will disconnect
users from their calls.
Do not disable devices when many people are using the Enterprise Edge
system. Wait until after regular office hours.
Do not enable or disable ports during the first two minutes after plugging
in your system.
If you enable or disable ports in the first two minutes after powering up,
incorrect ports may be enabled or disabled. To recover from this, disable, then
enable the affected modules using the Media Bay Modules selection.
Use the following procedure to disable a device immediately.
1. Identify the device you wish to disable. For information on how to perform
this procedure, refer to Identify a device connected to the system on page 280.
2. On the Configuration menu click Disable.
The system displays a warning that this action will disable the port.
3. Click OK.
The system disables the device in one minute (or immediately, if the device is
idle). Press Cancel to leave this display without disabling the device.
Enable a device
Use the following procedure to enable a disabled device:
1. Identify the device you wish to disable. For information on how to perform
this procedure, refer to Identify a device connected to the system on page 280.
2. Click on the device you want to enable.
3. On the Configuration menu click Enable.
The system displays a message indicating that the device is being enabled.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
282 Maintenance
System test log
The System test log shows you a list of diagnostic test results, audits, event
messages, and alarm codes. By using this feature you can check log items, any
current alarms, timing of log events and the number of consecutive occurrences of
an event or an alarm. In addition, you can use the System test log selection to erase
the log.
The System test log holds a maximum of 20 items. You should check and record
these items at regular intervals. Erase the log after dealing with all the items.
Use the System test log selection under Diagnostics, MSC to perform one of the
following procedures.
•
Display information on the items in the System test log on page 282
•
Erase the log on page 282
Display information on the items in the System test log
You can display information on any item in the System administration log using the
following procedure.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, System test log.
2. Double click on the System test log heading to display all the items in the log.
If there are no log entries, the navigation tree indicates that there are no
subheadings.
3. Click on an item. Information about the log item appears.
The description attribute indicates if the item is an event or alarm and includes
the associated code. The severity, repeats, time and parameters of the event or
alarm appears. For more information on the event or alarm, refer to Alarm
codes on page 285 or Event messages on page 285.
Note: Alarms also appear in the Windows NT event log.
4. Write down the item on the System administration log record and repeat these
steps until you record all the items.
Erase the log
You can erase log items from the System Test log using the following procedure.
Note: You cannot remove selected log items. You only have the option of removing
all the log items.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, and click on the System test log heading.
2. Click Del All from the menu above the navigation tree.
The system displays a message asking you to confirm that you wish to remove
all of the items.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 283
3. Select Yes to continue. If new items have been added since the log items were
displayed, these new items are not erased.
System administration log
The System administration log keeps a record of administrative events such as
sessions in which a change was made, invalid password attempts, and password
changes. You can check the items in the log, check when each item in the log
occurred and you can erase the log.
Note: The System administration log holds a maximum of ten items. Erase the log
after dealing with all the items.
Use the System admin log selection under Diagnostics, MSC to perform one of
the following procedures.
•
Display information on the items in the System Administration log on page 283
•
Erase the log on page 283
Display information on the items in the System Administration log
You can display information on any item in the System administration log using the
following procedure.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, System admin log.
2. Double click on the System admin log heading to display all the items in the
log. If there are no log entries, the navigation tree indicates that there are no
subheadings.
3. Click an item.
Information about the log item appears. The description attribute indicates if
the item is an event or alarm and includes the associated code. The severity,
repeats, time and parameters of the event or alarm appears. For more
information on the event or alarm, refer to Alarm codes on page 285 or Event
messages on page 285.
Note: Alarms also appear in the Windows NT event log.
4. Write down the item on the System administration log record and repeat these
steps until you record all the items.
Erase the log
You can erase log items from the System Administration log using the following
procedure.
Note: You cannot remove selected log items. You only have the option of removing
all the log items.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
284 Maintenance
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, System admin log.
2. Double click on the System admin log heading to display all the items in the
log. If there are no log entries, the navigation tree indicates that there are no
subheadings.
3. Click Del All from the menu above the navigation tree.
The system displays a message indicating that this will remove all of the
items.
4. Select Yes to continue. If new items have been added since the log items were
displayed, these new items are not erased.
Network event log
The Network event log keeps a record of events and alarms that are specific to the
T1 network interface. You can check the items in the log, check when each item in
the log occurred and you can erase the log.
The Network event log holds a maximum of twenty items. Erase the log after
dealing with all the items.
Use the Network event log selection under Diagnostics, MSC to perform one of
the following procedures.
•
Displaying information on the items in the Network event log on page 284
•
Erase the log on page 285
Displaying information on the items in the Network event log
You can display information on any item in the Network event log using the
following procedure.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC.
2. Double click on the System test log heading to display all the items in the log.
If there are no log entries, the navigation tree indicates that there are no
subheadings.
3. Click an item. Information about the log item appears.
The description attribute indicates if the item is an event or alarm and includes
the associated code. The severity, repeats, time and parameters of the event or
alarm appears. For more information on the event or alarm, refer to Alarm
codes on page 285 or Event messages on page 285.
Note: Alarms also appear in the Windows NT event log.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 285
4. Write down the item on the System administration log record and repeat these
steps until you have recorded all the items.
Erase the log
Note: You cannot remove selected log items. You only have the option of removing
all the log items.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, Network event log.
2. Double click on the System test log heading to display all the items in the log.
If there are no log entries, the navigation tree indicates that there are no
subheadings.
3. Click Del All from the menu above the navigation tree.
The system displays a message indicating that this will remove all of the
items.
4. Select Yes to continue. If new items have been added since the log items were
displayed, these new items are not erased.
Alarm codes
The Enterprise Edge system generates alarm codes after system disconnections or
after certain anomalies in system operation. All alarm codes appear at the Alarm
telephone, in the System test log of a Maintenance session and in the Win NT event
log. For a more complete description of alarm and event codes consult your
technical support representative.
Tips
You can assign the Alarm telephone in Feature settings under System
programming.
Alarms have a higher severity than events. Attend to alarm codes before event
messages.
Alarm code information that is specific to Companion components is included
in the.
An alarm code may not appear until two minutes after it is triggered. If the system
is powered off when the alarm is triggered, the alarm code does not appear until two
minutes after the system is powered on.
Event messages
Event messages appear as items in the System administration log or the System test
log of the Maintenance session. Most of these event messages can only be caused
by an unusual combination of events, and should rarely occur.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
286 Maintenance
Each event has a severity number. An “S” preceding this number, “S4” for example,
may appear in the event message. “S9” is the most severe. If the log is full, new
event messages with a higher severity number replace existing event messages of a
lower severity. For this reason, you should check event messages at regular
intervals. You can then deal with all messages before they are replaced. The time
that the message is recorded is also provided.
Event message information that is specific to Companion components is included
in the Companion event messages (North American systems only) on page 291.
For every event message that you see:
1. Refer to Significant event messages on page 286.
2. Determine if the event caused the system to automatically restart. For more
information, refer to the table on Event Message on page 289.
Significant event messages
The following table lists event messages that are relevant to maintenance activities.
Event message
The event message is recorded when…
Evt:210-YYYZ S4
Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has been started
Evt:211-YYYZ S4
Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has been stopped
Evt:220-3546
S4
the Sys admin log has been cleared by the DN (3546 in this
case)
Evt:221-3546
S4
the Sys test log has been cleared by the DN (3546 in this case)
Evt:222-3546
S5
the DN (3546 in this case) enters the debugging facility that is
password protected
Evt:255
S9
administered mode is not supported by the module plugged into
the slot
Evt:260-0302
S8
the system takes the access line on port 0302 out of service
because no current was detected
Evt:261-0302
S1
the access line on port 0302 is returned to service after current
was detected (see Evt:260)
Evt:268-07
S8
Dialing filter 07 has lost data due to a fault in the system
memory
Evt:269-3546
S8
the Line/set filter for the DN (3546 in this case) has lost data
due to a fault in the system memory
Evt:299
S1
the system powers up after a power failure
Evt:327
S5
short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE-DTM
Evt:328
S5
short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE-DTM
Evt:329
S5
short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE-DTM
Evt:330
S5
short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE-DTM
Evt:336
S5
long term alarm has been surpassed in the EE-DTM
Evt:373
S5
the system restart diagnostic tool has been activated
Evt:407
S2
there are no more codes for Speed Dial numbers
Evt:408
S2
there is no more memory for Speed Dial codes
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 287
Event message
The event message is recorded when…
Evt:415-3546
S3
an invalid customer password has been entered by the DN
(3546 in this case)
Evt:418
S7
a DN change is successful
Evt:419
S2
the time setting has been changed
Evt:421
S8
a DN change failed
Evt:422-3546
S6
a length change by the DN (3546 in this case) has been
requested
Evt:423-3546
S6
an individual DN change has been requested by the DN (3546
in this case)
Evt:441
S2
a timeout occurred while waiting for ANI or DNIS digits to be
received
Evt:442
S5
a timeout occurred while waiting for ANI or DNIS digits to be
received
Evt:454
S5
Invalid password entered
Evt:458
S4
Call-by-Call NVRAM data is corrupt and all the values have
been reset to default.
Evt:459
S9
DN length has been changed to less than 3 digits
Evt:680
S9
wireless system is disabled
Evt:681
S9
activation or recovery code entered
Evt:683
S9
new base station configuration detected
Evt:687
S4
the data driver has received a bad call reference
Evt:688
S4
the data driver has received a bad data event
Evt:689
S4
the data driver could not allocate a new index
Evt:690
S4
no response to the system within 10 seconds of being sent an
initialization message
Evt:691
S4
no response to the system within 3 seconds
Evt:692
S4
a bad parameter value has been received in a stimulus message
from the data device
Evt:693
S3
old data to be discarded has been detected
Evt:694
S4
RADAR flow control has received a bad stimulus message
from an off-core application
Evt:695
S4
attached set denied request for a B-channel
Evt:696
S2
corrupt CLID length
Evt:697
S2
an asynchronous data report generated by SDI
Evt:698
S8
incorrect software key entered
Evt:799
S7
a call processing error has occurred on an ISDN line
Evt:822
S8
Alarm code 63 is sent because there are no DTMF receivers for
an incoming call
Evt:882
S9
mobility data re-evaluation sequence initiated
Evt:883
S4
an invalid dial pulse signal was received by the EE-DTM
Evt:992
S6
auto attendant error
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
288 Maintenance
How to read an event message
In the event message shown below, Evt799 indicates a call processing error has
occurred on an ISDN line.
Evt799-031
02S7
The event number Evt799 is followed by a number representing the line or loop
number, and a code for the type of error. In this example, the error has occurred on
line 031 and the error code is 02.
The following table lists some of the error codes and their meanings.
Error code
Meaning
01
Internal software error. Cannot acquire the B-channel from the B-channel
arbitrator.
02
Internal software error. There is no free line available for the call.
03
A call that is not on the B-channel has been attempted. These kind of calls are
part of EKTS service, which is not supported by this version of the software.
Check with your service provider to make sure your package does not include
EKTS service.
04
Internal software error. Failed to instantiate on the chain.
05
Internal software error. Activation procedure failed.
06
Internal software error. Index conversion failed.
07
Unexpected digits on a Manual answer mode line. Configuration of the system
and the network connection may not match.
09
Cannot get vterm (virtual terminal) from the Vterm Server.
0C
Internal software error. Already instantiated on the chain.
Events that cause a system restart
You should rarely see any event messages that are not described in the Significant
event messages on page 286. If you do see one of these event messages, the system
has followed its normal recovery from an unusual combination of system events.
Although the problem is not a serious one, you should report repeated occurrences
of the event number as soon as possible.
As a result of some events, the system automatically restarts itself. The table on the
next two pages lists all the event numbers and identifies the events associated with
system restarts.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 289
Most of these events are recorded in the System test log. The few exceptions to this
are recorded in the System administration log, as indicated.
Event Message
System
Restart
Event Message
System
Restart
101-106
Yes
400 (Admin log)
Yes
107
No
401-403
No
108-112
Yes
405-411
No
113
No
412-419 (Admin log)
No
114-116
Yes
421-423 (Admin log)
No
117
No
424-425
No
118-120
Yes
426-430
Yes
121-123
No
431
No
124-125
Yes
432
Yes
126-129
No
433
No
130
Yes
441-442
No
131-132
No
453
No
133-134
Yes
454
No
135-136
No
458-459
No
137
Yes
600-602
Yes
138-150
No
603-613
No
151
Yes
614
Yes
152
No
615-629
No
160-164
No
630
Yes
170-173
No
631-646
No
200-211
No
680
No
220 (Admin log)
No
681
No
221-222
No
683
No
223 (Admin log)
No
689-698
No
224
Yes
799
No
225-228
No
800-802
No
229 (Admin log)
No
803
Yes
230-235
No
804-807
No
245-248
Yes
808
Yes
250-256
No
809
No
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
290 Maintenance
Event Message
System
Restart
Event Message
System
Restart
260-271
Yes
810
Yes
280-283
No
811-820
No
285-298
Yes
823
Yes
299
No
824-825
No
327
No
851
No
328
No
882
No
329
No
883
No
330
No
900
No
336
No
940-943
No
373
No
950-989
No
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 291
Companion event messages (North American systems only)
Table 1 Event messages
Event message display
Cause
Evt:275-3546
S8
(U.S. only) Unable to activate all registered portables. The
system ran out of portable credits. One event is generated per
portable that failed to activate. The repetition of the
corresponding alarm code 59 indicates how many additional
credits must be purchased.
Evt:301-1031
S5
The Base Station (on port 0103 in this case) cannot successfully
receive the data image.
Both radios belonging to the Base Station are disabled. This
may occur if the flash EEPROM is faulty. Two events are
raised: one for the B1 channel radio (as in this case) and another
for the B2 channel radio. A corresponding alarm code 53
occurs.
Evt:302-1031
S5
The Base Station (on port 0103 in this case) cannot be written to
during data transfer.
Both radios belonging to the Base Station are disabled. The
Base Station’s flash EEPROM is faulty. Two events are raised:
one for the B1 channel radio (as in this case) and another for the
B2 channel radio. A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs.
Evt:303-1031
5
The Base Station (on port 0103 in this case) cannot be
synchronized with the other Base Stations in the system.
Both radios belonging to the Base Station are disabled. The
Base Station hardware is faulty. Two events are raised: one for
the B1 channel radio (as in this case) and another for the B2
channel radio. A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs.
Evt:304-1032
Evt:305-01032
Evt:306-01031
A B2 channel radio (radio 2 on port 0103 in this case) cannot be
synchronized with other radios because of system overload.
S5
S5
Evt:307-0109100 S5
P0911588 Issue 01
A B2 channel radio (radio 2 on port 0103 in this case) cannot be
synchronized because the B1 radio was disabled in
maintenance.
Both radios belonging to the Base Station (on port 0103 in this
case) are disabled. The B1 radio must be operational to
synchronize both radios of the Base Station with other radios in
the system. Two events are raised: one for the B1 channel radio
and another for the B2 channel radio. A corresponding alarm
code 53 occurs.
A radio (0103-1 in this case) cannot be synchronized because
there are no B2 channel radios.
Both radios belonging to the Base Station (on port 0103 in this
case) are disabled.Two events are raised: one for the B1 channel
radio in this case) and another for the B2 channel radio. A
corresponding alarm code 53 occurs.
A recoverable RIM fault has occurred
The RIM is reset. If a link is active when this error occurs, the
link is dropped. The radio (0109-1 in this case) is returned to
service.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
292 Maintenance
Event message display
Cause
Evt:307-0109101 S5
An unrecoverable RIM fault has occurred
The radio (0109-1 in this case) is disabled and taken out of
service. If a link is active when this error occurs, the link is
dropped. A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs.
Evt:307-0109102 S5
The built-in self-test on the Base Station has failed
The radio (0109-1 in this case) is disabled and taken out of
service. If a link is active when this error occurs, the link is
dropped. A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs.
Evt:308-0103
S5
The Base Station is connected to a system that supports a radio
protocol that the Enterprise Edge does not understand.
Evt:664
S8
There is a bad signature.
Evt:665
S4
(U.S. only) there are insufficient radio credits.
Evt:666
S5
(U.S. only) radio credits decreased.
Evt:667
S5
(U.S. only) UTAM keys are required.
Evt:668
S5
(U.S. only) UTAM test failed.
Evt:669
S5
Evaluation override is finished.
Evt:670
S5
Disablement test is active.
Evt:671
S5
Disablement test is finished.
Evt:672
S5
System initialization is beginning.
Evt:673
S5
System initialization is finished.
Evt:675
S5
Demo system.
Evt:831
S5
Software error dealing with Base Station.
Evt:832
S5
System problem with locating portable telephones.
Evt:833
S5
The radio driver software which directly controls the Base
Stations’ device has experienced an internal error.
Evt:834
S5
System problem with locating portable telephones.
Evt:835
S5
Wireless system access error.
Evt:836
S5
Wireless system access error.
Evt:837
S5
Trying to register an incompatible wireless device.
Evt:840
S5
Wireless system software error in dealing with a portable
telephone.
Evt:841
S5
Wireless system software error.
Evt:842
S5
Portable does not support specific display character.
Evt:843
S5
Internal radio driver error.
Evt:848
S5
A cell manager has been unable to register with the router.
Evt:849
S5
Synchronization error.
Evt:850
S5
Synchronization error.
Evt:851
S5
Base Station software error.
Evt:852
S5
The Data Transfer server has been told by the Base Station that
an error has occurred.
Evt:853
S5
The Data Transfer server has been told by the Base Station that
an error has occurred.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 293
Event message display
Cause
Evt:854
S5
Invalid event for Data Transfer.
Evt:855
S5
Internal wireless subsystem software error.
Evt:856
S5
Internal wireless subsystem locator error.
Evt:859
S5
All possible wireless telephone numbers have been registered to
portable telephones. No directory number is available to handle
the registration Link setup request.
Evt:864
S5
A Base Station has received a corrupted stimulus message.
Evt:865
S5
The Base Station does not understand the received stimulus
message. This occurs when you are trying to use a type of
portable that the system does not support.
Evt:869
S5
Wireless subsystem language loading error.
Evt:870
S5
Firmware downloading to Base Station.
Evt:871
S5
Basestation download is complete.
Evt:872
S5
Wireless subsystem error.
Evt:873
S5
Wireless subsystem Common Signaling Channel server
software error.
Evt:877
S5
Wireless auto-admin (Re-Eval) subsystem detected that a data
re-evaluation is required.
Evt:878
S5
Wireless data re-evaluation has started.
Evt:879
S5
Wireless data re-evaluation has completed.
Evt:881
S5
Wireless auto-admin (Re-Eval) indicating that a configured cell
failed to come on-line. Alarm 23 displays cell that failed.
Evt:884
S5
The Wireless auto-admin (Re-Eval) subsystem has detected an
error.
Evt:885
S5
Sequencer functionality has detected an error.
Evt:886
S5
The Wireless auto-admin (Re-Eval) Initial Intelligence
component has detected an error.
Evt:887
S5
The Wireless auto-admin (Re-Eval) radio Sniffing component
has detected an error.
Evt:888
S5
The Wireless auto-admin (Re-Eval) Radio Manager has
detected an error.
Note: Companion alarm codes appear in the Windows NTTM event log.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
294 Maintenance
Tests
Enterprise Edge allows you to run tests to verify the integrity of the installation
wiring for the telephone sets. Before you run any tests, use the procedure, DN-toport conversion on page 296, to determine the port associated with a particular DN.
Choose an appropriate time to run tests.
A good time to run tests is after office hours.
The following messages may appear on the Alarm Telephone during Loopback
tests.
Message
Explanation
EVT: 210-YYYZ
Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has started
EVT: 211-YYYZ
Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has ended
You can start and stop Loopback tests under the Diagnostics heading. Run only one
test at a time on an EE-DTM. You can move on to another programming task while
the loopback test is running. While the loopback test is running, the green “in
Service” LED on the EE-DTM flashes.
If you administer the internal CSU on a line loopback and payload loopback, then
the central office can also invoke and stop tests. In order to be able to run a payload
loopback test, you must configure the EE-DTM for extended superframe format.
The Enterprise Edge system allows you to run the following tests:
•
Line loopback test on page 294
•
Payload loopback test on page 295
•
Card loopback test on page 295
•
Continuity loopback test on page 295
Use the procedure, Start a loopback test on page 296, to run any of these tests.
Line loopback test
The line loopback test loops the full 1.544 Mbps signal received from the network
back to the network. The looped signal regenerates without any change in the
framing format and without the removal of any bipolar violations. The line
loopback test can also be invoked and stopped remotely using the in-band signal or
via the facility data link (FDL) in extended super frame (ESF) format.
The line loopback test must be run in coordination with the T1 or PRI service
provider. Some test patterns can cause the EE-DTM to reset. To avoid this, start the
line loopback test from your system before the T1 or PRI service provider begins
their test, and stop the line loopback test from your system after the T1 or PRI
service provider ends their test.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 295
Payload loopback test
The payload loopback test loops the received information bits (192 per frame) back
to the network. You can also remotely invoke and stop the payload loopback test
through the facility data link (FDL) in extended super frame (ESF) format.
The payload loopback test must be run in coordination with the T1 service provider.
Some test patterns can cause the EE-DTM to reset. To avoid this, start the payload
loopback test from your system before the T1 service provider begins their test, and
stop the payload loopback test from your system after the T1 service provider ends
their test.
Card loopback test
The card edge loopback test loops the outgoing signal on the EE-DTM back to its
internal received signal path. The system disconnects signal paths to the external
network.
Continuity loopback test
The continuity loopback test shorts the tip and ring pair of the receive signal path
with the transmit signal path. This test allows you to check the metallic continuity
of the external wiring.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
296 Maintenance
Start a loopback test
Give notice that you are running a loopback test.
Calls on all T1 or PRI lines on the EE-DTM will be automatically dropped
when a loopback test is invoked. Use the Page feature to notify people using
the system that a test is about to begin and that calls will be disconnected.
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Double click on the bus that contains the card you want to test. For example,
Bus 02.
3. Double click on the appropriate module on this bus. For example, Module 1.
4. Click on Loopback Tests.
The Configuration menu option is enabled. The loopback status box displays
the type of test currently running.
Note: If there is an analog module in the slot or the slot is empty, the box
displays Not equipped.
5. On the Configuration menu click Start loopback to begin the test.
The system displays the Loopback type selection window.
6. From the drop-down menu, select the test you want to run and then click OK.
The options are Line, Payload, Card edge or Continuity.
Note: To end the test at any time, click Stop loopback on the Configuration
menu.
DN-to-port conversion
If you know a telephone’s DN, you can determine the port associated with this DN,
using the following procedure.
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, and click on the DN-to-port conversion heading.
2. Type the DN in the DN to convert box and press Enter.
The system displays values in the Device port and Device channel boxes.
Debug
Restart info
To view the Restart info:
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, Debug, and click on the Restart info heading.
The Restart info summary screen appears.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 297
2. On the Configuration menu click Clear restart info to clear the log.
Registers
To view the Registers information:
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, Debug, Restart info.
2. Click on the Registers heading.
The Registers summary screen appears.
Message monitoring
1. Choose Diagnostics, MSC, Debug, and click on the Message monitoring
heading.
The Message monitoring screen appears.
CSU statistics
Each EE-DTM has an internal channel service unit (CSU). When enabled, the
internal CSU monitors the quality of the received T1 signal and provides
performance statistics, alarm statistics and diagnostic information.
EE-DTMs must be individually programmed to establish parameters for collecting
and measuring transmission performance statistics by the CSU.
For more information, refer to:
•
Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system on page 297
•
Enable the internal CSU on page 298
•
Check the performance statistics on page 299
•
Check the CSU alarms on page 299
•
Check carrier failure alarms on page 299
•
Check bipolar violations on page 300
•
Check short term alarms on page 300
•
Check Defects on page 300
•
Reset all statistics on page 300
Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system
The system accumulates three performance parameters:
•
errored seconds (ES)
•
severely errored seconds (SES)
•
unavailable seconds (UAS)
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
298 Maintenance
These parameters are defined as per TIA-547A. Errored seconds are enhanced to
include control slip (CS) events. Only near-end performance data is recorded.
The internal CSU continuously monitors the received signal and detects four types
of transmission defects:
•
any active carrier failure alarms (CFA) (loss of signal LOS, out of frame OOF,
alarm indication signal AIS, remote alarm indication RAI)
•
the number of bipolar violations that occurred in the last minute
•
any defects (loss of signal LOS, out of frame OOF, alarm indication signal AIS)
that occurred in the last minute
•
the number of milliseconds of short term alarms (loss of signal LOS, out of
frame OOF, alarm indication signal AIS, remote alarm indication RAI) in the
last minute. A short term alarm is declared when the detected defects persist for
tens of milliseconds.
A carrier failure alarm (CFA) is a duration of carrier system outage. CFA types
reported can be mapped to CFAs defined in TIA-547A and TR62411 as follows:
Enterprise Edge
TIA-547A
TR62411
LOS CFA
Red CFA
Red CFA
OOF CFA
Red CFA
Red CFA
AIS CFA
Red CFA
AIS CFA
RAI CFA
Yellow CFA
Yellow CFA
The criteria for declaring and clearing the alarms is selectable to meet those in TIA547A or TR64211.
Enable the internal CSU
Use the following procedure to enable the internal CSU to gather performance
statistics for your T1 lines or PRI with public interface.
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules.
The window displays Bus 02 through to 08.
2. Choose the appropriate bus. For example, Bus 02.
3. Choose Modules on Bus.
The modules on this bus are displayed.
4. Choose the appropriate module. For example, Module 1.
5. Click on the T1 Parameters heading.
6. In the Internal CSU box, select On from the drop-down menu.
The module is temporarily disabled while the internal CSU is enabled.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 299
Check the performance statistics
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose the appropriate bus that contains the module that you want to check.
3. Choose Module #, CSU statistics, Performance statistics.
4. Click on the Current interval heading to display the duration of the current
15 minute interval of the selected card, the number of errored seconds (ES),
the number of severely errored seconds (SES) and the number of unavailable
time seconds (UAS).
5. Double click on the 15 min intervals heading to display statistics for 15
minute intervals in the last 24 hours, numbered from the most recent (01) to
the oldest (96). Click on the most recent interval. The window shows the start
time of the interval.
6. Click on the 24-hour summary heading for an overall summary of the
previous 24 hours.
The Number of intervals, Errored Seconds, Severely Errored Seconds,
Unavailable Seconds, appear in the summary.
Check the CSU alarms
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose a bus and then choose a module.
3. Choose CSU Statistics, Alarm statistics and click on the Active alarms
heading.
The display shows all the active alarms of the types LOS (loss of signal),
OOF (out of Frame), RAI (Remote alarm indicator) or AIS (Alarm indication
signal). For more information on these types of transmission defects, refer to
Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system on page 297.
Check carrier failure alarms
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose a bus and then choose a module.
3. Choose CSU Statistics, Alarm statistics, CFA alarms.
The display shows LOS (loss of signal), OOF (out of Frame), AIS (Alarm
indication signal), RAI (Remote alarm indicator), Short-term alarms and
Defects. For more information on these types of transmission defects, refer to
Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system on page 297.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
300 Maintenance
4. Choose the type of alarm you wish to view. For example, LOS (Loss Of
Signal).
5. Click on the Period #.
The display shows the Start time of the period.
Check bipolar violations
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose a bus and then choose a module.
3. Choose CSU Statistics and click on the Alarm statistics heading.
The display shows the number of bipolar violations that occurred in the last
minute.
Check short term alarms
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose a bus and then choose a module.
3. Choose CSU Statistics, Alarm statistics, and click on the ShortTerm
alarms heading.
The display shows the short term alarms and the number of milliseconds (not
necessarily contiguous) that were active in the last minute.
Check Defects
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose a bus and then choose a module.
3. Choose CSU Statistics, Alarm statistics, and click on the Defects heading.
The display shows the first type of defect and the number of milliseconds (not
necessarily contiguous) the hardware reported in the last minute.
Reset all statistics
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose a bus and then choose a module.
3. Click on the CSU Statistics heading.
4. On the Configuration menu, click Clear CSU statistics.
The system displays a message indicating that this will remove all of the
statistics.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 301
5. Select OK to erase all the current statistics and begin collecting statistics
again.
Link Status
When you purchase PRI from your service provider, you can request the number of
B-channels that are allocated for you to use. For example, you may want to use only
12 B-channels instead of 23 B-channels. If this is your situation, you should disable
all the B-channels that you do not need.
It is recommended that the number of lines that are deprovisioned on an EE-DTM
(configured as PRI) be the same as the number of b-channels that are disabled. For
example, If the EE-DTM is on bus 7, when b-channels 13-23 are disabled, you
should deprovision lines 73 to 83.
1. Choose Diagnostics, Trunk Modules.
2. Choose a bus and then choose a module.
3. Choose B channels.
A list of the B channels on this card appears.
4. Click on a channel, for example, B 01
The display shows the status of the PRI channel.
5. On the Configuration menu, click Enable or Disable to change the setting
for the channel.
Metrics
The following usage metrics are available with the Enterprise Edge Software:
•
CbC limit metrics on page 301
•
Hunt Group Metrics on page 302
CbC limit metrics
You can view statistical information on call-by-call limit settings for PRI when the
protocol is set to call-by-call routing.
1. Choose Diagnostics, Service Metrics, Telephony Services, CbC limit
metrics.
The display shows the pools that supports CbC routing.
2. Choose a pool. For example, Pool PRI-B
The display shows the services in the pool. The services that appear depend
upon the PRI protocol.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
302 Maintenance
3. Select a service. For example, Public.
The display shows the settings for the selected service.
To clear the settings for a selected service, click Clear metrics on the
Configuration menu.
Hunt Group Metrics
This feature gives you statistical information on hunt group calls.
1. Choose Diagnostics, Service Metrics, Telephony Services, Hunt Group
Metrics.
All the Hunt Groups appear.
2. Click on a Hunt Group.
The display shows all the statistical information for the selected hunt group.
To clear the hunt group metrics, click Clear group on the Configuration menu.
PSTN fallback metrics
To view the metrics associated with VoIP calls that fallback to the PSTN network.
1. Choose Diagnostics, Service Metrics, Telephony Services, and click on the
PSTN fallback metrics heading.
The Last reset time, Fallback requests and Fallback failures values appear.
2. On the Configuration menu click Clear data and time to reset the metric
log.
Moving telephones
You can move a Enterprise Edge telephone to a new location within the system
without losing its programmed settings. Set relocation (automatic telephone
relocation) must be enabled in system programming. This makes the internal
numbers, autodial settings, and personal speed dial codes remain with the telephone
when it is unplugged.
Automatic telephone relocation is disabled by default. Use the following procedure
to enable set relocation.
1. Choose Resources, Services, Telephony Services, General settings, and
click on the Feature settings heading.
2. In the Set relocation box, select Y from the pull-down menu.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Maintenance 303
After set relocation is enabled, unplug the telephone and plug it in again at another
location. It may take up to 45 seconds for the system to recognize the telephone.
Tips
All telephones being moved should be relocated before new telephones are
plugged into their place. This allows the moved telephones to retain their
programmed settings. If a new telephone is plugged into the system before the
old telephone is reconnected at a new location, the system will give the old
telephone’s information to the new telephone, and the old telephone will no
longer be recognized by the system.
When changing a telephone's internal number (in programming), wait one
minute after Automatic Telephone Relocation.
When you relocate a telephone, the telephone must remain installed and
connected in the new location for at least 3 minutes for the programming
relocation to be complete. Moving the telephone again before the 3 minute
period may result in losing the telephone’s programming.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
304 Maintenance
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge
system
9
These troubleshooting procedures allow you to solve many problems in the
Enterprise Edge system. Follow these procedures before replacing any components.
Only qualified persons should service the system.
The installation and service of this unit is to be performed only by service
personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of
hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to
minimize the danger to themselves or other persons.
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains
are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and
users, the Enterprise Edge must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire
ground.
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents
becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events
near network lines. These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective
Earth ground via the power cord. Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to
an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit.
Specifically, operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the
network connections (central office lines) removed first.
Under Diagnostics, MSC there is a Debug function which ITAS personnel can use
to troubleshoot problems with your Enterprise Edge system. Debug is password
protected. For more information, contact ITAS.
For more information, refer to the following sections.
•
General troubleshooting information on page 305
•
Problems with telephones on page 309
•
Problems with lines on page 310
•
Problems with optional equipment on page 315
•
Problems with Trunk or Station Modules on page 320
•
Problems for network or remote users on page 321
•
Problems with Companion sets (North American systems only) on page 326
General troubleshooting information
•
Getting ready on page 306
•
Types of problems on page 306
•
Basic troubleshooting procedure on page 306
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
306 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
Getting ready
Before you begin troubleshooting, gather all the information that is relevant to your
network configuration such as:
•
records from people who use the network
•
information about other hardware and non-Enterprise Edge features within the
public or private network
Notify service provider of T1 or PRI signaling disruption.
Notify your T1 or PRI service provider before disconnecting your T1 or PRI lines,
removing power to your system, or performing any other action that disrupts your
T1 or PRI signaling. Failure to notify your T1 or PRI service provider may result in
a loss of T1or PRI service.
Types of problems
The problems you encounter will likely fall into one of the following categories:
Misunderstanding of a feature: A problem may be reported because an Enterprise
Edge user is unfamiliar with the operation of a given feature. You may be able to
solve the problem simply by demonstrating how to use the feature correctly.
Programming errors: You may encounter problems caused by errors in
programming. A feature may have been programmed incorrectly or may not have
been programmed at all.
Wiring connections: Wiring problems are caused by loose, unconnected, or
incorrect wiring. Use the procedures in the section on checking the hardware as a
guide.
Equipment defects: You may encounter problems caused by Enterprise Edge
equipment defects. See the appropriate section for problems related to the system
hardware.
Basic troubleshooting procedure
Use the following basic troubleshooting procedure as well as the detailed
descriptions in this guide. Where more than one procedure is given for a particular
problem, the procedures represent different options from which you should select
just one.
1. Diagnose the trouble by determining:
•
the types of problems users have experienced
•
the frequency of the problems
•
how many telephones are affected
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 307
2. Access the system performance graphs and tables to view the system usage
and any system faults. For more information, refer to Viewing system
performance and fault alarms on page 307.
3. Check how a feature is being used. A problem may have been reported
because of a misunderstanding about how a feature works. Confirm that the
person who reported a problem understands the intended use and operation of
any feature in question.
4. Run a Station set test (ƒ°‚fi).
5. Check the wiring and hardware connections.
6. If the problem persists, run a Maintenance session as described in
Maintenance programming for telephony resources on page 278.
7. If hardware is defective, replace it. If the trouble requires expert advice, use
the instructions in How to Get Help on page 307.
How to Get Help
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a
distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that
distributor or reseller for assistance.
If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program, contact one of the following
Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers:
Technical Solutions Center
Telephone Number
Billerica, MA
800-2LANWAN (800-252-6926)
Santa Clara, CA
800-2LANWAN (800-252-6926)
Valbonne, France
33-4-92-96-69-68
Sydney, Australia
61-2-9927-8800
Tokyo, Japan
81-3-5402-7041
Viewing system performance and fault alarms
•
System performance graphs and tables on page 308
•
Fault Alarm Banner on page 308
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
308 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
System performance graphs and tables
To access the system performance graphs and tables:
1. Choose System.
The Performance, Fault and Tools menu options are enabled.
2. From the Performance menu option, select System CPU Usage Graph,
System CPU Usage Table, Memory Usage Graph and Memory Usage
Table.
Fault Alarm Banner
The Alarm Banner provides a window which allows you to continually monitor the
Enterprise Edge system for fault alarms. The Alarm Banner is designed to stay on
your desktop for quick access. The banner uses a color code to describe the severity
of the alarm and provides the number of alarms for each severity level.
To view the system fault alarm banner:
1. From the navigation tree, click System.
The Performance, Fault and Tools menus are enabled.
2. From the Fault menu, choose Fault.
The Alarm Banner appears.
3. To view a list of alarms of a particular severity level, click the color coded
corresponding box
or
click ALL (white box) to browse through the complete list of system alarms,
regardless of the severity level.
The Alarm Browser is displayed. See Alarm Browser on page 308 for more
information.
Alarm Browser
The Alarm Browser provides detailed description of each alarm occurring within
the system. The Alarm Browser contains a Repair Action box which can help you
take the correct action to clear an alarm.
To view Alarm Details,
1. From the Alarm Browser screen, click the row corresponding to the alarm for
which you want detailed information.
The row is highlighted.
2. From the Alarm Browser menu, click Actions and select Display Details.
The Alarm Details screen appears.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 309
Problems with telephones
For troubleshooting information for your telephone sets, refer to one of the
following items:
•
Telephone has faulty buttons, display, handset or other hardware problems on
page 309
•
Digital telephone display is unreadable on page 309
•
Telephone has no dial tone on page 310
Telephone has faulty buttons, display, handset or other hardware
problems
Run a Station Set Test (ƒ°‚fi).
Digital telephone display is unreadable
If the trouble is with an M7310 or an M7324 telephone
1. Press ƒ•‡.
2. Press UP or DOWN to adjust the display contrast to the desired level.
3. Press OK.
If the trouble is with an M7100 telephone
1. Press ƒ•‡.
2. Press a number on the dial pad to adjust the display contrast to the desired
level.
3. Press ˙.
If the display is still unreadable, disable the telephone and replace it with a known
working one and enable the working telephone. Disable the telephone using the
following procedure:
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules and then the appropriate bus.
2. From Ports on Bus, select the port on the bus that the telephone uses.
3. Select Channels.
4. Select the channel that the telephone uses.
5. From the Configuration menu, select Disable.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
310 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
To enable the working telephone, use the preceeding procedure and select Enable
from the Configuration menu.
Telephone has no dial tone
1. Run a Station Set Test (ƒ°‚fi).
2. Check for dial tone.
3. Check the display.
4. If the problem persists, replace the telephone with a known working telephone
of the same type (so that the programming is retained).
5. Check the internal wiring at both the modular jack and the distribution
cross-connect. A TCM port should have between 15 and 26 V DC across the
Tip and Ring when the telephone is disconnected.
6. Check the line cord.
Problems with lines
The troubleshooting problems listed here focus on trouble with making calls or
using lines. For more information, refer to one of the following problems:
•
Calls can be received but cannot be made on page 310
•
Dial tone is absent on external lines on page 311
•
Lines at a telephone are busy after call is over on page 311
•
Auto-answer line rings at a telephone on page 313
•
Prime telephone gets misdialed calls on page 314
•
Selected lines reads “Not in service” or “Not available” on page 314
•
Selected line pool shows “No free lines” on page 315
Calls can be received but cannot be made
1. If an incorrect line number or name appears (or if neither appears) on the
telephone display, check the programming settings.
OR
If the correct line number or name appears on the telephone display, make
sure the external lines are properly cross-connected.
2. Check external lines by attaching a test telephone directly on the distribution
block.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 311
3. Ensure that the 25-pair cable is properly connected from the EE-DSM to the
station set termination.
4. In the Unified Manager, verify that the EE-DSM module is not disabled or
unequipped by selecting Resources, Media Bay Modules and the bus that the
module is on. For more information, refer to Display the Media Bay Module
status on page 279.
5. Disable and then enable the module by selecting Resources, Media Bay
Modules and the bus that the module is on. For more information, refer to
Disable a module on page 279 and Enable a module on page 280.
6. If you still cannot make external calls, power down, then power up the system.
This should be done after business hours to avoid losing calls.
7. To check the line, contact the telephone company.
Notify service provider of T1 signaling disruption.
Notify your T1 service provider before disconnecting your T1 lines, removing
power to your system, or performing any other action that disrupts your T1
signaling. Failure to notify your T1 service provider may result in a loss of T1
service.
Dial tone is absent on external lines
1. Check for dial tone using a test telephone at the connections for the external
line on the distribution block.
2. Make sure that a trunk module for the line is properly installed in the server or
expansion cabinet.
3. Make sure that the hub is properly connected to the MSC card.
4. In the Unified Manager, select Resources, Media Bay Modules and the bus
that the module is on, to ensure that the line is not disabled. See Display the
Media Bay Module status on page 279.
Lines at a telephone are busy after call is over
Line indicators that have been solid for a long time are the only visible indication
that lines are hung. The problem may be due to one of the following:
•
A redirected line remains busy on page 312
•
Programming is incorrect on page 312
•
Lines require maintenance session on page 312
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
312 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
A redirected line remains busy
A line that has been redirected using Line Redirection may, under some
circumstances, remain busy after a call is over. If this happens, the outgoing line for
the redirection also remains busy. You can clear this kind of hung line only at the
telephone that was used to redirect the line.
Use the following procedure to clear the line:
1. Enter the Button Inquiry feature code (ƒ•‚) at the telephone that
was used to redirect the line.
2. Press the button of the redirected line.
3. Press SHOW or £.
4. Press DROP or •.
Both the redirected line and the outgoing line for the redirection should now be
cleared.
Programming is incorrect
The supervision and/or disconnect timer programming for the line do not match the
settings for the line at the central office.
Verify in the Unified manager that your programming for the line matches the
central office settings using the following procedure:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines.
2. Select the affected line.
3. Select Trunk/Line data.
The line’s programming data is displayed.
4. Verify that the supervision and disconnect timer programming match the
settings for the line at the central office.
Lines require maintenance session
Lines are still hung after all the above solutions have been investigated or tried out.
For lines that are hung for any other reason, you will have to run a Maintenance
session and disable then re-enable the affected trunk module using the following
procedure:
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules and the bus that the module is on.
Disable the module using the procedure, Disable a module on page 279.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 313
2. Enable the module using the procedure, Enable a module on page 280.
Follow the procedures in the Basic troubleshooting procedure on page 306 before
proceeding.
Auto-answer line rings at a telephone
The problem may be due to one of the following:
•
Installed hardware does not support disconnect supervision on page 313
•
Line is configured as auto-answer and unsupervised on page 313
•
Line is not equipped for disconnect supervision at the central office on page 313
•
Trunk module’s disconnect timer setting is not correct on page 314
Installed hardware does not support disconnect supervision
You configured a loop start trunk as auto-answer but the installed hardware does
not support disconnect supervision. (In this case, the symptom would be
accompanied by the Alarm 62 code symptom.) If the installed hardware does not
support disconnect supervision, reconfigure the trunk as manual-answer.
Line is configured as auto-answer and unsupervised
If the line is configured as auto-answer, reconfigure it as manual-answer. If the line
is configured as unsupervised, reconfigure it as supervised. Use the following
procedure.
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines.
2. Select the affected line.
3. Select Trunk/line data.
4. In the Trunk mode field, reconfigure the line as supervised by selecting
Super from the drop-down menu.
OR
In the Auto answer field, reconfigure the line as manual answer by selecting
Manual form the drop-down menu.
Line is not equipped for disconnect supervision at the central office
If the line is not equipped for disconnect supervision at the central office,
reconfigure the trunk as manual-answer using the following procedure:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines.
2. Select the affected line.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
314 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
3. Select Trunk/line data.
4. In the Auto answer field, reconfigure the line as manual answer by selecting
Manual form the drop-down menu.
Trunk module’s disconnect timer setting is not correct
If the disconnect timer setting for the trunk module does not match the setting for
the line at the central office, reconfigure it to match the setting using the following
procedure:
1. Choose Services, Telephony Services, Lines.
2. Select the affected line.
3. Select Trunk/Line data.
The data is displayed for this line.
4. In the Trunk mode field, select the correct setting from the drop-down menu.
For more information, refer to Trunk/line data on page 111, Trunk mode.
Prime telephone gets misdialed calls
The digits sent by a switch at a central office or in the private network did not match
any Received number or the Auto DN. The call has been routed to the prime
telephone for the incoming trunk. Perform the following steps to determine the
cause:
1. Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received
number length defined in your system.
2. Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
3. Check that you have defined the corresponding Received number for every
target line in your system.
4. Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your network are correct.
Selected lines reads “Not in service” or “Not available”
The problem may be due to one of the following:
•
Line is connected to an EE-DTM which is currently not in service on page 315
•
Line has been disabled for maintenance purposes on page 315
•
Line has not been provisioned on page 315
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 315
Line is connected to an EE-DTM which is currently not in service
Perform the following steps to determine why the EE-DTM is not in service:
1. Check if the green LED on the EE-DTM is flashing to indicate that service is
suspended.
2. Check if any yellow LEDs are on to indicate an alarm or error condition.
3. Check if the red test LED is on to indicate that a continuity loopback test is
running.
4. Check that the cable connecting the EE-DTM to the termination point from
the central office or network is properly connected.
5. Check that the EE-DTM is properly inserted in the module bay.
6. In the Unified Manager verify the status of the EE-DTM. For more
information, refer to the procedure, Display the Media Bay Module status on
page 279.
Line has been disabled for maintenance purposes
If the line has been disabled, enable the line. If the line will be out of service for
some time, configure another line to replace it on the telephone.
Line has not been provisioned
If the line has not been provisioned, provision it.
Selected line pool shows “No free lines”
If this happens often, there are not enough lines in the line pool to serve the number
of line pool users. If this is the case, and the line pool contains loop start trunks,
move the under-utilized loop start trunks from other line pools into the deficient line
pool.
Problems with optional equipment
For more information on problems with optional equipment attached to the
Enterprise Edge system, refer to one of the following problems
•
Problems with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 on page 316
•
Problems with the auxiliary ringer on page 316
•
Problems with external paging on page 317
•
Problems with Music on Hold and Background Music on page 317
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
316 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
Problems with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2
1. Check the connections to the jack.
2. Check the connections to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2.
3. Disconnect the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 and replace it with a working digital
telephone. If the telephone still works properly, the system and the EE-DSM
are operating properly.
4. Verify that the programming has been performed correctly.
5. If the trouble seems to be in the system or EE-DSM, double-check all wiring
and programming options.
OR
If the trouble seems to be with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2, disable the
Enterprise Edge ATA 2 and replace it with a known working one.
For more information, refer to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 Installation Guide.
Running a Maintenance session to test a Enterprise Edge ATA 2
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules and navigate through the selections
to find the ATA 2, to ensure that the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 is not disabled.
See Identify a device connected to the system on page 280.
2. Disable the port connected to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 using the procedure,
Disable a device on page 281.
3. Enable the port connected to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 using the procedure,
Enable a device on page 281.
Problems with the auxiliary ringer
1. If the auxiliary ringer is used for Schedules (Night, Evening, or Lunch
service), ensure that Schedules is activated from the control telephone.
2. Check the wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator and the ringing
device. Refer to the auxiliary ringer wiring chart.
3. Check the following wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator and the
distribution block.
4. Ensure that the auxiliary ringer contacts are operating properly by checking
with an ohmmeter across the auxiliary ringer pin contacts listed above.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 317
5. Check that the auxiliary ringer pin contacts are programmed to operate in
conjunction with any or all of the features in the auxiliary ringer programming
chart.
The current capacity of the Enterprise Edge relay contacts is 5 0mA DC. They
are designed to operate with the auxiliary ringer generator, or equivalent.
Problems with external paging
1. Use the Button Inquiry feature (ƒ•‚) to verify the feature of a
programmable memory button.
2. Check the wiring between the 50-pin connector and the paging amplifier.
3. Test external paging ƒfl¤ to ensure that it is working. The nominal
output signal from the Enterprise Edge is 100 mV ac r o s s 6Ω.
00
Problems with Music on Hold and Background Music
Although Music on Hold and Background Music are separate features, they share
the same wiring and customer-supplied music source.
1. Ensure that the proper feature access code (ƒ°fl) is turned on.
Adjust the volume using the volume control bar.
2. Use the Button Inquiry feature (ƒ•‚) to verify the feature on a
programmable memory button.
3. If there is trouble with Music on Hold or Background Music, check the feature
settings in the Unified Manager by selecting Services, Telephony Services,
General settings and then Feature settings.
4. Check the wiring between the music source and the 50-pin connector.
5. Ensure that the music source is turned on, is operational, and the volume
control is set properly.
6. Any music source with a low-output impedance (for example, less than 3,300
ohms) can be connected. The output level must be less than one volt.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
318 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
Problems with module service
Check first for user problems, then wiring connections and programming errors
before replacing Enterprise Edge equipment.
Notify service provider of T1 or PRI signaling disruption.
Notify your T1 or PRI service provider before disconnecting your T1 or
PRI lines, removing power to your system, or performing any other
action that disrupts your T1 or PRI signaling. Failure to notify your T1
or PRI service provider may result in a loss of T1 or PRI service.
1. Check that the module is properly inserted in the server or expansion cabinet.
2. Access Services, Telephony Services and then Feature settings, to ensure
that the module is not disabled. For more information, refer to the procedure,
Display the Media Bay Module status on page 279.
If the problem persists
If the AC power is present and the LED indicator on the module is off, contact your
customer service representative. If AC power is present and the LED indicator on
the Enterprise Edge system is off, replace the system power supply.
Note: Before you replace the system power supply, disconnect all central office
and station lines from the Enterprise Edge system. Power down the system
by unplugging it.
Refer to Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide for information on
replacing components.
Refer to the following sections for more information:
•
Digital Trunk Computer Module trouble on page 318
•
Monitoring the T1 or PRI signal on page 320
Digital Trunk Computer Module trouble
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules and the bus that the module is on to
verify that the EE-DTM is enabled and that it’s lines are provisioned. For
more information, refer to the procedure, Display the Media Bay Module
status on page 279.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 319
2. Check the LEDs on the front of the EE-DTM
Front view
Power LED
Status LED
In Service LED
Loopback Test LED
Continuity loopback
Receive LEDs
Transmit LEDs
Loopback
Telecom
connector
•
Receive Alarm: yellow LED on indicates a problem with the digital
transmission being received. This half-duplex link is unusable.
•
Receive Error: yellow LED indicates a minor error as a result of degraded
digital transmission. Possible causes are an ohmic connection, water ingress, or
too long a loop.
•
Transmit Alarm: red LED on indicates an inability to transmit. Alarm
indication signal (AIS) is being transmitted to the terminating switch. This halfduplex link in unusable.
•
Transmit Error: yellow LED on indicates a remote alarm indication (RAI)
carrier failure alarm (CFA) is being sent to the terminating switch. If the
Transmit Alarm is not on, this indicates a far-end or cable problem.
•
In service: flashing green indicates that the T1 or PRI trunks are out of service
because of a running loopback test, or because the
EE-DTM is being initialized.
•
Loopback test: red LED on while a continuity loopback test is running.
•
All LEDs flashing continuously: the EE-DTM is being initialized.
3. In the Unified Manager, select Resources, Telephony, Maintenance, and
Tests to run any loopback tests as appropriate.
4. Check the pinout of the cable that connects the EE-DTM to the termination
point from the T1 or PRI service provider or the external channel service unit,
and check that the cable is properly connected.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
320 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
5. Check with your T1 or PRI service provider to see if through-fed repeaters are
used on the T1 or PRI span. The EE-DTM does not provide the DC
connection required for through-fed repeaters. If through-fed repeaters are
used on the T1 span, disable the internal CSU and connect the EE-DTM to an
external CSU.
6. If the problem persists, replace the EE-DTM.
Notify service provider of T1 or PRI signaling disruption.
Notify your T1 or PRI service provider before disconnecting your T1 or PRI
lines, removing power to your system, or performing any other action that
disrupts your T1 or PRI signaling. Failure to notify your T1 or PRI service
provider may result in a loss of T1 or PRI service.
For information on how to replace any system components, refer to the Enterprise
Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide
Monitoring the T1 or PRI signal
If you are finding minimal faults with the T1 or PRI signal, you can monitor the
signal to try and isolate the problem. The monitor jack on the EE-DTM faceplate
provides non-intrusive, bridged in-service monitoring of the T1 or PRI signal.
Connect a protocol analyzer or other test equipment into the monitor jack to monitor
the signal received from the network, and the signal transmitted by Enterprise Edge.
Problems with Trunk or Station Modules
1. Choose Resources, Media Bay Modules and the bus that the module is on to
ensure that the module is not disabled. For more information, refer to the
procedure, Display the Media Bay Module status on page 279.
2. Disable the module using the procedure, Disable a module on page 279.
3. Enable the module using the procedure, Enable a module on page 280.
4. For an EE-DTM, EE-CTM or EE-DSM:
Check the external line by terminating a single-line telephone directly on the
distribution block, or equivalent, which connects to the Trunk Module.
5. For the EE-ASM:
If the EE-ASM is still down, power down, then power up the Enterprise Edge
system.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 321
If the problem persists
1. If AC power is present and the LED indicator on the module is off, replace the
module.
2. Replace the link cable.
3. Replace the module.
4. Replace the MSC.
For information on replacing components, refer to the Enterprise Edge Installation
and Maintenance Guide.
Problems for network or remote users
Refer to one of the following items for information on how to solve network or
remote user problems.
•
Remote feature code gets no response on page 321
•
Dialed number gets ringback and the wrong person on page 322
•
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of ringback on page 322
•
Dialed number gets busy tone on page 322
•
Dialed number does not get through on page 322
•
Dialed feature code gets overflow tone on page 323
•
Dialed feature code gets busy tone on page 324
•
Line pool access code gets overflow tone on page 324
•
Line pool access code gets ringback on page 325
•
Line pool access code gets busy tone on page 325
•
Dialed number gets no response on page 325
Remote feature code gets no response
An Enterprise Edge user has called into another Enterprise Edge system and is
trying to activate a remote feature but gets no response after dialing the feature
code. Perform the following steps to determine the cause:
1. Make sure that the remote caller is dialing the feature code correctly. Use the
asterisk (*) character, followed by the feature code, to activate a remote
feature. (Do not use Feature for accessing features on a remote Enterprise
Edge system.)
2. Make sure that the remote user is dialing tones, not pulses once the call is
answered.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
322 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
Dialed number gets ringback and the wrong person
The digits sent by a switch at a central office or in the private network did not match
any Received number or the Auto DN. The call has been routed to the prime
telephone for the incoming trunk. Perform the following steps to determine why
calls are being routing incorrectly:
1. Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received
number length defined in your system.
2. Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
3. Check that you have defined the corresponding Received number for every
target line in your system.
4. Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your network are correct.
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of ringback
The remote caller has tried to reach an Enterprise Edge target line, but has reached
the Enterprise Edge system instead. The system has mapped the incoming digits
onto the Auto DN. Perform the following steps to determine why the remote caller
cannot reach the target line:
1. Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
2. Check that you have defined the corresponding Received number for every
target line in your system.
3. Check that you have defined the correct Auto DN for your system.
4. Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your network are correct.
Dialed number gets busy tone
The target line that the incoming digits map onto is busy, and there is no prime
telephone for the incoming trunk. For maximum call coverage, make sure that you
configure a prime telephone for every incoming trunk.
Dialed number does not get through
The problem may be due to one of the following:
•
Digits do not match Received number or Auto DN on page 323
•
The Enterprise Edge system did not receive some or all of the incoming digits
on page 323
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 323
Digits do not match Received number or Auto DN
The digits sent by a switch at a central office or in the private network did not match
any Received number or the Auto DN. There is also no prime telephone assigned
for the incoming trunk. In this case, the caller may hear overflow tone from the
Enterprise Edge system or a recorded message from the originating switch. Perform
the following troubleshooting steps:
1. Configure a prime telephone for every incoming trunk.
2. Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received
number length defined in your system.
3. Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
4. Check that you have defined a Received number for every target line in your
system.
5. Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your network are correct.
The Enterprise Edge system did not receive some or all of the incoming digits
Perform the following troubleshooting steps to determine why the system is not
receiving some of the incoming digits:
1. Check that the system hardware is receiving signals properly.
2. Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received
number length defined in your system.
3. If the switch at the far end is sending pulse signals, make sure they are being
sent at the proper rate. (Pulse digits must be 3 0 0ms or more apart for the
Enterprise Edge system to receive them.)
Dialed feature code gets overflow tone
The problem may be due to one of the following:
•
Remote caller does not have access to that feature on page 323
•
Feature code is not valid on page 324
•
Call may originate on a telephone that uses pulse signaling on page 324
Remote caller does not have access to that feature
Check the remote package that you assigned to the incoming trunk. Make sure that
it gives the appropriate access to the remote caller.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
324 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
Feature code is not valid
1. Make sure that remote callers have a correct listing of the features that are
programmed for remote access.
2. Ensure that remote callers are programming the feature code correctly. Press *
followed by the feature code to activate a remote feature.
Call may originate on a telephone that uses pulse signaling
The caller may be dialing on a rotary-dial telephone or on a push-button telephone
that uses pulse signaling. Inform remote callers that they must dial from a
push-button telephone that uses DTMF “tone” signaling.
Dialed feature code gets busy tone
A resource that the remote feature uses may currently be in use. For example, a
remote caller trying to use the paging feature would get a busy tone if the auxiliary
speaker were being used at the time.
If repeated attempts to use the remote feature get busy tone, there may be a
malfunction in a resource that the feature uses. Check that the remote feature
hardware is functioning normally.
Line pool access code gets overflow tone
The problem may be due to one of the following:
•
Remote caller does not have access to line pool on page 324
•
Line pool access codes are invalid on page 324
•
Call may originate on a telephone that uses pulse signaling on page 325
Remote caller does not have access to line pool
If the published line pool access code is valid, the remote caller does not have access
to that line pool. If this is the case, change the remote package for the incoming
trunk so that it permits access to that line pool. Alternatively, give the remote caller
a line pool access code that is permitted within the Class of Service on the incoming
trunk.
Line pool access codes are invalid
If the published line pool access code is invalid, the system has attempted, without
success, to match the invalid code to an Enterprise Edge target line internal number,
and there is no prime telephone for the auto-answer trunk. Verify the following:
1. Published line pool access codes are correct.
2. Check that the line pool access codes have been entered correctly under
Access codes in System programming.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 325
Call may originate on a telephone that uses pulse signaling
The caller may be dialing from the network on a rotary-dial telephone or on a
push-button telephone that uses pulse signaling. Inform remote callers that they
must dial from a push-button telephone that uses DTMF “tone” signaling.
Line pool access code gets ringback
If the line pool access code gets ringback, the published line pool access code is
invalid, and the system has routed the call to the prime telephone for the incoming
trunk. Verify the following:
1. Make sure that the published line pool access codes are correct.
2. Check that the line pool codes have been entered correctly under Services,
Telephony Services, General Settings, Access codes.
Line pool access code gets busy tone
The line pool access code will get a busy tone if there are not enough lines in the
line pool to serve the number of users. If the line pool contains loop start trunks,
enter programming and move under used loop start trunks from other line pools into
the deficient line pool. Alternatively, you can create a separate line pool for remote
users only.
Dialed number gets no response
This may be caused by one of the following:
•
Remote caller dials before far end is ready on page 325
•
Line malfunction on page 325
•
System malfunction on page 325
Remote caller dials before far end is ready
The remote caller, after accessing a line in a line pool, may have started dialing
before the far end was ready to receive digits. To avoid this problem, instruct remote
callers to wait until they hear feedback before entering any digits.
Line malfunction
There may be a malfunction in the line that the remote caller accessed. If the
problem is persistent, check that all lines in the affected line pool are functioning
normally.
System malfunction
There may be a malfunction in the system that the caller is trying to reach. Inform
the operators of the system at the far end that the dialed number is not getting
through.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
326 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
Problems with Companion sets (North American systems only)
When there is a problem with a Companion set:
1. Make sure the portable is compatible with Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging
Companion Wireless software.
2. Verify that the portable is ON and that the battery is not low.
3. Establish a radio connection to get a dial tone.
4. If there is no dial tone present:
•
verify that a dial tone is available from Enterprise Edge.
•
the portable may not be registered. If this is the case, register the portable
again.
•
check that the portable is using the correct registration slot.
•
verify that the portable has been assigned the correct internal number by
calling it from another telephone.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples
In addition to public network connections, Enterprise Edge can be integrated into
an existing private network of M1s to form a corporate telecommunications
network.
Tips
The ability to perform private networking requires software keys for Enterprise
Edge VoIP Gateway and Enterprise Edge PRI.
Enterprise Edge uses enhanced trunking to join other Nortel or customer equipment
in a private network. Authorized users can also access tie lines, central office lines,
and Enterprise Edge features from outside the system.
T1 lines
Analog lines
Private
Network
Public
Network
PRI lines
Enterprise Edge
For background information on Enterprise Edge networking, refer to the following:
•
Access using Enterprise Edge on page 328
•
Lines used for networking on page 328
•
Remote system access to Enterprise Edge on page 330
•
Enterprise Edge security on page 333
For more information on setting up dialing plans and examples of Enterprise Edge
networking, refer to
•
Coordinated dialing plans on page 335
•
Networking examples on page 341
•
Public networking scenarios on page 362
•
Private networking scenarios on page 365
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
328 Appendix A: Network Examples
Access using Enterprise Edge
Callers using Enterprise Edge can:
•
call directly to a specific telephone
•
select an outgoing line to access a private network
•
select an outgoing line to access features that are available on the private
network
•
select an outgoing central office line to access the public network
•
use all of the Enterprise Edge features.
Callers in the public network can:
•
call directly to one or more Enterprise Edge telephones
•
call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing tie line to access a private
network
•
call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing central office line to access the
public network
•
call into Enterprise Edge and use remote features.
Callers in the private network can:
•
call directly to one or more Enterprise Edge telephones
•
call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing tie line to access other nodes in
a private network
•
call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing central office line to access the
public network
•
call into Enterprise Edge and use remote features.
Lines used for networking
External lines provide the physical connection between Enterprise Edge and other
systems in a private or public network. Lines are numbered 061 to 238. Lines 001
to 008 are used for Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway (IP telephony functionality).
Enterprise Edge includes different types of modules that are configured for different
types of lines:
•
A DTI (EE-DTM) configured for PRI and BRI is used for incoming and
outgoing calls (two-way DID). Incoming calls are routed directly to an
Enterprise Edge telephone. Outgoing calls are made using the intercom key and
dialing destination codes.
•
A DTI (EE-DTM) configured for T1 has digital lines that are configured as
Groundstart, E&M, Loop, and DID.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 329
Target lines are virtual communication paths between trunks and telephones on the
Enterprise Edge system. They are incoming lines only, and cannot be selected for
outgoing calls. With target lines, you can concentrate incoming calls on fewer
trunks. This type of concentration is an advantage of DID lines. Enterprise Edge
target lines allow you to direct each DID number to one or more telephones. Target
lines are numbered 241 to 336.
Telephones can be configured to have an appearance of any type of trunk and line
(including target lines, excluding PRI trunks). If assigned, they are used for
monitoring call usage.
For more information on Enterprise Edge external line types, refer to:
•
PRI lines on page 329
•
T1 lines (Loop, E&M, DID, Ground start) on page 329
•
BRI lines on page 330
•
DPNSS lines (International systems only) on page 330
PRI lines
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an
ISDN network and are auto-answer trunks. PRI lines are set to auto-answer by
default and cannot be changed. The DTI (EE-DTM) is configured to provide PRI
lines.
PRI lines provide a fast, accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving data,
images, text and voice information. Using PRI lines allows for faster transmission
speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business applications, including
remote LAN access, video conferencing, file transfer and Internet access.
T1 lines (Loop, E&M, DID, Ground start)
Ground start lines offer the same features as loop start trunks, but are used when the
local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for the digital loop
start trunks. Ground start trunks work with T1 only. By configuring lines as ground
start, the system will be able to recognize when a call is released at the far end.
Tips
You cannot change the trunk mode for a ground start trunk on an EE-DTM (or
DTI). It always has disconnect supervision.
An EE-DTM configured for T1 can provide a maximum of 24 ground start
trunks. Analog ground start trunks are not supported.
Target lines are assigned by default for all templates except the DID
template.Target lines are assigned line numbers (for example, 241 to 336) similar
to physical lines.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
330 Appendix A: Network Examples
You can program auto-answer T1 loop start, T1 E&M trunks, T1 DID, T1 ground
start trunks, PRI, and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass
(calling directly to a department or individual) and line concentration (one trunk can
map onto several target lines).
BRI lines
Basic rate interface (BRI) lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN
network. ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute
specification for BRI ISDN service. BRI provides 2 bearer B-channels operating at
64 kbits/s and a data D-channel which operates at 16 kbits/s. The D-channel is used
primarily to carry call information. Like loop start trunks, BRI lines can be
configured as manual-answer or auto-answer.
DPNSS lines (International systems only)
Digital Private Network Signalling System (DPNSS) lines, when installed in a
network, offer significant enhancements to Enterprise Edge networking
capabilities.
DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private
networks, for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls. Its
routing capabilities provide more of the larger-network capabilities without the
expense of installing a new system, re-configuring all the nodes and worrying about
a lot of downtime. Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent once the
DPNSS is programmed into the system.
DPNSS allows a local node, acting as a terminating node, to communicate with
other PBXs over the network using E1 lines. For example, corporate offices
separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS lines to other Enterprise Edge
systems, bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected.
This allows connected Enterprise Edge systems to function like a private network.
Remote system access to Enterprise Edge
The remote access feature allows callers elsewhere on the private or the public
network to access Enterprise Edge by dialing directly without going through an
attendant. Once in the system, the remote user can use some of the system's
resources. The remote access must be enabled in programming before callers can
use it.
Enterprise Edge supports remote system access on a number of trunk types which
may require the remote caller to enter a password for direct inward system access
(DISA).
The system resources (dialing capabilities, line pool access and feature access) that
a remote user may access depends on the Class of Service (COS) assigned to them.
See COS Passwords on page 160 and the Nortel Networks Voice Programming
Guide for more details.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 331
Note: To use features on Enterprise Edge remotely, press * followed by the
ƒ code. Even if you are calling from another Enterprise Edge
system, press * instead of Feature.
For more information on remote system access on various trunk types, refer to:
•
Remote access on loop start trunks on page 331
•
Remote access on a private network on page 331
•
Remote access on T1 Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks on page 332
•
Remote access on PRI trunks on page 332
•
Remote access on DPNSS lines on page 332
Remote access on loop start trunks
Loop start trunks provide remote access to Enterprise Edge from the public
network. They must be configured to be auto-answer to provide remote system
access.
A loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is to operatein
auto-answer mode. T1 E&M trunks always operate in disconnect supervised mode.
When a caller dials into the system on a line that has auto-answer, the system
answers with system dial tone and no (COS) password is required. In this case,
control over the system capabilities available to the caller is provided only by the
restriction filters assigned to the line.
When a caller dials in on a line that has auto-answer with DISA, the system answers
with stuttered dial tone. This is the prompt to enter a COS password which
determines which system capabilities are available to the caller.
Remote access on a private network
Nodes on the private network deliver the last dialed digits to the destination
Enterprise Edge node for interpretation. The destination Enterprise Edge node
either matches the digits to a target line or interprets the digits as a remote feature
request. The call is either routed to the specified target line, or the remote feature is
activated.
By default, T1 E&M trunks are set to answer with DISA. For auto-answer T1 E&M
trunks connected to a private network, change the default so that the trunks are not
answered with DISA.
If an auto-answer T1 E&M trunk is configured to answer with DISA, the system
tries to interpret any received digits as a COS password.
The DISA DN and the Auto DN allow auto-answer private network and DID calls,
in the same way that calls on auto-answer loop start and auto-answer T1 E&M
trunks can be answered, with or without DISA. These DNs are described in Access
codes on page 156 of the Configuring Enterprise Edge Services chapter.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
332 Appendix A: Network Examples
Remote access on T1 Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
Remote system access on T1 DID trunks is similar to that of T1 E&M trunks
connected to a private network. The main differences are:
•
a remote caller is on the public network dialing standard local or long-distance
telephone numbers
•
the digits received are delivered by the central office
•
DISA cannot be administered to a T1 DID trunk
As with a private network, the dialed digits may be programmed to match those of
a specific target line DN, the DISA DN or the Auto DN.
Remote access on PRI trunks
Remote system access on PRI trunks is similar to that of T1 E&M trunks connected
to a private network. The main differences are:
•
a remote caller is on the public network dialing standard local or long-distance
telephone numbers
•
the digits received are delivered by the central office
•
answer with DISA cannot be administered to a PRI trunk
As with a private network, the dialed digits may be programmed to match those of
a specific target line DN, the DISA DN or the Auto DN.
Remote access on DPNSS lines
A remote caller can access a Enterprise Edge system dial tone, select a line pool that
contains exchange lines or DPNSS lines, then dial a number. The procedure is
identical to dialling an outside number from an extension in the local system. The
main features are:
•
Calls coming from another switch to the Enterprise Edge system can be routed
in two ways, depending on the Answer mode that you program. If Answer mode
is set to Manual and the line is assigned to ring at an extension, the incoming
call automatically rings at the assigned extension. If Answer mode is set to
Auto, the incoming call is answered automatically by the CCU. Because most
other DPNSS features are extension specific, it is recommended that all DPNSS
lines be configured as Auto-answer lines.
•
The Page feature is available to both remote callers and callers within the
system. The operation of the feature is identical, however the remote caller must
have DTMF capability to access the feature.
•
Line Redirection allows the originating party to redirect a call, waiting a
connection or re-connection, to an alternate destination after a time-out period.
Failed calls can be redirected. Priority calls cannot be redirected.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 333
Enterprise Edge security
Programming provides several ways of protecting Enterprise Edge from
unauthorized access or use. For more information on features that provide restricted
access to your Enterprise Edge system, refer to:
•
Class of Service on page 333
•
Restriction filters on page 333
•
Direct inward system access (DISA) on page 335
Class of Service
Class of Service (COS) refers to the capabilities that Enterprise Edge provides to
users who access the system from the public or a private network. The COS
includes:
•
filters that restrict dialing on the line
•
an access package, which defines the set of line pools that may be accessed and
whether or not the user has access to the paging feature.
The COS that is applied to an incoming remote access call is determined by:
•
the filters that you apply to the incoming trunk
•
the COS password that the caller used to gain access to Enterprise Edge.
In cases where DISA is not automatically applied to incoming calls, the remote
caller can change the COS by dialing the DISA DN and entering a COS password.
To program COS passwords, see COS Passwords on page 160.
Restriction filters
Restriction filters can be used to restrict the numbers that may be dialed on any
external line within Enterprise Edge. Up to 100 restriction filters can be created for
the system. A restriction filter consists of up to 48 restrictions and their associated
overrides.
To restrict dialing within the system, you can apply restriction filters to:
•
outgoing external lines (as line restrictions)
•
telephones (as set restrictions)
•
external lines on specific telephones (as line/set restrictions)
Restriction filters can also be specified in Restrictions service for times when the
system is operating according to a schedule. See Restriction service on page 141
and Restriction filters on page 124 for more details. Dialed digits must pass both the
line restrictions and the set restrictions. The line per set (line/set) restriction
overrides the line restriction and set restriction.
Line and set restrictions are shown in Line restriction example on page 334 and
Remote line restriction example on page 334.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
334 Appendix A: Network Examples
Line restriction example
Line restriction
Set restriction
line 1
no long
distance
except
area codes
212, 718
line 3
no long
distance
except area
codes 212
718, 214, 713
no long
distance
Line/Set
restriction
no long
distance
line 1
line 3
line 5
no long
distance
except
area codes
212, 718, 415
line 5
In this diagram, a caller using line 001 could only dial long-distance numbers to
area codes 212 and 718. A caller using line 003 could not dial any long-distance
numbers. A caller using line 005 could dial long-distance numbers to area codes
212, 718, and 415.
Tip
To restrict dialing from outside the system (once a caller gains remote access),
apply restriction filters to incoming external lines (as remote restrictions).
Remote line restriction example
Line restriction
no long
distance
except
area codes
212, 718, 41
Remote
restriction
Remote
caller
no long
distance
except
area codes
212, 718
line 1
Line pool
access code
81
no long
distance
except
area codes
212, 718, 41
line 3
In this case, dialed digits must pass both the remote restriction and the line
restriction. A remote caller can override these filters by dialing the DISA DN and
entering a COS password.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 335
Direct inward system access (DISA)
To control access from the public or private network, you can configure
auto-answer trunks to answer with DISA. Remote callers hear a stuttered dial tone
and must then enter a COS password that determines what they are allowed to do in
the system.
Auto-answer T1 loop start and T1 E&M trunks are configured to answer with DISA
by default. For DISA programming instructions.
Tips
T1 DID trunks cannot be configured to answer with DISA. If you want
incoming T1 DID calls to be answered with DISA, configure the system with a
DISA DN. Incoming T1 DID calls that map onto the DISA DN are then routed
to a line that has DISA.
Coordinated dialing plans
Enterprise Edge has a routing feature that allows you to set up a coordinated dialing
plan with other systems in the public network. The goal is to have a network-wide
dialing plan where all telephone numbers are unique and of a uniform length.
Coordinated dialing plans are typically used with a network of systems with a three
to seven digit dialing access between them.
Any programming for routing should be carefully planned using tables. For more
information about routing and destination codes, see Routing Service on page 142.
This section deals with applying the programming in network situations.
For more information on Enterprise Edge dialing plans, refer to:
•
Dialing plan using public lines on page 335
•
Dialing plan using T1 E&M lines on page 337
•
Dialing plans with shared line pools on page 340
Dialing plan using public lines
The following illustrations provide an example of how you might record dialing
plan information in a spreadsheet. The example shows dialing plan information for
a Toronto system in a network of three offices: Toronto, Halifax and Vancouver.
Without routing, an Enterprise Edge user in Toronto would have to select a line pool
and dial 1-902-585-3027 to reach extension 27 in Halifax (902). By creating a
destination code of 30 and creating a route that uses the proper line pool and dial
out number (referred to as “External #” in programming), the user simply dials
3027. The same feature is available for Vancouver (604).
In the column Dial out, P stands for pause, a host system signaling option. Press
ƒ‡° to insert a 1.5 second pause in the dialing string.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
336 Appendix A: Network Examples
Routing Service (Services: Routing Service)
Route #
(000-999)
Dial out (if required)
(max. 24 digits or characters)
Use Pool
100
1-P-902-585
A B C
101
1-P-902-585
A B C
102
1-P-604-645
A B C
103
1-P-604-645
A B C
A B C
Routing service (continued)
Dest code (Services: Routing service: Dest codes)
Service Schedule
Sched name
(max. 7 char.)
DestCode
(max. 7 digits)
Normal
Sched 1
Sched 2
Normal
Night
Evening
Sched 3
Lunch
Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb
(001-999) Length (001-999) Length (001-999) Length (001-999) Length
0
000
All
000
All
000
All
31
000 101 All 0
000
All
000
All
000
All
32
000 102 All 0
000
All
000
All
000
All
33
000
All
000
All
000
All
30
000100 All
103
All 0
000
Destination code numbering in a network
Because the system checks the initial digits of a call against the routing tables, each
type of internal or external call must begin with a unique pattern of digits. The
following table gives a sample plan for how initial digits are assigned in a network
of systems with three-digit intercom numbers.
Leading Digits
Use
0
Network Direct Dial
221-253
Intercom calls
4
Coordinated Dialing Plan
5
Unused
6
Unused
8
Call Park Prefix
9
All PSTN Calls
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 337
In the table, 4 is used as the initial digit for the coordinated dialing plan, but 5, or 6
could also be used for this purpose.
Tip
When programming a button to dial a Network number automatically
(autodial), network calls must be programmed as external autodial numbers,
even though they resemble internal extension numbers.
Routes generally define the path between the Enterprise Edge system and
another switch in the network, not other individual telephones on that switch.
Dialing plan using T1 E&M lines
By properly planning and programming routing tables and destination codes, an
installer can create a dialing plan where T1 E&M lines between Enterprise Edge
systems are available to other systems in the network
Dialing plan for Enterprise Edge network on page 337 shows a coordinated dialing
plan for a network of three Enterprise Edge systems. Each system must be running
Enterprise Edge software. Each system must be equipped with target lines and
Enterprise Edge with an EE-DTM with at least one T1 E&M line. Programming
information for this network is shown in Routing information on page 338.
Dialing plan for Enterprise Edge network
New ork
Network # 2221
Received # 2221
Internal # 2221
Toronto
Network # 221
Received # 221
Internal # 221
Pool H
Pool N
Enterprise Edge Voice
Pool M
T1 E&M
Pool B
T1 E&M
Santa Clara
Network # 4221
Received # 4221
Internal # 4221
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
338 Appendix A: Network Examples
Routing information
Heading
Parameter
Setting
New York office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
Line 061
T1 E&M
Answer Mode
Auto
Line type
Pool H
Line 241
Target line
Received #
2221
Set 2221
L241: Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool H
Route
001
Use
Pool H
External #
None
Destination Code
4
Normal route
001
Absorb
None
Destination Code
6
Absorb
None
Normal route
001
Line 091
T1 E&M
To Santa Clara:
Routing service
To Toronto:
Routing service
Santa Clara office:
Trunk/Line Data
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
Answer Mode
Auto
Line type
Pool M
Line 092
T1 E&M
Answer Mode
Auto
Line type
Pool B
Line 251
Target line
Received #
4221
Set 4221
L251: Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool B
Line pool M
Route
001
Use
Pool M
External #
None
Destination Code
2
Absorb
None
Normal route
001
To New York:
Routing service
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 339
Heading
Parameter
Setting
To Toronto:
Routing service
Remote access
Route
002
Use
Pool B
External #
None
Destination Code
6
Absorb
None
Normal route
002
Rem access pkgs
01
Line pool access
Pool M: ON
Rem access pkgs
02
Line pool access
Pool B: ON
Line abilities
049
Remote pkg
01
Line abilities
050
Remote pkg
02
Line 093
T1 E&M
Answer Mode
Auto
Line type
Pool N
Line 300
Target line
Received #
6221
Set 6221
L300: Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool N
Route
001
Use
Pool N
External #
None
Destination Code
4
Absorb
None
Normal route
001
Destination Code
2
Absorb
None
Normal route
001
Toronto office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
To New York:
Routing service
To Santa Clara:
Routing service
If a user in New York wishes to call Toronto within the network, they dial 6221.
The local Enterprise Edge checks the number against the routing tables and routes
the call according to the destination code 6, which places the call using Route 001.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
340 Appendix A: Network Examples
The call appears on the auto answer line on the Enterprise Edge in Santa Clara as 6221. Because 6 is programmed as a destination code for Toronto on the Santa Clara
system, another call is placed using route 002 from Santa Clara to Toronto. At the
Toronto system, the digits 6-221 are interpreted as a target line received number.
The call now alerts at telephone 6221 in Toronto.
Dialing plans with shared line pools
Using routes and destination codes is a powerful and efficient way to create a
coordinated dialing plan. Line pools offer an alternate method of creating a dialing
plan or supplementing the routing and destination codes.
If the Enterprise Edge systems are close to each other geographically, you can
conserve resources by not duplicating access. For example, system A, B, and C are
all within the same area code. System A has a line pool to Santa Clara, System B
has a line pool to Montreal, and system C has a line pool to Miami. An Enterprise
Edge user in system A can reach Miami by calling system C and using their line
pool to Miami.
To simplify access between Enterprise Edge systems, all line pools that go to the
same destination should have the same line pool access code. For example, system
A and system B both have a line pool to Ottawa. You can configure both systems
with the same line pool access code for the Ottawa line pool.
A dialing plan similar to the one in Network example using shared line pools. on
page 340 will let you create a company directory that uses line pool access codes
and unique DNs of a uniform length
Network example using shared line pools.
Network # 334
Received # 334
Internal # 334
Network # 5234
Received # 234
Internal # 234
System A
System B
Pool A ()
Pool B (7)
Pool C (8)
Pool A (5)
Pool B (8)
Pool C (7)
T1 E&M
T1 E&M
T1 E&M
T1 E&M
T1 E&M
System D
System C
Pool A (5)
Pool B ()
Pool C (7)
T1 E&M
Network # 8534
Received # 534
Internal # 534
Pool A ()
Pool B (5)
Pool C (8)
Network # 7434
Received # 434
Internal # 434
For instance, the person on system A at telephone 234 can press an Intercom button
and dial 7434.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 341
This means that telephone 234 has dialed the line pool access code of the trunk to
system C, and will receive the dial tone of system C. The digits 434 then map to the
Received number 434, and ring telephone 434 with an appearance of the associated
target line.
Tips
Network calls that use routes are subject to any restriction filters that are in
effect.
If the telephone used to make a network call has an appearance of a line used
by the route, the call will move from the intercom button to the line button.
The telephone used to make a network call must have access to the line pool
used by the route.
Network calls are external calls, even though they are dialed as if they were
internal calls. Only the features and capabilities available to external calls can
be used.
When programming a button to dial a Network number automatically
(autodial), network calls must be treated as external numbers, even though they
resemble internal set numbers.
Routes generally define the path between your Enterprise Edge switch and
another switch in your network, not other individual telephones on that switch.
For dialing plan information with PRI, see Using a dialing plan to route outgoing
PRI calls on page 137.
Networking examples
•
PRI Networking with Meridian 1 on page 341
•
PRI networking using Call-by-Call Services on page 346
•
Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway and M1 networking on page 348
•
Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway on page 351
•
Networking with QSIG (International systems only) on page 356
•
Private networking with DPNSS (International systems only) on page 359
PRI Networking with Meridian 1
Some of the benefits of networking Enterprise Edge and Meridian M1 (version1.1)
over PRI include
•
common dialing plan
•
centralized PSTN trunking (Enterprise Edge users can share the M1’s PSTN
trunks with M1 users)
•
PRI networks can be used for voice, data, and video calls
•
no usage costs when placing calls over private networks
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
342 Appendix A: Network Examples
Note: Private networking requires an Enterprise Edge PRI software keycode.
This example shows a private network composed of one central Meridian 1 (version
1.1), and two smaller sites with Enterprise Edge systems.
Note: Enterprise Edge systems only interact with M1 version 1.1. Enterprise Edge
systems will no longer interact with the M1 version 2.0.
This could represent a large head office (with the Meridian 1) connected to several
smaller branch offices. In this network, only the head office has trunks connected
to the public network. The branch offices access the public network via the private
connection to the head office. This configuration allows for cost savings by
consolidating the public access trunks. Users at all three locations access the public
network by dialing ‘9’, followed by the public number. For example, a user in the
west end branch might dial 9-555-1212 (for a local call) or 9-1-613-555-1212 (for
a long distance call). These public calls are routed to the Meridian 1 by the
Enterprise Edge routing table. Routing tables at the Meridian 1 will then select an
appropriate public facility for the call.
Note that the Private Network Identifier (PNI) is programmed at each end of the
links. The PNI identifies the Enterprise Edge to the Meridian M1.
Private network calls are made by dialing a 4-digit private network DN. For
example, if a user in the west end branch wishes to call a user in the east end branch
within the private network, they dial 6221. PRI networking with Meridian M1
(version 1.1) on page 343 illustrates this example. Refer to the following for
hardware and routing programming for this network:
•
PRI networking with Meridian M1 Routing information on page 343
•
Hardware programming for the branch offices on page 343
In this example, there is additional configuration required as outlined in Additional
Configuration to Enterprise Edge systems on page 345 and Guidelines to setting up
PRI networking to Meridian M1 on page 345.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 343
PRI networking with Meridian M1 (version 1.1)
Network # 221
Received # 221
Internal # 221
Network # 2221
Received # 2221
Internal # 2221
PRI (SL-1)
Enterprise Edge
West-end Branch
PRI (SL-1)
Meridian M1
Enterprise Edge
East-end Branch
PNI2
PNI1
DN: 4221
PRI (public protocol)
Central
Office
Hardware programming for the branch offices
Heading
Parameter
Setting
West End office:
Hardware programming EE-DTM
PRI
Protocol
SL-1
BchanSeq
Ascend
ClockSrc
Primary
East End office:
Hardware programming EE-DTM
PRI
Protocol
SL-1
BchanSeq
Ascend
ClockSrc
Primary
PRI networking with Meridian M1 Routing information
Note: Private network routing information is highlighted in gray. Public network
routing information is shown in white. In this example, the private DN
length is 4 and the public DN length is 8. The public DN lengths depend on
the market profile which you have downloaded.
.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
West End office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
P0911588 Issue 01
Line 245
Target line
Received #
2221
Set 2221
L245:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool PRI-A
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
344 Appendix A: Network Examples
Heading
Parameter
Setting
To Head Office: (call terminates on M1)
Routing Service
Route
001
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
DN type
Private
Destination Code
4
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
To East End: (call terminates at East end)
Routing Service
Destination Code
6
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
To Public Network:
Routing Service
Route
002
External #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
DN type
Public
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
0
East End office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
Line 245
Target line
Received #
6221
Set 6221
L245:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool PRI-A
To Head Office:(call terminates on M1)
Routing Service
Route
001
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
DN type
Private
Destination Code
4
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
To West End: (Call terminates at West end)
Routing Service
Destination Code
2
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
To Public Network: (Call terminates at M1)
Routing Service
Route
002
External #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 345
Heading
Parameter
DN type
Destination Code
Setting
Public
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
0
Additional Configuration to Enterprise Edge systems
In this example, outgoing public network calls dialed from an Enterprise Edge set
are passed to the Meridian M1, and the Meridian M1 is responsible for seizing a
public trunk. For this reason, the ‘9’ prefix is left in the number passed to the
Meridian 1.
This necessitates that the Public DN lengths table on each Enterprise Edge be
modified to account for the extra leading digit. Essentially, the eight pre-configured
entries are modified to include a leading ‘9’ in the prefix digits, and the length value
for each entry is increased by one. The new entries are listed below. Note that
regulatory requirements may demand an entry for 911. The Public DN lengths table
is specific to individual market profiles.
Prefix
Length
Default
8
90
12
900
13
901
18
9011
19
91
12
9411
4
9911
4
Guidelines to setting up PRI networking to Meridian M1
When setting up PRI networking with Meridian M1s, you must consider the
following:
•
Meridian M1 is the timing master for the private network PRI connections.
•
Meridian M1 uses descending mode for PRI B-channel selection.
•
The Meridian M1 must recognize calls dialed to 2xxx and 6xxx numbers, and
route the call over PRI to either the East or West end offices. The same applies
to incoming DID calls from the public network.
•
The Meridian M1 must recognize numbers starting with ‘9’ as public numbers,
whether the numbers are dialed by Meridian M1 users or by Enterprise Edge
users.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
346 Appendix A: Network Examples
PRI networking using Call-by-Call Services
This example highlights the use of PRI Call-by-Call Services. It shows two offices
of a company, one in New York and one in Toronto. Each office is equipped with
an Enterprise Edge system and a PRI line. Each office has to handle incoming and
outgoing calls to the public network. In addition, employees at each office often
have to call colleagues in the other office. To reduce long-distance costs, and to
allow for a coordinated dialing plan between the offices, private lines are used to
handle inter-office traffic.PRI networking using Call-byCall Services
New ork office
Toronto office
Network # 2221
Received # 2221
Internal # 2221
DID # 73-2221
Network # 221
Received # 221
Internal # 221
DID # 52-221
Enterprise Edge Voice
Enterprise Edge Voice
Tie Connection
PRI
PRI
Central
Office
Central
Office
Public Network
If call-by-call services were not used, each Enterprise Edge system might have to
be equipped with the following trunks:
•
12 T1 DID lines needed to handle peak incoming call traffic.
•
8 T1 E&M lines needed to handle inter-office calls.
•
8 lines needed to handle outgoing public calls
The total required is thus 28 lines. If the Enterprise Edge systems were using T1
trunks, then two T1 spans would be required at each office. Note that the total of 28
lines represents the worst case value for line usage. In reality, the total number of
lines in use at any one time will generally be less than 28. For example, during
periods of peak incoming call traffic, the demand for outgoing lines will be low.
With PRI call-by-call services, it is not necessary to configure a fixed allocation of
trunks. Each of the 23 lines on the PRI can be used for DID, private Tie, or outgoing
public calls. This consolidation means that it may be possible for each office to use
a single PRI span, rather than two T1 spans. With PRI call-by-call services, the only
limitation is that there are no more than 23 calls in progress at any one time.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 347
The dialing plan at each Enterprise Edge site is configured to determine the call type
based on the digits dialed by the user. If a user in Toronto wishes to dial a colleague
in New York, they dial the 4-digit private DN (such as 6221). The dialing plan
recognizes this as a private network DN, and routes the call using Tie service with
a private numbering plan.
Incoming Tie calls are routed to sets based on the digits received by the network,
which in this case will be the 4-digit private DN.
If a user in either location wishes to dial an external number, they dial ‘9’, followed
by the number (such as 9-555-1212). The dialing plan recognizes this as a public
DN, and routes the call using Public service.
Incoming DID calls will be routed to sets based on the trailing portion of the digits
received by the network. For example, if a public network user dials an employee
in the Toronto office, the network will deliver digits 4167632221. Enterprise Edge
will route the call using the last four digits, 2221.
PRI Call-by-Call Services Routing Information
Note: Private network routing information is highlighted in gray. Public network
information is shown in white.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Toronto office:
Hardware
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
EE-DTM
PRI
Protocol
NI-2
Line 245
Target line
Received #
2221
Set 2221
L245:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool PRI-A
Route
001
External #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
Service type
Tie
ServiceID
1
DN type
Private
Destination Code
6
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
Route
002
External #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
Service type
Public
To New York:
Routing Service
To Public Network:
Routing Service
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
348 Appendix A: Network Examples
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
ALL
EE-DTM
PRI
Protocol
NI-2
Line 245
Target line
Received #
6221
Set 6221
L245:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool PRI-A
Route
001
External #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
ServiceType
Tie
ServiceID
1
DN type
Private
Destination Code
2
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
Route
002
External #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
Service type
Public
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
ALL
New York office:
Hardware
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
To Toronto:
Routing Service
To Public Network:
Routing Service
Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway and M1 networking
This example shows a private network composed of one central Meridian 1, and two
smaller sites with Enterprise Edge systems connected over IP trunks through a
corporate IP network. This could represent a large head office (with the Meridian
1) connected to several smaller branch offices.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 349
In this network, only the head office has trunks connected to the public network.
The branch offices access the public network using IP trunks to the head office. This
configuration allows for cost savings by consolidating the public access trunks.
Users at all three locations access the public network by dialing ‘9’, followed by the
public number. For example, a user in the west end branch might dial 9-555-1212
(for a local call) or 9-1-613-555-1212 (for a long distance call). These public calls
are routed to the Meridian 1 by the Enterprise Edge routing table. Routing tables at
the Meridian 1 will then select an appropriate public facility for the call.
Private network calls are made by dialing a 4-digit private network DN. For
example, if a user in the west end branch wishes to call a user in the east end branch
within the private network, they dial 6221.
Note: The quality of the IP trunk connection is assessed during initial call setup,
and if the quality is poor, Enterprise Edge will try to find an alternate route to
complete the call based on the fallback programming definitions in the routing
table. For simplicity, this example does not show programming for fallback.
Therefore, in this example, if the quality of the IP connection is low during the call
setup phase, the call will be maintained at that quality. For an example of fallback
programming, see Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway on page 351.
Note: Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway requires a software keycode.
VoIP Gateway and M1 Networking
Network # 2221
Received # 2221
Internal # 2221
Network # 221
Received # 221
Internal # 221
WAN
IP
IP
IP
Enterprise Edge
West end Branch
I.P. Address 192.1.1.2
Enterprise Edge
East end Branch
I.P. Address 192.1.1.3
PRI
(public protocol)
Meridian M1
DN: 4221
I.P. Address 192.1.1.4
Remote Gateway Configuration:
West end:
192.1.1.3
4 192.1.1.4
9 192.1.1.4
Central
Office
East end: 2 192.1.1.2
4 192.1.1.4
9 192.1.1.4
The Call Managers examine the Called Party Number digits and route the call to the
corresponding IP address.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
350 Appendix A: Network Examples
VoIP and M1 Networking Routing information
In the table that follows, private network routing information is highlighted in gray.
Public network routing information is shown in white.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
West End office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
Line 241
Target line
Received #
2221
Set 2221
L241:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool A
Route
001
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Private
Destination Code
4
Normal route
001
Absorb
None
Destination Code
6
Normal route
001
Absorb
None
Route
002
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Public
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
None
Line 241
Target line
Received #
6221
Set 6221
L241:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool A
Route
001
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Private
Destination Code
4
Normal route
001
Absorb
None
To Head office (M1):
Service/Routing Service
To East End:
Service/Routing Service
To Public Network:
Service/Routing Service
East End office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
To Head Office: (M1)
Service/Routing Service
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 351
Heading
Parameter
Setting
To West End:
Service/Routing Service
Destination Code
2
Normal route
001
Absorb
None
Route
002
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Public
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
None
To Public Network:
Service/Routing Service
In this example, outgoing public network calls dialed from an Enterprise Edge set
are passed to the Meridian M1, and the Meridian M1 is responsible for seizing a
public trunk. For this reason, the “9” prefix is left in the number passed to the
Meridian 1.
Note: Ensure that Line Pool A is used for IP trunks.
Guidelines to setting up Meridian M1 in this example
In order for the digit counting algorithm for outgoing IP calls to take into account
this extra digit, the Private Network Access Code must be set to “9” on each
Enterprise Edge system.
The Meridian M1 must recognize incoming 2xxx and 6xxx DID calls, and route the
call over IP trunks to either the East or West end offices.
The Meridian M1 must recognize numbers starting with “9” as public numbers,
whether the numbers are dialed by Meridian M1 users or by Enterprise Edge users.
Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway
This example shows a private network composed of one Enterprise Edge system in
Toronto and one Enterprise Edge system in Ottawa, connected over IP trunks
through a corporate IP network.
In this network, each Enterprise Edge system has a PRI trunk to the Central Office,
and IP trunks to the other Enterprise Edge system. Calls from the Toronto system
to the Ottawa system and the Ottawa public network are made over IP trunks with
fallback to the PRI trunks when IP trunks are congested. This configuration allows
for cost savings by using the corporate IP network whenever possible, thereby
bypassing toll charges that would be incurred by using the public network.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
352 Appendix A: Network Examples
Note: When a call gets rerouted over the PSTN due to congestion, the user may see
a prompt “Expensive route.” The warning indicates that toll charges may be applied
to this call.
Users at both locations access the public network by dialing “9”, followed by the
public number. For example, a user in Toronto might dial 9-555-1212 (for a local
call), or 9-1-613-555-1212 (for a long distance call to Ottawa). Local calls would
be sent directly to the Central Office over PRI trunks. Long distance calls to Ottawa
would be sent over IP trunks; the Ottawa system would tandem these calls to the
local Central Office over PRI trunks.
Private network calls are made by dialing a 4-digit private network DN. For
example, if a user in Toronto wants to call a user in Ottawa within the private
network, they dial 6221.
Note: Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway requires a software keycode.
Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway
Network # 2221
Received # 2221
Internal # 2221
Network # 221
Received # 221
Internal # 221
Corporate
I.P. Network
IP
PRI
(public protocol)
Public
Network
IP
Enterprise Edge
Toronto Branch
I.P. Address 192.1.1.2
Enterprise Edge
Ottawa Branch
I.P. Address 192.1.1.3
Remote Gateway Configuration:
Toronto:
9 192.1.1.3
192.1.1.3
Ottawa:
9 192.1.1.2
2 192.1.1.2
PRI
(public protocol)
Public
Network
The Call Manager at the Toronto office examines the Called Party Number digits
and determines that it should be routed to the IP address corresponding to the
Ottawa office. The Ottawa office receives the call, sees that the leading digit(s)
match its Private Network Access Code, and uses a destination code to route the call
over its public trunks to the PSTN.
This is a simplified example where only calls to the 613 Area Code are routed by
the Ottawa node. In a real world configuration, it would also be desirable to handle
Area Codes that are ‘close’, for example Montreal: 514.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 353
Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway Routing Information
Note: Private network routing information is highlighted in gray.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Toronto office:
Lines/Trunk/Line Data
Terminals & sets/Line Access
Line 241
Target line
Received #
2221
Set 221
L241:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool A
Line pool PRI-A
Route
001
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Private
Route
002
Use
Pool PRI-A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Private
Destination Code
6
Schedule 4
001
Absorb
None
Normal route
002
Absorb
None
Route
003
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Public
Route
004
Use
Pool PRI-A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Public
Destination Code
91613
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Schedule 4
003
Absorb
None
Calls to Ottawa office:
Services/Routing Service
Services/Routing Service
Services/Routing Service
Calls to Ottawa Public Network:
Services/Routing Service
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
354 Appendix A: Network Examples
Heading
Parameter
Setting
To Public Network:
Services/Routing Service
Destination Code
9161A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Destination Code
916A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Destination Code
91A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Destination Code
9A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Line 241
Target line
Received #
6221
Set 6221
L241:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool A
Line pool PRI-A
Route
001
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Private
Route
002
Use
Pool PRI-A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Private
Destination Code
2
Normal route
002
Absorb
None
Schedule 4
001
Absorb
None
Ottawa office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
To Toronto office:
Services/Routing Service
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 355
Heading
Parameter
Setting
To Toronto Public Network:
Services/Routing Service
Services/Routing Service
Route
003
Use
Pool A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Public
Route
004
Use
Pool PRI-A
External #
(leave blank)
DN type
Public
Destination Code
91416
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Schedule 4
003
Absorb
None
Destination Code
9141A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Destination Code
914A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Destination Code
91A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
Destination Code
9A
Normal route
004
Absorb
1
To Public Network:
Services/Routing Service
The implications on the configuration on each node are:
•
each node must have the Private Network Access Code set to the value 9.
•
each node must have destination code(s) that match the Private Network Access
Code plus digits corresponding to calls terminating in the local PSTN. For
example, if the Private Network Access Code is ‘9’, the node in Ottawa would
require a destination code of ‘91613’. Similarly, Toronto would require the
following destination code: 91416.
Note: Ensure that Line Pool A is used for IP trunks.
To allow for fallback to PRI trunks when the IP trunks are congested, you must also
program the following Routing service settings:
•
Set the start and end times for Sched 4 to 1:00 so that IP calls can be made 24
hours a day.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
356 Appendix A: Network Examples
•
Program the Sched 4 Service setting to Auto and enable overflow routing by
changing the Overflow setting to Y (Yes).
•
A control set must be defined for all sets on the system that make calls over IP
trunks. See Control set on page 92 for more information.
You must program Remote Packages so that the IP trunks in Pool A can access the
lines in Pool PRI-A in a toll bypass scenario. In other words, you must give package
01 access to pool PRI-A and you must assign package 01 to all IP trunks. For more
information, see Remote access packages on page 160.
Networking with QSIG (International systems only)
QSIG is an ETSI standard signalling for multi-vendor peer-to-peer communications
between PBXs and/or central offices.
This networking example shows a private network composed of one central PBX,
and two smaller sites with Enterprise Edge systems. This could represent a large
head office connected to several smaller branch offices. In this network, only the
head office has trunks connected to the public network. The branch offices access
the public network via the private connection to the head office.
Private network calls are made by dialing a 4-digit private network DN. For
example, if a user in the west end branch wishes to call a user in the east end branch
within the private network, they dial 6221. In this example, the private DN length
is 4 and the public DN length is 8. The public DN lengths depend on the market
profile which you have downloaded.
QSIG networking on page 357 illustrates this example. Refer to the following for
hardware and routing programming:
•
Hardware programming for the branch offices on page 357
•
Routing information for QSIG network example on page 358
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 357
QSIG networking
Network # 221
Received # 221
Internal # 221
Network # 2221
Received # 2221
Internal # 2221
PRI/BRI QSIG
Enterprise Edge
West-end Branch
PRI/BRI QSIG
PBX
Enterprise Edge
East-end Branch
DN: 4221
PRI (public protocol)
Central
Office
Hardware programming for the branch offices
The following table lists the settings for some of the hardware parameters. Note that
in this example:
•
Private DN length is 4 and the public DN length is 8. The public DN lengths
depend on the market profile which you have downloaded.
•
B channel sequencing for BRI is hard coded as descending. B channel
sequencing for PRI can be programmed. If it is programmed ascending on one
of the branch Enterprise Edge servers, it must be programmed descending at the
opposite end on the PBX.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
West End office:
Hardware programming EE-DTM/EE-BRIM
PRI/BRI
Protocol
QSIG
BchanSeq
Ascend (PRI only)
ClockSrc
Primary
East End office:
Hardware programming EE-DTM/EE-BRIM
P0911588 Issue 01
PRI/BRI
Protocol
QSIG
BchanSeq
Ascend (PRI only)
ClockSrc
Primary
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
358 Appendix A: Network Examples
Routing information for QSIG network example
Note: Private network routing information is highlighted in gray.
.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
West End office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
Line 245
Target line
Received #
2221
Set 2221
L245:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool PRI-A
To Head Office: (call terminates on M1)
Routing Service
Route
001
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
DN type
Private
Destination Code
4
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
To East End: (call terminates at East end)
Routing Service
Destination Code
6
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
To Public Network:
Routing Service
Route
002
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
DN type
Public
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
0
East End office:
Trunk/Line Data
Line Access
Line 245
Target line
Received #
6221
Set 6221
L245:Ring only
Line pool access
Line pool PRI-A
Route
001
To Head Office:
Routing Service
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
DN type
Private
Destination Code
4
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 359
Heading
Parameter
Setting
To West End: (Call terminates at West end)
Routing Service
Destination Code
2
Normal route
001
Absorb
0
To Public Network: (Call terminates at M1)
Routing Service
Route
002
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool PRI-A
DN type
Public
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
0
Private networking with DPNSS (International systems only)
DPNSS supports the Universal Dialling Plan (UDP), an international standard for
sending and receiving private numbers over networks. The UDP requires that a
number include the following:
•
a Home Location Code (HLC) which is assigned to a PBX as part of it’s
destination code and can be any string of digits up to a maximum length of
seven. For each HLC, a routing code must be programmed in the system.
•
a Directory Number (DN) which is assigned to individual extensions as a line
appearance. The DN appears as the last string segment in a dialed number. In
the number 244-1111, “1111” is the DN.
•
a Private Access Code which can be programmed into the system as part of the
destination (dest) code table to prevent conflicts with the internal numbering
system.
A typical Private Number, using a Private Access Code and dialed from another site
on the network, is show below.
Private Access
Code
+ Home Location
Code
+ Directory
Number
= Calling Party Number
6
+ 848
+ 2222
= 6-848-2222
In this networking example, a private network is formed when several systems are
connected through a Meridian M1 and a terminating Enterprise Edge system. Each
site has its own HLC and a range of DNs. DPNSS networking on page 360
illustrates this example. For information on programming routing for this example,
refer to Routing information for DPNSS network example on page 361.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
360 Appendix A: Network Examples
DPNSS networking
Public
Network
DPNSS
Terminating
Enterprise Edge
Site A
DN # 111
LOC # 244
DPNSS
Meridian M1
LOC # 53
DPNSS
Enterprise Edge
Site C DN # 3333
LOC # 49
DPNSS
Enterprise Edge
Site D
DN # 2229
Extension 2222
LOC # 848
Enterprise Edge
Site B
DN # 2222
LOC # 8
Calls are dialed and identified to the system as follows:
•
To reach a set inside the Private Network, at the Enterprise Edge site, the user
dials the DN of choice.
•
To reach a set inside the Private Network, but on another site, the user dials an
HLC + DN.
•
To reach a set outside the Private Network, the user dials an Access Code +
HLC + DN
Each node has its own destination (dest) codes to route the call appropriately.
The following table shows examples of the construction of numbers used when
dialling within the example network. Note that 6 is the Private Access code.
Dialling examples within a DPNSS Private Network
Calling Site
LOC/HLC
Calling Party
Number
Called Site
Dialling String
Called Party
Number
Site A
244
244 1111
Site B
6 668 2222
668 2222
Site B
668
668 2222
Site D
6 848 2222
848 2222
Site D
848
2222
Site D
2229
2229
Site C
496
496 3333
Public DN
9 563 3245
563 3245
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 361
Routing information for DPNSS network example
.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Private Network: (for each branch Enterprise Edge)
Routing Service
Route
001
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool N
DN type
none (private access code 6 is programmed)
Destination Code
6
Normal route
001
Absorb
1
Public Network:
Routing Service
Route
002
Dial out #
No number
Use
Pool N
DN type
public
Destination Code
9
Normal route
002
Absorb
1
For more information on creating a private numbering plan with DPNSS, refer to
•
Guidelines for creating a private numbering plan with DPNSS on page 361
•
Customizing the routing service on page 362
Guidelines for creating a private numbering plan with DPNSS
Use the following guidelines when creating a private numbering plan with DPNSS.
•
When creating HLCs for the nodes in your system, avoid numbering conflicts
between network nodes and internal DNs, Hunt Group DNs.
•
Program a Private Access Code into your dest routing tables to avoid conflicts
with your internal HLC and dest code numbering plan. For example, if a dialout
HLC is 848, but this number already exists in the Norstar system for an
extension, the routing tables should add a Private Access Code to the dest code.
If the code is programmed as “6”, the dest code becomes 6848. 6848 uses a
route to dial out 888 using the DPNSS line pool, allowing the call to be placed.
Note that a Private Access Codes is required only for specific DPNSS features
such as Diversion, Route Optimization, and Redirection.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
362 Appendix A: Network Examples
Customizing the routing service
You can customize the routing service using the following restrictions:
•
Direct Inward Access (DIA) lines allow incoming calls on private circuits to be
directed to telephones without going through the normal call reception. Each
DIA line is assigned to one or more extensions and is given a distinct Private
Received number. When someone on another system on the network dials the
Private Received number on a DPNSS line, the Enterprise Edge system checks
all received digits, compares the digits to an internal table and routes the call to
the appropriate DIA line. All extensions programmed to have access to that DIA
line will then alert for the incoming call.
•
Dialling restrictions can be added to lines in line pools. Filters can restrict the
use of the line to specific area codes.
•
Host system signaling codes can be part of the dial out for a route. Routing can
also be used as an alternate method for a direct-dial number. For example, create
a destination code 0 and program the number of the internal or external
destination as the dial out. Digit absorption should be set to 1. Because overflow
routing directs calls using alternate line pools, a call may be affected by
different line restrictions when it is handled by overflow routing.
Public networking scenarios
The following scenarios illustrate various Enterprise Edge calls you can make with
public networking:
•
Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones on page 363
•
Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to a private network on page 363
•
Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network on page 364
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 363
Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones
Ms. Nelson is a bank customer who has a question for an accountant. She dials the
telephone number 555-4321 that maps onto target line 241. All of the accountants’
telephones ring.
Target line
241
Ms. Nelson
Accountant
(telephone 225)
DID
DTM
DID
Enterprise Edge
Target line
241
Accountant
(telephone 22)
Central Office
Hardware: Enterprise Edge, an EE-DTM with lines programmed as DID.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Trunk/Line Data
Received #
Line 061
4321 (for Line 241)
T1 DID
Rec'd # length
Received # length
4 digits (can be from 2 to 7 digits, but
must match number of digits sent by
central office)
Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to a private network
A manager in Georgia wants to use the tie lines at headquarters to call Washington.
He dials a telephone number 555-5321 that maps onto the DISA DN, enters a Class
of Service (COS) password, then dials a line pool access code to select a tie line to
Washington.
Manager
in Georgia
DID and T1 E&M DTM
DID
T1 E&M linepool to Washington
Central Office
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
364 Appendix A: Network Examples
Hardware: Enterprise Edge, an EE-DTM with one T1 DID line and three T1 E&M
lines.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Incoming trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Line 061
T1 DID
Access codes
DISA DN
5321
Rec'd # length
Rec'd # length
4 digits (can be from 2 to 7 digits,
but must match number of digits sent
by central office)
Line 062
Line type
T1 E&M
Pool F
Line pool F
6 (up to 4 digits)
Outgoing trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Access codes
COS pswds
Define restrictions. Define remote
access pkgs. Assign a restriction
filter to the line. Assign COS
passwords and filters for each Class
of Service.
Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network
Gord is working from home, and needs to make a long-distance business call from
home. To avoid being charged, he dials the telephone number 555-4321 that maps
onto the Auto DN at work. After hearing the dial tone, Gord dials a line pool access
code 1234 to select a line to the public network. He then dials the long-distance
number.
business client
line pool
DID
Enterprise Edge
Central Office
Central Office
Hardware: Enterprise Edge, EE-DTM with several T1 DID lines.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Incoming trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Line 061
T1 DID
Access codes
Auto DN
4321
Rec'd # length
Rec'd # length
4 digits (can be from 2 to 7 digits, but
must match number of digits sent by
central office)
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 365
Heading
Parameter
Lines /Restrictions and
Remote access
Outgoing trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Access codes
Setting
Define restriction filters. Define
remote access packages. Assign a
remote restriction and remote
package to the line.
Line 001
Line type
Loop
Pool A
Line pool A
1234
Lines /Restrictions
Assign a restriction filter to the line.
Private networking scenarios
Note: The ability to perform private networking is only available with Enterprise
Edge software keycodes.
The following scenarios illustrate various Enterprise Edge calls you can make with
private networking:
•
Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones on page 363
•
Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to a private network on page 363
•
Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network on page 364
•
Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones on page 366
•
Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to other nodes in the private network
on page 366
•
Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network on page 367
•
Select T1 E&M trunks to the private network on page 368
•
Using Enterprise Edge Line Redirection on page 368
Refer to the following for information on programming DID:
•
PRI dialing plan example for 2-way DID on page 370
•
PRI DID and 2-way DID on page 370
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
366 Appendix A: Network Examples
Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones
The production supervisor in Houston selects the less expensive company tie line
to call the manager at the Administration office in Dallas. Once the line is selected,
the production supervisor dials the digits that will map onto the target line of the
manager in Dallas.
T1 E&M
PBX in Houston
Target line
243
Manager in
Dallas
Enterprise Edge
Hardware: Enterprise Edge, an EE-DTM with a T1 E&M line.
Heading
Incoming trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Rec'd # length
Parameter
Setting
Received #
Line 061
Answer Mode
4321(for target line 243)
T1 E&M
Auto
Received # length
4 digits (can be from 2 to 7 digits, but
must match number of digits sent by
central office)
Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to other nodes in the private
network
At a branch office, Joan selects a tie line to the main office downtown. After hearing
the dial tone, she dials a line pool access code to select another tie line to a branch
office in the next state.
Joan at
branch office
T1 E&M line pool
to next state
T1 E&M
Enterprise Edge
key system
Hardware: Enterprise Edge, an EE-DTM with four T1 E&M lines
(3 lines in the line pool and 1 incoming line).
Heading
Incoming trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Parameter
Line 061
Answer mode
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
Setting
T1 E&M
Auto
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 367
Heading
Parameter
Under Lines /Restrictions
and Remote access
Outgoing trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Access codes
Setting
Define restriction filters. Define
remote access packages. Assign a
remote restriction and remote
package to the trunk.
Line 062
Line type
T1 E&M
Pool D
Line pool D
71 (can be from 1 to 4 digits)
Lines /Restrictions
Assign a restriction filter to the
trunk.
Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network
In Memphis, Liz needs to call long-distance to a client in New York. She selects a
tie-line to the branch office in New York. After hearing the dial tone, she dials a line
pool access code to select a line to the public network. Then, she dials the client's
number as a local call.
Liz in
Memphis
client in
New ork
T1 E&M
T1 loop start
Enterprise Edge
key system
Central Office
Hardware: Enterprise Edge, an EE-DTM with a T1 E&M line.
Heading
Incoming trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Parameter
Line 091
Answer mode
Under Lines /Restrictions
and Remote access
Outgoing trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Access codes
Lines /Restrictions
P0911588 Issue 01
Setting
T1 E&M
Auto
Define restriction filters and remote
access packages. Assign a remote
restriction and remote package to the
trunk.
Line 061
Line type
Loop
Pool B
Line pool B
73 (can be 1 to 4 digits)
Assign a restriction filter to the line.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
368 Appendix A: Network Examples
Select T1 E&M trunks to the private network
For a confidential call, the Montana sales manager presses the line button for a
private E&M trunk to the Oregon office. This automatically alerts at the line
appearance on the telephone of the Oregon sales manager.
Montana
sales manager
(telephone 372)
Oregon
sales manager
(telephone 41)
T1 E&M
Enterprise Edge
Enterprise Edge
Hardware: (for both systems) Enterprise Edge, an EE-DTM with a T1 E&M line.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Montana:
Outgoing trunk:
Trunk Data
(Line 049)
Line Data
(Line 049)
Line
T1 E&M
Line type
Private to 372
Line
Answer mode
Line type
T1 E&M
Manual
Private to 641
Oregon:
Incoming trunk:
Trunk Data
(Line 057)
Using Enterprise Edge Line Redirection
The branch office is receiving more calls than it can handle, so it redirects one of its
lines to the main office. All calls that come in on target line 241 will be routed out
on line 003 to the main office. Whenever a call is redirected, the target line and
outgoing line will be busy for the duration of the call.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix A: Network Examples 369
The branch office only routes out one call at a time on the redirected line. If the
target line is busy, the next incoming call will go to the prime set and not be
redirected.
target
line
241
branch office
main office
line 3
incoming call
redirected call
Hardware: Enterprise Edge, an EE-DTM with one T1 E&M line or one T1 DID
line.
Tips
Any line appearance on a telephone can be selected as the incoming line to be
redirected. Restriction filter restrictions on the line are checked against the
filter in effect at the time a call is redirected not when redirection is
programmed.
A target line can not be selected as the outgoing line for redirection. The
incoming trunk must have disconnect supervision.
Heading
Incoming trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Parameter
Line 061: T1 Loop
Trunk mode: Super
Answer mode: Auto
OR
Line 065: T1 DID
OR
Line 065: T1 E&M
Answer mode: Auto
Setting
Incoming trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Received #: 4321
(for target line 232)
Rec'd # length
Outgoing trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Capabilities
P0911588 Issue 01
Rec'd # length
Received # length: 4 digits
(can be from 2 to 7 digits, but
must match number of digits
sent by central office)
Line 062: T1 Loop
OR
Line 066: T1 E&M
Allow redirect: Y
Outgoing trunk:
Trunk/Line Data
Capabilities
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
370 Appendix A: Network Examples
PRI dialing plan example for 2-way DID
The following list shows the general steps involved in configuring a dialing plan for
two-way DID using a Public service. In this example the user dials the prefix 8 to
place a call over a PRI line.
1. Choose Resources, Telephony, Hardware and configure the DTI (EE-DTM)
for PRI.
2. Select Public as the protocol.
3. For incoming calls, program target lines to match the DID digit that is being
received on the PRI interface.
4. Set Dial Out to None.
5. Select PRI-A as the line pool.
6. Set ServiceType to Public.
7. Choose Services, Routing Service to enter a Destination Code (8 in this
example).
8. Set Absorb Length to All.
9. Provide access to the PRI Pool for the set that you are dialing out from. This is
programmed in Terminals & Sets.
10. Define received digits for target lines.
11. Define limits for incoming and outgoing public calls, see Programming Call
by Call service selection on page 168.
Note: 2-way DID does not have to be configured for Call-by-call service.
PRI DID and 2-way DID
When configuring PRI DID with 2-way service, the channels programmed as DID
at the CO must be the lowest B-channels on PRI. On your Enterprise Edge system,
the BchanSeq mode must be set to descending. In this configuration, all calls on
PRI must be Public service.
For example, channels 1 to 4 are configured as DID at the CO. The CO uses
ascending mode for B-channel selection, and Enterprise Edge uses descending
mode.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview
This chapter provides the following information:
•
Welcome to ISDN
•
Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI
•
ISDN hardware
•
ISDN standards compatibility
•
Planning your ISDN network
•
ISDN programming
Welcome to ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) technology provides a fast, accurate
and reliable means of sending and receiving voice, data, images, text, and other
information through the telecom network.
ISDN uses existing analog telephone wires and divides it into separate digital
channels which increases bandwidth.
ISDN uses a single transport to carry multiple information types. What once
required separate networks for voice, data, images, or video conferencing is now
combined onto one common high-speed transport.
Nortel endeavours to test all variations of ISDN PRI on Enterprise Edge; however,
due to the number of variations, this is not always possible.
Analog versus ISDN
ISDN offers significantly higher bandwidth and speed than analog transmission
because of its end-to-end digital connectivity on all transmission circuits. Being
digital allows ISDN lines to provide better quality signaling than analog POTS
lines, and ISDN out-of band data channel signaling offers faster call set up and tear
down.
While an analog line carries only a single transmission at a time, an ISDN line can
carry one or more voice, data, fax, and video transmissions simultaneously.
An analog modem operating at 14.4 K takes about 4.5 minutes to transfer a 1MB
data file and a 28.8K modem takes about half that time. Using one channel of an
ISDN line, the transfer time is reduced to only 1 minute and if two ISDN channels
are used, transfer time is just 30 seconds.
When transmitting data, the connect time for an average ISDN call is about 3
seconds per call, compared to about 21 seconds for the average analog modem call.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
372 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
Types of ISDN service
Two types of ISDN services (lines) are available: Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and
Primary Rate Interface (PRI). Each line is made up of separate channels known as
B and D channels which transmit information simultaneously.
•
BRI is known as “2B+D” because it consists of
2 B-channels and 1 D-channel.
•
PRI is known as “23B+D”(in North America) or as “30B+D” (in Europe). In
North America, “23B+D” consists of 23 B-channels and 1 D-channel (T1
carrier). In Europe, “30B+D” consists of 30 B-channels and 1 D-channel (E1
carrier).
B channels
B channels are the bearer channel and are used to carry voice or data information
and have speeds of 64 kbps. Since each ISDN link (BRI or PRI) has more than one
B-channel, a user can perform more than one transmission at the same time using a
single ISDN link.
D channels
The standard signaling protocol is transmitted over a dedicated data channel called
the D-channel. The D-channel carries call setup and feature activation information
to the destination and has speeds of 16 kbps (BRI) and 64 kbps PRI. Data
information consists of control and signal information and for BRI only,
packet-switched data such as credit card verification.
ISDN layers
ISDN layers refer to the standards established to guide the manufacturers of ISDN
equipment and are based on the OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) model. The
layers include both physical connections, such as wiring, and logical connections,
which are programmed in computer software.
When equipment is designed to the ISDN standard for one of the layers, it works
with equipment for the layers above and below it. There are three layers at work in
ISDN for Enterprise Edge. To support ISDN service, all three layers must be
working properly.
•
Layer 1: A physical connection that supports fundamental signaling passed
between the ISDN network (your service provider) and the Enterprise Edge
system.When the LED on a BRI S/T Media Bay Module configured as BRI is
lit, your layer 1 is functioning.
•
Layer 2: A logical connection between the central office or the far end and the
Enterprise Edge system.Enterprise Edge has one or two of these connections for
each BRI link, and one for each PRI link. Without Layer 2, call processing is
not possible and there is no dial tone.
•
Layer 3: Also a logical connection between the ISDN network (your service
provider) and the Enterprise Edge system. For BRI lines, layer 3 is where call
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 373
processing and service profile identifier (SPID) information is exchanged. This
controls which central office services are available to the connection. For
example, a network connection can be programmed to carry data calls.
Note: Throughout this chapter, references are made to Service profile identifiers
(SPIDs). SPIDs are a part of the BRI National ISDN standard. SPIDs are not
used in the ETSI BRI standard or on PRI.
The system of layers is important when you are installing, maintaining, and
troubleshooting an ISDN system. For information about troubleshooting ISDN, see
Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system on page 305.
ISDN Bearer capability
Bearer capability describes the transmission standard used by theBRI or PRI line
so that it can work within a larger ISDN hardware and software network.
The bearer capability for BRI and PRI is voice/speech, 3.1 kHz audio, and data
(unrestricted 64 kbps, restricted 64 kbps, or 56 kbps).
Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI
As part of an ISDN digital network, your system supports enhanced capabilities and
features, including:
•
faster call set up and tear down
•
high quality voice transmission
•
dial-up Internet and local area network (LAN) access
•
video transmission
•
network name display
•
name and number blocking (PRI, BRI and analog)
•
access to public protocols
PRI services and features
•
Call-by-call service selection (NI protocol)
•
coordinated dialing plan (SL1 protocol)
•
Emergency 911 dialing, internal extension number transmission
•
access to Meridian 1 private networking (SL-1 protocol)
BRI services and features
•
data transmission at speeds up to 128 kbps per loop (depending on the
bandwidth supported by your service provider)
•
shared digital lines for voice and data ISDN terminal equipment
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
374 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
Enterprise Edge Basic Rate Interface (BRI) cards also support D-channel packet
service between a network and terminal connection. This allows you to add
applications such as point-of-sale terminals without additional network
connections.
Any analog or digital network connections can be shared by all Enterprise Edge
telephones, peripherals and applications, and ISDN terminal equipment (TE).
Enterprise Edge supports the following ISDN services and features offered by
ISDN service providers:
•
D-channel packet service (BRI only) to support devices such as transaction
terminals. Transaction terminals are used to “swipe” credit or debit cards and
transmit the information to a financial institution in data packets.
•
calling number identification (appears on both Enterprise Edge sets and ISDN
terminal equipment with the capability to show the information)
•
Multi-Line Hunt or DN Hunting which switches a call to another ISDN line if
the line usually used by the Network DN is busy. (BRI only)
•
subaddressing of terminal equipment (TE) on the same BRI loop. However,
terminal equipment which supports sub-addressing is not commonly available
in North America.(BRI only)
Transmission of B-channel packet data using nailed up trunks is not supported by
Enterprise Edge.
Contact your ISDN service provider for more information about these services and
features. For more information about ordering ISDN service in North America, see
Ordering ISDN PRI on page 381 and Ordering ISDN BRI on page 381.
The terminal equipment (TE) connected to the Enterprise Edge system can use
some feature codes supported by the ISDN service provider. See “ISDN services
and features” in the Enterprise Edge Telephone Feature Programming Guide for
more information.
Network name display
This feature allows ISDN to deliver the Name information of the users to those who
are involved in a call that is on a public or private network. For information about
programming this feature, see Network Name Display on page 163.
Your Enterprise Edge system displays the name of an incoming call when it is
available from the service provider. If the Calling Party Name has the status of
“private” it may be displayed as “Private name” if that is how the service provider
has indicated that it should be displayed. If the Calling Party Name is unavailable it
may be displayed as “Unknown name”.
Your system might display the name of the called party on an outgoing call, if it is
provided by your service provider. Your system sends the Business Name
concatenated with the set name on an outgoing call but only after the Business
Name has been programmed.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 375
The available features include:
•
Receiving Connected Name
•
Receiving Calling Name
•
Receiving Redirected Name
•
Sending Connected Name
•
Sending Calling Party Name
For more information, see Network Name Display on page 163. Consult your
customer service representative to determine which of these features is compatible
with your service provider.
Name and number blocking (North America only)
When activated, ƒ°⁄· allows you to block the outgoing name and/or
number on a per-call basis. Name and number blocking can be used with an
Enterprise Edge set. For information about programming this feature, see Outgoing
name and number blocking (ONN) on page 165.
Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this
feature is compatible with your provider.
Call by Call service selection for PRI (NI protocol)
PRI lines can be dynamically allocated to different service types with the Call by
Call feature. PRI lines do not have to be pre-allocated to a given service type.
Outgoing calls are routed through a dedicated PRI Pool and the calls can be routed
based on various schedules.
The service types that may be available, depending on your service provider are
described below.
Public
Public service calls connect your Enterprise Edge set with a Central Office (CO).
DID and DOD calls are supported.
Private
Private service calls connect your Enterprise Edge set with a Virtual Private
Network. DID and DOD calls are supported. A private dialing plan may be used.
Tie
Tie services are private incoming and outgoing services that connect Private Branch
Exchanges (PBX) such as Enterprise Edge.
FX (Foreign Exchange)
FX service calls logically connect your Enterprise Edge set to a remote CO. It
provides the equivalent of local service at the distant exchange.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
376 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
Outwats
Outwats is for outgoing calls. This allows you to originate calls to telephones in a
specific geographical area called a zone or band. Typically a flat monthly fee is
charged for this service.
Inwats
Inwats is a type of long distance service which allows you to receive calls
originating within specified areas without a charge to the caller. A toll-free number
is assigned to allow for reversed billing.
Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this
feature is compatible with your provider.
Emergency 911 dialing
The ISDN PRI feature is capable of transmitting the telephone number and internal
extension number of a calling station dialing 911 to the Public Switched Telephone
Network. State and local requirements for support of Emergency 911 dialing
service by Customer Premises Equipment vary. Consult your local
telecommunications service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws
and regulations. For most installations the following configuration rules should be
followed, unless local regulations require a modification.
•
All PSTN connections must be over PRI
•
In order for all sets to be reached from a Public Safety Answering Position
(PSAP), the system must be configured for DID access to all sets. In order to
reduce confusion, the dial digits for each set should be configured to correspond
to the set’s extension number
•
The OLI digits for each set should be identical to the DID dialed digits for the
set
•
The routing table should route “911” to a PRI line pool
•
If attendant notification is required, the routing table must be set up for all 911
calls to use a dedicated line which has an appearance on the attendant’s console
•
The actual digit string “911” is not hard-coded into the system. More than one
emergency number can be supported
If transmission of internal extension numbers is not required or desired, then it is
recommended that the person in charge of the system maintain a site map or
location directory that allows emergency personnel to rapidly locate an Enterprise
Edge set given its DID number. This list should be kept up to date and readily
available.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 377
2-way DID
With PRI the same lines can be used for receiving direct inward dialing (DID) and
for making direct outward dialing (DOD) calls.
The dialing plan configured by your customer service representative determines
how calls are routed. Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your service provider.
Dialing Plan and PRI
The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and private networks. The
dialing plan is a collection of features responsible for processing and routing
incoming and outgoing calls. All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan.
The Dialing Plan
•
allows incoming calls to be routed to sets based on service type and digits
received
•
provides the ability to map user-dialed digits to a service type on a Call by Call
basis
•
allows long distance carrier selection through user-dialed Carrier Access Codes
Consult your customer service representative to determine how your dialing plan is
configured.
ISDN hardware
To support connections to an ISDN network and ISDN terminal equipment, your
Enterprise Edge must be equipped with a BRI S/T Media Bay Module (EE-BRIM
S/T) or a Digital Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-DTM) card configured for PRI.
PRI hardware
The Digital Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-DTM) is configured for PRI. In most
PRI network configurations, you need one EE-DTM configured as PRI to act as the
primary clock reference. The only time when you may not have an EE-DTM
designated as the PRI primary clock reference is in a network where your Enterprise
Edge system is connected back-to-back with another switch using a PRI link. If the
other switch is loop-timed to your Enterprise Edge system, your EE-DTM (PRI) can
be designated as a timing master.
If your Enterprise Edge has more than one EE-DTM configured as PRI, you must
assign the first EE-DTM as the primary reference, the second EE-DTM as the
secondary reference, and the third EE-DTM as the timing master.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
378 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
BRI hardware
The loops on the EE-BRIM S/T module can be programmed to support either
network or terminal connections. This allows you to customize your arrangement
of lines, voice terminals, data terminals and other ISDN equipment. This section
describes some basic hardware configurations for network and terminal
connections for each loop type.
Detailed wiring information for BRI and PRI network and terminal connections is
included in the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide.
An EE-BRIM S/T provides four loops. Each loop can be individually programmed
as:
•
an S reference point connection (S loop) to ISDN terminal equipment (TE), or
•
a T or S reference point connection (T loop or S loop) to an ISDN network using
an external NT1
S reference point
The S reference point connection provides either a point-to-point or point-tomultipoint digital connection between Enterprise Edge and ISDN terminal
equipment (TE) that uses an S interface.
S loops support up to seven ISDN DNs, which identify TE to the Enterprise Edge
system.
point-to-point
ISDN TE
(with terminating
resistors)
Insp
ect FOR
WAR
D Calle
rs
ISDN TE
MXP
Enterprise
Edge
S
Insp
ect FOR
WAR
D Calle
rs
MXP
S
ISDN TE
(with terminating
resistors)
Insp
ect FOR
WAR
D Calle
rs
MXP
ISDN TE
T reference points
The T reference point connections provide a point-to-point digital connection
between the ISDN network and Enterprise Edge.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 379
A T loop provides lines that can be shared by all Enterprise Edge telephones,
peripherals and applications, and ISDN TE.
network
connection
ISDN
T
Enterprise Edge
A T loop can be used in combination with an S loop to provide D-packet service for
a point-of-sale terminal adapter (POSTA) or other D-packet device. D-packet
service is a 16 kbps data transmission service that uses the D-channel of an ISDN
line.
To deliver D-packet service, a network connection (T loop) is programmed to work
with a terminal connection (S loop). The loops must be on the same physical
module.
Clock Source for ISDN
Systems with ISDN interfaces need to synchronize clocking with the ISDN network
and any ISDN terminal equipment connected to the network. Systems synchronize
clocking to the first functionally available network connection. If there are
excessive errors on the reference network connection, the next available network
connection is used for clock synchronization. The clock synchronization process
generates alarm codes and event messages. Clock synchronization is supported by
the Digital Trunk Media Bay Module, BRI S/T Media Bay Module and the Fiber
Expansion Media Bay Module.
The Enterprise Edge derives timing from the network using T reference points
(loops). Terminal equipment on S reference points (loops) derive timing from the
Enterprise Edge system.
When you configure the network connections to the Enterprise Edge, you should
take into account the system preferences for selecting loops for synchronization:
•
lower numbered loops have preference over higher numbered loops
•
the loop preference order is: 201, 202, 203, 204 etc.
•
the system skips S and analog loops on Mod2 Card 1, when selecting a network
connection for synchronization
Systems with only S loops act as timing masters for the attached terminal equipment
(TE), and are not synchronized to the network. ISDN TE without access to a
network connection (BRI lines) has limited or no functionality.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
380 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
If your system has both an EE-BRIM S/T configured as BRI, and an EE-DTM
configured as PRI, it is recommended that you use PRI as the primary clock source.
See PRI hardware on page 377.
Other ISDN BRI equipment
NT1
The NT1 (network termination type 1) connects an S interface (four-wire) to a U
interface (two-wire). In most cases, it connects loops from an EE-BRIM S/T
module to the network connection, which uses the Uinterface .
The NT1 converts and reformats data so it can be transmitted to and from the S or
T connection. In addition, it manages the maintenance messages travelling between
the network and the NT1, and between the NT1 and the Enterprise Edge system.
The NT1 from Nortel Networks is packaged two ways:
•
a stand alone package which contains one NT1 card (NTBX80XX) and a power
supply (NTBX81XX)
•
a modular package which contains up to 12 NT1 cards (NTBX83XX) and a
power supply (NTBX86AA)
ISDN standards compatibility
In North America, Enterprise Edge ISDN equipment supports National ISDN
standards for basic call and calling line identification services. Enterprise Edge BRI
is compliant with National ISDN-1 and PRI is compliant with National ISDN-2.
Enterprise Edge does not support EKTS (Electronic Key Telephone System) or
CACH (Call Appearance Call Handling).
In Europe, Enterprise Edge supports ETSI Euro and QSIG standards, and
PRI SL-1 protocol.
Planning your ISDN network
Consult the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide to determine a
configuration of ISDN trunks and terminal equipment (TE) for the Enterprise Edge
system, then order the appropriate ISDN capability package from your ISDN
service provider.
For ISDN BRI service your service provider supplies service profile identifiers
(SPIDs), network directory numbers (Network DNs), terminal endpoint identifiers
(TEIs), and other information as required to program your Enterprise Edge, TE and
other ISDN equipment.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 381
Enterprise Edge does not support any package with EKTS (Electronic Key
Telephone System) or CACH (Call Appearance Call Handling). EKTS is a package
of features provided by the service provider and may include features such as Call
Forwarding, Link, Three-Way Calling, and Calling Party Identification.
Ordering ISDN PRI
Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada
In Canada, order Megalink™ service, the trade name for standard PRI service and
set the Enterprise Edge equipment to the supported protocol that is identified by
your service provider, either DMS-100 or NI-2.
Ordering ISDN PRI service in United States
In the United States order PRI service from your service provider. Set the Enterprise
Edge equipment to the PRI protocol indicated by your service provider.
Ordering ISDN PRI service outside of Canada and the United States
Outside of Canada and the United States order Euro ISDN PRI and/or BRI service
from your service provider. Set the Enterprise Edge equipment to the Euro ISDN
protocol.
Ordering ISDN BRI
Ordering service ISDN BRI service in Canada
In Canada, order Microlink™ service, the trade name for standard BRI service. You
can order either regular Microlink™ service, which includes the CLID (Calling
Line Identification) feature, or Centrex Microlink™, which includes access to
additional ISDN network features (including Call Forwarding).
When ordering Microlink™ service, it must be ordered with EKTS (Electronic Key
Telephone System) turned off. If you will be using a point-of-sale terminal adapter
(POSTA), ask for D-packet service to be enabled.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
382 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
Ordering ISDN BRI service in the United States
In the U.S., regardless of the CO (Central Office) type, order National ISDN BRINI-1 with EKTS (Electronic Key Telephone System) turned off. Use the following
packages as a guideline for ordering your National ISDN BRI-NI-1. However, we
recommend using packages M or P with the Enterprise Edge system. Contact your
service provider for more information about the capability packages it offers.
Bellcore/National ISDN Users Forum (NIUF ISDN packages supported by
Enterprise Edge (for ordering in U.S.)
Capability
Feature set
Optional features
Point- Voice Data
of-sale
M
Alternate
voice/circuit-switched data
on both B-channels
--
calling line
identification
--
√
√
P
Alternate
voice/circuit-switched data
on both B-channels
D-channel packet
flexible calling for
voice (not supported
by Enterprise Edge)
Basic D-Channel
Packet
additional call offering √
(not supported by
Enterprise Edge)
calling line
identification
√
√
If you want to transmit both voice and data, and support D-channel packet service,
order package P. However, Enterprise Edge does not support the flexible calling for
voice and additional call offering features that are included in package P.
Multi-Line Hunt may be ordered with your package. When a telephone number (the
Network DN) in the group of numbers assigned by your service providers is busy,
the Multi-Line Hunt feature connects the call to another telephone number in the
group. Enterprise Edge supports the feature only on point-to-point, network
connections (T loop). Check with your service provider for more information about
Multi-Line Hunt.
Any of the ISDN packages will allow you to use sub-addressing, but your ISDN TE
must be equipped to use sub-addressing for the feature to work.
Ordering ISDN BRI service outside of Canada and the United States
Outside of Canada and the United States order Euro ISDN PRI and/or BRI service
from your service provider. Set the Enterprise Edge equipment to the Euro ISDN
protocol.
Supported ISDN protocols
The switch used by your service provider must be running the appropriate protocol
software and the correct version of that software to support ISDN PRI and BRI.
Each protocol is different and supports different services. Contact your service
provider to make sure that your ISDN connection has the protocol you require.
For more information on the supported protocols and services, refer to Call by Call
service selection for PRI on page 166.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 383
ISDN programming
Most of the programming for PRI and BRI lines, and ISDN terminals is done under
the Media Bay Modules heading. This section gives you an overview of
programming for PRI and BRI lines, ISDN terminals and devices, and D-packet
services.
PRI or BRI programming activity
Programming heading
View or change the Digital Trunk Media Bay Module Resources, Media Bay Modules
(EE-DTM)
Configure EE-DTM for PRI
Provision or pre-provision lines
Resources, Media Bay Modules,
Bus 0#, Modules on Bus, Module 1,
Provision lines
Enable or disable BRIM-S/T and EE-DTM
Resources, Media Bay Modules,
Bus 0#, Modules on Bus Module 1
View status of line, loop or port
Resources, Media Bay Modules,
Bus #, Ports on Bus
Program PRI resources
Some steps may not be necessary depending on the service you are using. For more
detailed programming information, see Media Bay Modules on page 69 and
Maintenance on page 259. For complete module installation instructions and safety
precautions, see the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide.
1. Collect the information supplied by your service provider to support your
ISDN package.
2. Install the EE-DTM. (For information, refer to the Enterprise Edge
Installation and Maintenance Guide.)
3. Configure the EE-DTM for PRI. For information on how to configure a
module, see Module on page 72.
4. Configure the lines on the modules. For more information, see Lines on page
108.
Programming ISDN BRI resources
Some steps may not be necessary depending on the service you are providing. For
more detailed programming information, see Media Bay Modules on page 69 and
Maintenance on page 259. For complete module installation instructions and safety
precautions, see the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide.
1. Collect the information supplied by your service provider to support your
ISDN package. This includes network service profile identifiers (SPIDs) and
Network DNs. If you are supporting a point-of-sale terminal adapter, you also
need one or more static terminal endpoint identifiers (TEIs).
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
384 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
2. Install the EE-BRIM S/T module in the Enterprise Edge system. (For
information, refer to the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance).
3. Select the module type (BRI-ST). For information on selecting a module type,
Guides Module on page 72.
4. Select the type (T or S) for each loop. For information on how to select a loop
type, see Loops on page 121.
5. If the module uses a T loop, enter the following configuration information (for
North America only) as supplied by your service provider: the SPID assigned
to the loop, the number of B-channels associated with each SPID, the Network
DNs used with the network SPID, and the call type of the Network DN.
Repeat the programming for the second network SPID, if any.
If the T loop is used for D-packet service: turn on the service, assign the
appropriate S-loop mapping and assign the static TEIs (provided by the telco
to support a point-of-sale terminal adapter or other D-packet service device) to
the loop.
If the loop type is S, select the sampling used on the loop. Assign ISDN DNs
to the loop and designate one of the assigned ISDN DNs to be the DN for the
loop (Loop DN).
Note: You can have a maximum of 28 ISDN DNs on your system. The
default ISDN DN range is 501-528.
6. Provision the loops and lines. For more information, see Provision lines on
page 81.
7. If you are configuring auto-answer BRI trunks to map to target lines, program
the received number for the target line (see Setting Received number on page
117) to be the same as the Network DN supplied by your service provider.
From the Terminals & Sets, Line Access heading, assign the ISDN lines and
target lines to the appropriate ISDN DNs (the set of DNs reserved for use by
ISDN devices). ISDN lines can also be assigned to the DNs used by
Enterprise Edge telephones or any other devices connected to the Enterprise
Edge system.
Program the ISDN terminals and devices with the appropriate ISDN DNs and
terminal SPIDs by following the instructions that come with the devices. For
more information see Program ISDN equipment on page 386. If you are
setting up a D-packet service, program the point-of-sale terminal adapter or
other D-packet service device with the appropriate TEI (provided by your
service provider), terminal SPID, and DN by following the instructions that
come with the device.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 385
Program PRI lines
When the hardware configuration is complete, your PRI lines are ready to be
programmed. For information on programming your PRI lines, see Call by Call
service selection for PRI on page 166.
Program ISDN BRI lines (North America)
When the hardware configuration is complete, your BRI lines are ready to be
programmed in the same way as analog lines. You can, for example, place them in
pools and assign them to Enterprise Edge sets and ISDN terminal equipment.
However, there are some differences in the way BRI lines work that will influence
how you configure them to handle incoming and outgoing calls.
For BRI lines, in most cases, your service provider supplies two SPIDs – one for
each B channel. Each SPID and one or more Network DNs are associated with a
single line. Calls to a Network DN come in on a specific line, and pressing a line
button selects the same line every time.
If your service provider supplies you with a single SPID for both B channels,
incoming and outgoing calls are handled according to the loop. The two lines
provided by the BRI loop are “pooled” for both incoming and outgoing calls.
For example, if Loop 201is programmed with a single SPID, which supports lines
061 and 062, incoming calls made to a Network DN associated with the SPID
appear on either line 061 or line 062. If you press the line button for line 061, either
line 061 or line 062 is selected. For loops which use a single SPID, assign both lines
on a loop to a set to guarantee that all calls appear at the set.
Program Direct Inward System Access (DISA) on PRI lines (North America)
When an EE-DTM is configured for PRI, all lines on that module are set to Auto
Answer without Direct Inward System Access (DISA). DISA can however be
accessed by one of two methods.
Method 1:
Define the DISA DN to match the trailing digits of the Called Party Number
(CDN).
With Public, Private, and Tie service types, the CDN is simply truncated to
the Target Line Receive Digit Length and is parsed to match the Target Line
Receive Digits. DISA can be accessed by having the DISA DN match the
trailing digits of the CDN. For example, with a Receive Digit Length = 4, and
DISA DN = 1234, a call made to Public DN 763-1234 will be handled as
follows:
• the ISDN setup message will contain a CDN of 763-1234
• the CDN will be truncated to the 4 digits, 1234
• 1234 matches the DISA DN
• the call will be answered with DISA
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
386 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
Method 2:
Use incoming Call by Call (CbC) Service routing to map the call type to the
DISA DN. Refer to Call Routing on page 128 for more information.
With FX, INWATS, 900, and SDS service types, either a Service Id (SID) or a
CDN is mapped to Target Line Receive Digits. This is programmed under
Call by Call Service routing on page 130. DISA may be accessed by having
the SID or CDN map to the DISA DN. This example has a Receive Digit
Length = 4,
DISA DN = 1234, and CbC Routing with (Service Type = FX, Map from SID
= 2, Map to digits = 1234).
A call presented to the Enterprise Edge system with service type FX and
SID 2 will be handled as follows:
• The ISDN setup message will specify FX with SID = 2
• The FX SID = 2 will be mapped to DISA DN digits 1234
The call will be answered with DISA.
Program ISDN equipment
PRI modules support various applications that are enabled by PRI. For a list of the
type of applications that are supported, refer to theEnterprise Edge Feature
Programming Telephone Guide.
Terminal equipment for BRI cards
ISDN devices and terminals connected to the Enterprise Edge system must be
configured under Services, Telephony Services, Loops. You choose directory
numbers for ISDN equipment from a pre-determined range of DNs (501-528). Any
of the ISDN DNs can be assigned to an S loop but each can only be assigned to one
loop and a single device.
Devices on an S loop (BRI cards only)
Terminal equipment using an S loop must be assigned an ISDN directory number
(ISDN DN). This allows the TE to be assigned lines and to communicate with other
devices connected to the Enterprise Edge system. Each DN can be assigned to only
one TE and one loop.
You assign ISDN DNs to S loops from the Telephony Services subheading, under
Loops, DNs on Loop, Assign DNs. Each S loop can be programmed with eight
ISDN DNs, but you cannot exceed a total of 28 ISDN DNs for the Enterprise Edge
system.
Loop DN (North America)
Once you have assigned ISDN DNs to a loop, designate one of the DNs as a Loop
DN. The Loop DN acts as a main ISDN DN and completes the configuration of the
loop.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix B: ISDN Overview 387
The ISDN terminal equipment (TE) on the loop is also programmed with its ISDN
DN. See the instructions that come with the ISDN device for information about how
to program it to recognize its assigned DN. Most devices will require both a
terminal service profile identifier (terminal SPID) and a DN, and some will require
two terminal SPIDs and two ISDN DNs. The SPID used with the device should not
be confused with a SPID used for network connections using a T loop.
To create a terminal SPID for a device, add at least two zeros to the end of the of
the ISDN DN. Add more zeros to the beginning or end of the ISDN DN until you
have the length of SPID required by the TE. For example, if an ISDN telephone
requires a six-digit SPID and has a DN of 667, its SPID is 066700. If the same TE
requires a minimum of ten digits, the SPID is 0000066700.
Most ISDN terminals require a five-digit SPID. An ISDN PC card usually requires
a ten-digit SPID. Follow the directions that come with the ISDN device to program
it with a SPID and ISDN DN.
D-packet service (BRI only)
The D-packet service supplied by the Enterprise Edge system supports a point-ofsale terminal adapter (POSTA). Connecting a POSTA allows transaction terminals
(devices where you “swipe” credit or debit cards) to transmit information using the
D channel of the BRI line, while the B channels of the BRI line remain available for
voice and data calls. A special adapter links transaction equipment (such as cash
registers, credit card verification rigs, and point-of-sale terminals) to the X.25
network, a data communications network designed to transmit information in the
form of small data packets.
To support the D-packet service, your ISDN network and financial institution must
be equipped with a D-packet handler. To convert the protocol used by the
transaction equipment to the X.25 protocol, your ISDN network must also be
equipped with an integrated X.25 PAD which works with the following versions of
X.25: Datapac 32011, CCITT, T3POS, ITT and API. The ISDN service package
you order must include D-packet service (for example, Package P in the United
States; Microlink™ with D-channel in Canada).
Your service provider supplies a Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) and DN to
support D-packet service. The TEI is a number between 00 and 63 (in Canada, the
default range is 21-63). Your service provider may also supply you with a DN to
program your D-packet device. The DN for D-packet service becomes part of the
dialing string used by the D-packet to call the packet handler.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
388 Appendix B: ISDN Overview
POSTA for ISDN BRI
When you configure D-channel packet service, you are specifying the transmission
path between an ISDN loop on the network side of the Enterprise Edge system and
the ISDN loop on the set side (the loop used by the point-of-sale terminal adapter).
The service is turned on and configured from the Services, Telephony Services,
Loops subheading (S or T loop for EE-BRIM S/T modules).
To set up D-packet service:
1. Go to the programming settings for the network loop (T, or NT loop) under
Services, Telephony Services, Loops
2. Select the loop type used by POSTA: S loop or LT loop.
3. Enter the terminal endpoint identifiers (TEIs) supplied by your service
provider.
4. Select “D-packet enabled” to Y.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix C: Setting Up Remote Routers
This appendix includes information on setting up Nortel Networks routers and how
to set up a range of UDP as a high priority.
This appendix includes:
•
Creating an Outbound Traffic Filter
•
Sample Criteria, Ranges, and Actions for UDP Filtering
Creating an Outbound Traffic Filter
To create an outbound traffic filter:
1. In the Configuration Manager window, click Circuits and then click Edit
Circuits.
The Circuit List window appears.
2. Select a circuit.
3. Click the Edit button.
The Circuit Definition screen appears with the circuit you selected
highlighted.
4. Click Protocols, click Edit Protocol Priority, and then click
Priority/Outbound Filters.
The Priority/Outbound Filters window appears.
5. Click Template.
The Filter Template Management window appears.
6. Click Create.
The Create Priority/Outbound Template window appears.
7. Type a descriptive name in the Filter Name field.
8. Click Criteria, click Add, click Datalink, click IP, and then click Criterion.
The Add Range window appears. If you choose the User-Defined criterion,
the Add User-Defined Field window appears first.
9. Type a minimum and maximum value to specify the range, and then click the
OK button.
The Add Range window closes. The new criterion and ranges now appear in
the Filter Information field of the Create Priority/Outbound Template window.
10. Click Action, click Add and then click action.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
390 Appendix C: Setting Up Remote Routers
11. Click the OK button.
The Filter Template Management window opens. The new template appears
in the templates list.
12. Click Done.
The Priority/Outbound Filters window opens.
13. Click Create.
The Create Filter window opens.
14. Select a circuit in the Interfaces field.
15. Select a template in the Templates field.
16. Type a descriptive name in the Filter Name field.
17. Click OK.
The Priority/Outbound Filters window opens.
18. Click Apply.
The filter is applied to the circuit.
Sample Criteria, Ranges, and Actions for UDP Filtering
The filtering goal is to place all VoIP H.323 traffic leaving a particular interface in
the high priority queue. From the BayRS Site Manager:
Use a criteria path of Criteria, Add, IP, IP, UDP Destination Port
The range is 2065 to 2067.
The action path is: Action, IP, Add, High Queue.
Note: This example shows how to give H.323 traffic priority over other protocols
on the interface.
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix D: Market profile attributes 391
Appendix D: Market profile attributes
Market profiles are selected by the user at system startup. Each market profile is
designed using a set of system defaults that provide specific functionality for the
region in which the system is deployed. Enterprise Edge offers a choice of the
following market profiles:
•
Global
•
United Kingdom
•
Sweden
•
Holland
•
CALA (Central American Latin American)
•
Caribbean
•
North American
•
Denmark
For more information on selecting Market Profiles, refer to Enterprise Edge
Installation and Maintenance Guide.
For information on the functionality associated with each market profile, refer to:
•
Languages available to customer on page 391
•
System defaults on page 392
Languages available to customer
The following table lists the languages available for each market profile and a list
of some countries that will be using each profile.
Market profile
Language
Sample of countries using this profile
Global
English, French, Spanish, Turkish
Turkey, India, Saudi Arabia
United Kingdom
British, VIOC
England, Ireland
Sweden
English, Swedish
Sweden
Holland
English, Dutch
Holland
CALA
English, French, Spanish
Caribbean
Caribbean
English, French, Spanish
Caribbean
North American
English, French, Spanish
Canada, United States, Caribbean
Denmark
English, Danish
Denmark
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
392 Appendix D: Market profile attributes
System defaults
The following table compares the system defaults for the North American and
Global market profiles. In addition, the following functionality applies:
•
Market profiles for Denmark, Holland and Sweden are the same as the Global
market profile except for the default to local languages and local tones and
cadences.
•
Market profile for Caribbean is the same as the North American profile except
for its support for the M7000 phone.
•
Market profile for CALA is the same as the Caribbean profile except NI ISDN
replaced by ETSI ISDN (u-law).
Functionality
Attribute
North American
Global profile
United Kingdom
0
0
0
Tone duration
120 msec
120 msec
120 msec
Pause time
1.5
1.5
3.5
Interdigit time
80 msec
80 msec
100 msec
Conference tone
disabled
disabled
enabled
Call Back Kill time
180 sec
180 sec
360 sec
PCM Companding Law
mu-law
a-law EBI
a-law EBI
Race Integration
disabled
disabled
disabled
OLI digits
fixed 10 digits
fixed 10 digits
variable length up to 8
Dial Tone Detection
enabled
enabled
enabled
Show in second
disabled
disabled
disabled
Default delay
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
Queue timeout
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
If busy
busy tone
busy tone
busy tone
Mode
broadcast
broadcast
sequential
Target line if busy setting
prime
prime
busy tone
M7000 set
disabled
enabled
enabled
Fax switch
enabled
enabled
enabled
Night
start 23:00
end 07:00
start 23:00
end 07:00
start 23:00
end 07:00
Evening
start 17:00
end 23:00
start 17:00
end 23:00
start 17:00
end 23:00
Lunch
start 12:00
end 13:00
start 12:00
end 13:00
start 12:00
end 13:00
Service 4
start 00:00
end 00:00
start 00:00
end 00:00
start 00:00
end 00:00
Service 5
start 00:00
end 00:00
start 00:00
end 00:00
start 00:00
end 00:00
Service 6
start 00:00
end 00:00
start 00:00
end 00:00
start 00:00
end 00:00
Direct Dial Access code
DTMF parameters
Hunt Groups
Service Schedule time
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Appendix D: Market profile attributes 393
Functionality
Attribute
North American
Global profile
United Kingdom
Call Forward Delay
Show in second
disabled
disabled
disabled
Default
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
2 ring cycles
Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Show in second
disabled
disabled
disabled
Default
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DRT Delay
2 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
ring cycles
10 ring cycles
1 ring cycles
2 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
ring cycles
10 ring cycles
2 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
ring cycles
10 ring cycles
1 ring cycles
2 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
ring cycles
10 ring cycles
2 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
ring cycles
10 ring cycles
1 ring cycles
2 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
ring cycles
Handsfree
none
none
none
Pickup Group
none
none
none
Remind Delay
60 secs
60 secs
60 secs
Allow SLR
disabled
disabled
disabled
Show in second
disabled
disabled
disabled
Default
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transfer Callback
Dialling Plan
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
5 ring cycles
ring cycles
12 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
5 ring cycles
ring cycles
12 ring cycles
3 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
5 ring cycles
ring cycles
12 ring cycles
market dependent
(defined in
application but
controlled by
market profile ID)
market dependent
(defined in
application but
controlled by
market profile ID)
market dependent
(defined in
application but
controlled by market
profile ID)
VSC for analog
tone
n/a
n/a
141
VSC for analog
pulse
n/a
n/a
141
VSC for BRI
n/a
n/a
141
VSC for PRI
n/a
n/a
141
State for BRI/PRI
n/a
n/a
send feature code
Default CO lines
2
2
4
UTAM
enabled
disabled
disabled
0
defined in the
application (max)
n/a
ONN Blocking
Portable credits
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
394 Appendix D: Market profile attributes
Functionality
Attribute
North American
Global profile
United Kingdom
Release reason
Release text
none
none
detail
Release code
disabled
disabled
disabled
Display duration
3 sec
3 sec
3 sec
Overlap Receiving
disabled
enabled
disabled
Local Number length for
ISDN overlap receiving
8
8
8
Tandem alerting
disabled
disabled
disabled
TON/NPI
national/E.164
national/E.164
unknown/unknown
National number length
10
10
0
national number prepend
n/a
n/a
0
Provide tone on PRI
enabled
n/a
disabled
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary
A
AbsorbLength
A setting that determines how many of the digits in a destination code will not be
dialed by the system. AbsorbLength is assigned under Destination codes in
Services.
access code
Different sequences of characters used to gain access to the features: Line pools,
Call park, external lines, Direct-Dial telephone and Auto DN.
address
A unique identifier assigned to networks and stations that allows each device to
receive and reply to messages.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an IP address to
a physical machine address that is recognized in the local network. For example, in
IP Version 4, an address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet local area network, however,
addresses for attached devices are 48 bits long. The physical machine address is also
known as a Media Access Control or MAC address. A table, usually called the ARP
cache, is used to maintain a correlation between each MAC address and its
corresponding IP address. ARP provides the protocol rules for making this
correlation and providing address conversion in both directions.
alarm code
A number that is displayed, informing you that a fault has been detected in the
system.
Analog Terminal Adapter
A device that permits the connection of analog telecommunication devices such as
fax machines, answering machines, and single line telephones to the Enterprise
Edge system.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
396 Glossary
Answer button
A telephone button with an indicator that is used to monitor another telephone. The
answer button indicates incoming calls destined for the other telephone. Someone
working at a telephone with answer buttons (an attendant, for example) can receive
all ringing and visual indication of incoming calls for other telephones, and answer
those calls when necessary.
One telephone can have up to four Answer buttons. An Answer button is
automatically assigned to a telephone when that telephone is assigned an
Answer DN.
Answer DN
The internal or directory number (DN) of a telephone that is monitored by an
Answer button. You can assign up to four Answer DNs to a telephone under Line
Access in Terminals and Sets programming.
Application Program Interface (API)
An API is the specific method prescribed by an operating system or by another
application program when a programmer writes an application program. The API is
used to make requests of the operating system or another application.
Unlike the graphical user interface or command interface, which are direct user
interfaces, the API is an interface to an operating system or a program.
Application
A computer program that performs a wide range of tasks as specified by the user.
Examples of application programs include word processing packages, spreadsheet
packages and accounting packages.
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol.
asynchronous
A method of transmission where the time intervals between characters are not
required to be equal and signals are sourced from independent clocks with different
frequencies and phase relationships. Start and stop bits may be added to coordinate
character transfer.
Autobumping
A feature that determines what the system does with new Call Log items when your
Call Log is full. When Autobumping is on, a new log entry causes the oldest entry
to be deleted. If Autobumping is off, your system does not log calls when your log
is full.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 397
autodial button
A memory button that, if programmed, provides one-touch dialing of external or
internal numbers.
autolog options
A feature that allows you to select the type of calls that are stored in your Call Log.
You can choose to log calls that were not answered by anyone within the system, to
log calls that were unanswered at this telephone but answered elsewhere in the
system, to log all calls answered and not answered at this telephone, or to not have
calls automatically logged.
Automatic Daylight Savings Time
A feature that switches the system to standard or daylight savings time at
pre-programmed times. It is turned on or off under Daylight time in System
programming.
Automatic Dial
A feature that allows you to dial without having to pick up the receiver or select a
line. You must have a prime line to use Automatic Dial. Automatic Dial is assigned
under Dialing options in Terminals and Sets programming.
Automatic Handsfree
A feature which automatically activates Handsfree operation when you make or
answer a call. Automatic Handsfree is assigned under Handsfree in Terminals and
Sets programming.
Automatic Hold
A feature that automatically places an active call on hold when you select another
line. Automatic Hold (Full AutoHold) is assigned in Lines programming.
Automatic Privacy
See Privacy.
Automatic Telephone Relocation
A feature that lets a telephone retain its personal and system programming when it
is plugged into a different modular jack. Automatic Telephone Relocation is
enabled under Set relocation in System programming.
auxiliary ringer
A separate external telephone ringer or bell which can be programmed to ring when
a line or a telephone rings. An auxiliary ringer may be programmed to ring only
when the system is in a particular schedule. Programming of an auxiliary ringer is
done in Services programming after the feature has been enabled under Capabilities
in Terminals and Sets programming.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
398 Glossary
AWG
American wire gauge.
B
B channel (Bearer channel)
An ISDN standard transmission channel used for voice or data transmission.
Background Music
A feature that lets you hear music from the speaker of your telephone. It is available
only if a music source has been attached to the system and the feature has been
enabled under Feature settings in System programming.
Back up
To make a duplicate copy of data files so that you can store the originals in a safe
place. Backing up your original files protects them from damage if a hardware
failure occurs.
Base Station
A Companion component that is mounted on walls and ceilings to provide a radio
link to an office or other area where Companion portable telephones are used. Each
Base Station houses two radios that allow portables to send and receive calls
through the Enterprise Edge Server.
Basic Rate Interace (BRI)
An ISDN interface which uses two B channels and a D channel (2B+D). ETSI BRI
is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI
ISDN service
Baud rate
A unit of measurement of data transmission speed. It is approximately equivalent to
Bits Per Second (BPS). Typical baud rates are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600.
Bearer channel
See B channel.
BERT
See bit error rate test.
BIOS (Basic Input Output System)
A program contained in Read Only Memory (ROM) that acts as the interface
between software programs and the computer hardware.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 399
Bit
An abbreviation for Binary Digit. A bit is the smallest unit of information
recognized by the computer. A bit has one of two values (0 or 1) to indicate off or
on.
bit error rate test
A test that checks the transmission of data across the voice and data channels
between the system and any telephone.
BPS (bits per second)
The speed of data transmission between two computers.
Bus
A collection of communication lines that carry electronic signals either between
elements on the system board or between the circuitry on the system board and any
cards plugged into the system board.
busy lamp field (BLF)
A device with a liquid crystal display (LCD) panel of indicators that shows the
status of up to 24 telephones in the system.
Byte
The amount of space required to store a single character. One byte equals eight bits.
C
Call Duration timer
A feature that lets you see how long you spent on your last call or how long you
have been on your present call.
Call Forward
A feature that forwards all the calls arriving at your telephone to another telephone
in your system. To have calls forwarded outside the system, use Line Redirection.
Call Forward No Answer
A feature that forwards all calls arriving at your telephone to another designated
telephone in your system after a specific number of rings. Call Forward No Answer
is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming.
Call Forward On Busy
A feature that forwards all calls at your telephone to another designated telephone
if your telephone is busy. This feature is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals
and Sets programming.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
400 Glossary
Call Forward Override
An automatic system feature that lets you call someone and ask them to stop
forwarding their calls to you.
Call Information
Call Information allows you to display information about incoming calls. For
external calls, you can display the caller's name, telephone number and the line
name. For an internal call, you can display the name of the caller and their internal
number. You can obtain information about ringing, answered, or held calls.
Call Log
Enter your Call Log to view a record of incoming calls. The log could contain the
following information for each call: sequence number in the Call Log, name and
number of caller, long distance indication, indication if the call was answered, time
and date of the call, number of repeated calls from the same source, and name of the
line that the call came in on. See Autobumping, Autolog options, and Call Log for
further information.
Call Park
With this feature you can place a call on hold so that someone can retrieve it from
any other telephone in the system by selecting an internal line and entering a
retrieval code.
The retrieval code appears on the display of your telephone when you park the call.
You can park up to twenty-five calls on the system at one time.
Call Park Callback
See Callback.
Call Park prefix
The first digit of the retrieval code of a parked call. This digit cannot conflict with
the first digit of any existing DNs, Line Pool access codes, the Direct-dial digit, or
the external line access code. The default Call Park prefix digit is “1”. It may be set
to none, in which case Call Park is disabled. Call Park prefix is assigned under
Access codes in System programming.
Call Pickup Directed
A feature that lets you answer a call ringing at any telephone by entering the internal
number of that telephone before taking the call. Call Pickup Directed is enabled
under Feature settings in System programming.
Call Pickup Group
See Pickup Group.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 401
Call Queuing
If you have several calls waiting at your telephone, you can invoke the Call Queuing
feature to answer them in order of priority. Priority is given to incoming calls,
followed by callback and camped calls.
Callback
If you park, camp, or transfer a call to another telephone and it is not answered
there, it will ring again at your telephone. How long the system will wait before
Callback occurs is set under Feature settings in System programming.
Camp-on
A feature that lets you reroute a call to a telephone even if all the lines on that
telephone are busy. To answer a camped call, use Call Queuing or select a line if
the camped call appears on your telephone. Priority is given to queued calls over
camped calls.
Camp timeout
The length of a delay before a camped call is returned to the telephone that camped
the call. The length of delay is set under Feature settings in System programming.
Central answering position (CAP)
An M7324 telephone that has been designated as a CAP under CAP assignment in
System programming. The CAP provides backup answering and can be used to
monitor the telephones within a system.
Central answering position (CAP) module
A module connected to an M7324 telephone and provides 48 additional buttons that
can be used as autodial buttons or feature buttons. A maximum of two CAP
modules can be connected to a single M7324 telephone.
Channel Service Unit (CSU)
A device on the Digital Trunk Interface that is the termination point of the T1 lines
from the T1 provider. The CSU collects statistics on the quality of the T1 signal.
The CSU ensures network compliance with FCC rules and protects the network
from harmful signals or voltages.
Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP)
CHAP is a method of establishing security on PPP links where the peers must share
a plain text identifier. The caller sends a challenge message to its receiving peer and
the receiver responds with a value it calculates based on the identifier. The first peer
then matches the response with its own calculation. If the values match, the link is
established.
CHAP is a more secure procedure for connecting to a system than the Password
Authentication Procedure (PAP).
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
402 Glossary
Class of Service (COS)
The set of features and lines available to the user for a call. The Class of Service for
a call is determined by the restriction filters and remote access packages assigned
to the telephone in Lines programming. The Class of Service for a call can be
changed by entering a six-digit Class of Service password. (Internal users cannot
change their access to features with a COS password, only their restriction filters.)
Class of Service and Class of Service passwords are assigned in Passwords
programming. See Remote Access.
Class of Service password
A six digit code that lets you switch from your current Class of Service to one that
lets you dial numbers prohibited by your current Class of Service.
client
A client is a computer system or process that requests a service of another computer
system or process. A workstation requesting the contents of a file from a file server
is a client of the file server.
cold start
A cold start occurs when all system programming is lost. This can happen after a
major event such as an extended power failure.
Companion portable telephone
Hand-held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of
Companion Base Stations or an external antenna. Portables offer many but not all
standard system features and share much of the same programming as “wired” desk
telephones.
Companion Wireless
The name for the communication systems which use radio technology to transmit
and receive signals between its components and the Enterprise Edge Server.
Companion Wireless provides mobility in the workplace. Calls that used to ring just
at your telephone set can also appear and ring at your portable.
Conference
A feature that allows you to establish a three-person call at your telephone.
Conventions
The way certain information is described. For example, using underlined text to
represent second-line display prompt information.
COS
See Class of Service.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 403
D
D channel (Data channel)
An ISDN standard transmission channel which is packet-switched, and is used for
call setup, signalling and data transmission.
Data channel
See D channel.
Data link connection indentifier (DLCI)
The DLCI is used to identify a PVC in frame relay networks.
Defaults
The settings for all features when the system is first installed. Settings are changed
from their defaults in programming.
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT) to prime
After a specified number of rings, this feature transfers an unanswered call on an
external line to the prime telephone associated with that line. This feature is
activated under Feature settings in System programming.
destination code
A two- to seven-digit number that the system interprets and then translates into the
digits that you want dialed out. Both the code and its associated dialed digits are
assigned under Routing service in Services programming.
DHCP
See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
dialing restriction
See Restriction filter.
dial-up connection
A dial-up connection is a temporary connection between computers that is
established over an analog or digital phone line.
Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
DiffServ is an implementation methodology for QoS service for IP networks.
DiffServ is a rule based methodology intended to improve network performance.
Instead of applying faster, more advanced technology, networks are managed by
appropriate network policies. With DiffServ there is a cost associated with higher
quality services and a risk with lower quality services.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
404 Glossary
Digital Access Signaling System Number 2 (DASS2)
A UK proprietary standard for signalling on ISDN connections between customers’
premises and the public network. DASS2 is used between the customer’s
equipment and ISDN local exchange and is suitable for multiple access.
Digital Private Network Signalling System (DPNSS)
DPNSS is a networking protocol that gives operators access to Enterprise Edge
features over multiple combined networks in International systems only. Corporate
offices, separated geographically, can be linked over DPNSS to other Enterprise
Edge systems, bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be
connected. This allows connected Enterprise Edge systems to function like a private
network.
Direct-dial
A feature that lets you dial a designated telephone in your system with a single digit.
As many as five direct dial sets can be established. Each telephone in the system is
assigned to one direct-dial telephone. There is a single, system wide digit for calling
the assigned direct-dial telephone of any telephone. Direct-dial telephones are
established in System programming. Telephones are assigned to a direct-dial
telephone under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming.
Direct-dial #
A digit used system-wide to call the Direct-dial telephone. The digit is assigned
under Access codes in System programming.
Direct-dial number
The digit used to call the direct-dial telephone.
directed pickup
See Call Pickup Directed.
Directory number (DN)
A unique number that is automatically assigned to each telephone or data terminal.
The DN, also referred to as an internal number, is often used to identify a telephone
when settings are assigned during programming.
Disconnect Supervision
A setting that enables the system to detect whether an external caller hangs up. Once
an external caller hangs up, the system can disconnect its line. Disconnect
Supervision is enabled under Trunk/Line data in Lines programming.
Disk drive
A mass storage device that seeks, reads and writes data on a disk.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 405
Display
A one-line or two-line screen on an Enterprise Edge telephone that shows
commands and options.
Display buttons
The three buttons that appear underneath an Enterprise Edge two-line LCD display.
Display options
The choices available to a user that appear on the Enterprise Edge two-line display.
Options appearing on the display can be selected using the display or dialpad
buttons.
DLCI
See Data link connection indentifier.
DN
See Directory number (DN).
DNS
See Domain Name Server (DNS).
DNS proxy
A Domain Name Service (DNS) proxy translates alphabetic domain names into
computer-readable IP addresses. For example, the domain name
www.nortelnetworks.com for the Nortel Networks web site can translate to the
IP address 192.177.5.18. After a domain name is translated into an IP address, the
workstations on your network can communicate with the web site. Depending on
the configuration of your system, you can let your workstations know that
Enterprise Edge is the DNS proxy.
domain name
The domain name is used to organize Internet names into manageable groups, such
as nortelnetworks.com, where nortelnetworks is the domain name.
Domain Name Server (DNS)
The domain name system or domain name server is the system in the Internet that
maps names of objects, most usually host names, into IP numbers or other resource
record values. The namespace of the Internet is divided into domains, and the
responsibility for managing names within each domain is delegated, typically to
systems within each domain.
Do Not Disturb
A feature that stops calls from ringing at your telephone. Only Priority Calls will
ring at your telephone. A line button will flash when you receive a call, but the call
will not ring.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
406 Glossary
Driver (Device)
A program that allows a hardware peripheral, such as a NIC, to communicate with
the Enterprise Edge Server.
DTMF
See Dual tone multifrequency.
dual tone multifrequency
Two distinct telephone signaling tones used for dialing.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
DHCP is a protocol that lets network administrators centrally manage and automate
the assignment of IP addresses in an organization's network. Using the Internet's set
of protocols (TCP/IP), each machine that can connect to the Internet needs a unique
IP address. When an organization sets up its computer users with a connection to
the Internet, an IP address must be assigned to each machine.
Without DHCP, the IP address must be entered manually at each computer and, if
computers move to another location in another part of the network, a new IP address
must be entered. DHCP lets a network administrator supervise and distribute IP
addresses from a central point and automatically sends a new IP address when a
computer is plugged into a different place in the network.
dynamic IP address
A dynamic IP address changes. Dynamic IP addresses are assigned to computers by
an IP address server as the computer needs it. Usually there is a particular range, or
scope, of IP addresses that your network uses. With dynamic IP addressing, a
computer can have a different IP address every time it connects to the network.
Other devices must know the computer’s IP address so that they can communicate
with it. The IP address server manages the assignment of IP addresses to the client
workstations. See also static IP address.
E
Emergency 911 dialing
The capability to access a public emergency response system by dialing the digits
9-1-1. State and local requirements for support of Emergency 911 Dialing service
by Customer Premises Equipment vary. Consult your local telecommunications
service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations.
emergency telephone
A single-line telephone (also referred to as a 500/2500 telephone) that becomes
active when there is no power to the Enterprise Edge Server.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 407
Ethernet
A widely used Local Area Network (LAN) protocol that is the original Carrier
Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD) LAN that lets PCs and/or
Enterprise Edge Servers listen for pauses before they communicate. Ethernet LANs
use coaxial cable or twisted pair wiring for connecting computers.
evening schedule
See Schedules and Services.
event message
Event messages are stored in the system log and displayed during a Maintenance
session. They record a variety of events and activities in the system.
exceptions
See Overrides.
Extended Data-Out (EDO)
A form of Dynamic Random Access Memory (RAM) in which storing data to and
reading data from the memory is performed at a faster rate.
external call
A call to a destination outside the system.
external code
The number you dial to get an external line. By default it is 9, but this can be
changed under Access codes in System programming. You do not always need an
external code. It is primarily to support the M7100 telephone and single line
telephones using an Analog Terminal Adapter.
external line
A line on your telephone used for making calls to destinations outside the system.
external music source
See Music source.
external paging
A feature you can use to make voice announcements over an externally-mounted
loudspeaker connected to the Enterprise Edge Server. The external speaker is not
an Enterprise Edge component and must be supplied by the customer.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
408 Glossary
F
FAX
FAX works with Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging, offering a caller the capability
of sending a fax document to a mailbox as easily as sending a voice message.
Feature Code
A unique code used to access Enterprise Edge features and options.
File
A collection of related information stored on a disk under a given name for later
reference and used by an operating system or application program. Each application
program that you use saves the data you create in files. Files are identified by a file
name and optional extension.
File name
A name that identifies a file and consists of one to eight characters.
filtering
Filtering is the process of examining a data packet on the network to determine the
destination of the data and whether the packet should be passed along on the local
LAN, copied to another LAN, or dropped.
Forward
See Call Forward.
frame
A frame is a unit of data transmission in a local area network.
frame relay
A frame relay is a high-speed, packet switching WAN protocol designed to provide
efficient, high-speed frame or packet transmission with minimum delay. Frame
relay uses minimal error detection and relies on higher level protocols for error
control.
FTP
The file transfer protocol (FTP) allows a user on one host to access and transfer files
to and from another host over a network. On the Internet, FTP refers to a tool for
accessing linked files.
Full Autohold (on idle line)
When this feature is on, if you select an available line, and then do something that
selects another line, the first line is put on hold. Full Autohold is enabled under
Trunk/Line data in Lines programming.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 409
Full Handsfree
See Handsfree.
Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)
The combination of host name and domain name. For example
mycomputer.nortelnetworks.com is Fully Qualified Domain Name.
G
gateway
A system that links two different types of networks and enables them to
communicate with each other. Enterprise Edge is the gateway that links your
company’s network to the Intranet or Internet. Depending on your configuration,
you can let your workstations know that Enterprise Edge is your Internet gateway.
Ground Start trunk
Ground start trunks offer the same features as loop start trunks, but are used when
the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for the digital
loop start trunks. By configuring lines as ground start, the system will be able to
recognize when a call is released at the far end. Ground start trunks are provided
only by a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI).
Group Listening
A feature that allows you to have others in your office hear a caller through your
telephone speaker. The caller hears you only when you speak into the receiver and
cannot hear other people in the office.
You can cancel Group Listen for the current call. Group Listen is cancelled
automatically when you hang up the Group Listen call.
H
H.323
H.323 is the standard for using IP to send voice and video within intranets and on
the public Internet.
Handsfree
A feature you can use to make calls without using the telephone receiver. Full
Handsfree is activated under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming.
When it is activated, a Handsfree/Mute button is automatically assigned to the
telephone.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
410 Glossary
Handsfree (HF) Answerback
When activated, this feature automatically turns on the microphone at a telephone
receiving a Voice Call so that the person receiving the call can respond without
lifting the receiver. It is activated under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets
programming.
Handsfree/Mute button
See Handsfree.
Hard disk drive
A data storage device that uses non-removable, rigid magnetic platters. Hard disk
drives work faster and store more data than disk drives do for diskettes.
Hardware
The physical components of the Enterprise Edge system.
HDLC
See High-level Data Link Control.
Headset
A head-mounted or ear-mounted telephone receiver that is used instead of the
hand-held receiver. Headsets are not Enterprise Edge system components and must
be supplied by the customer.
Held (Line) Reminder
A telephone rings and displays the message On hold: LINENAM when an external
call has been placed on hold for a certain period of time. The Held Line Reminder
feature and Remind delay are set under Ftr settings in System programming.
HF Answerback
See Handsfree Answerback.
High-level Data Link Control (HDLC)
HDLC is a group of protocols or rules for transmitting data between network points
or nodes. Data is organized into a unit, called a frame, and sent across a network to
a destination that verifies its successful arrival. The HDLC protocol also manages
the flow or pacing at which data is sent. HDLC is one of the most commonly-used
protocols in Layer 2 of the industry communication reference model, Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI).
Hold button
This button is used to suspend calls so that the person using the telephone can
perform another task without disconnecting the caller.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 411
Hook Switch Flash
See Link time.
Host Name
In networking, the name of a computer that primarily provides services, such as
database access, to other computers or Enterprise Edge Servers in the domain. The
host name is associated with a unique IP address. Since the Enterprise Edge Server
has a unique IP address, it qualifies as a host.
Host system signaling
Also referred to as end-to-end signaling. Telephones can access a remote system or
dial a number on an alternate carrier by means of host feature activation, such as
Link, Pause and Run/Stop.
Hotline
This feature automatically calls a pre-assigned number when the telephone's
receiver is lifted or the Handsfree/Mute button is pressed. A Hotline number can be
an internal or external number. Hotline is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals
and Sets programming.
HTTP
The Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the set of rules for exchanging text,
graphic images, sound, video, and other multimedia files on the world wide web.
HTTP proxy
See Web proxy.
Hz (hertz)
A unit of measure for indicating frequency in cycles per second.
I
I/C
An abbreviation of intercom.
ICMP
ICMP is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and
a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses IP datagrams, however the messages are
processed by the TCP/IP software and are not directly apparent to the application
user.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
412 Glossary
IETF
See Internet Engineering Task Force.
In-Band
In-band is a method of device access which utilizes a network interface component
within the device.
Initialization
The steps required to prepare hardware or software for operation.
Install
To set up for operation. For example, hardware is installed by attaching it to the
appropriate connectors or sockets either inside or outside the Enterprise Edge
Server.
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
A digital telephone service that allows for a combination voice and data connection
over a single, high-speed connection. ISDN service can operate over the same
copper twisted-pair telephone line as analog telephone service.
intercom button
A button that provides access to internal lines used for calls within a Enterprise
Edge system and access to external lines through a line pool or external code. A
telephone may be assigned zero to eight Intercom buttons. This is done under Line
access in Terminals and Sets programming.
intercom keys
See Intercom button.
Interface
An information interchange path that allows communication between computer
parts.
internal line
A line on your telephone dedicated to making calls to destinations inside your
system. An internal line may still connect you with an external caller if you use it
to access a line pool or to pick up a call using the call handling features such as
Call Park or Call Pickup Directed.
internal number
A number (also referred to as a Directory Number or DN) that identifies a telephone
or device.
internal user
Someone using an Enterprise Edge telephone within the system.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 413
Internet
A global TCP/IP network linking millions of computers for communications
purposes.
Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
The IETF is the committee that defines standard Internet operating protocols such
as TCP/IP. The IETF is supervised by the Internet Society's Internet Architecture
Board (IAB).
Internet-standard Network Management Framework
Device configuration and monitoring via SNMP.
IP
The Internet Protocol (IP) is the protocol that supports data being sent from one
computer to another on the Internet. Each computer on the Internet has at least one
address that uniquely identifies it from all other computers on the Internet. When
you send or receive data, the message gets divided into units called packets. Each
of these packets contains both the sender's Internet address and the receiver's
address.
IP is a connectionless protocol, which means that there is no established connection
between the end points that are communicating. Each packet that travels through the
Internet is treated as an independent unit of data without any relation to any other
unit of data. In the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) communication model, IP
is in layer 3, the Networking Layer.
IP address
The Internet Protocol address is a unique identifier that allows communication over
the Internet to be directed to the appropriate destination. Every computer on the
Internet must have a unique IP address. IP addresses are allocated by an Internet
service provider (ISP) in the following format: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, where nnn is a
numeric value from 0 to 255. IP addressing might be referred to as being static IP
address) or dynamic IP address.
IPX
IPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange) is a networking protocol from Novell that
interconnects networks that use Novells NetWare clients and servers. IPX is a
datagram or packet protocol. IPX works at the network layer of communication
protocols and is connectionless (that is, it doesn't require that a connection be
maintained during an exchange of packets as, for example, a regular voice phone
call does).
IRQ (Interrupt Request)
A signal sent by a hardware device to the microprocessor requesting its immediate
attention. For example, each communications port has an interrupt request line for
notifying the microprocessor when data has been received or transmitted.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
414 Glossary
IRQ Conflict
Two hardware devices are vying for same IRQ. On installation of a device where
an IRQ conflict occurs, the user may have to manually configure the IRQ settings
to resolve the conflict.
ISDN
See Integrated Services Digital Network.
ISDN DN
A directory number (DN) used by ISDN terminal equipment connected to the
system. The Enterprise Edge system uses a maximum of thirty ISDN DNs.
K
Kbyte
The abbreviation for kilobyte. A kilobyte is equal to 1024 bytes.
L
LAN
A LAN is a network of interconnected workstations sharing the resources of a
single processor or server within a relatively small geographic area.
Last Number Redial
A feature that allows you to redial the last external number you dialed.
Least cost routing
See Routing service.
line
The complete path of a voice or data connection between one telephone (or other
device) and another.
Line number
A number that identifies an external line. The total number of lines depends on the
number and type of trunk media bay modules installed.
Line Pool
A group of lines used for making external calls. Line pools provide an efficient way
of giving a telephone access to external lines without taking up many line buttons.
A line is assigned to be part of a line pool under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 415
Line Redirection
A feature that allows you to redirect all calls on an incoming line to a destination
outside the system. Once a line is redirected it cannot be answered within the
system. The system may be set up to give a brief ring when a call comes in on a
redirected line, under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming.
This feature differs from Call Forward in two ways. It redirects only external calls
(not internal calls) and it redirects calls to destinations outside the system. Call
forward redirects calls only to destinations inside the system. See Call Forward.
Lines
A programming section that lets you assign settings to each trunk and external line.
Link
If your Enterprise Edge system is connected to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX),
you can use a Link signal to access special features. The Link signal can also be
included as part of a longer stored sequence on an External Autodial button or in a
Speed Dial code. The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence.
Local Area Network (LAN)
A group of computers or Enterprise Edge Servers physically connected in a manner
that lets them communicate and interact with each other.
Long Tones
A feature that lets you control the length of a tone so that you can signal devices
such as fax or answering machines which require tones longer than the standard
120 milliseconds.
Lunch schedule
See Schedules and Services.
M
M7100 telephone
The Enterprise Edge model M7100 telephone that has a single-line display and one
programmable button without an indicator.
M7208 telephone
The Enterprise Edge model M7208 telephone that has a single-line display and
eight programmable buttons with indicators.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
416 Glossary
M7310 telephone
The Enterprise Edge model M7310 telephone that has a two-line display with three
display buttons, 10 programmable buttons with indicators and 12 dual
programmable buttons without indicators.
M7324 telephone
The Enterprise Edge model M7324 telephone that has a two-line display with three
display buttons and 24 programmable buttons with indicators.
MAC
The Media Access Control (MAC) is a physical address that is the portion of the
data-link layer in 802.x networks that controls addressing information of the packet
and enables data to be sent and received across a local area network.
Maintenance
A type of programming that is used to diagnose and repair problems in the
Enterprise Edge system. Maintenance requires no programmable settings.
Mailbox
A storage place for voice messages on Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging.
Meridian 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface (MCDN)
A protocol used between members of the Nortel Networks Meridian family of
Private Telecommuncation Network Exchanges. The signalling information is
carried via time slot 16 of a 2.048 Mbit/s digital transmission system.
message
A feature that allows you to send a message to another system user. The Message
feature also lets you know if you have any messages waiting and maintains a
Message Waiting List to keep a record of your internal messages and your
(external) voice mail messages.
MHz
The abbreviation for megahertz. This is a unit of measure indicating frequency in
millions of cycles per second.
Microprocessor
A chip that is the center of all activity inside the Enterprise Edge Server. The
microprocessor controls all logical and arithmetic operations for the computer and
is responsible for executing program commands. It is also referred to as the Central
Processing Unit (CPU).
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 417
Modem
A communications device that allows data to be exchanged between computers
over telephone lines. The exchange is done by electronic processes called
modulation and demodulation. The modem changes (modulates) the data into tones
to send to another modem and also converts (demodulates) tones when receiving
from another modem.
Move Line buttons
A feature that allows you to move external lines to different buttons on your
telephone.
Multilink PPP
Multilink PPP is an extension to the PPP protocol that enables you to group a set of
links into abundle for more bandwidth. The links in the bundle can operate at
different speeds. Typical links can be ISDN B channels, dial-up connections, and
leased-lines.
Music source
A radio or other source of music can be connected to the system to provide music
for the Music on Hold and Background Music features. A music source is not part
of the Enterprise Edge system and must be supplied by the customer.
N
Names
Names can be assigned to System Speed Dial numbers, external lines, telephones,
mailboxes, ACD Queues and service schedules. This is done in programming. You
can use up to sixteen characters to name a System Speed Dial number, 13 characters
for mailbox and ACD Queue names, and seven characters to name a telephone, line,
or schedule.If a Name has not been assigned, the line number or DN will appear on
the display instead of a name.
name server
A name server provides the means of translating readable host computer names into
actual IP addresses so you do not have to remember long numbers in order to access
other computers and destinations on the Internet. For example, DNS servers and
WINS servers are name servers.
NetBIOS
The Network Basic Input/Output System (NetBIOS) is an interface and upper-level
protocol developed by IBM for use with a proprietary adapter for its PC network
product. NetBIOS provides a standard interface to the lower networking layers. The
protocol provides higher-level programs with access to the network. Windows NT
systems use NetBIOS.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
418 Glossary
Network
Two or more computers linked together electronically to share programs and
exchange data. Joining computers over a network requires adding specialized
hardware and software to each computer.
network device
A network device is a hardware entity characterized by its use as a communications
component within a networking infrastructure.
Network DN
A number supplied by the ISDN network service provider for ISDN terminal
equipment.
Network Interface Card (NIC)
An adapter card containing the hardware necessary to connect an Enterprise Edge
Server to a local area network.
NIC
A network interface card (NIC) is a computer circuit board or card that is installed
in a computer so that it can be connected to a network.
Personal computers and workstations on local area networks (LANs) typically
contain a network interface card specifically designed for the LAN transmission
technology, such as Ethernet or Token Ring. Network interface cards provide a
dedicated, full-time connection to a network.
Night schedule
See Schedules, and Services.
O
On hold
A setting, programmed under Feature settings in System programming, that
controls whether external callers hear music, periodic tones, or silence when they
are placed on hold.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
A routing protocol used within larger autonomous and complex networks in
preference to the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) which suits a small network.
Like RIP, OSPF is designated by the Internet Engineering Task Force as one of
several Interior Gateway Protocols.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 419
Operating system
The disk-based software that manages the operation of the Enterprise Edge Server.
An operating system controls the flow of information between the computer
hardware. Windows® NT is the operating system that manages the Enterprise Edge
Server.
option
An Enterprise Edge Server choice that is given to a user through display prompts.
OPX
Off premise extension.
OSPF
See Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).
Out-of-Band
Out-of-band is a method of device access which circumvents the network interface
components within the device.
overflow
A setting in Routing Service that allows users to decide what path an outgoing call
will take if all the lines used in a particular route are in use when the call is made.
Overrides
One component of a restriction filter. Overrides are numbers you can dial even if
they are forbidden by a more general restriction. See Restrictions.
P
Packet
A packet is the unit of data that is routed between an origin and a destination on the
Internet or any other packet-switched network. When any file (e-mail message,
HTML file, GIF file, URL request, and so forth) is sent from one place to another
on the Internet, the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) layer of TCP/IP divides
the file into pieces of an efficient size for routing. Each of these packets is separately
numbered and includes the Internet address of the destination. The individual
packets for a given file may travel different routes through the Internet. When the
packets have all arrived, they are reassembled into the original file.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
420 Glossary
A packet-switching scheme is an efficient way to handle transmissions on a
connectionless network such as the Internet. An alternative scheme,
circuit-switching, is used for networks allocated for voice connections. In
circuit-switching, lines in the network are shared among many users as with
packet-switching, but each connection requires the dedication of a particular path
for the duration of the connection.
Packet and datagram are similar in meaning. A protocol similar to TCP, the User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses the term datagram.
Page
A feature you can use to make announcements over the Enterprise Edge system.
You can make page announcements over the telephone speakers and/or external
speakers.
Page Time out
A setting that controls how long a Page Announcement can last. It can be assigned
under Feature settings in System programming.
Page zone
An area in the office that receives internal page announcements independently of
the rest of the office.
Each page zone is identified by a number. Telephones are assigned to page zones
under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming.
PAP
The Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) is a procedure used by PPP servers to
validate a connection request. PAP works as follows:
1. After the link is established, the requestor sends a password and an id to the
server.
2. The server either validates the request and sends back an acknowledgement,
terminates the connection, or offers the requestor another chance.
Passwords are sent without security and the originator can make repeated attempts
to gain access. For these reasons, a server that supports CHAP will offer to use that
protocol before using PAP.
Parallel port
A port that transfers data through multiple wires so that eight bits are transmitted
simultaneously. Parallel ports usually use a 25-pin interface that transmits and
receives data one byte at a time using a separate data line for each bit.
Park prefix
See Call park prefix.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 421
Park timeout
The time before an unanswered parked call is routed back to the telephone that
parked it. Park timeout is under Feature settings in System programming.
Password
A four-digit to eight-digit number that is entered using the dialpad. A password is
used to open mailboxes or perform configuration tasks.
Pause
A feature that enters a 1.5 second delay in a dialing sequence on an external line.
This is often required for signaling remote devices, such as answering machines, or
when reaching through to PBX features or host systems. The Pause symbol uses one
of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence.
PBX
See Private branch exchange.
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Slot
Socket on the Enterprise Edge Server main board that connect to the Enterprise
Edge cards.
Permanent virtual circuit (PVC)
The PVC is an end-to-end virtual connection in frame relay networks.
Personal Speed Dial
Two-digit codes (71-94) can be programmed to dial external telephone numbers.
Personal Speed Dial numbers are programmed for each telephone, and can be used
only at the telephone on which they are programmed.
Pickup Group
A telephone can be placed into one of nine call pickup groups. A call ringing at a
telephone within a pickup group can be picked up at any other telephone within the
same pickup group. A telephone is assigned to a pickup group under Capabilities in
Terminals and Sets programming.
Pin-1
The first pin in a multiple-pin connector or chip designated as such to help you
properly orient the component when attaching or installing it.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
422 Glossary
Point-to-point protocol (PPP)
PPP is a protocol for communication between two computers using a serial
interface, typically a personal computer connects to a server by a phone line. For
example, your Internet server provider may provide you with a PPP connection so
that the provider's server can respond to your requests, pass them on to the Internet,
and forward your requested Internet responses back to you.
PPP is a full-duplex protocol that can be used on various physical media, including
twisted pair or fiber optic lines or satellite transmission. It uses a variation of High
Speed Data Link Control (HDLC) for packet encapsulation.
PPP can process synchronous as well as asynchronous communication. PPP can
share a line with other users and it has error detection.
Pool
See Line pool.
Port
A connector on the Enterprise Edge Server that allows data exchange with other
devices, such as a printer or mouse.
portable telephone
See Companion portable telephone
PPP
See Point-to-point protocol.
Pre-dial
A feature that allows you to enter a number and check it on your telephone display
before it is actually dialed. If the number is incorrect, you can edit it. The number
is dialed only when you pick up the receiver or select a line.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
An ISDN interface that uses twenty three B channels and a D channel (23B+D).
Prime line
The line on your telephone that is automatically selected when you lift the receiver,
press the Handsfree/Mute button or use an external dialing feature. A Prime Line is
assigned to a telephone under Line access in Terminals and Sets programming.
Prime Set (prime telephone)
A telephone that provides backup answering for incoming calls on external lines.
The prime telephone for a line will ring for any unanswered calls on that line. A
prime telephone is assigned to a line under Trunk/Line data in Lines programming.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 423
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your office, you can interrupt
them for an urgent call. This feature is enabled for a telephone under Capabilities in
Terminals and Sets programming.
Privacy
This feature determines whether a system user may select a line in use at another
telephone and join an established call. Privacy is enabled under Trunk/Line data in
Lines programming, but can be turned on and off by users during individual calls.
Private branch exchange (PBX)
A PBX is a telephone system within an enterprise that switches calls between
enterprise users on local lines while allowing all users to share a certain number of
external phone lines. The main purpose of a PBX is to save the cost of requiring a
line for each user to the telephone company's central office.
The PBX is owned and operated by the enterprise rather than the telephone
company.
Private line
See Private to.
Private network
A telephone network consisting of owned or leased telephone lines used to connect
different offices of an organization independently of the public network.
Private to
Lets you select the telephone that will use the line exclusively. The line cannot
appear on any other telephone, except the prime telephone for that line. Private lines
cannot be placed into line pools. Private lines are assigned under Trunk/Line data
in Lines programming.
programming
Setting the way the Enterprise Edge system will work. Programming includes
system-wide settings and individual telephone and line settings.
Protocol
A set of rules and procedures for exchanging data between computers or Enterprise
Edge Servers on a network or through the Internet.
Power cable
A cable that connects the Enterprise Edge Server to apower source.
Proxy
A proxy is a server that acts on behalf of another.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
424 Glossary
Power cable
A cable that connects the Enterprise Edge Server to apower source.
public line
An external line that can be assigned to any telephone and to many telephones. A
line is assigned as Public under Trunk/Line data in Lines programming.
public network
The regular telephone network that connects most homes and businesses.
pulse/tone dialing
An external line setting for pulse or tone dialing. Pulse is the traditional method of
dialing used by rotary-dial or push-button single-line telephones. Tone dialing
allows telephones to communicate with other devices such as answering machines.
Tone dialing is required to access the features that PBX systems may offer or to use
another system remotely.
PVC
See Permanent virtual circuit.
Q
Quality of Service (QoS)
On the Internet and in other networks, QoS refers to guaranteed throughput level.
QoS allows to measure, improve and, to some level, guarantee the transmission
rates, error rates, and other data transmission characteristics. QoS is critical for the
continuous and real-time transmission of video and multimedia information which
use high bandwidth.
QoS
See Quality of Service (QoS).
Q reference point signalling (QSIG)
QSIG is an ETSI standard signalling for multi-vendor peer-to-peer communications
between PBXs and/or central offices.
R
RAM (Random Access Memory)
Computer memory that stores data temporarily. RAM stores the data used by the
microprocessor as it executes instructions. The contents of RAM are erased each
time the Enterprise Edge Server is turned off or restarted.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 425
receiver
The handset of a telephone.
Regression Code
Restores the previous system security number so that previously applied UTAM
Activation Codes and Portable Credit Codes can be reentered to restore full system
operation. Also required in cases of system recovery. This code cannot be reused.
Relaying
Relaying is the process of moving data along a path determined by a routing
process. The data is relayed between a source and a destination.
Remind delay
A feature that causes a telephone to beep and display the message
On hold: LINENAM when a call has been on hold for a programmable period of time.
This period is the Remind delay.
Remote access
The ability to dial into an Enterprise Edge system from outside the system and make
use of selected features. The lines, features, and dialing capabilities available to a
remote user are determined by the Class of Service.
remote access dial restriction
See Remote restriction.
Remote access service (RAS)
The RAS is the ability to get access to a computer or a network from a remote
distance. In corporations, people at branch offices, telecommuters, and people who
are travelling may need access to the corporation's network. Home users get access
to the Internet through remote access to an Internet service provider (ISP).
A remote access server is the computer and associated software that is set up to
handle users seeking access to network remotely. Sometimes called a
communication server, a remote access server usually includes or is associated with
a firewall server to ensure security and a router that can forward the remote access
request to another part of the corporate network.
Remote capability
A subset of Enterprise Edge features that are available to users connected through
remote access.
Remote device
A remote device is any network device that is accessible only by means of
communication over a digital or analog (dial-up) network.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
426 Glossary
Remote monitoring
A feature that lets an off-site technician with a PC call in and troubleshoot your
system through the built-in modem.
Remote paging
This feature allows remote users to use the system paging feature. Access to this
feature is governed by the Class of Service for the call. See Remote Access and
Class of Service.
Remote restriction
A restriction filter applied to a line in order to control which digits can be dialed
during an incoming remote access call. It is the equivalent of a set filter for a remote
user.
remote user
Someone who calls into an Enterprise Edge system from a telephone outside that
system and uses system features or lines. See Remote Access.
Restriction filter
Through a combination of restrictions and overrides, restriction filters prevent
certain telephone numbers or feature codes from being dialed. Restriction filters can
be applied to lines, sets, specific lines on a set, and to Class of Service passwords.
Restriction service
A Services section that allows you to assign alternate dialing filters to lines,
telephones, lines on a particular telephone, and alternate remote filters to lines at
specified times of the day and on specified days.
restrictions
One component of a Dialing filter. Restrictions are numbers you cannot dial when
that dialing filter is in effect. See Exceptions.
Ring Again
A feature that can be used when you cannot get through to someone on your system
because their telephone is busy or there is no answer. Ring Again instructs the
system to inform you when they hang up or next use their telephone.
ring group
A setting under Services that lets you assign a number of different telephones to ring
during one of the schedules. Up to 20 ring groups can be programmed by an installer
or a system coordinator plus.
ring type
A feature that allows you to select one of four distinctive rings for your telephone.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 427
ring volume
A feature that allows you to set the volume at which your telephone rings.
ringing service
A Services section that allows you to make additional telephones ring at specified
times of the day and on specified days.
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol.
Rls button
Ends a call in the same way that hanging up the receiver does.
ROM (Read Only Memory)
Memory that stores data permanently. ROM contains instructions that the
Enterprise Edge Server needs to operate. The instructions stored in ROM cannot be
changed and are used by the Enterprise Edge Server each time it is turned on or
restarted.
Router
A router is a device that forwards traffic between networks, based on network layer
information and routing tables. A router decides which path network traffic follows
using routing protocols to gain information about the network and algorithms to
choose the best route based on a routing matrix.
Routing
The path a message takes from its point of origin to its destination on a network or
the Internet.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
RIP enables routers in the same autonomous system to exchange routing
information by means of periodic updates. RIP is a widely-used protocol for
managing routing information within a self-contained network such as a corporate
local area network (LAN) or an interconnected group of such LANs.
Using RIP, a gateway host (with a router) sends its entire routing table (which lists
all the other hosts is has on record) to its closest neighbor host every 30 seconds.
The neighbor host passes the information to its next neighbor and so on until all
hosts within the network have the same routing path information, a state known as
network convergence. RIP uses a hop count as a way to determine network distance.
Each host with a router in the network uses the routing table information to
determine the next host to route a packet to for a specified destination.
RIP is considered an effective solution for small homogeneous networks. For
larger, more complicated networks, RIP's transmission of the entire routing table
every 30 seconds may put a heavy amount of extra traffic in the network.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
428 Glossary
The major alternative to RIP is the Open Shortest Path First Protocol (OSPF).
Routing service
A programming section that allows outgoing calls to be directed automatically
based on the numbers a caller dials. For Enterprise Edge Servers linked in a
network, routing can create a transparent or coordinated dialing plan. It can also be
used to direct calls to the least expensive lines according to a Services schedule
(sometimes called least cost routing).
Run/Stop
A feature that creates a break point in a programmed external dialing sequence.
When you press a programmed key, the system dials the number up to the run/stop.
When you press it again, the system dials the digits following the run/stop.
S
SAPS
See Station Auxiliary Power Supply.
Saved Number Redial
A feature that allows you to save the number of the external call you are on
(providing you dialed the call) so that you can call it again later.
Schedules
Any of six different sets of services that can be applied to your system. See
Services.
Selective line redirection
See Line Redirection.
Serial port
A port that sends and receives data one bit at a time. This port can be used to connect
the Enterprise Edge Server to a printer, external modem or mouse. Serial port
connector has nine pins and are designated by software with the letters COM and a
single digit, such as COM1.
Service modes
See Services.
Service profile identifer (SPID)
A number that identifies the services ordered with your ISDN BRI line. Each ISDN
BRI line has two phone numbers. Each of these phone numbers has a SPID.
(See also SPID on page 430.)
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 429
Services
A programming section that lets you assign which telephones ring, which
restrictions apply, and which call routing is used during any of six different
schedules. There are three services: Ringing service, Restriction service and
Routing service, all found in Services programming.
set
A telephone.
Set Copy
A programming section that allows you to copy programmable settings from one
telephone to another of the same type. Set Copy provides two options: duplicating
System Data and User Data, or duplicating System Data only. Set Copy does not
provide the same copy capability as COPY, which is more selective of the settings
that can be duplicated.
Set filter
See Restriction filter.
Set lock (telephone lock)
This feature allows you to limit the number of features that may be used at a
telephone. Full set lock allows very few changes or features, Partial set lock allows
some changes and features, and No set lock allows any change to be made and any
feature to be used. Set lock is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets
programming.
Set relocation
See Automatic Telephone Relocation.
SIMM
Single In-line Memory Module. The Enterprise Edge Server is equipped with one
SIMM that provides 64 MB of SDRAM. The memory can be increased with the
addition of more SIMMs.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP is the protocol governing network management and the monitoring of
network devices and their functions.
Software keys
A programming section used to enable the optional Remote monitoring feature.
One setting provides a System ID, which an installer or system coordinator plus
then uses to request three password keys from the Nortel Networks Customer
Response Center. Once these three passwords have been entered, the system will
permit Remote monitoring.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
430 Glossary
SPID
Acronym for Service Profile Identifier, a number that identifies a specific ISDN
line. When you obtain ISDN service, your telephone company assigns a SPID to
your line. Part of the initialization procedure is to configure your ISDN terminal
adapter to use this SPID.
Most telephone companies in North America use the Generic SPID Format, which
is a 14-digit number. The first 10 digits identify the telephone number, called the
Directory Number (DN). The remaining four digits identify a particular ISDN
device, in the case where multiple devices share the same Directory Number.
(See also Service profile identifer (SPID) on page 428.)
Startup programming
When an Enterprise Edge system is first installed and powered up, Startup
programming must be performed before any programming can be done. Startup
initializes the system programming to defaults.
static IP address
A static or fixed IP address never changes. It is assigned to a computer permanently.
The computer has the same IP address every time it connects to the network and is
known to other devices on the network by that IP address. Compare with dynamic
IP address.
Station
An individual telephone.
Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS)
A device which provides power to a telephone that is connected more than 300 m
(975 ft.) and less than 1200 m (3900 ft.) from the server, or to a CAP module.
Station Media Bay Module
A computer module which provides access to telephone lines. The 16-port Digital
Station Media Bay Module (EE-DSM 16) allows the connection of 16 digital
telephone sets to the system. The 32-port Digital Station Media Bay Module
(EE-DSM 32) allows the connection of 32 digital telephone sets to the system. The
Analog Station Media Bay Module (EE-ASM 8) allows the connection of analog
station sets to the system.
Station set test
A series of diagnostic tests for these components of a telephone: display, buttons,
handset, speaker, and power.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 431
subnet mask
A value used to route packets on TCP/IP networks. When the IP layer has to deliver
a packet through an interface, it uses the destination address contained in the packet,
together with the subnet mask of the interface to select an interface, and the next
hop in that subnet
synchronous
A synchronous signal is sourced from the same timing reference. A synchronous
signal causes the interval between successive bits, characters, or events to remain
constant or locked in to a specific clock frequency.
system data
An option in the Set Copy function. System Data refers to the programmable system
settings that apply to all telephones and lines.
System programming
A programming section that lets you assign and maintain certain settings on the
Enterprise Edge system.
System speed dial code
A two-digit code (01 to 70) that can be programmed to dial a telephone number up
to 24 digits long. System speed dial codes are programmed for the entire system
under the System Speed programming heading.
System Startup
See Startup programming.
T
T1
Digital carrier system or line that carries data at 1.544 Mbps.
TAPI
See Telephony Application Program Interface.
Target lines
Lines used to answer incoming calls only. A target line routes a call according to
digits it receives from an incoming trunk. They are referred to by line numbers in
the same way as physical lines.
TCP/IP
See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
432 Glossary
TE
See Terminal equipment.
TEI
See Terminal Endpoint Identifier.
Telco features
A programming section that lets you specify the external telephone numbers that
are dialed by the Message feature to retrieve voice messages, or to set up CLASS
(CMS) services for lines and telephone. Telco features are accessed by an installer
or a system coordinator plus.
Telephony Application Program Interface (TAPI)
The Telephony Application Program Interface (TAPI) is a standard program
interface that lets you and your computer communicate over telephones or video
phones to people or phone-connected resources elsewhere in the world.
Telnet
Telnet is a service that provides terminal-emulation capabilities for logging into the
Enterprise Edge unit from a remote location.
Terminal Endpoint Identifier
A digit used to identify devices which are using an ISDN connection for D-channel
packet service.
Terminal equipment (TE)
A generic term for devices that connect to an ISDN network. Examples of ISDN TE
are ISDN telephones, computers equipped with ISDN cards and video terminals.
Terminals and Sets
A programming section that lets you assign and change settings that apply to the
telephones and other devices connected to the Enterprise Edge Server. Terminals
and Sets programming is performed by an installer or a system coordinator.
Time and date
A programming section that lets you manually change time or date.
Token-ring
A token-ring is a network topology and data signaling scheme where a special data
packet (called a token) is passed from one station to another along an electrical ring.
A transmitting station takes possession of the token, transmits the data, then frees
the token after the data has made a complete circuit of the electrical ring.
Tone dial telephone
A push button telephone that emits DTMF tones.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 433
TOS
See Type of Service.
Transfer
A feature that lets you redirect a call to another telephone in your Enterprise Edge
system, over a network or outside your system.
Transfer Callback
If a transferred call is not answered after a specific number of rings, the call will
return to the telephone that made the transfer. The number of rings is assigned under
Feature settings in System programming. Transfer Callback does not apply to calls
transferred externally.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
A language governing communication among all computers on the Internet.
TCP protocol checks packets of information for errors, submits requests for retransmission in the event of errors and returns multiple packets of a message into
the proper original sequence when the message reaches its destination.
IP dictates how packets are sent out over networks and has a packet addressing
method that lets any computer on the Internet forward a packet to any other
computer that is a step or more closer to the packet’s recipient.
Trunk
The physical connection between the Enterprise Edge system and the outside world
using either the public telephone system or a private network.
Trunk Answer
A feature you can use to answer a call on any line that has an active Ringing service
Service Mode, even if that line does not appear on your telephone. Trunk Answer
is enabled in Services programming.
Trunk Media Bay Module
A computer module which provides access to telecommunications trunks. The
Digital Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-DTM) provides the connection between a
standard digital PSTN T1 or PRI line and the Enterprise Edge system. The Caller
ID Trunk Media Bay Module (EE-CTM) provides the ability to access four analog
Caller ID PSTN lines.
Type of Service (TOS)
The TOS field is located in the IP packet header and is used in DiffServ processing.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
434 Glossary
U
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol.
Unsupervised line
A line for which disconnect supervision is disabled. If an external caller hangs up,
the system does not detect the disconnection and does not hang up its line. See
Disconnect Supervision.
User Data
User Data is an option in the Set Copy feature. User Data refers to the personal
settings that are unique to an individual telephone, and are not programmed for the
system. User Data is programmed at each telephone.
These settings, for example, include Personal Speed Dial and the assignment of
programmable memory buttons.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
The UDP is a protocol that offers a limited amount of service when messages are
exchanged between computers in a network that uses IP. UDP is an alternative to
the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and, together with IP, is sometimes
referred to as UDP/IP.
Like the Transmission Control Protocol, UDP uses IP to actually transfer a data unit
(called a datagram) from one computer to another. Unlike TCP, however, UDP does
not provide the service of dividing a message into packets (datagrams) and
reassembling it at the other end. Specifically, UDP doesn't provide sequencing of
the packets that the data arrives in. This means that the application program that
uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in
the right order.
Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very
small data units to exchange (and therefore very little message reassembling to do)
may prefer UDP to TCP. The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) uses UDP
instead of TCP.
User Filter
See Restriction filter.
User Preferences
A programming section that lets you assign autodialers, user speed dial codes,
display contrast, and other settings to a specific telephone or person. You do not
have to program these settings at the person’s telephone. User preferences are
assigned in Terminals and Sets programming.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Glossary 435
User Speed Dial
Two-digit codes (71-94) can be programmed to dial external telephone numbers.
User Speed Dial numbers are programmed for each telephone, and can be used only
at the telephone on which they are programmed.
V
Voice Call
A feature you can use to make an announcement or begin a conversation through
the speaker of another telephone in the system. The telephone you call will not ring.
Instead, the person you call will hear a beep and then your voice. Their telephone
will beep periodically to remind them that their microphone is open.
Voice Call deny
A feature that prevents your telephone from receiving Voice Calls.
Voice message center
If you have subscribed to Call Display services you can receive visual Voice
Message Waiting Indication, providing your telephone has a display. If you have
Voice Message Waiting Indication, you can program the telephone numbers
required to access up to five different Voice Message Centers. You can also
program which of the five Centers is to be accessed by each specific line.
Voice over IP (VoIP)
Voice over IP (VoIP) is the capability to deliver voice using the Internet Protocol.
VoIP is a set of facilities for managing the delivery of voice information using the
IP. In general, this means sending voice information in digital form in discrete
packets rather than in the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public
switched telephone network (PSTN). A major advantage of VoIP and Internet
telephony is that it avoids the tolls charged by ordinary telephone service.
In addition to IP, VoIP uses the real-time protocol (RTP) to help ensure that packets
get delivered in a timely way. Using public networks, it is difficult to guarantee
Quality of Service (QoS).
Using VoIP, an enterprise positions a VoIP device at a gateway. The gateway
receives packetized voice transmissions from users within the company and then
routes them to other parts of its intranet (local area or wide area network) or, using
a T-1 or E-1 interface, sends them over the public switched telephone network.
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
436 Glossary
W
Wait for dial tone
A feature that causes of sequence of numbers to pause until dial tone is present on
the line before continuing to dial. The Wait for dial tone symbol (‡) uses two of
the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence. This feature requires a Services or Combo
Cartridge.
Web cache
A web cache is a server or collection of servers that store copies of Internet content.
The web cache server can be either located on the LAN where the clients it serves
are also located, or it can be embedded within the enterprise WAN or at the client’s
Internet Service Provider (ISP).
Web proxy
A web proxy, or HTTP proxy, is a server that acts on behalf of the requester of pages
from an HTTP server and the Internet.
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ)
WFQ is a queuing method that allows low volume traffic such as Telnet to be given
priority and interactive traffic receives higher priority than batch transfers. Also,
high bandwidth usage traffic such as batch file transfer traffic gets equal priority
with other high bandwidth use traffic.
Wide Area Network (WAN)
A collection of computers or Enterprise Edge Servers connected or networked to
each other over long distances, typically using common carrier facilities.
wireless
See Companion.
Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Index 437
Index
Numerics
2-way DID
PRI 377
PRI dialing plan example 370
2-way service 370
A
access codes 156, 340
accessing Unified Manager settings, system 41
ACD 27
Adding a user profile 254
administration, web based, setting up 37
Agents 27
alarm
codes 285
CSU 299
messages 149
short term 300
telephone 149
Alarm Backup Batch Job 253
Alarm Banner 256
Alarm Browser 256
Alarm Database 253
Alarm Manager 253
alarm manager settings, overview 256
alarm service settings, overview 232
Alarm time 184
allow last number redial
programming 104
AMIS 26
Answer DNs 98
Answer mode 113, 332
assign
answer DNs 98
intercom buttons 94
line pools 97
lines 95
Audio Messaging Interchange Specification 26
auto DN, programming 157
Automatic Call Distribution 27
automatic route selection (see call routing)
automatic telephone relocation
programming 302
auxiliary ringer
programming 117
troubleshooting 317
P0911588 Issue 01
B
back up WAN 59
Background music 148
troubleshooting 317
Backup and Restore 260, 265
backing up programming 266
caution when restoring programming 267
failed restore 267
bar graph (progress indicator) 266
B-channel selection sequence 75
BRI (Basic Rate Interface) module 378–379
BRI (see also ISDN)
BRU 260
C
Call by Call
example 346
PRI limits 168
programming service selection 168
routing table 130
service selection 76
service selection for PRI 166
call log
automatic 96
password 93
set 96
space 107
Call Offer 247
Call routing 27
programming 128
called ID 107
Camp timeout delay 152
CAP (Central Answering Position)
line assignment 97
programming 154
card edge loopback test 295
carrier access codes 159
carrier failure alarms 298
CbC routing table example 130
central answering position (see CAP)
change DNS 148
Channel Service Unit (see CSU)
channel, disabling PRI 82
CLASS assignment 106
Class of Service
dialing restriction 333
security 333
Class of Service (see COS)
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
438 Index
clock source
about 75
master 76
primary reference 75
secondary reference 75
CO fail 78
cold start
definition 267
warning (dialog box) 268
common settings 143
Companion programming
cell
assignment 180
neighbours 181
radio neighbour 181
radios 180
disabling registration 177
enabling registration 177
recommended settings 182
re-evaluation 179
re-evaluation status 179
Companion, troubleshooting 326
compression protocol 50
Configuring an ISDN interface 60
configuring management settings
alarm manager, overview 256
user manager, overview 253
configuring resource settings
LAN 46
WAN backup links
access parameters 66
link parameters 65
overview 63
summary parameters 64
WAN primary links
frame relay parameters 54
line parameters 53
overview 49
performance graphs and tables 58
PPP parameters 57
configuring service settings
alarm service, overview 232
DHCP
LAN 194, 198
overview 192
DNS, overview 199
NetLink manager, overview 229
QoS
overview 220
performance graphs and tables 225
QoS monitor
mean opinion score 227
overview 227
routing, overview 200
SNMP
community list 217
manager list 217
trap community list 217
TAPI Service Provider, overview 232
voice mail, overview 240
voice record, overview 232
voice service 189
VoIP Gateway 189
overview 227
Web cache, overview 228
configuring system settings
fault alarm banner 308
introduction 41
performance graphs and tables 308
connecting to Enterprise Edge, methods for
remote dial-in 66
connections, stand alone 379
Contrast Adjustment 309
coordinated dialing plan 335
copy telephone settings 91
COS (Class of Service)
auto DN 157
calls answered with DISA 157
password 160
auto-answer system 331
line restriction 161
user filter 161
with DISA 335
CSU (Channel Service Unit)
alarms 299
description 79
performance statistics 299
stats 297
CSU (Channel Service Unit) line build 78
customizing call display services 106
D
defaults
dialing restriction 125
directory number lengths 162
remote access packages 110
restrictions 125
set restrictions 105
delay
Camp timeout 152
Delayed Ring Transfer 149
Park timeout 152
Transfer callback 152
Delayed ring transfer 149
Deleting a user profile 255
Deleting an ISDN interface 63
deprovisioning a line 81
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Index 439
destination code
description 129, 131
Destination IP Type 240
device
disabling 281
enabling 281
DHCP service settings
LAN 194, 198
overview 192
diagnostics 269
T1 signal 297
test results, system test log 282
dial tone absent on external lines 311
Dialing plan
2-way DID 370
coordinated 335
PRI 377
PRI routing table 130
private DN length 155
public DN length 155
shared line pools 340
using T1 E&M lines 337
dialing restriction 333
defaults 125
exceptions 126
for remote callers 119
line filter 161
line/set restriction 105
maximum length 126
maximum number 126
remote 334
remote user 119
removing a filter 126
Restriction service 333
restrictions 126
set restrictions 104
user filter 161
wild card character 125, 131
dial-on-demand 231
DID (Direct Inward Dial) trunk 332
Digit Absorb 133
Digit Absorption 133
Digital Trunk Interface (see DTI)
Direct dial digit, programming 150, 153, 157
Direct Inward Access
lines in a network 362
Directed pickup 149
directory numbers
changing 148
coordinated dialing plan 335
length 162
P0911588 Issue 01
DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DID, trunk 332
DN 157
private networks 363
remote callers 335
disabling
a device 281
a module 279
disconnect supervision
loop start trunks 331
disconnect timer 74
display unreadable, troubleshooting 309
Disposition 239
Diversion 243
DN hunting (see multi-line hunt)
DNS guidelines 199
DNS service settings, overview 199
DPNSS 1 features 242
DSX1 build 78
DTI (Digital Trunk Interface), trunk 328
E
EE-DTM
clock source 75
LEDs 319
electromagnetic compatibility 17
enabling a module 280
Enbloc dialing 137
Entering the software keycodes 41
Enterprise Edge
administration, web-based, setting up 37
IP addresses, setting up
with a laptop 36
with a PC 36
IP Routing information protocol 201
logging off 40
logging on 37
operational considerations 37
rebooting 40
WAN connections
permanent
frame relay 50
PPP 50
with Meridian M1 over PRI 328
Enterprise Edge Link, troubleshooting 316
Enterprise Edge Operator Manager 26
Enterprise Edge Personal Mailbox Manager 26
Enterprise Edge QoS Routing 28
Enterprise Edge system networking 328
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
440 Index
error messages
10.5.2 273
11.12.10 273
11.19.9 273
11.5.2 273
14.17.40 274
14.17.41 274
14.17.68 274
14.4.21 273
14.5.77 274
2.5.4 270
2.5.6 270
2.5.8 270
2.xx.4 270
2.xx.6 270
5.16.68 272
5.4.59 271
5.5.39 271
5.5.40 271
5.5.41 271
5.5.45 271
8.4.2. 272
8.5.3 272
8.8.3 272
9.4.2 272
9.6.4 272
9.6.5 272
9.6.6 272
overview 270
user actions 270
Ethernet
WAN connections
permanent
frame relay 50
PPP 50
evening schedule 143
event messages
maintenance 285
significant 286
system restarts 288
exception (see dialing restriction)
extended superframe 78
external code, programming 157
external lines, access code 157
external paging, troubleshooting 317
extra-dial telephone, programming 140
F
Fast 47
Fast Routing 47
fault alarm banner settings 308
feature
codes, troubleshooting 323
using remotely 331
Feature Settings
access codes 156
Call log space 151
CAP assignment 154
Direct dial 153
Held reminder 149
page 152
page tone 149
Park 150
filtering
criteria 390
ranges 390
filters (see also restriction service) 105, 124
first display 107
Fnvram (backup file name) 265
Fnvram.NEW 265
Fnvram.OLD 265
frame relay 50
frame relay parameters, WAN 54
framing format 78
G
General Settings
Feature Settings 148
Remote Access 160
ground start trunk 329
H
hearing-aid compatibility 17
help, customer support 307
Hold
tones, music, or silence 148
Home Location Code 359
Hospitality services 183
hung lines 311
Hunt Groups
about 170
Adding members 171
Assigning lines 173
Broadcast mode 174
Distribution modes 174
Moving members 172
Programming busy line setting 175
Programming the overflow set 175
Programming the queue time-out 175
Removing members 171
Rotary mode 174
Sequential mode 174
Setting the hunt delay 174
Setting the name 176
Unassigning lines 173
usage metrics 302
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Index 441
I
L
ICMP counters 275
idle line, search for 116
impedance, setting for line 117
Integrated QoS Routing 28
interdigit timeout 154
interface levels 78
internal CSU 79
internal numbers
changing 148
coordinated dialing plan 335
length 162
Intrusion Capability Level 246
Intrusion Protection Level 246
IP addresses, setting up
with a laptop 36
with a PC 36
IP options 239
IP Routing 200
information protocol 201
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network)
bearer capability 373
BRI card 378–379
capabilities 371
capability packages 382
capability packages, ordering 380
clocking 379
data transmission speed 373
D-channel packet service 388
installation programming 383
layers 372
network synchronization 379
ordering service 382
planning service order 372
programming sequence 383
S interface 378
S reference point 378
services and features 374
SPID 387
standards 380
T reference point 378
terminal equipment configuration 378
ISDN Access Parameters 61
ISDN Channel Characteristics 61, 62
ISDN loss plan setting 78
ISDN Overview 371
ISDN PRI
2-way DID 377
Dialing Plan 377
ISDN Summary 60
LAN performance 49
LAN resource settings 46
LAN, DHCP settings 194, 198
LEDs, EE-DTM 319
Legacy networks, port range settings 225
Licensing 41
line
assignment 95
control sets 109
deprovisioning 81
pool
access code 158
access codes 340
troubleshooting 324
PRI, about 329
programming
name 109
telco features 118
trunk/line data 111
provisioning 81
redirection feature 368
restriction programming 118
selection, for a direct dial telephone 153
troubleshooting 310–315
line access 93
line coding 78
line parameters, WAN 53
line pool access code 158
line restriction 333
line/set restriction 105, 333
user filter 161
link parameters, WAN 65
Link time 153
log
network evt 284
space
number of spaces 107
programming 107
system administration 283
system test 282
logging off of Enterprise Edge 40
logging on to Enterprise Edge 37
logon definitions
configure 38
download 38
login 38
password 38
upload 38
Loop avoidance, programming 252
loop start trunk
remote access from public network 331
loopback test, starting 296
J
JAVA Virtual Machine (JVM) 37
P0911588 Issue 01
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
442 Index
loss package 117
loss/gain settings 117
lunch schedule 143
M
M7100 telephone
accessing external lines 157
M7324 telephone
CAP 154
maintenance
alarm codes 285
bipolar violations 300
carrier failure alarms 299
CSU stats 297
disabling module/cartridges 279
enabling the module 280
event messages 285
identify device connected to system 280
network event log 284
programming
system administration log 283
short term alarms 300
system
administration log 283
test log 282
version 278
Management 253
mean opinion score, QoS monitor 227
Media Bay Modules, clock source 75
Meridian 1 341
message centre, selecting 251
Message Waiting Cancellation 249
Message Waiting Indication 249
Message Waiting Indication, setting 251
Message, sending 150
MIB-II
counters 274
variables 274
Modem Link Parameters 65
Modifying a user profile 254
module
enabling 280
showing inventory 279
troubleshooting 325
moving telephones (see automatic telephone
relocation)
multi-line hunt 374
groups 382
music
license 18
source 18
MWC 249, 251
MWI 249, 251
N
National ISDN standards 380
NetLink manager settings, overview 229
network
configuration samples 327–369
event log 284
options with Enterprise Edge 327
private 365
private systems to Enterprise Edge 328
public network to Enterprise Edge 328
security 333
troubleshooting 321–325
user problems 321
Network Name Display 163
Business name 165
calling party name 164
connected name 164
interactions 164
programming 165
receiving redirected name 164
Network Routing 28
night schedule 143
No free lines 315
Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers 307
Not available 314
Not in service 314
NSI string 250
NT1 (network termination type 1) 380
stand alone connections 379
O
On hold (see hold)
operational considerations 37
Operator Manager 26
optional equipment, troubleshooting 315–317
outbound traffic filter, creating 389
Outgoing Name and Number Blocking 188
Outgoing name and number blocking 165
overflow routing 142
P
packet filtering
features
destination address 239
destination mask 239
destination port 239
protocol 237, 239
source address 237, 239
source mask 237, 239
source port 239
Paging, remote 332
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Index 443
parameters
obtaining required values 35
required values 35
Park
retrieving calls 156
timeout delay 152
park prefix 156
password
calls answered with DISA 157
COS 160
using DISA 335
payload loopback test 294
performance 269
performance graphs and tables
QoS 225
system 308
WAN 58
Personal Mailbox Manager 26
Point to Point Protocol (PPP) 50
port range settings
Legacy networks, overview 225
port ranges
QoS, adding 226
QoS, deleting 226
QoS, modifying 226
portable telephone
disabling 177
enabling 177
troubleshooting 326
PPP parameters, WAN 57
PRI (Primary Rate Interface)
trunk 329
PRI channel, disabling 82
PRI dialing plan, 2-way DID 370
PRI line
provisioning 81
PRI line pools 169
PRI line, provisioning 81
PRI Networking
additional configuration 345
Call-by-call services example 346
Meridian 1 341
Meridian M1 configuration 345
primary WAN 59
primary WAN connection 230
prime telephone 149
Private Access Code 359
private line 112
private network 327
remote access 331
sample configurations 365–369
tie lines 363
P0911588 Issue 01
programming
alarm telephone 149
allow last number redial 104
auto DN 157
backing up 266
call routing 128
CAP assignment 154
features on a set 107, 141
General Settings 147–169
ISDN 383
least cost routing 136
line access 93
lines 108–121
maintenance 259–301
Media Bay Modules 69
on lines
dialing restrictions 141
ISDN (BRI) lines 385
ISDN (PRI) lines 385
trunk/line data programming 111
voice message center 188
services 124–143
system 163
system features
auxiliary ringer 141
called ID 107
CLASS assignment 106
DN length 162
extra-dial telephone 140
log space 107
remote restrictions 119
restriction service 103–106, 124, 141
ringing 139
ringing group 141
schedule times 143
services 143
System Speed Dial 145
telco features 103, 118
trunk answer 139, 140
voice message center 188
system speed dial 145
Telco Features 187
Terminals&Sets 90–107
Programming PRI routing table 130
protocols, routing information 201
provisioning, T1 lines 81
public line 112
public network 327, 362–364
Q
QoS best effort queue counters 277
QoS best effort traffic counters 277
QoS dropped packets counter 277
QoS graph counters 277
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
444 Index
QoS module
relationship with the VoIP QoS monitor,
overview 220
restrictions and defaults 221
QoS monitor settings
mean opinion score 227
overview 227
QoS port ranges
adding 226
deleting 226
modifying 226
QoS service settings 220
performance graphs and tables 225
QoS session counters 277
Quick 240
R
radio-frequency interference 16, 20
reallocating log space 151
rebooting Enterprise Edge 40
Received number length 162
receiver volume 149
re-evaluation, see Companion programming
registration
information for telephone company 18
on a portable 181
remote
filters 161
system access 330–332
users, troubleshooting 321–325
remote access
COS password 160
defaults 110
dialing restriction 333
DID trunks 332
from public network 331
loop start trunks 331
on a private network 331
PRI trunk 332
restricting 160
security 333
T1 E&M trunks 331
remote dial-in, guidelines 66
Remote Paging 332
remote restriction 334
remote routers, setting up 389
remote system access 330
restore 262, 267
restricting
feature use (see Set Lock)
line at telephone 105
lines 118
remote access 160
remote callers 119
telephones 104, 124
restriction
default 105
dialing 137
service 103, 118, 124, 141
line/set 104, 105
programming 141
schedules 104
Restrictions, using 333
retrieving voice messages 187
ringing service
night schedule 140
ring group assignment 139
ringing groups 139
Route
adding a long distance access code 135
dialing plan to route outgoing PRI calls 137
dialing restrictions 137
for least cost routing 136
for local calling 133
for long distance calling 134
routing
destination codes 129
dialing restrictions 137
sample for local calling 133
sample for long distance calling 134
settings 200
routing, IP
information protocol 201
managing information 200
Routing, network 28
Rule 239
Rule Name 239
S
S interface 378
S or T reference point 378
S reference point 378
Schedule 4 143
Schedule 5 143
Schedule 6 143
schedule names 143
security 333
Class of Service 333
dialing restriction 333
services
evening 143
example of alternate call ringing 139
lunch 143
night 143
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Index 445
programming
common settings 143
restriction services 141
ringing groups 139
ringing service 139
programming ringing sets 141
Schedule 4 143
Schedule 5 143
Schedule 6 143
schedule names 143
schedule times 143
types 138
set
feature and number restrictions 104
restriction
default 105
user filter 161
Setting global WAN parameters 51
setting up
JAVA Virtual Machine 37
logging off of Enterprise Edge 40
logging on to Enterprise Edge 37
operational considerations 37
rebooting Enterprise Edge 40
web-based administration 37
significant event messages 286
SNMP guidelines 216
SNMP service settings
community list 217
manager list 217
trap community list 217
SNMP Trap 253
Software
Integrated QoS Routing 28
Personal Mailbox Manager 26
Unified Messaging 26
Source IP Type 239
Source Routing 239
speed dial 145
Speed Dial programming 145
start and stop times, services 143
Stateful 239
Static DID 370
Static routes 202
Station Set Test 309
statistics 269
Stop restore (dialog box) description 268
summary parameters, WAN 64
superframe 78
support 307
system
administration log 283
processor software 278
P0911588 Issue 01
sample configurations 327–369
speed dial 145
test log 282, 285, 289
version 278
System Identification Number 41
system performance graphs and tables 308
system settings
Answer key 151
configuring 41
T
T reference point 378
T1
signal diagnostics 297
transmission performance 297
T1 parameters
CO fail 78
CSU line build 78
DSX1 build 78
Framing 78
Line coding 78
target lines
description 329
numbering 329
TCP counters 276
TE (see ISDN terminal equipment)
technical support 307
telephone
control sets 92
direc dial 157
log calls automatically 96
troubleshooting 309
voice message waiting indication 96
Terminals&Sets 90–107
capabilities 98
allow redirect 99
auxiliary ringer 99
direct-dial 99
DND on busy 99
handsfree 99
handsfree answerback 99
hotline 100
page zone 99
paging 99
pickup group 99
priority call 99
redirect ring 99
line access 93
answer DNs 98
intercom keys 94
line assignment 95
line pool access 97
name 91
restrictions 103
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
446 Index
telco features 103
user preferences 102
testing
loopback tests 294
system test log 282
Three Party Service 243
tie lines 363
timers, disconnect 74
Tools 265
Transfer callback 152
troubleshooting 305
auxiliary ringer 316
background music 317
Enterprise Edge Link 316
external paging 317
line pools 324
lines 310
modules 318–320
network or remote users 321–325
optional equipment 315–317
portable telephone 326
T1 signal 320
trunk module 320
trunk modules 318
types of problems 306
trunk
answer, programming 140
DTI 328
ground start 329
module, troubleshooting 318, 320
numbering 328
PRI 329
types 328
trunk/line data 111
U
voice service settings 189
VOIP 115
VoIP Gateway 60
VoIP gateway settings
local gateway 189
overview 227
remote gateway 189
VoIP QoS Monitor
relationship with the QoS module, overview
220
VPIM 26
W
WAN connections
permanent
frame relay 50
PPP 50
WAN Overview 49
WAN resource settings
backup links
access parameters 66
link parameters 65
overview 63
summary parameters 64
primary links
frame relay parameters 54
line parameters 53
overview 49
performance graphs and tables 58
PPP parameters 57
warm start, definition 267
Web cache settings, overview 228
web caching/proxy, guidelines 228
web-based administration, setting up 37
wild card character 125, 131
wiring, loopback test 294
UDP counters 276
Unified Messaging 26
Usage metrics, Hunt groups 302
User Manager 253
user manager settings, overview 253
User Profile 253
utilities, overview 269
V
V.90 modem interface 64
voice mail settings, overview 240
voice message
accessing 96
external center 187
waiting indication 96
Voice Profile for Internet Mail 26
voice record, service settings 232
Enterprise Edge 2.0 Programming Operations Guide
P0911588 Issue 01
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement